VOL. 110, PARTS 1 & 2 30 MAY, 1986 Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia Incorporated Contents Barker, S. Stigmodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae): taxonomy, new species and a checklist - - - - - - - - - - Tyler, M. J. & Lungershausen, K. The ultrastructure of male nuptial pads in some Australopapuan frogs - - - - - - - - - x, Baker, G. H. Coleoptera, Scorpionida and Reptilia collected in pitfall traps in Engelbrook National Trust Reserve, South Australia - - - - - - Lioyd, L. N. & Walker, K. F, Distribution and conservation status of small freshwater fish in the River Murray, South Australia — - - - - - Russell, B. C. A new species of Suezichthys (Pisces: Labridae) from the Great Australian Bight) - - - - - - - - - - - - Tyler, M. J., Davies, M. & Aplin, K. A new stream-dwelling SpeeiaS of Litoria (Anura: Hylidae) from New Guinea - - - - - - - Branden, K. L., Edgar, G. J. & Shepherd, S. A. Reef fish populations of the Investigator Group, South Australia: a comparison of two census methods - - % Mawson, P. M. Redescription of Tetrameres certa (Leidy, 1886) Nematoda: Habro- nematoidea - - - - - - - - - - - Allan, R. J., Bye, J. A. T. & Hutton, P. The 1984 filling of Lake Eyre South - - - Brief Communications: Shea, G. M. & Miller, B. The occurrence of Hemiergis initialis (Werner, 1910) (Lacertilia: Scincidae) in South Australia - - - - - - - - Tyler, M. J. On the systematic position and type locality of the frog Pachybatrachus petersii Keferstein, reported from Australia - - - - - - - PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED VOL. 110, PART 1 OW) W TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INC. CONTENTS, VOL. 110, 1986 PART I & 2, 30 May Barker, S. Stigmodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae): taxonomy, new species and a checklist - - - s - 4 . - 4 Tyler, M. J. & Lungershausen, K. The ultrastructure of male nuptial pads in some Australopapuan frogs - - - ‘ 2 3 z a » Baker, G. H. Coleoptera, Scorpionida and Reptilia collected in pitfall traps in Engelbrook National Trust Reserve, South Australia - : - - - - Lloyd, L. N. & Walker, K. F. Distribution and conservation status of small freshwater fish in the River Murray, South Australia - - - - - Russell, B. C. A new species of Suezichthys (Pisces: Labridae) from the Great Australian Bight) - 2 3 7 ~ Z L : f “ 3 5 Tyler, M, J., Davies, M. & Aplin, K. A new stream-dwelling SpeaIES of Litoria (Anura: Hylidae) from New Guinea - - “ Be a } Branden, K. L., Edgar, G. J. & Shepherd, S. A. Reef fish populations of the Investigator Group, South Australia: a comparison of two census methods - - Mawson, P. M. Redescription of 7etrameres certa (Leidy, 1886) Nematoda: Habro- nematoidea - - _ 2 E : o ‘ , 2 Allan, R. J., Bye, J. A. 1, & Hutton, P. The 1984 filling of Lake Eyre South - - Brief Communications: Shea, G. M. & Miller, B. The occurrence of Hemiergis initialis Genet, wie} (Lacertilia: Scincidae) in South Australia = - - - - - Tyler, M. J. On the systematic position and type locality of the frog Pachybatrachus petersii Keferstein, reported from Australia - - - - - 89 91 PARTS 3 & 4, 28 November Koste, W. & Shiel, R. J. New rotifera (Aschelminthes) from Tasmania - - - Davies, M. & Littlejohn, M. J. Frogs of the genus Uperoleia sy (Anura: Leptodactylidac) in south-eastern Australia - - - - Greenhalgh, S. A., Singh, R. & Parham, R. T. Earthquakes in South Australia - : - - - ~ - ~ - - - Burton, T. C. & Stocks, R. A new species of terrestrial microhylid frog from Papua New Guinea - - - = ‘ rs < BI s = Thomas, I. M., Ainslie, R. C., Johnston, D. A., Offler, E. W. & Zed, P. A. The effects of cooling water discharge on the intertidal fauna in the Port River Estuary, South Australia = - - 3 - Z - # - Brief Communications: Lange, R. T. A systematic effect of stocking intensity upon the specific defoliation rate of saltbush by sheep - = - z “ . a a i Guerin, B. New records of spiders (Arachnida: Araneae) from South Australia - - Guerin, B. Celaenia atkinsoni (Arachnida, Araneae): new record for South Australia with a description of the male - - - - - - - Jago, J. B. An alleged Archaeocyath from Cape Denison, Antarctica - - - - Barlow, B., Denham, D., Jones, T., McCue, K., Gibson, G. & Greenhalgh, S. The Musgrave Ranges earthquake of March 30, 1986 - - - - Shepherd, S. A. & Gray, J. D. Food of the anemone Anthothoe albocincta at West Island, South Australia - 2 # i ‘ : = : ‘ Tyler, M. J. & Watson, G. F. On the nomenclature of a ee tree frog from Queensland - - - - - - - Insert to Transactions of the Roval Society of South Australia, Vol. Ii, Parts | & 2, 28 November, 1986 93 111 145 155 159 173 177 181 183 187 19] 193 STIGMODERA ( CASTIARINA) (COLEOPTERA: BUPRESTIDAE): TAXONOMY, NEW SPECIES AND A CHECKLIST BY §. BARKER Summary Twenty-two species are resurrected from synonymy. S. acuta Deuquet, S$. alternozona Thomson, S. bicolor C & G, S. bimaculata Saunders, S. colligens Kerremans, $. danesi Obenberger, S. desideria Carter, S. deyrollei Thomson, S. eborica Carter, S. garrawillae Carter, S. haroldi Saunders, S. humeralis Kerremans, S. julia Thomson, $. montigena Oke, $. ochreiventris Saunders, S. placens Kerremans, §. puella Saunders, S. puerilis Kerremans, S. puteolata Carter, S. terraereginae Blackburn, S. trimaculata Saunders, S. tyrrhena Blackburn. Two sub-species (S. picta malleeana Carter and S. grata dicoflava Carter) are raised to specific rank. Eighteen new synonyms (Castiarina) are recognised (valid name is given last); timida Kerremans = australasiae C & G; aliceae Barker = bicolor C & G; kalbarri Barker = bucolica Kerremans; goldingi Barker = danesi Obenberger; chobauti Théry = sancta Carter = deyrollei Thomson; clarki Carter = eremita Blackburn; yllgarni Obenberger = flaviceps Carter; fairmairei Kerremans = hoffmanseggi Hope; electa Kerremans = inconspicua Saunders; blackburni Carter = julia Thomson; dawsonensis Carter = liliputana Thomson; alpestris Barker = montigena Oke; cara Blackburn = ochreiventris Saunders; auripennis Barker = pallas Blackburn ; aurolimbata Carter = puella Saunders; transversepicta Thomson = scalaris (Boisduval); cordifer Kerremans = thomsoni Saunders. STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) (COLEOPTERA; BUPRESTIDAE): TAXONOMY, NEW SPECIES AND A CHECKLIST by S, BARKER* Summary Bakker. (like) Sremadera (Custlurtna) Coleoptera; Buprestidae): taxonomy, new species and a vhwekhst. Trans, R. Sac, S, Aust. (UL), 1-36, 30 May, 1986, Twenty-two species are resurrected from synonymy. §. aewfa Deuquet, &. alernozona Thomsen. S bicolor © & G, 8, biraenlaia Saunders, 3. valligens Kerremans, 5. danesy Obenberger, S. desidenia Carter, S. deyrollei Thomson, S. eborice Carter, 5. garrawillae Carter, 8. haroldi Saunders, 5, humeralis Kerremans, S julia Thomson, S santigena Oke, 5, ochreiventris Saunders, S. placeny Korremans, 5. puella Saunders, S. puerilis Kerremans, 8. putealara Carter, 8. ferraereginue Blackburn, & trimaculuia Saunders, 8 Qverhena Blackburn, Tvo sub-species (S. picta malleeana Carter and S. gra(adisceflava Carter) are raised (o specific rank, Bighleen new synonyns of Sgnodera (Casriarina) are recognised (valid name is given last): Minide Kerremans = austratusiae © & G; alleewe Barker = bicolor & G: kulbarri Barker — bucolicu Kerrenyans; evoldinet Barker=dunesi Obenberacr; chobout: Theryssaneta Carter=deyrollei Thomson, clarki Cartur=eremifa Blackburn; v/learn) Obenberger «fluviceps Carter, fairmuatrel Kerremans = hoffmansege! Hope; electa Kerremans-Meonspiewa Saunders; blaekbureat Carter=/ulia Thomson; dawsonensis Carters /ilipatana Thomson, u/pesiris Barker ~montigena Oke; cara Blackburn © ochrelventris Saunders; auripennis Barkers pallax Blackburn; aurolinibata Carterspuella Saunders; crvasversepicra Thomson =sealaris (Boisduval), cordifer Kerremans » thanteni Saunders. Twenty-five new spevies of Stigmodera (Casi/arimas are deseribed: S. ythertanensis sp. nov., 5, blackdownensis sp. nay. 5. browning? sp. nay. &. burast sp. noy,, &-capensis sp, nay, 5. Caels/ sp. fav, Sveracen(asp nov. & dessarté sp. (ov, S. discolorita sp. nav, 8. evrensis sp, nov., S. fusca sn. nov., S. Aileri 4p. tev, So incognita sp. nov. 9. Kempsterisp. nov, 5. dukin/ sp. nov. S melrasensis sp, nov, 5. pearsont sp. nov, 8, palla sp. nov., 8. mufa sp, nov. &. stellaia sp. nav, 5. dasmaniensis sp, nov, 8, turbulenta sp, nov, S. wnealtd sp. nov, So tivdelined sp. nov. S. warningensis sp. nov. A checklist of the three hundred arid seventy-five species in the sub-genus Casylurina is given with species disrribucon indicared hy state ar country. Key Woxbs; Coleoplera, Buprestidae, Stigmodera (Custiurinas syronyims, wew specles, checklist, Introduction The taxonomy of the buprestid sub-venus Stigmodera (Castiarina) Castlenau & Gary has been in a state of Mux aver recent years, Barker (1979, 1980, 1983) has described fifty-five new species and synonymised many others. Examination of freshly collected specimens and of specimens deposited in anumber of museums has indicated the existence of many more undescribed species and cast doubi upon the validicy of others, Twenty-five new species of Stigmodera (Castiarina) ape described here, the status of a Further forty-two species and two sub- species reassessed and a checklist of the species recognised within the sub-genus with their distribution provided, Materials und Methods The abbreviations used in che cext for museum aud private collections are as follows (Watt 1979): AHQA Mr A. Hiller, Mc Glorious, Qld) AMSA Australian Musem, Svdney; ANIC Austrahan * Deparment of Zooloxy, Uniyersixy of Adelaide, Baw 498, CPO, Actelaide, S. Aust, SOM, National Insect Collection, CSIRO, Canberra; ASSA Mr A. Sundholm, Sydney, N.S.W.; AWHO Mr A, Walford-Huggins, Mt Molloy, Qld; BMNH British Museum (Natural History), London, DPIQ Department gl Primary Industries, Mareeba, Qld; EAQA Mr E, E, Adams, Edungalba, Qld; GBVA Mr G. Burns, Mornington, Viey HMOE Hope Museum, Oxford, England; JGAA Mrs J, Gardner, Adelaide, S. Augty MNHN Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelles, Paris; MPWA Mr M. Powell, Mr M. Golding and Mr T. M.S. Hanlon, Attadale, W,.A,; NMPC National Museum, Prague, Czecho- slovakia; NMVA National Museums of Vieroria; OMBA Queensland Museum, Brisbane; RMBB L'Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Brussels; RWSO Mr R. Westcott, Salem, Oregon; SAMA South Australian Museum, Adelaide; WAMA Western Australian Museum, Perth; WADA Western Australian Department of Agriculture, South Perth, Members of species groups referred to in rhe text are Indicated in the cheeklist by a lower case Teller i) parenthesis, They are: fa} 8, /lavopicta (Boisduval), [b] &. Adaris Hope, [c] S. sexeurrara Macleay, [d] §. weima Saunders, fe) S. ervenrara 2 5. BARKER (Kirby), [f7 5, daadiate Macteay, [h] S. Alu C&G, Li] % defectabilés Vope, Lj] & srraeninew Macleay, [k] &. gihhieollis Saunders, [I] S. fulviventris Macleay, [m} 8, commeey Carter, [In] S. distineuende Saunders, [o} S. predicts Saunders mimicry group, Ip] &. decemmaculuta (Kirby), Iq] S scalaris (Boisduval), [r] 8. simulera C&G, |s} 8. octospilota CX G, [ & octomaculaa Sanders, fu) S. atricollis Saunders, [v| & sexplagiata Gory, [w] % mifasciata C & Cj, A complete list af species groups and a key eventually will be published as part of a revision of Srigmodera (Custivrina) in preparation. Species resurrected from svnonyinw Harker (1983) synonyniised & dunes: Obenberger tholotype male, Qld, NMPC 24415) with &. caslelnaudi Saunders (holotype female, Adelaide, BMNEL). In &. danest the background colour of the elyirg and sides of the propotum is orange while in S, castelhavd? i is red, External morpholagy and male penitalia sre different and indicate that they both are valid belonging in two different species broups§. danesi oceurs in WA, and S. Aust. and is figured under the desetiplion of itg synonym & goldina® Barker (holotype male, Coolgardie, WAMA) (Barker 1983, Figs, 2E, 8D)_ ] have re-examined the holotypes of & pueri/ix Kerremans (holotype lemale, Aust., BMNH) and S tinida Kerremans (holotype male, Adelaide, RMNA) and find (hat 5, puerilis is a valid species and 8. divide isa synonym of & ausrrulasiae C & G (holotype female, Aust. MNHN). Barker (1983) confused these mwo species, synonvmised §. puerilis With S. ausiralesiae and figured S$. pueritis mistakenly calling it S rvnea. Barker (1979) followed Carter (1916, 1929, 1931) lit avnonymising S. dicolor C & G (holotype, Kangaroo Ih, MNHN) with §, J/lanepitta (Boisduval) (holotype not located). S& bicalar isa member of ite S, craentata (Kirby) (holotype, Aust., AMINA) specyes group and is a smaller species than 5. Hlavopicia, Male genitaha are very dislinet and place §. flavanion in its own species eroup (Rarket 1980, Fig. JE, Barker 1983, Big. (¥). S. dlenlor vecurs in the Mo Lofty Ranges and on Kangaroo I. S. Aust. and is Meured under whe deseripnon al’ S. aliveae Barker (holoiype male, Mr Lofty, SAMA) us synurivert (Barker 1980, Fig. 2B). Carrer (1937) considered S puelle Kerremans (holotype, Aust., BSINH) to be a synonym of S. Seen raja Macleay (holotype female, Pert Denison, ANIC) and Barker (1979) followed. S. paella isa member of the & soxendiala species proup, but hecause of differences in external ntorphology and niale genitalia (bigs 1B, 1B), | consider 1 a valid species, S. aurolimbata Carter (holotype male, Cairns, Old, NMYVA) is ils synonym, Backer (1980) syoouymised & velligens Kerremans (holotype female, Qld, BMNH) with & carmined Saunders (holarype, N.SW,, BMNE). & collivens has very pale yellow elytra with dark fascia and oecurs near Coonabarabran, N.SW. and in southern Qld. [tis larger than 8. cunrtines whieh has red elytra and occurs tn NeSMW,, Vic., S. Aust. and W.A, Although male genitalia are quite similar, as in ollrer members af the S, vicina Saunders species group (Barker 1983, Figs. 3K, 3L), che differences in colour, elytral pattern and distribution justify separation and | consider both to be valid species. Barker (1979) synonymised &. desideria Carter (two Feniale syntypes, Cue, W.A,, NMVA) with &. longicollis Saunders (holotype fenrale, horth-western Australia, BMINH), | have re-examined a series of bath forms. S. desideria has heavier markings than 5. longicollis, is larger, Matter, occurs further cas in WA. than §, forigico/lis and male genitalia differ (Figs 1G, IH). | consider 5. desideria a valid species. Carter (1931) fisted S. Agroldi Saunders (replacement name for S. viridiventris Saunders homonym) (holotype female, BMNH) a5 a synonvint of S, vegera Hope (holotype male, HMOE 974) bur inexplicably listed So cruenialu (Kirby) as a synonym of S, vegefa despile the fact that S&. crventata has date priority. Barker (1979) listed S. vegeta and & huroldi as synonyms of 8, cruenteta. §. erveniata has a blue body and red elytra with the following blue markings: very broad pre-medial fascia; post-medial fascia; apical mark. S, baroledi has a preen head, pronotum and underside and yellow elvira with the following durk markings: pre- medial fascia not reaching the margin, projecting anteriorly trom the end; post-medial fascia reaching margin: anv apical mark (Fig. 4A), ifs disinibulion is unvertain a5 the two specimens available in whe BMNH cellection are labelled, N.SW. and Nov Hollandiae. oveictentalis, respectively. Ir is larger than S. vegere which has blue-green head, pronoium and undersurface and red elytra with the following dark markings: pre-wpical fascia extend- ing from the posterior edge 16 reach margin; post- medial fascia reaching margin; an apical mark. All are valid species belonging in the 5, efventara (Kirby) species group. S haroldi is the largest member, Barker (1979) followed Carter (1940) who synonymised & mondigena Oke (holotype female, Warburion Ranwes, Vic. NMVA) with S, /lave- purpurea Carier (balorype female, Medlow, N.SW., NMVA). S. mtortrigena is a valid species and 3 member of the S. cruentata (Kirby) species group. It is figured under its synonym S. wlpestris Barker TAXONOMY OF STIGMQDERA (CASTIARINA} eonrng OP ‘ar = W Fig. 1, Photomicrographs of male genitalia of the following Stigmodera (Castiarina) species: A. §, hilaris Hope, B. Ss. aged Saunders, C, S. melrasensis sp. nov., D, 8. capensis sp. nov., E. 8. sexgultata Macleay, F. 8. goodingi Barker, G. 5, desideria Carter, H. S. longicollis Sauriders, 1. S, trimaculata Saunders, J, S. rerraereginae Blackburn, K. S, biguttata Macleay, L. S. alternozona Thomson, M, S. deyrollei Thomson, N. 8. eupricollis Saunders, O. S. hoffmanseggi Hope, P. S. eborica Carter, Q. S. mroribunda Saunders, R. S. punctiventris Saunders, 8. 8. birmaculata Saunders, T. S. viridolinea sp. nov., U. 8. subtincta Carter, V. S. ignea Blackburn, W. S. burnsi sp. nov. 4 S BARKER {holotype male, Upper Tumut Gorge, N.SA¥,, QMISA) (Barker 1983, Figs. (W, 61D), and is a widely distributed species in Vic. and N.SW, S, /love- purpurea belougs in its Ow! species group. Barker (1979) synonymised S. frimaculara Saunders (holotype female, morth-west Aust, BMNH) and §, ferraereginee Blackburn (holotype female, Endeavour River. NMVA) (Fig. 41) with 5. biguitata Macleay (holotype female, Port Denison, ANIC), I have examined fresh specimens and male genitalia (Figs 1, 1. 1K) and find (hat all are valid species. 5, ferraereginae und S, bieulfata vocur in northern Qld and 8. trimeeculara in NT. and nerch- west WA, They belong tw the S$. diguifate species gtoup, Carler (1916, 1929, 1931) syaonymined S. allernazonu Thomsen, & devrol/ei Thomson anid S. julia Thomsen with §. cupricalfis Saunders. Barker (1979) agreed and also placed §, chobautt Thery, 5, fairmiairel Kerremans and S, saneta Carter as synonyms of §, eupricellis, Afrer pe-exanuiing the rypes and male genitalia (Figs IL. IM. IN, 10) { find chat there are five valid species. 5. eupricalliy Saunders (holotype female, Aust., BMINH) occurs in Qld. The head, pronotum.and undersurface are coppery-bronze, ihe elytra yellow with (We lascla and an apical mark (Fig. 4H), S. alfernozana Thomson (bolotype male, Aust. MNHN) is a Jarger species found in the Mt Lofty Ranges, S. Aus. Teo Specimens have been located in the MNHWN, BMNH and SAMA. The head and pronotum are dull green, the undersurtace bright green and the elyira red wiih two fascia and an apical mark (Fig, 4G), In & deyrollei Thomson (halotype lemale, Aust, MNHN) the head and pronotum are green or eolden green, the Undersurface green and the elytra yellow witt (wo fascia and an apieal mark. it Gecurs in southern Qld, NWSW. and Vic, (Fig, 47), & chobanty Thery (holotype, Mt Victoria, MNNHN) is \ts senior synonym and S, sancta Carter (holotwpe Male, Beechworth, Wic, NMVA) its junior synonym. The latter form has the pte-medial Fiseia on the elytra missing. The male genitalia do not differ [rom Khe typical form of 8S. deyroflet. S. julie is known only from (three female specimens: the type [nt MNEIN; a single specimen in the BMNH tron Port Lincoln, S, Aust. (rem the Blackburn collection; the female holorype of S. blackburn Carier, §, Aust.. SAMA. The head and body are nondescript dark, the clyirain hve specimens are probably pale yellow with a red margin, there are rwe pre-medial Spols, a post-medial fascia and un apteal mark (Fig. 46). S. Blackburni Carter is js synonym, These all belong in the 5, cupricollis species group, 3, hoffmanseggt Hope (syntype mule, WAL ¢siv), HMOE |O0i) 2.2) overs in eastern and southern Australia (net in WA), Male genitalia are distinctive (Fig. 10} and place it in the S. w/w? C&G species group. S. fairniairer Kerremans {halorype male, Aust., BMNH) is its synonym. Barker (1979) listed & eberiee Carter (holotype, Ebon NSW. NMVA) as 3 synonym of SS. moribunda Saunders (holotype male, Aust, BMNH). 5, eborica is found in the Armidale district N,SMV, The head pronorum and undersurface are bright ereen. The elyira are pale yellow and have the following black markings: a spor over cael humeral callus; narrow pre-apival faselay a narrow apical mark (Fig, 4C), The head, pronuruny and undersurface of S. moribunda are dull green, the elytra are pale yellow and have the following black markings: 4 pre-medial fascia; a post-medial fascia; a matk covering tke whale apical area (Fig. 4D). Specimens with the heaviest pattern Secur ip coastal areas in N.S. There is a-cline with loss of partern in Speaamens trom further inland in N.S A ralundaia Saunders (female holotype, 8. Aust. (sic), BMNH) is its synonym. Male genitalia are different from those of S. eharica (Figs IP, 1), | eansider & ¢borica © be a valid species. Carter (1929, 1931) listed S. Lyrrhene Blackburn thololype male, Old, BMMNH) as a synenyin of §, sepremenriata Waterhouse (holarype temale, Old, BMNH). This synonymy was followed by Barker {(979). S. tyrrhena has a-green head and bady, the elytra are yellow with a red margin and the following, black markings Iwo pre-medial spots and an anterior sulural tiark; a posi-medial fascia; an apical mark (Fig. 7G). Specimens attributable to 5S. septemgutiata in Wwe SAMA are broader and have a ercen Head and bods, yellow elytra wirh a red manin arid the following black markings: (wo pre- medial spots and an anterior sutural mark; two post-medial spors: narrow pre-apical mark. Their thalé genitalia are different (Figs 3P, 3Q). | consider S, tyreheda a valid species, Both belong in the 3. delevtubilis Hope (halotwpe female, Pore Phillip, HMOE, 996) species eroup (Fig. 76}. Carter (1914, 1929) listed S Dimuciu/aia Saunders (holotype female, north-west Ausi,, BMNH) as a Fig. 2. Photomicrographs of orale genitalia of the following, Srginuidera (Casticrina) species: A. S, Atiateralis Ketromatis, B, S. wetertensis Hlackbury, C. 8 gibbieallis Saunders, 0. S. erevaita Blockburn, E. S rufa sp nav. FS. eerenses sp, noy,, G, S. slellafe sp. nov., HOS incognita-sp. 00V,, LS. refolimitiata Carter, J. S falviventriw Macleay, K- S. atherionensis sp. nov, L, S. jexell’ Sautiers, M.S aehresveviters Saunders, N.S. straminéa Macleay, O. 8 plavens Keremans, BS, divcofleva Carer, QS, bluckdownensis sp, nov, BR, S swbyratm Blackbur, 5, S, garrawillae Carrer, ‘LS. eneaia sp. nove U, S. simulata O & G, V, & convexa Carter, W. 8, putevlata Carter, &, 3) terrier? Bar key, VOR Aempasreri sp, nov, TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) 6 & BARKER valid species and S punctiveniris Saunders, 8, suite Blackburn, van nveur Blackbornm and & igned Blackburn as its synonynis. Carter (1933) later recognised Four as Valid species, S. bpraculate oocurs in northewest WA, and Qld but rs rare ah collections. The edges of the pronotum are fattened und the texture of the centre marbled wirh wlahrous areas (Pic, SA). It is a larger species than & straminea Macleay (holotype, Part Denison, ANIC) aid was incorrectly synonymised with that speevies by Barker (1979), S. purnerivenrris Saunders (holotype female, Gawler, BMNH) has dark blue head, pronorum and undersurface The elytra are red with two dark blue fascia and an apical mark It occurs in the Norseman and Euela districts af W.A, and in the Big and Little Deserts, Vic, and in N.SMW. &. piset/ormis Carter (syntypes male and feniale, ANIC) js its synonym, 3. gitata is represented by two female specimens in the BMNH. The holotype labelled “Lyndoch, 5. Aust.”"and the other “Adel.” | have nor located any other specimens, It is a typical mallee species with pale yellow elytra and the resi of the body bnght green) (Fig, 5D). Blackburn (1890) oripinally described what he thought might be a variety and he commenced the description with the following: “bor(?) Minor” The latin word minor is unitalicised and is vot a name, no name is given in the paper. Carter (1929) listed minor Blackburn as a variety name thus creating a nomen niidiuirn, 11 ty Wkely that the species Bluckburn deserrbed asx aun unnamed Variety of S. suata has been mistakenly identified as S, euttdra, & species pot represented in any Australian collection (har | have seen, It is described herein as S. viridalinea Barker sp, nov, (Figs 17, 56). S ignea Blackburn (holotype, S. Aust, BMINH) is a Valid species Found in W.A., S, Aust. and View Available male genitalia are figured (Figs |R, 15, 1T, WV, 2N). Barker (1979) listed S, Awereralis Kerremans (holotype. S-S.W., BMNH) as 4 synonym of & virtoriensis Blackburn (halotype female, Ballarat, BMNH). The (wo belong in the §. gibineatits Saunders (hatotype male, Adelaide, AMNH) species: yvroup. & vicroriensis las three fascia on the elytra and oveurs in Vic. and southern N.S.W. (Pig, 6HY; S sensitiva Kerremans (holotype; Aust., HMNH) wis synonym. So Aumerelis has a lighter elyteal pattern und oecursin northern NWSW. and southern Did (Pig. 6G), Male genitalia differ (Pigs 2A, 2B, 20), | eonsider S. Auhendtis Kerremans (a be a Valid species; S, liltvard? Carter (svatypes, N.SW,, NMVA) is its synonym. Burker (1979) followed Carter (1931, 1940) who invorreetly synonyntised Sovhretverriy Saunders (holotype mabe, Aust., BMAD) (bigs $C, 2M) with 5. fulviventris Macleay thatotype, Port Dentwon, ANIC) (Figs 2), 710), The latter species forms a nalural group with S$, jekelli Saunders (holotype female, Adelaide, BMNH), S pallas Blackburn (holotype male, Thurs. Is.) and & uthertonensis Barker sp. nov. (Figs 2K, 7B). S. guriigers Blackburn (syatype male, Vie NMVA) and mackayana Carter (holotype male, Mackay, SAMA) are its synonyms. 5. echreiveruris belongs in the 8. Stramiiniea Macleay (holotype, Port Denison, ANIC) species group, together with S placens Kerremans {holotype male, Aust., BMNH), Their male geni- talia are illustrated (Figs 2M, 2N, 20)..8. straminea accurs i central and northern Qld and has ivary elytra with either a post-medial spot on each elytron and a 4rmall apical mark or no elytral markings. - addenda Kerremans (holotype Aust., BMNH) and S, joharinae Thery (holowpe male, Townsville, Qld, MNHAQN) are ily synonyms, S. placens bas a dark head and pronotum and pale yellow elytra with two broud black taseia reavhing the margin and a black apical mark (Fig, 568), lt oveurs in central coastal NSW, S. ochréiveitirs isa variably marked species. The head and pronolum are shining coppery anc the elytra pale yellow with black markings varying Irom two Facia und an apical mark. to four spobs on the elytra and 4 remnany apical mark (Pig. 3C)- fi oeeurs in (he Stanthorpe district, Qld and northern NUSW, S. can Blackburn (holotype fale, Darling Downs, Old, NNMLVA} ts its synonym, Barker (1979) synonymised .S. pulee/ata Carter (holotype gale, Lake Nineham, WA. ANIC) with §, comeva Carter (syntypes, Kalgoorlie, W.A., NMVA). | have re-examined a series of specimens in the SAMA callection and male genitalia (Figs 2¥V, 2W) and find that they represent two species, Barker (1983, Fig. 3W) wrongly illustrated the ecnitalia of 8. pufeolata.as S, convexu, 5, convex has # closely punclured pronotum and {5 found at Southern Cross and Kalgoorlie, WiA, § puleolala has very coarsely punctured pronolum and occurs further vorth and inland in W.A. und at Ooldea, S. Aust. Barker (1983) synonymised §, garrawillae Cartet (holotype male. Mullaley, N.XW., nol Tocated) with S svberata Blackburn (replacement name for § cumpesiris Kercemans, homonym) (holotype, Aust,, BMNH), The female allotype (Mullaley, N.SW., ANIC) has broken tips to che elytral apices sa that it has Not been possible to confirm the presence of spineless apives (Carter, 193]), | have now examined topulype male and female specimens and agree that the apices are spineless. S. subgrata has bispinose clytral apices and gecurs in Sydney and the Blue Mis. Beeause of colour and pattern differences, a different disaibudow and differences in male genitalia (Pigs 2R, 28) 1 cousider S. garmawi/iae to TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) V7 a1 he J ; Limm] v - WwW ' X Fig. 3. Photomicrographs of male genitalia of the following Stigmtodera (Castiarina) species: A. S. malleeana Carter, B, S. decemmuculata (Kirby), C. S. browningi sp. nov., D. S. pallidiventris C & G, E. S. tasmaniensis sp. nov., F. S. octospilota C & G, G, S. pearsoni sp. nov., H. S. octomaculata Saunders, |. S. cracenta sp. nov., J. 8. atricollis Saunders, K. S. hilleri sp. nov., L. S. fusca sp. nov., M. S. warningensis sp. nov., N. S. turbulenta sp. nov., O. S. dessarti sp. nov., P. 8S. septemguttata Waterhouse, Q. S. tyrrhena Blackburn, R. S, delectabilis Hope, S. 8. pulla sp. noy., T. S. /ukini sp. nov., U. S. trifasciata C & G, V. S, coolsi sp. nov., W. S, browni Carter, X. S. discolorata sp. noy., Y. S. cruentata (Kirby). 4 S. BARKER be a valid species. fl belongs in the 3, dewinguende Saunders species group, The identivy of four members of the &. producta Saunders (holotype fernale, BMNH) mimicry grotip is conlused, Barker (1979) synonyniised 8, wera Deuquet (holotype mule, Acacia Pliteau, N.S.W,, AMSA) with & delicatula Kerremans (holotype fenale, N.SW,, BMNH), Both of these are valid species and are Lhe most offen seen in collections. A third species was deseribed as & pseudasilica ty Barker (1983, Fig. 62). Que of the paratypes designated was the female paratype of 8. acura Detiquet held in the RMBB collection, The iNustration given by Deuquet (1956, Fig. i) as & acuia Was autually of this specimen, and the type of &. ucita, a separare species, was not ilusurated. Barker (1983, Fi, 4A) figured S. wcura and wrongly ealled |t S delicatula, S. spectabilis Kerremans appenrs to be represented m collections by only ihre specimens: the holowpe female, N.SW,, BMNH; two lemiales collected hy Mr A, Hiller at Mt Cilarlous, Old, Sub-species elevated to specific rank §. picia tnalleeuna Carter 1929 (Fig. SK) occurs in mallee areas in Vie, and & Aust... 9 pice C&G is a smaller species Which Occurs on the coastal plains in W.A, St lias dark purple-Hliue head and pronouumy in S. valleeane they are bright blue. Both species belong in the S$. devenmruculara (Kirby) species group, and alihough S. wialleeana close to S$. decemmeculata male genitalia ure different (Figs JA, 3B), | consider & malleeana ta be a valid species. | have not been able to locate types, & subgrate discoflava Carter 1930 aecurs in the Sraniherpe distinct, Gid, and the basal colour of tbe elytra is red with brassy-green markings (Tig. 51), whetcas S. svbgrata Blackburn oecurs in Sydney and the Glue Mts aud the basal colour of the elytra 6 red wirh blue markings. Male genitalia ave differen (igs 2P, 2K} bt eonsider & diseoflava Carter & valid species. Both of these species belong in the S. dispivguende Saunders species group, holotype and an allaiypeare located iq tic SAMA collection New syronpms in Stigiiedera (Castiarina) S, tonide Kerremians S. australasiae C&C (see jp. 2) 8 ulicede Barker = S, bivalor © & G (see ph 2) 8 Autres Barker (Holotype male, Kalburri Nulional Park, WAMA)«5. buco/ica Kereemans 1898 tholorype female, Australia, BMT). the holorype of S&S. bueahra is @ badly faded ani Uiscoloured specimen, difficult la recognise, The species Geeurs in the Northampten aod Murehison River districts, W.A,, on the flowers of Threplomene sp, S. gelding Barker=§. daresi Obenberger (see po 2h AX vhohauli Thery = S. sancta Carter = 8. devrallei Thomson (see p. 4}. S, clarki Carter (holotype male, Busselton, WAL, NMVA)-S. eremila Blackburn (holotype Eucla, W.A, , BMNH), This species belongs m the 4, gibbicallis Saunders species group. The lateral margins of the pronotum are pale vellow as 1s the basal colour ot the elytra. {t hag been confused with S rufa Barker sp. nov. named herein trom W.A., which has red lateral margins to the pronotum and elytra with red basal color. S. plgayn( Obenberger (holotype male, Yilgarn, W.A., NMPC 23393)=S. fMaviceps Carter (syntype male, Geraldton, WA, NMVA), Barker (1983) synonymised this species with & pallidivenirts C&G, Although the colour and elytral markings of te two species are similar, differences in s{rneture of male genitalia and external morphology place them in different species groups, 5, /laviceps Was bispinase elytra while 8. pallidivenrris has wispinose elytra, 8, fuirmuire’ Kerremans=S. holfmanseges Hope (see p, 4), S. glecta Kerremans {holotype Australia, BMNH}-S. dnconsptreuu Saunders (holotype female, Aust.. BMNH), 5. electa was wrongly svnonymised with S. /aena Thomson by Barker (1979), The type of §. e/ecta |s a small specimen, easily confused with the ollver species, % (aera occurs in W,A, and is a member of the $. /levontere (Boisduval) species group while 5. jreonspticua occurs in NSW, and southern Qld and belongs in its own species group. &. blackburni Carter 3, julie Thomsdan dsee p. 4), 5, dewsorlersis Blackbur 1890 (holotype female Dawson River, Old, BMNH)-S8. Jiliputane Thomson (holotype male, New Holland, MINHM). The holotype of 8, f/ipuiuny is a smaller specimen and hag no pre-apical yellow spot on rhe elytra whlch {6 all black from before the middle. The holotvpe of S dowsenensisis a larger specimen and has a large pre-apical yellow spet on each elytron. It is possible that the size and pattern differences are sex-liriked, S. alaesiris Barker-S, montigens Oke (see p, 2). 8, cura Blackburn - & echreivenrris Saunders {see p, 4), §. wveipennis Barker (replacement name for & aurifera Carter 1922, homonym: holotype female, Kuranda, Qld, NMVA) ~ S& pallas Blackburn {Wolotype male, Thursday ts, RMN). There are few specimens of S. pal/as in Australian collections and the holotype of S. aurifend had been confused with an unidentified species also found in Qld. 5. aurolimbaia Carter = & puella Saunders (see p. 2). & transversepiets Thamson (holotype female Swan River (sie), MNTIN) © & scalaris (Boisduyal) TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINAS 9 (holotype female, MNHN), There is a NSW, specimen ofS. scaluris in ANIC identical to the holarype of S. rransversepicta, Both have reduced elytral pattern, The species has never been recardet| ‘reliably from W.A. S. cardifer Kerremans (syntype male, W.A, (sic), BMNH)-=S. thomson’ Saunders (bolorype female, Aust, BMNE). The pattern on the elytra of the holotype of S. cordifer is typical of specimens collected in Tasmania attributable ta & /homsont, S. fhomsont is a widespread species in eastern Australia but does not oecur in W.A. Species Descriptions Stigmodera (Castiarina) rita sp. no, PIGS 26, GA | ap ace eremity (Barker, 1979: 17) nee Blaekburn #90, Holotype, 2, Tallering Sin, Pindar, W,A,, 27.1%, 1980, S, Barker & DJ, Willtatns, WAMA. Allotype. 9 same data as holotype, WAMA, Paratypes, W.A..9 oor, 10 9 @, Same data as holotype. WAMA & SAMA; co, 2 9 @, Pindar, Nov, 1957, B. Barker, SAMA; 3 oc, Murchison, 20.x11.1967, & AL Uiher Baker, WAMA; 9 Payne's Find, 18ix.970, 8, Barker, SAMA; 2crcr, 1 &, Youanmi, 5.ix,1971, FA. Uther Baker, WAMA; 9 ao, 3 99, Mary Springs, 8ix.1970, AL & E, Curnaby, SAMA; 2 oo Ankertell, A. Ao Brown, SAMA; 3 o o,f @, Pindar, 2 7/11.1x4.1976, 2B MeMillan, WAMA; 2 oor, 3 9 G, Tallering Sin, Pindar, 28.9.1980, 5. Barker D. 1 Milliants, WAMA & SAMA; 1) 9, 17 km W Mullewa, 294%,1980, S. Barker, DJ. Williams, SAMA. 1 2, 16 km E Mt Magnet, 20.\x.1980, & Barker, DO J Willlams, SAMA; | co, 2 29, 1-2 km SW Tamala TO, Shark Bay, 23/°25,ix,1980, 8. Barker DJ, Willianis, SAMA: 2 ocr, 3 © 9, Mary Springs, §.ix.1970_ K & E. Carnaby, RWSO;2 a c,1 9, Marloo Sin, Wurarga, Goer/ing, RMBB, i co, | 9, Wurarga, H, Brown, RMBB. Colour, Vead, antennae, undersurface and legs black with blue reflections, Scutellum dark blue, Pronotum black with blue refleetions tn middle red al Sides. Elytra red with following black markings: basal margin; pre-medial fascta the ends expanded anteriorly obliquely over humeral callus reaching anterior margin, and posteriorly siquously reaching lateral margin (in most specimens there js litle posterior expansion) enclosing basal spot and one on margin; broad post-medial tascia peachine margin, extending anteriorly and posteriorly along sinurey mark covering whole af apex Hairs silver. Shape and seulpiure. Head closely punctured, median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae? segments 1-3 obconic, 4-11 toothed, Pronotum closely punctured, small basal fovea extending forwards to middle as thin glabrous line, small basal notches closer to margin (han 10 middle; projecting forwards in middle of apical margin, basal margin barely hisinuate; laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded OL (6 Widest part before middle, rounded to apex. Sciutellum seutiform, withoul punctures, glabrous, flar. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals canvex al sides and apex, less so in middie, punctured; laterally angled oul from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave then rounded out after middle and narrowed to bispinase apex; marginal spine sharp, sulural spine minute, rounded and indented between, apices barely diverging, apical margin sub- serrate, Uncersurface with clase shallow punctures, hairy, hairs long. S52 truncate in both sexes, Size. Males, 108=+0.12*«3.9+004 mim (38) Females, 11.6 + 0.15 44.3- 0,08 mm (31). Male gentalia. (Pig. 2B) Curved in dorso-ventral plane. Parameres gradually angled outwares from hasal piece, rounded off and tapered to apices, Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece wide. Aedaegus in §- gibbicollis (Fig. 2C) 1s larger. Parameres broader at basal piece and not angled as far apart towards apex, wfadually rounded then abruptly, clase Lo apex, Median Jobe poimted, sides acutely angled uway. Apophysis of basal picve wide. Distribution. W.Ac Murchison District, Goldfields, Shark Bay, Mullewa District, Remarks. Adult specimens are commonly roupd associaled with Eremophila sp. Member of the §. gibbicollis Saunders species eroup, This species has been misidentified as S, eremma Blackburn in Australian collections, ag it has been unrecognised that S$, elarki Carler is a synonym of S. eremila Blackburn, S. rufa can be readily distinguished from 3, eremita (Fig. 6F) which has yellow elvira and yellow lateral markings on the pronatum, arid & evrensis Barker sp now. (Pig. 6B) which has vellow to orange elytra atid lateral markings on the prenotum. In S. rufa the red colour of the pronatum anqd elytra tades tn ald specimens. The specific name is derived fram rufs L, red, Stigmodera (Castiarina) ey resis sp. poy. FIGS 2F, 6B Holotype, 2, | km W tron Knob S$. Aust. 28.16.1982. 8. Barker, J Gurdner, H. Vanderwaude, SAMA | 21158. Allobype. 2, same dala as holowpe. SAMA T 21159, 10 S. BARKER Paratypes 8. Aust.: 7 oo, 9 9 9, same data as holotype SAMA; 1 o@, 4 9 9°, 7 km E Kimba, 14.x,1982, S. Barker, P Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, SAMA. Colour. Head blue. Antennae: segments 1-3 green- bronze; 4-11 bronze. Pronotum dark blue in middle, yellow to orange at sides. Scutellum dark blue. Elytra yellow to orange with following dark blue markings; narrow basal margin; short pre-medial fascia not reaching margin, ends expanded anteriorly meeting basal margin and enclosing basal spot on each elytron; post-medial fascia expanded anteriorly on suture and connected along suture to pre-medial fascia; mark covering apex and connected along suture to post-medial fascia. Undersurface blue. Legs: femora blue; tibia and tarsomeres bronze-green. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, broad median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae: segments I-3 obconic; 4-11 toothed. Pronotum closely punctured, basal fovea extending forwards to middle as glabrous line, apical margin projecting in middle, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally rounded from base to apex, widest before middle. Scutellum scutiform, without punctures, glabrous, flat, excavate. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex, less so in middle, punctured and wrinkled; laterally angled out from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle, narrowed to bispinose apex; sharp marginal spine, minute sutural spine, margin rounded and indented between spines, apices hardly diverging, apical margin subserrate. Undersurface with shallow punctures, edges of abdominal segments glabrous; moderately hairy, hairs medium length. S;: truncate in male; rounded in female. Size. Males, 12.0 + 0.19 4.4 + 0.08 mm (9). Females, 13.8 + 0.19x5.2+ 0.08 mm (14). Male genitalia. (Fig. 2F). Curved in dorso-ventral plane. Parameres gradually angled outwards from basal piece to widest part after middle, abruptly rounded to apices. Median lobe pointed, sides obtusely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece medium width. Distribution: S. Aust.: Upper Eyre Peninsula. Remarks. This species belongs in the S. gibbicollis Saunders species group. It most resembles S. rufa Barker sp. nov., but has yellow to orange not red markings on the pronotum and elytra, is a larger species, and is associated with Acacia papyrophylla not Eremophila species. The specific name is derived from the type locality Eyre Peninsula. Stigmodera (Castiarina) stellata sp. nov. FIGS 2G, 6E Holotype. &, Parmango’s Rd, 18 km S Deralinya ruin, Balladonia, W.A., 22.x.1982, S. Barker, P. G. Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, WAMA. Allotype. 9, 92 km S of Balladonia, W.A., 9.xii.1974, S. Barker, SAMA I 21160. Paratypes. W.A.: 1 9, 8 km E_ Yellowdine, 13.xi.1980, 77 M.S. Hanlon, MPWA;1 9, Johnston Lake, 8.xi.1981, M. Powell, MPWA; 4 a0, 1 9, § km S Lake Cronin, 8.xi.1981, S. Wilson, D. Knowles, M. Powell, MPWA; 1 9, 28 km N Ravensthorpe, 15.xi.1981, 7) M. S. Hanlon, MPWA; 1 o, Parmango’s Rd, 20 km SW Deralinya ruin, 20.xi.1982, S. Barker, P G. Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, SAMA; 2 oc’, 17 km N Dempster’s Rd, Scadden Rd crossing, 18.x.1982, S. Barker, P. G. Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, SAMA; 1 o, 35 km W Salmon Gums, 8.x.1983, G. Browning, G. Mutze, SAMA; 1 9, 5 km SW Lake Cronin, 24.xi.1977, K. T. Richards, WADA; 1 o, 3 9 9, 80 km E Hyden, 24.xi.1977, K. T. Richards, WADA; 1 9, Boyatup, 13.x.83, WADA, Colour. Head, antennae, scutellum, undersurface and legs bronze. Pronotum bronze in middle, yellow at sides. Elytra yellow with following black markings with blue reflections: basal margin; broad premedial fascia reaching lateral margin, expanded forwards from anterior edge over humeral callus and meeting basal margin, enclosing large basal spot and small spot on lateral margin; broad post- medial fascia reaching margin, convex forwards; pre-apical mark covering apex and spines, enclosing yellow pre-apical spot on each elytron in most specimens, absent in a few; all marks connected down suture. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture. Head with close punctures, shallow median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae: segments 1-3 obconic; 4-11 toothed. Pronotum with close punctures, small basal fovea extending forward to middle as thin glabrous line, basal notches represented by glabrous areas closer to margin than middle; projecting forward slightly in middle of apical margin, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded to widest part before middle, rounded to apex. Scutellum scutiform, without punctures, glabrous, excavate along mid-line. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex and punctured, less so in middle; laterally angled out from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle and narrowed to bispinose apex; marginal spine medium sized but blunt, sutural spine minute, rounded and indented between, apical margin sub-serrate. Undersurface with close shallow punctures, except edges of IAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTTARINA) {1 abdominal segments which aré glabrous, densely hairy, hairs medium-length, Sy: truneate in inale: indented in middle in female. Size. Males, 124+0.3324,540.16 mm (1), Females, 13.7 + 0.20+5.2 4 0.10 mm (10). Male genitalia. (Fig. 2G) Curved in dorso-veriral plane. Parameres angled outwards [rom basal piece, parallel-sided from before middle; rounded off and tapered (o apices, Median lebe pointed, sides angled away. Apopbysis of basal piece wide, slightly clongate. Parameres in S. erentita Blackburn (Fig, 2D) atigled outwards from basal picee, rounded before middle, narrowed and paraltel- sided, rounded off ta apices. Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away, Apophysis of basal piece narrow ald tapered to apices, Remarks, Member of §. gihbicollts Saunders species group. Closest to S. evernita but male genitalia differ, is a larger species than 5, erentila, S, stellaja is slightly cylindrical jn shape while S. eremvifa is more dorso-ventrally thatiened. 5. s7éllata Occurs 1 the Goldfields and Esperance districts W,A,, §, eremila in the Murchison distnel W,A. The adults of 8. stellata are found on the Mowers of Melaleuca sp. The specific name is derived from s/e//atus L- starred, Stigmoedera (Custiariaa) incognita sp. roy. FIGS 2H, 6D Holotype. a, 83 kin E Lake King, W.A., 24.x.1983, M. Powell, WAMA, Allatype Q, same data as holotype, WAMA. Puratypes. 1 9, same data as holotype. MPWA; I a, Yellowdioe, 13.41.1977, M, Powell, SAMA, Colour Head, antennae, scutellum, undersurface und Jegs coppery-bronzve. Pronolum coppery bronze in middle, red at sides, Elytra yellow with red margins and following markings: bronze narrow basal margin, the following black with blue reflections; pre-medial fascia reaghing margin expanded anteriorly reaching basal margin, enclosing yellow basal spols on each elytran and clongate red spal on the margin; broad post-medial fascia reaching murgin; pre-apical spade-shaped mark, all marks connected down suture. Hairs silver, Shape and sculpture, Head closely puncturect, shallow median suleus, shert muzzle. Antennae compressed: segments 1-3 obconic; S-1L toothed. Pronotum closely punctured, basal fovea extending forwards to middle as glabrous line, basal norehes represented by glabrous area an each side closer fo margin (han middle; apical margin projecting in middle, basal margin bisinuate; laterally purallel- sided at base, rounded ta widest part before middle, rounded and narrowed to apex; overall slightly bulbous, Scutellum scutiform, glabrous, Mat. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex, punctured and wrinkled: literally angled out [rom base, rounded at husneral callus, concave, rounded after middle, tapered then strongly rounded to bispiriose apex: both spines minute and blunt, margin rounded and indented between spines, apices hardly diverging, apical margin subservate. Undersurface, with shallow punctures, edges of abdaminal segments glabrous, densely hairy, Waus medium length. S.: inale truncare; female truncate and slightly indented in middle, Size. Males, 13,.1*3.) mm (2). Females, 15.8 6.0 mm (2), Male genitalia. (Fig, 2H). Curved in dorso-ventral plane, Parameres angled outwards from basal piece, raunded after middle, parallel-sided then rounded and tapered (o apices. Median lobe pointed, sides angled away, Apophysis of basal piece mediuin width. ln §. rufallmbate Carter (Fig, 21) parameres are unvled outwards from basal piece, rounded al middle, parallei-sided, rounded oulwards and narrowed 1o upices. Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away, Apophysis of basal picee thedium width, slightly widened at apex, Disrrihution, W.A. Great Southern district Remarks. Member of the 8, gibbicollis Saunders Species group on basis of colour, pattern, oiale genitalia and external morphology. Most resembles 8. rifolimbata (Pig, 6C) but the pranotum is bronze inthe middle and distinctly bulbous, whereas. in S- rufolimbaia the pronotum is blue in the middle and rounded. The specific name is derived fram incognitus L, unknown. Stigmodera (Custinring) ungata sp. nov. PIGS 27, 6k Holotype: &, Kiata, Vie, Dee. 1967, Kh. Hateley, SAMA I 21161, Allatype. 9, same data as holotype, SAMA T 21162. Parawvpes. Viet 1 9, 14 km S Murrayville, 3),.4,1982, A & DB Gardner, SAMA; 1 9 Sea Lake, Nov.1916, G. Gandie, NMVA, 1 @ Salisbury, 6-xi1.1958, & Jenz, NM VA. Colowr. Head, aniennac, pronotum, undersurface and legs bronze with coppery reflections. Scutellum black. Elytra vellow with red margins and following black markings, basal murgin: pre-medial fascia represented by elongate mark On suture, sinuous mark running over humeral cullus and around to lateral margin; post-medigl faseia reaching margin; 12 pre-apical anchor-shaped mark, the last two connected down suture. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, eyes bulbous, shallow median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae: segments 1-3 obconic; 4-11 toothed. Pronotum closely punctured, punctures larger at sides than in middle, small basal fovea extending to middle as glabrous line, basal notches closer to margin than middle; projecting forwards slightly in middle of apical margin, basal margin virtually straight; laterally angled inwards from base, rounded to widest part before middle, rounded and narrowed to apex. Scutellum cordiform, glabrous, excayate in middle. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals punctured, convex at apex and sides almost flat in middle; laterally angled outwards from base rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle and tapered to bispinose apex; marginal spine small and blunt, sutural spine slightly larger and sharper, rounded between, apices diverging, Undersurface with close shallow punctures, edges of abdominal segments glabrous, dense long hair. 57: truncate in male; narrowly truncate in female. Size. Male, 12.4x15.1 mm (1). Females, 13.6x 5.5 mm (4). Male genitalia. (Fig. 2T). Parameres parallel-sided from basal piece, angled outwards before middle, gradually rounded and narrowed to apices. Median lobe blunt, sides obtusely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece medium width. Aedaegus in S, simulata C & G (Fig. 2U) larger. Parameres gradually angled outwards from basal piece, gradually rounded and narrowed to apices. Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece wide. Distribution. Vic: Big and Little Desert. Remarks. Belongs in the S, simulata species groups. Distinguished by the prominent anchor-shaped mark at the apex of the elytra and male genitalia. The specific name is derived from uncatus L. hooked. Stigmodera (Castiarina) kempsteri sp. nov. FIGS 2Y, 7A Holotype. @, 7 km E Norseman, W.A,, on Eremophila ionantha, 17.x.1982, PR G. Kempster, WAMA. Allotype. 9, same data as holotype, WAMA. Paratypes. W.A,: 5 oo, 25 km SW Deralinya ruins, Balladonia district, 20,.x.1982, S. Barker, P G. Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, WAMA & SAMA; 5 aoa,2 99, 18km SW Deralinya ruins, 22.x.1982, S. Barker, P. G. Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, WAMA & SAMA. 2 S. BARKER Colour. Head, antennae, pronotum, scutellum, undersurface and legs bronze. Elytra pale yellow with following black markings: narrow basal margin; pre-medial fascia, expanded anteriorly over humeral callus from anterior end and posteriorly to margin from posterior end; post-medial fascia reaching margin, projecting forwards slightly past middle of anterior edge and backwards slightly past middle of posterior edge, expanded anteriorly and posteriorly on suture; pre-apical spade-shaped mark covering tip of apex, all marks connected down suture. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, median sulcus, muzzle very short. Antennae: segments 1-3 obconic; 4 -11 toothed. Pronotum closely punctured, very small basal fovea extending forwards to middle as impressed line; projecting forwards slightly in middle of apical margin, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally rounded from base to apex, widest before middle. Scutellum scutiform, without punctures, excavate. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals flat in middle, elsewhere convex, with deep punctures; laterally angled out from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave then rounded after middle to spineless apex; apex narrowly truncate or very slightly rounded, apices diverging. Undersurface shallowly punctured, very hairy, hairs moderately long. S5: truncate in both sexes. Size. Males, 11.5 40.32x4,.4+4 0.12 Females, 12.0x4.5 mm (3), Male genitalia. (Fig. 2Y). Parameres parallel-sided from basal piece, rounded outwards to widest part after middle, parallel-sided, abruptly rounded near apex. Median lobe with blunt point, sides obtusely angled away. Basal piece of apophysis medium width, Aedaegus of S. turneri Barker (Fig. 2X) is of same proportion but larger. Median lobe with blunt point, sides acutely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece wide. Distribution. W.A.: Balladonia and Norseman Districts. Remarks. Adults are associated with Eremophila sp. Member of the S. convexa Carter species group, closest to S. turneri Barker. Similar in colour and markings to S. sagittaria C & G which belongs in its Own species group. S. kempsteri is distinguished from that species by its bispinose elytra; S. sagittaria has trispinose elytra. Named after Mr P. G. Kempster, Adelaide. mm (11). Stigmodera (Castiarina) athertonensis sp. nov. FIGS 2K, 7B Holotype. o, Mt Carbine, Qld, 9.i.1981, S. Barker, SAMA IT 21163. TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) 13 Allaiype 9, Davies Creek State Forest, Qld, 41,1981, 5, Barker, SAMA 1 21164. Paraiypes. Qlds 1 cr. Talga, 21.<11.1977, NV, Gough, DPIQ: 1 9, Mc Carbine, LLiid978, A, h Storey, DPIO: 1 &, Kuranda, 28.41.1973, 4. & M, Walford- Huggins, AWHQ. Colour, Head purple with green muzzle. Antennae green with yellow reMections, Pronotum purple. Scutellum coppery. Elytra yellow with following dark blue markings: narrow basal margin with green reflections; spot over each humeral callus. remnant of pre-medial fascia with purple reflections; post-medial lascta reaching margin with purple reflections; mark covering apex with purple reflections, all marks connected down suture, Undersurface; sternum purple; abdomen testaceous wilh green or purple reflections. Legs: femora green ventral surfave, blue-green dorsal surface; tibia and tarsomeres blue-green, Hairs silver. Shupe and scu/pture. Head closely punevured, broad median sulcus, medium muzzle, Antennae: segments I-3 obeanie; 4-l! toothed. Pronotum closely punctured, basal fovea extending forwards to middle as glabrous line, basal notches closer ta margin than middie; apical margin projecting in middle, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded to widest part before middle. rounded and narrowed to apex. Scutellum stutiform, punctured, flat. Elyira punctate-striate, intervals heavily punetured: laterally anvled out from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded aller middle, rounded und narrowed Jo bispmose upex: both spines small, margin rounded and indented between spines, apices diverging, apical margin Subserrate. Undeérsurface with shallaw punctures, moderatey fairy, hairs shorr on abdomen, medium length on sternum. S.: truncate in both sexes. Size. Males, 15.6+6,2 mm (2), Females, 16.9 - 6.7 mm (3). Male zenitalia, (Vig, 2K). Heavily chitinised as are other members of §, jekell’ Saunders species vroup. Parameres. parallel-sided at basal piece, rounded outwards, widest after middle, gradually rounded to apex, Median lobe wlth sharp point, sides anuled away, then drop more or less vertically. Apaphysis of basal piece short and wide, Aedaewus in S. fekelli (Vig, 20) larger Parameres parallel-sided at basal Piece, rounded ourwards after middle, then parallel- sided and rounded off abruptly, tapered Lo ypices. Median lobe and apophysis of basal picce Similat to those in S, arhertanersis. Distribttian. Qld: Atherton Tableland, Remarks, Member of the S. jekell/ species vroup. Distinguished [rom other meaibers of the group by the purple bead and pronotum. A larger species than §. fu/eiventris Macleay (Fig. 7C) which oceurs iti southern Queensland, NSW, and Vie. 5. jekell? oecursin S. Aust. and S redriventris Blackburn in W.A. The specific name is derived from the type lovality. Stigmodera (Castiarina) melrasensis sp. nov. PIGS IC, 5H ffoloivpe. o, Mt Remarkable N.B, Melrose, 8. Ausr., 6.1.1980, 8. Barker, SAMA 1 21168, Allotype. 2, sama data as holotype, SAMA} 21166. Paratypes. S. Austs 19 crc, 4 OO. samy duta as holotype, SAMA: 17 oc, 12 © 9, Mt Romarkable N.P., Melrose, 30.41.1968, S. Borker, SAMA, Colour Head, antennac, pranotum, seutellum, undersurface and legs green with gold reflections, Elytra pale yellow with following variable markings: narrow green basal margin; dark blue mark covering: humeral callus, reaching apical and laters! margins; triangular blue pre-medial mark on eachi side of suture; post-medial blue fascia, convex antertarly and posteriorly and ejiher reaching margin, nat touching margin, represented by a inedial spot on each elytron or entirely absent; pre-apical blue mark which may be reduced of absent; green mark down suture covering apical spines. Hairs silver, Shape and sculpture, Head closely punceured, median sulcus, muzzle short. Antennae segments: 1-3 obconic, 4-1) toothed. Pronotum closely pufictured, small basal fovea extending to apical margin as medjum impressed lie, basal notches closer fo margin than middle: apical margin straizht, basal bisinuate: laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded to apex, widest at middle, Scutellum scutifarm, punctured, excavate. Elyira punctate striate, all intervals conyex, punchured und wrinkled: laterally angled out from base, rounded at humeral callus, convave then rounded after middle, rounded and narrowed ta bispinase apex; marginal spine large, Sulural minule, margin rounded and indented between, apives slightly diverging. Undersurface elosely punctured, moderately hairy, hairs slrort, Ss: truncare in both sexes. Size. Males, 7.3 +01! + 2.6 0.03 mim (37). Femules, 77201128 +004 mm U7). Mole genitalia. (Fig, 1). Parameres parallel-sided frorn basal piece until after middle, rounded our no Widest part, rounded and narrowed to apex, Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece medium width. Parameres of S. Ailaris Hope (Fig, 1A) are broader at basal piece, sides slightly angled outwards then rounded ou jo widest part after middle, rounded and tapered to apices: Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away, Apophysis of basal piece medium width 14 TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) 0 5 mm F Fig. 4. A. Stigmodera haroldi Saunders, B. S. turbulenta sp. nov., C. S. eborica Carter, D. S. moribunda Saunders, E. S. julia Thomson, F. S. warningensis sp. nov., G. S. alternozona Thomson, H. S. cupricollis Saunders, I. S. terraereginae Blackburn, J. S. deyrollei Thomson. S. BARKER 15 Fig. 5. A. Stigmodera bimaculata Saunders, B. S. placens Kerremans, C. S. ochreiventris Saunders, D. S. guttata Blackburn, E. S. viridolinea sp. nov., F. S. burnsi sp. nov., G. S. capensis sp. noy., H. S. melrosensis sp. nov., I. S. discoflava Carter, J. S. blackdownensis sp. nov., K. S. malleeana Carter, L. S. browningi sp. nov. 16 8, BARKER Distribution: & Aust. Mt Remarkable. Remarks. A\l specimens Were collected on the Flowers a! Burseria spinosa, Member of 8. hilaris Species group. Superficially resembles S, sexgulteta Macleay, but male genitalia differ from that spectes (Fig. 16) which belongs in its own species aroup. The specific name ss derived roy the type locality Melrose. Stigmaderm (Castigcinu) capensis sp. nev. FIGS 1D, 5G S. avrolimbute (Barker 1983 Kin, 2W) gee Carter 1922, Halotvpe. a, Cape York, Qld, SAMA #21147. Allotype 2, Cape York, Qld, SAMA | 21568, Paratype. |, Cape York, Old, SAMA. Colour Head, antenriag, pronotum, scutellum, undersurface and legs green with yellow reflections. Elytra yellow with follawing markings: black with green reflections on narrow basal margin and along suture, oblique broad black vita over each humeral callus; broad posi-medial black fascia reaching margin; black apical mark, all marks broadly connecred down suture. Hairs silver, Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, broad median sulcus, shart muzzle. Antennae cornpressed, seuments: 1-3 obconic: 4-1! toothed. Pronotun closely punctured, narrow basal fovea extending forwards to apical margin as glabrous line, bisal notches represented by small glabrous ares on each side closer to margin than middle; apical margin straight, basal margin bisinuates laterally parallel- sided at hase, rounded to widest part before middle, rounded and nurrowed to apex. Scurellum seati- form, punctured, flat, Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex, punctured and wrinkled; laterally angled out from base, rounded al humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle and narrowed to hispinuse apex; inarginal spine broad bur sharp, miinuic sutural spine, margin rounded and indented between spines, apices diverging. Undersurface shallow punctures, sparse short hairs. S>: crunvate in bath sexes, Size. Males, 7-2 «2.6 mm (2). Female, 6.4.2.5 mm (1), Male genitalia, (Fig, 1D). Parameres slightly angled cauiwands from basal piece, rounded after middle to Widest part, capered, poinied at apices. Median lobe puinred, sharp, sides acutely angled away, Apophysis of basal piece broad, In S. goodingi Barker (Fig. JF) dimensons of gedaegus similar. but apices of parameters mare pointed and centre of median lobe less so, Apophysis af hasal piece mare tapered. Distribution, Qld: Cape York - Remarks, Member of the S. sexguttalu Macleay (Fig. 1B) species group. Superficially resembles a stnal) specimen of S. sexp/agiara Gory, However mule gennaha are not wedge-shaped as in 5, sexplagiata species group, The specific nanie is derived from cap L. Cape, referring To the type locality Cape York, Stigmodera (Castiarina) browmingi sp. wo. FIGs 3¢, 51, Holotype, & 59 km 3 Balladonia, W.A., on Eremophila dempsteri, 3.x,1983, G, Browning, G. Mutze, WAMA. Alletype. 9, same data as holotype, WAMA. Paraiypes, WAL IS oo, 2 9 9, same data as holorype, WAMA & SAMA, Colour Head bronze with yellow frontal spor. Antennae blue-green, Pronotum bronze with blue reflections, yellow at sides. Scutellum dark blue, Elytra pale yellow with following dark blue markings: narrow basal margin; broad pre-medial fascia, both ends expanded anteriorly over humeral callus meeting basal margin, enclosing yellow basal spot and elongate yellow mark on margin; broad post-medial fascia reaching margin: apical mark enclosing pre-apical yellaw spot io most specimens, Undersurface pale yellow with dark blue markings over sutures and at edges of abdominal segments and lateral marks on each side of Sy, Ss and So. Legs dark blue. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture, Head closely and shallowly punctured, no median sulcus, very short muzzle, eyes bulbous, Anlennac compressed, segments: |-4 obvonic; 5-11 toothed. Pronotum closely and shallowly punctured, minute basal fovea, basal notches on cach side claser 1o margin than middle; apical margin slightly projecting in middle, basal margin almost straight; rounded tron base, widest before iniddle, rounded and narrowed to apex. Seutellum seutiform, elabrous and flat, Elytra pusnctate-striute. intervals canyex, punctured and wrinkled: laterally angled our from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle and narrowed fo trispiniose apex; small marginal sping, larger middle spine, small sutural spine, margin rounded between spines, apives diverging. Undersurface shallow punctures, edges ol abdorninal segments glabrous, short sparse hairs. Ss: lruncate in both sexes. Size. Males, 8.9 2 U.11 3.2 + 0.05 mm U6), Females, 9.0.3.3 mm (3). Male genitalia, (Fig. MC), Pacameres slightly angled outwards from basal piece, rounded before middle ro widest part after middle, gradually rounded and narrowed to apices, Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away: Apophysis of basal piece TAXONOMY OF STIGMODER.) (CASTLARINA) narrowed to apex, Parameres in S. pallidiventris C&G (fig. 3D) shebtly angled outwards from basal piece, rounded before middle to widest part alter middle, slightly narrowed, abruptly rounded to apex. Median lobe pointed, sides vradually angled away, Apophysis af basal plece narrowed to apex. Distribution, WA. Balladonia district, Remarks, Belongs in the 8, decermaculara (Kirby) Species group of which il is the smaliest. Most resembles §. pellidiveniris but bas no red markings on the pronotum, elytra or uridersurface as in that species, Specimens were collected an the flowers of Eremaphila denipsieri, Named after Mr G, Browning, Adelaide. Stipmodera (Castisrina) taamanionsis sp. nov, FIGS 36, 7 Halorype. o, Bruny Is, Tas., 3bxhJ981, GF Bornemissza, SAMA | 21169. Allaiype. 2. Entrance Mt Field §.P., Tas, 26.1.1983. JM. dS. Barker, HL vanderwande, SAMA 1 21170. Paratypes, Vasc 2 G 9, Lake Leake, 1HiL1974, OC. Hocking, SAMA; 1 2, Waterhouse, 44,1982, G. Bornemissza, SAMA, | 2, Hobart, Lea, SAMA; 40, Bruny LL, 3.1984, G. A Bornermisscu, SAMA; |G, Geeveston, 2461984, GG. Burns GBVA, 1 o,1 &, Zeehban, 21.1984, G. G. Burns; GBVA; | or, National Park, 21.7 (985, G. G. Burns, GBVA. Colour. Head and antennae blue or blue-green with a prominent yellow frontal spot, Pronotum black with blue-green reflecuions in middle, yellow at sides. Scutellum blue-green. Elytoa yellow wib following dark blue markings: narrow basal margin, broad pre-media! fascia; broad post-medial fascia; pre-apical mark covering apex, all marks coalesced along margin to form § yellaw marks on each elytron, consisting of a basal spot, elongate mark an the margin at humeral callus, elongate medial mark, narrow fascia after middle, small pre-apical spot. Undersurface yellow with dark blue markings an margin and sutures. Legs dark blue, Hairs silver. Shape and scwlpture. Head with shallow punctures, shallow median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae: segments 1-4 obconic, S-11 toothed. Pronatum wilh shallow punctures, basal fovea extending to middle as glabrous line, basal notches closer 1o margin than middle; projecting forwards broadly in middle of apival margin, basal margin almost straight; laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded hefore middle and narrowed to apex. Scitellum seutiform, without punetiires, excavare. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex With puncusres; laterally angled out imi from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave rounded after middle to trispitiose apex; margivial spine small and blunt angled outwards to che Jarge and blunt middle spine, shghtly indented fo minute, blunt sutural spine Undersurface with shallow punctures, moderately hairy, hairs moderately long, 57: truncate in male; indented in iniddle and with a distinet lip in female. Size, Males, 12.7 + 0,233.0 > 0.08 mnt (7). Females, 14.7 4 0.36 © 5.7 40.12 mm (7). Male genitalia. (Fig. 3B). Parameres angled outwards Irom basal piece, rounded before middle, parallel-sided and pounded abruptly then tapered to apex, Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away al first then sinuously at greater angle. Apophysis of basal piece medium width. Parameres in. actaspilota (Fig. 3P) slightly angled outwards from basal piece, rounded before middle, parallel sided then abruptly rounded and lapered to apices. Median lobe pointed bur blunr, sides angled away. Apophysis of basal piece medium width, Distribution. Tasmania. Remarks. Member of the S acrospilom C & G species group. Only representative oecutring itt Tasmania. The elytral pattern is darker than in S. avrospilota. The specific name has been derived from the area of occurrence, Tasmania, Sttgmodera (Castiarina) pearsoni sp. av. FIGS 34, 61 Hololype. o, Blackdown Tableland, Qld, Nov,J982, S. Pearson, QMBA, Allowwpe. 9, same data as holotype, QMBA. Paratypes, Qld. 2 oom, same data as holorype, OMBA, 3 co, | O, Blackdown Tableland, 6.x,|973, EE Adams, SAMA & EAQA; | o, 1 ®, Blackdown Tableland, & & Adams, SAMA & EAQA, Colour, Head dark blue, bronze-preen at base. Antennae bronze-green. Pranotum dark blue in middle, bronze-green at anterior ntargin, light blue or bronze-green at angles. Scurellurn and under- surface dark blue. Elytra red-brown with narrow dark blue basal margin. Legs blue. Hairs silver. Shape und sculpture, Head closety punctured, broad median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae: segments 1-3 obeonic; 4-1) toothed. Pronotum closely punctured, small basal fovea extending forwards to middle as glabrous impressed line, apical margin projecting in middle, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded before middle, rounded and narrowed to apex. Scutellum scutiform, punctured, flat. Elytra costate, scutellary, Ist, 3rd and Sth intervals raised, intervals between 18 TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) Fig. 6. A. Stigmodera rufa sp. nov., B. S. eyrensis sp. nov., C. S. rufolimbata Carter, D. S. incognita sp. nov., E. S. stellata sp. nov., F. S. eremita Blackburn, G. S. humeralis Kerremans, H. S. victoriensis Blackburn, I. S. pearsoni sp. nov., J. S. hilleri sp. nov., K. S. uncata sp. nov., L. S. cracenta sp. nov. S. BARKER 19 Fig. 7. A. Stigmodera kempsteri sp. nov., B. S. athertonensis sp. nov., C. S. fulviventris Macleay, D. S. discolorata sp. nov., E. S. delectabilis Hope, F. S. dessarti sp. nov., G. S. tyrrhena Blackburn, H. S. pulla sp. nov., |. S. fusca sp. nov., J. S. tasmaniensis sp. nov., K. S. lukini sp. nov., L. S. coolsi sp. nov. 20 5S. BARKER flat, punctured and rough; laterally parallel-sided at base, slightly angled outwards, rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle and narrowed to bispinose apex; both spines minute, margin rounded and indented between spines; apices hardly diverging, apical margin subserrate. Undersurface shallow punctures, edges of abdomi- nal segments glabrous, sparse short hairs. S3: truncate in male; rounded in female. Size. Males, 9.9 + 0.30.x 3.84 + 0.10 mm (7). Females, 1.34.3 mm (3). Male genitalia, (Fig. 3G). Parameres slightly angled outwards from basal piece then angled further outwards before middle, rounded then angled further outwards until widest part, abruptly rounded and tapered to apices. Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece narrow. Aedaegus of S. octomaculata (Fig. 3H) larger but has same proportions except that apophysis of basal piece is wider. Distribution. Qld: Blackdown Tableland, Expedition Range. Remarks. The adults have been collected on the flowers of Leptospermum sp. Member of the S. octomaculata Saunders species group. It is the only lycid mimicking species known from this group. Named after Mr S. Pearson, Ranger, Blackdown National Park. Stigmodera (Castiarina) blackdownensis sp. nov. FIGS 2Q, 5J Holotype. &, Blackdown Tableland, Qld, 6.x.1973, E. E. Adams, ANIC. Allotype. 9, Blackdown Tableland, Qld, Nov.1982, S. Pearson, QMBA. Paratypes. Qld: 4 o@, 7 99, same data as holotype, EAQA, ANIC, AWHQ, SAMA; 3 oo’, 1 9, Blackdown Tableland, 23.ix.1973, E. &. Adams, EAQA, AWHQ; 7 oc, 3 9 9, Upper Stoney Creek, Blackdown Tableland, 9.xi.1981, S. Barker, P- Kempster, H. Vanderwoude, SAMA; 5 oo, 4 99, same data as allotype, QMBA. Colour. Head, antennae, scutellum either green with gold reflections, blue-green or blue. Pronotum either green with gold reflections, blue-green or blue in the middle, brown lateral margin. Elytra brown with the following green marks: narrow basal margin; elongate spot over each humeral callus, spot on suture in between; post-medial fascia projecting anteriorly in middle on each side and anteriorly and posteriorly on suture; preapical spade-shaped mark, all marks connected down suture. Undersurface blue-green. Legs: femora blue-green; tibia and tarsi green with gold reflections. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, muzzle short. Antennae segments: 1-3 obconic; 4-11 toothed. Pronotum closely punctured, small basal fovea extending forwards to middle as glabrous line; projecting anteriorly in middle of anterior margin, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally rounded from base, widest before middle rounded and narrowed to apex, lateral margin dorso-ventrally compressed at base, with a large shallow fovea at each basal angle. Scutellum scutiform, flat, glabrous. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex, slightly punctured in middle, heavily at sides; laterally angled outwards from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, then rounded after middle and narrowed to bispinose apex; marginal spine small, sutural spine minute, margin rounded and indented between, apices diverging, apical margin subserrate. Undersurface shallowly punctured, moderately hairy, hairs short. S,: broadly rounded in male; narrowly rounded in female. Size. Males, 10.2 +0.21x4.0+0.08 mm _ (20.) Females, 11.2 + 0.18x4.4+0.06 mm (16). Male genitalia. (Fig. 2Q). Parameres slightly angled inwards from basal piece then rounded and angled outwards, abruptly rounded at apices. Median lobe bluntly pointed in middle, sides acutely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece narrow, Distribution. Qld: Blackdown Tableland, Expedition Range. Remarks. Belongs in S. distinguenda Saunders species group. The elytral pattern most resembles S. garrawillae Carter but is a different colour, the elytra are bispinose whereas spines are absent in S. garrawillae and male genitalia are different (Fig. 2S). The specimens were collected on the flowers of Baeckea sp. The tableland area where this species and the previous one were collected is a vegetational island, with endemic plant and insect species. The name is derived from the type locality. Stigmodera (Castiarina) cracenta sp. nov. FIGS 3], 6L Stigmodera atricollis (Barker, 1983; Fig. IF) nec Saunders 1869. Holotype. o, Tallering Stn, Pindar, W.A., 27.1x.1980, S. Barker, D, J. Williams, WAMA. Allotype. 9, Tallering Stn, Pindar, W.A., 28.ix.1980, S. Barker, D. J. Williams, WAMA. Paratypes. W.A.. 2 oc, 1 ©, same data as holotype, SAMA; 2 oo, 1 9, same data as allotype, SAMA; | o, 1 9, Shark Bay, 20.ix.1969, F.) H. Uther Baker, SAMA; 1 9, Mt Magnet, 20.viii.1967, FH. Uther Baker, SAMA; 1 9, E Murchison, Mansbridge, SAMA; 2 00,3 99, TAXONOMY OF STIGMOBERA (CASTLARINA) 2) Mary Springs, 8.4x.1970,,.A. & & Carnaby, SAMA; Lo, 10 kro W Gaseoyne Jen, 22.ix.1980, Do Williains, S. Barker, SAMA; 1 &, 1 9, Marloo Stn, Wurarga, 1931-194), A, Goerling, ANLC; 2 ceo, Cus, 7. MW Brown, NMVA; 1 cy Ll 9, Yampire Gorge, Hamersley Range, 26.viii.1967, BA. Urher Baker, SAMA. Colour. Head, antennae, pronotum and scutellum dark blue, Undersurface blue Elytra yellaw with following black niarkings! narrow basal margin, pre-medial fascia not reavhing margin extending. anteriorly to humeral callus from the end, represented by three spots in.a few specimens; broad post-miedial fascia projecting anteriorly in middle ofeach side and along sujure: mark covering whole apex. Legs: femora aud tibia dark blue; tarsomeres blue-green. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture. Wead closely punctured, shallow median sulcus, very short muzzle, eyes bulbous, Antennae compressed; seements 1-3 abconiv; 4-I1 toothed. Pronotum shallowly punctured, glabrous, small basal fovea; apical margin projecting in middle, basal margin barely bis{nuates laterally parallel-sided al base, rounded lo witlest part after middle, rounded to apex. Scutellum scutiform, glabrous, excavate glong anterior margin. Elytra puretate-striate, intervals fal, shallowly punctured; laterally angled out from base, rounded ac humeral callus, concave then rounded after middle, tapered to bispinose apex: long sharp marginal sping, small sharp sutural spine, margin rourided and deeply indented between spines, apices diverging, apical margin subserrate. Undersurface with shallow punctures, edges of abdominal segments glabrous, sparse hairs, Sy truncate in male, narrowly (Tuncale in female. Size. Males, 9.2 © O0.1643,1+0,06mm (13). Females, N12 015 63.4 +0007 mar (11). Male genitafie, (Fig. 31), Parameres slightly angled outwards fron basal piece, becoming parallel-sided afler middle, then rounded and narrowed to apices. Median lobe pointed, sides acutely angled away. Apoaphysis of basal piece narrowed front base rounded aut at apex, medium width. Parameres in §, alricollts Saunders (Fig. 34) angie outwards from basal piece ntore or less Continuously, rolunding off just before apex. Median lobe pointed, sharp, sides angled away, Apophysis of basal piece medium widely. Distribution. WA. Shack Bay Murchison and Maullewa districts. Remarks. Belougs in S atrical/lis Saunders species group but is 4 smaller species chan S. arricallis and has sharper elytral spines, The specie tare 1s derived fron crécerns L. slender. Stigmodera (Castiarina) hilleri sp. nov. PIGS 3K, 6J Holotype. o&, Mt Glorious, Qld, 104.1984, .4_ Hiller, QMBA. Allotype. 2, Mt Glorious, Qld, 27.xi/.1983, 4. Hiller, QMBA. Paratypes, Qld: | o, same data as allotype, SAMA; Toro, i! OG, MrGlorious, 16.11.1983, 1, Hiller, AHQA; 3 a0, 1 9, Mt Glorious, 30.x7.198U, 4. Hillery, AHQA & SAMA, J oo, Mt Glorious, 12,xi1, 1983, 4 Hiller, AHQA. Colour, Head green with yellow reflections. Antennae blue-green, Pronotum, scutellum and undersurface green with yellow reflections. Ebytra yellow with following dark vreen markings with yellow reflections down Suture only: narrow basal margin; broad pre-medial fascia reaching margin; broad post-medial tascia reaching margin; spade- shaped pre-apical mark reaching margin enclosing yellow spot on each side berween it and post-medial fascia, all marks connected down suture to apex- Legs blue-green. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture, Head closely punctured, broad median sulcus, short muzzle. Afrennae! segments 1-3 obconio; 4-1! toothed. Pronotum closely punctured, basal fovea extending lorwards*to apical margin as glabrous line; apical margin projecting broadly in middle, basal miargin bisinuate; laterally rounded fram base, widest before middle, rounded to apex. Scutellum seurform, few punctures, glabrous, flat. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex, punctured apd wrinkled; laterally angled oul from base, rounded at humeral vallis, concave, rounded after middle and narrowed to bispinose apex; marginal spine blunt, very small sutural spine, margin indented between spines, apices diverging. Undersurface with shallow punctures, edges of abdominal segments glabrous, moderately hairy, hairs medium Jength. S7: truncate in male; indented in middle in female. Size. Males, 9.74 0.202£3.4 + 0.06 mm (13). Females, 10,0 © O:.28 43.64 0.1) mm (13). Male genitalia. (Fix. 3K), Parameres angled oulwards from basal piece, rounded before middle to widesc part after middle, rounded and narrowed TO apices. Medisn lobe very wide, pomted but blurt, sides obtusely angled away. Apophysis of basal Piece medium width. Distriniion. Old: Mt Glorious. Remarks, Collected from Bark/va flowers an the edye af rain forest. | am unable to assaciate this species with any other on ibe basis ot male vennalia and extemal morphology. Named alter Mir A. Hiller, Mi Ciluricus, (tude ae s. BARKER Stigmodera (Castiarina) fusea sp. nov. FIGS 3L, 71 Holotype. or, N.Q., Dodd, NMVA- Allotype, 2, Atherton, S.SW, (sic), French eoll.. NMVA. Paraivpes, Qids | of, Kuranda, M.SW. (sic) Jan.1905, 2 P Dodd, SAMA. N.SWe L 9, Tweed River, F841 1923, & M. Benguet, RMEBB. Colour Head, antennae, undersurface ereen. Pronetum green along apical margin and al sides, black in middle Elyira basal colour vellow with ube following black markings: broad basal margins pre- medial fascia; post-medial fascia; pre-apical mark covering apex, All these marks have coalesced al the sides leaving the following: basal yellow spot on each side and one at middie; red spot on lateral margin at humeral callus and one on the lateral margin in the prestpical area. Legs: ereen of ventral surface, blue-green on dorsal surface of femur, tibia; tarsameres blue-green Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture, Head with shallow punctures, thin median sulcus, muzvle shor Antennae: seemenis 1-4 obeonic; 5-11 toothed, Pronotum with shallow punctures, glabrous, basal fovea and basal notches closer fo margin than middle; projecting forwards broadly wi middle of apical margin, basal margin bisinvate; laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded before middle and tapered to apex, Scurellum scutiform, Nat wilhoul punctures. Ety(ra punctate-siniate, intervals without punctures, glabrous, convex at base and apex, Flat in middle; laterally angled out trom base, rounded at hurneral callus (widest part), concave, rounded afler middle and tapered (o bispinase apex; spines equal Iength, interval between straight, Undersurface with shallow punetures, edges of abdominal segments vlabrous, few short hairs, Sy: truneate in both. Sexes. Legs: in male 2nd and 3rd with tarsal pads absent on tarsomeres |, 2, 3, replaced by blunt median spine. Size. Males, 11.0%4,3 mm (2), Females, 13-7» 4.8 mm (2), Male genitalia, (Fig, AL), Parameres parallel-sided al basal piece, slightly angled outwards before middle, rounded to widest part, narrowed ta the apices. Median lobe pointed and sharp, sides angled away. Apophysis of basal picee medium with, Distribution. Northern M.SW, and Old, Remarks. Member of 8. produete Saunders mimiery group on basis of colour and pattern. Lam unable 19 group S. fusca with any other species on basis of external morphology or struectire of the mile genitalia. The specific name is derived from fusers L, dark. Stigmodera (Castiarina) warningetsis sp. now FIGS 3M, 46 Holotype. 3, Mc Warning, NoSW,. 8.4ii,1979, TM, S. Hanlon, SAMA L 2LI7L Paratype. 1 a, Mt Glorious. Old. 107,1984, 4. Hille. AHQA,. Colour, Head black with blue reflections on muzzle. Antennae: segment | blue; segments 2-1) bronze- green. Pronotum and sculellum black. Under- surface and legs black with blue reflections. Blytra bright yellow with following black markings: narrow basal margin, mark down suture; mark covering apex, Hairs silver, Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, broad median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae: segments 1-4 obconic; 5- toothed, Pranotum closely punctured, basal fovea extending forwards to near apical margin as impressed line, basal notches on each side closer to margin than middle: apical margin projecting in middle; basal margin bisinuate; igterally angleal inwards rom base, rounded to widest part before middle, rounded and narrowed to apex. Scutellum cordiferm, punctured, excavate. Elytra costate, scutellary, 3rd, Sth and 7th intervals slightly raised, other intervals flat, all punctured; laterally angled aut from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle and narrowed to bispinose apex; small, sharp marginal spine, minute sutural spme, maruin indented but straight between spines, apices diverging, Undersurface shallow punetures, hairy, hairs short, Legs: in male 2nd and 3rd with tarsal pads replaced on tarsomeres 1-3 by elongate median ridge. Sy: truncate in male; female unknown, Size. Males, 13,7 «4.9 mm (2). Male genitalia. (Pig, 3M), Large, wedge-shaped, median labe pointed, sides rounded away, Similar to §, ligris Barker (1983, Fiz. LP) except median lobe of S. tigris pointed and sharp, sides angled away nol rounded, Distribution, High altitude rain forest in northern N.SMW. and southern Qld. Remarks. Member of the S. sexplagiata Gory species group, Closest to S, digris, differs from (hal species in pattern, shape, size and shape af elytral spines, The specific name is derived from the type locality. Stigntudera (Castiarina) turbulenta sp. nov. FIGS 3N, 4B Holorpe, &, Boxwood Hill, W.A,, [6.xi,1980, 7, M.S. Harlan, WAMA. TAXONOMY OF STIGMORERA (CASTTARINA) a3 dlatvpe 2, 35-55 kro S&S Yellowdine, WA, 27...1978, T) & Houston, WAMA. Paratypes, W401 co, Dedati, 2.x.1977, D. Knowles, MPWA} | &, 1 9, 55 km EB Ayden, (7.x. t981, M4. Powell, MPWA; | ct, same data as holotype, MPWA: | ov, Jerramuneup, 16.xi,1980, 7 M.S Flunion, MPWA; 1 or, EF Hyden, 191.1973, K & £, Carnaby, SAMA; 1.0, MeDermid Rock, 90 km W Norseman, Ocl,197%, G. dfarola, WAMA, 1G, Tarin Rock, WAMA 48-2728 1 9. Kukerin, WAMA 48-2981: | 9, Reserve 16 kim SSE Merredin, 29.x,1978, 7 & Houston, WAMA; 1 2,2 kim WNW Wodberiup Fhil, 29/30.si,1979, 7 FE Houston, WAMA; | oo, Yellowdine, 21.s.L980, RO P MeMillan, WAMA;3 cot, 1 @, Luke Grace, A. Me Browe, NMVA; 1G, Kalgoorlie, A Wo Brawn RMEB; 3 9 2, Murchison, 77. Ho Brown, RMBB, 2 9 9, Ausiralia, Deuquet Calleetion, RMBB; 2 2 9. Albany, Brewer, BMNH- Colour Head bronze-green with blue muzzle. Antennae bronze-green, Pronotum dark blue in middle, bronze-preen at sides. Sculellum dark blue. Elytra red with tollowing dark blue markings: narrow basal margin, pre-medial fascia concave anteriorly, not reaching margin; post-nedial fascia reaching margin; mark covering apex, last bwe marks connected down suture, fascia nol carmected, Undersurface dull blue-green. Lees: femora and libia blue-green: tarsomeres green. Hairs silver. Shape and sculplure. Head closely punetured, shallow median sulcus, short muzzle, Antennae: segments 1-4 obeoniec, 5-1) toothed. Proporuni closely punctured, stall basal fovea extendine forwards to middle as glabrous impressed tine; apical margin straight, basal margin bisinuate; laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded from base, widest part hefore middle, narrowed ta apex, Scutellum cordiform, punctured, excavate Elyira punctale-striale, intervals convex punetured and wrinkled; laterally angled out fram base, rounded at humeral vallus, concave, rounded after middle, narrowed to bispinose apex; prominent sharp marginal spine, siall sharp sulural spine, margin rounded and indented between spies, apices hardly diverging, apleal Margin rough. Undersurface with narrow plinctures, hairy, hairs medium length. S45: truncate in both sexes. Legs: in male 2nd and 3rd will tarsal pacs missing on rarsomeres 1-3, replaced by double median spine. Size, Males, 10.1 40.2143.87 (1.07 mm Females, 10.7 +.0.27 &4.L +0.10 mim (16), Male wenliata (Piv. 3M). Wedge-shaped, median lobe pointed, sides rounded away, Distribution, WAS Murchison, Goldfields and Great Sourherd districts, (10), Remarks. Member of the S. sexplagiaia Gory species group. Closest to 8, curnisAd Barker (}Y83, Pig. TR), but differs in shape, colour and size. The specific name is derived from furhulentas L. agiraicd, Stigmoders (Castisrina) dessarti sp. nov. FIGS 30, TF Holotype: oo, WA, ©. Deuguet collection, RM BB. Paraypes WAS 3 oot, same data as holotype, RMHB & SAMA. 1 cr, 32 km & Southern Cross, 8.x. 1978, D, Kaowles, MPWA; 1 oo, 35 km E Jerramungup, 3.sL1979, VW Powel, Mt. Golding, MPWA,; 1 o, 55 lin E Hyden, (7.x,1981, MZ. Powell, MPWA, Colour, Head bronze with blite-green reflections. Antennae: scements 1-2 blue-green, 3-11 bronze. Pronojum bronze. Sculellum and undersurface dark blue. Elytra ced with following dark blue markings: narrow basal margin; preanedial fascia not reaching margin, expanded anteriorly at ends, the first two marks connected dawn sulure; past-niedial fascia reachine margin; mark covering apex and spines, the last two marks eonected down suture Legs: femora and tibia dark blue; tarsomeres blue-green. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpiire, Head closely punctured, broad median suleus, short muzate, Antennae? segments 1-3 abconic; 4-11 toothed. Pronowm vlosely punctured, basal fovea exiendina forwards to middle as glabrous. line, basal notches represented by glabrous area on each side closer 10 margin than middle; apical margin slightly projecting in middle, basal maryin bisinuate; larerally parallel-sided at base, rounded before middle, rounded and narrowed to apex. Scutellum scurtforin, without punctures, glabrous, excavate. Elytra punctale-striate, intervals convex, punctured; laterally angled aut from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle and Hatrowed |o bispinose apex; marginal spine slightly larger than sulural spine, margin straight between spines, apices diverging. Undersurface will shallow punctures. edges of abdominal seemenis glabrous, moderately hairy, hairs medium leneth S>: truncate in nvle; female unk now, Size, Males, 1.54 0.25.4.2 * 0.13 mm (7). Male genitalia. (ig. JO). Parameres angled outwards [tom basal piece to widest par atter middle, rounded and tapered to apex, Median Inhe pointed and sharp, acutely angled away ar sides. Apophysis of basal piece medium width. Aedacgus of 8. delecrabilis Hope (Fig. 3R) longer. Parameres parallel-sided at basal piece, angled outwards before middle, rounded at widest part after middle arid 24 5, BARKER lapered ta apices, Median lobe pointed, acutely angled away at sides. Apophysis of basal piece wide and elongate. Distribution, W.A.. Great Southerr district, Remarks. Member af the & de/ectahilin (Fig. 7B) species group. Smallest species in the group and the only one occurring in W.A, Named after Dr P- Dessart, RMBB, Stigzmodera (Castiarina) pulla sp, nov, FIGS 35, 7H Holotype, o, Wawarra Coastal Range, 23.x1).1952, C! Deuryuet, QMBA. Allatype, 9, Miwarra Coastal Range, LS.xi).1948, C Deuguel, SAMA I 21172. Paratypes. SSW 2 oo, Waterlall, Schroeder, ASSA; I oo, Mawarra, 16.xi1,1950, C Deuquet, SAMA; | O, Mt Keira, 15.41.1957, 4 Balderson, SAMA: 14 oo, 6 99, Wawarra, C. Deuguet, RMBR: | @, Jamberoo, 30.x01,1954, C Deuquet, RMAB,; 1 &. St Albans, Nov., C Deuquet, RMBB, Colour Head, antennae, scutellum and under- surface green. Proriotum bronze in middle, green at sides. Elyzra yellaw wilh following variable black markings: narrow basal margin; broad pre-mechal fascia reaching margin; broad post-medial fascia reaching margin; spade-shaped mark covering pre apex and apical areas, ends of the fascia all coalesce along margin; elongate red mark on margin al humeral callus and apex; basal yellow wark and medial yellow mark and yellow pre-apical Fascia may be variably obscured by black, Legs: femora and tibia: dorsal surface blue-green, ventral surface green; tarsomeres green. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture, Head shallowly punctured, glabrous, broad median suleus, short muzzle, Anlennae: segments 1-3 obconic; 4-1) toothed. Pronotwm shallowly punctured, glabrous, basal fovea, basal notvhes on cach side closer to margin than middle; apical margin straight, basal margin bisinuale; laterally parallel-sided at base, raunded before middle and parrowed (to apex, Seutellurn scutiform, few punctures, glabrous, excavate, Flytra nunvtate-striae, intervals convex, lightly punctured, lateral margin wurned outwards; laterally angled out from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle and narrowed to bispinose Apex; both spines broad and sharp, margin rounded betWeen spins, apices hardly diverging, Under- Surface with shallow punctures, sparsely covered with medium leneth hair; mesosternal pravess slivhtly inflated, Sp: truneate in both sexes- Size. Males, 1540200061007 mn Females, 13.9 40.27» 5.64 O85 men (9), (19) Male geniralia. (Fig. 38). Aedacgus shorter than in S, deleciabilis Hope. Parameres parallel-sided at basal piece, angled outwards before middle, rounded at widest part after middle, tapered to apices. Median lobe broader than in S, delectabilis, pointed, abtusely angled away at sides, Apophiysis of basal piece medium width and narrowed towards apex, Distribution. N.SW. Northern, east of Dividing Range Remarks. Member of the 8. delectuhilis Hope group on basis of male genitalia and external morpholoyy. Member of the 5. producra Saunders mimicry group on the basis of colour and pattern. Only species belonging to both groups. The specific name is derived from pullus L, dark coloured. Stigmodera (Casliarina) Jukini sp. nov. FIGS 37, 7K labile fucolica (Barker, LOB; 2) aeo Kereemans ROH Holeatype. &, 2b km W Port Lincaln, 8. Aust. 16,.x1.1974. 8. Barker, SAMA | 21173, Allotvpe. 9, same data as holotype, SAMA J 21174. Paratvpes, §, Aust: 5 ora, 3 9 9, sanre data as holotype, SAMA; 10,2 99, SAMA; | @, Port Lincoln, xi-I872, SAMA; 1 9, Por Lincoln, Oct.1909, SAMA; LQ, Saunders coll., BMNH; | >, Port Lincoln, Blackhura, BMNH. Colour, Head, antennae, seutellum green or blue- Hreen, Pronotum green, bronze or purple-branve in centre, green With yellow reflections at the sidew Elytra orange with following dark blue-green markings: narrow basal margin; pre-medial Fascrt, not reaching margin, projecting anteriorly from end of anterior margin; post-medial Fasiia reaching margin projecting anteriorly in middle of each elytron and al suture, projecting posteriorly on suture; pre-apical spade-shaped mark covering aper and spines, last twa connected down suture Undersurface and legs green with yellow reflections, Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture, Head closely punctured, shallow median sulcus, muzzle very short. Antennae compressed: sepmenis 1-3 obconicy 4-11 toothed. Pronoun clasely punctured, very small basal fovea extending forwards to middle as glabrous lime, projevting forwards in middle of apical margin, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally rounded from base, widest before middle, rounded and narrowed to apex, Sevitellunmy seutiform with few punclires, slighuly concave, Elytra pumetate-siriite, intervals fal in middle, conves at apex and sides, punctured; laterally anvled oul from base, rounded TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) pa) at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle 1 bispinose apex; marginal spines small, sutural ininute, margin rounded and indented between spines, apices slightly diverging, apical margin sub- sermite, Undersurface with shallow punctures, sparse long hair. Sy: turned under and faintly bilobed in both sexes. Size. Males, 13.8 + 0.214.5.1 + 0.09 mm (7). Females, 13.7+6,25 «5.4 +012 mm (10), Mole ventialia. (Fig. 3T). Parameres angled slightly outwards from base, rounded and widened before middle, parallel-sided alter middle, rounded abruptly to apex. Median Jobe pointed, sides angled away. Apophysis of basal piece narrowed in middle, but rounded to medium width at apex. Parameres in S. rrifasciata’C & G (Pig. 3U) are parallel-sided from basal piece then slightly angled cutwards, rounded outwards before nuddle to widest part aller middle, tapered inwards then abruptly rounded and angled inwarde at apex. Median lobe bluntly pointed, sices arigled away. Apopliysis of basal piece medium width, Distribition, 3. Aust; Southern Eyre Peninsula. Remarks, The specimens collected in 1974 were taken on flowers of Boeekeo sp Belongs in the S, irifusciata species group, Colour, body shape-and male genitalia of S. buenlica (Barker, 1983, figs, 3A, 6F) are quite distiner fram these of S. /wkind Named after Mr Dean Lukin, Olympian, Port Lincoln. Stigmodera (Castiarina) caalsi sp. nov. FIGS 3V. 7L Holotype. o, Burracoppin, WiA., 10.%.1936, AL Ee Brown, RMBB. Purutypes, W.A. 2 oo, same data as holotype, RMBB & SAMA, Colour. Head black with blue reflections, Antennae: segments 1-2 blue-green; 2-1 bronze-ereen. Pronolum black in middle, dark blue at sides. Scuorellum black with wreea reflections, Under- surlace prey-blue, Legs: femora and tibla blue; Tarsomeres blue-green, Elytta orange brown with the following markings with blue releetions: nartow basal margin; broad pre-medial fascia, not Teaching margin, projecting anteriorly and posteriorly af ends; broad past-medial fascia reaching margin, projecting anteriorly in middle of anterior marein and posteriorly in middle of POSletior margin; marx cayering apex, the lascia and the apical mark connected down suture Hairs silver, Shape and sculpture, Head closely punctured, median sulcus, very shor! music. Antennae: compressed, sxzements 1-3 obconics 4-1) toorhed. Pronotum closely punctured, minute basal fovea extending forwards to apical margin as impressed line, basal notches represented by glabrous area on each side closer to margia than middle; apical margin projecting in middle, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally rounded from base to widest part before middle, rounded and narrowed to apex, Scutellum sculiform, glabrous, excavate. Elytra punctate-striate, intervals convex, punctured and wrinkled; laterally angled out from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded aller middle, tapered lo Spineless apex; margin indented and straight in spinal area; apices hardly diverging. Undersurface with shallow punctures, edges of abdominal segments glabrous, moderately hairy, hairs medium length. $4; truncale in male; female unknown. Size. Males, 14.1.¢5.4 mm (3). Male genitalia. (Pig, 3V), Parameres slightly angled outwards [rom basal piece, rounded before middle, parallel-sided, slightly rounded. outwards to widest Part, abruptly rounded and narrowed to apices. Median lobe pointed and sharp, sides obtusely angled away, Apophysis of basal piece medium width, Parameres in S. brown’ Carter (Fig. 3W) slightly angled outwards from basal pieve to widest part after middle, rounded and narfawed to apices. Median lobe pointed and sharp, sides obtusely angled away, Apophvysis of basal piece broad. Distribution, WA. Burracoppin. Rernarks. Member of 5. (rifasciata C & Gi species group on basis of external morphology and male genitalia, Closest to S. brown’ Carter but tbat species has a bispinose apex. The elytral markings differ from all koown species. Named after Mansieur Jacques Coolk, RMBB. Stigmadera (Castiarina) viridolinea sp. nov FIGS IT, SE Stiemodera gutiar var. minor Carter 1929 (nomen nudund), Holotype. =, Inglewood, Vic, 22,xi),1923, Oke, NMVA. Allolype, 2, same dura as bolorype, NMVA. Parawypes. Vici 2 9 9 same data us holotype, NMVA; Il oo, 4 9 9, Inglewood, 30.x1, 1915, NMVA; 2 oc, | &, Inplewood. 14.si/.1916, NMVA? 23 coo, 14 O99, Inglewood, Dee s9ts 41916, 2 E Divon, NMVA; 3 aor, 2 @&, Inglewood, tan IIL 197, 2 E Diver, NMVA, 2 cr, Inglewood, 13.11.1920, 4 & Divor, NMVAL lL oF, 3 9 9, Inglewood, 27. xi1,1923, © Oke, NMVA;7 creer, § GY, Inglewood, 27.x7.1945, E, Smith, NMVA; 2 oo, 3 29, Inglewood, 26 S. BARKER NMVA; 4 oo, 7 99, Sea Lake, Nov.1916, Goudie, NMVA, SAMA; | 9, Sea Lake, NMVA; 2o00,2 9 9, Lake Hattah, J. FE. Dixon, NMVA; 200,29 9, Lake Hattah, 4 & 18.x.1953, J. Plant, NMVA; 1 ©, Birchip, 1903, NMVA; 1 9, Mallee, NMVA; 1 o, Ouyen, Dec.1912, NMVA; 2 oo, 3 9° 9, NMVA. S. Aust.: 1 9, Lyndoch, 31.xii.1885, Dr L. Kidder, SAMA; 1 9, Reed Beds, 12.i1.1911, S.A, White, SAMA; 1 0°, Gawler, 9.i.1913, SAMA; 1 9, Ardrossan, J G. O. Tepper, SAMA; 1 9, Lyndoch, Blackburn, SAMA; 1 9, Yorke Valley, Blackburn, SAMA, | o&, Wirrabarra, Nov., C. H. Curnow, SAMA; | o&, Alligator Gorge, 8.viii.1972, S. Barker, SAMA; 1 @&, Sellicks Scrub, 4.xi.1978, S. Barker, SAMA; 1 @, Halycon Scrub, Black Hill, 2.xii.1984, J & D. Gardner, §. Barker, JGAA;1 0, SAMA, Aust.: 4 oo, 5 99, SAMA. Colour, Head, antennae, pronotum, scutellum, sternum and legs green with yellow reflections or all coppery. Abdomen testaceous in both sexes with green or coppery reflections. Elytra yellow with following dark green markings: anterior margin; mark down suture covering apices in some but not in others; with or without a post medial spot on each elytron in 7th and 8th interval from suture. Hairs silver. Shape and structure. Head with close shallow punctures, broad median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae: segments I-3 obconic; 4-11 toothed. Pronotum closely punctured, small basal fovea in female, in male extending forwards to apical margin as glabrous line, basal notches well marked in male surrounded by glabrous area, obscure in female; projecting forwards in middle of apical margin, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally angled outwards at base, rounded and bulbous before middle, rounded and narrowed to apex. Scutellum scutiform, few punctures, flat. Elytra punctate- striate, intervals convex, more so at margin and apex than middle, lightly punctured in middle, heavily punctured at sides; laterally parallel-sided at base, slightly angled outwards then rounded at humeral callus, concave then rounded after middle and narrowed to bispinose apex; both spines minute, margin angled and indented between. Undersurface shallowly punctured, edges of abdominal segments glabrous, moderately hairy, hairs short. S7: narrowly truncate in male; rounded and slightly pointed in female. Size. Males, 13.7+0.09x5.2+0.04 mm (72), Females, 14.8 + 0.17x5.7 +. 0.06 mm (62). Male genitalia. (Fig. 1T). Parameres parallel-sided from basal piece, rounded outwards before middle to widest part after middle, slightly angled inwards, rounded off to narrow apices. Median lobe pointed and sharp, sides obtusely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece short and medium width. Parameres in S. subtincta Carter (Fig. 1U) parallel-sided from basal piece, slightly angled inwards, rounded before middle, angled outwards to widest part after middle, rounded to apices. Median lobe sharp and pointed, sides obtusely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece medium width. Distribution. Vic.: Mallee district. S. Aust.: Adelaide Plains, Yorke Peninsula, Southern Flinders Ranges, Murray mallee. Remarks. Member of S. straminea Saunders species group on basis of testaceous abdomen and structure of male genitalia. Closest in appearance to S. subtincta but females of that species have all green abdomens and males mostly green with the terminal segments only testaceous. In S. viridolinea both sexes have testaceous abdomens and a green line down the suture. Specific name is derived from virido L. green, linea L. line. Stigmodera (Castiarina) burnsi sp. nov. FIGS IW, 5F Holotype. &, Big Desert, Vic., 6.xi.1978, G. Burns, NMVA, Allotype. 9, Sea Lake, Vic., Goudie, SAMA I 21175. Paratypes. Vic: 3 oo, 3 99, Mallee, Deuquet collection, RMBB; 4 9 9, Sea Lake, Nov.1916, Goudie, NMVA & SAMA; 4 oo, Mallee, 7 Dixon, NMVA; 5 oo, 2 9 9, Hattah, Oct.1915, 19, 21.x.1916, NMVA; 1 9, Ultima, Nov.1917, Goudie, SAMA; 1 9, Gypsum, Nov.1924, C. Oke, NMVA; 4 co", 1 9, Hattah, 4, 25.x.1953, J Plant, NMVA; 2 oo’, Hattah, Sep.1940, F E. Wilson, NMVA; 1 9, Mallee, SAMA. S. Aust.: I 9, Hayleon Scrub, Black Hill, 2.xii.1984, 2 & D. Gardner, 8S. Barker, JGAA; 1 o, 1 9, Deuquet collection, RMBB; 2 co 0, 1 9, Sharp collection; BMNH; | o, 1 9, Gawler, Pascoe collection, BMNH; 1 9, Murray Bridge, 10,Dec., Griffith collection, SAMA; 1 co, Adelaide, RMBB. Aust.: 3 aoc, | 9, Rosenberg & Weyers collections, RMBB. Colour. Head bright green. Antennae: segments J-2 green; 3-11 gold and green. Pronotum bright green with or without gold reflections. Scutellum bright green with gold reflections. Elytra yellow with following blue markings: narrow basal margin; short vitta on each humeral callus; narrow post- medial fascia, convex anteriorly, concave posteriorly, not reaching margin; spade-shaped pre- apical mark often reduced and projecting down suture to cover apex, all marks connected along suture. Undersurface: sternum and base of TAXONOMY OF STIGMODER A (CASTIARINA) 7 ahdomen green; dpical abdominal segments lestaceors, Legs ereen, Hairs silver, Shape and seulpture. Head glosely punctured, braad median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae: segments 1 obconic: 4-1) toothed, Pronotum closely punetured, very small basal fovea, small basal notches closer to margin than middle; apical margin projecting in middle, basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally parallel-sided at base then rounded to wides! part before middle, rounded and tapered to apes, Seutellum seutiform, glabrous, flat Elytra punclale-sirale, ireryals convex and wrinkled, laterally angled out from base, rounded al humeral callus, cOnvave, rounded alter middle, tapered to hbispindse apex; both spines small and blunt, mangin rounded and indented between spines, apices diverging. Undersurface with shallow punciures, edges of abdoininal segments glabrous, moderately hairy, hairs short. Sz: truncate in male; rounded in female. Size. Males, 14,9+0.23«5.74+0,08 mm (27). Females, 15,7 £0.27 6,0 10.10 mm (20), Male genitalia. (Fig. \W). Parameres slightly angled outwards from basal piece, rounded before middle lO widest part after middle, angled inwards and rounded to apives. Median lobe pointed, sides obtusely angled away. Apophysis of basal piece medium width, Distribufion, Vie. Mallee, Big and Little Deserts. 5, Aust.: Gawler, Murray mallee, Remarks. Member of the §. strantinea Saunders species group on basis of external morphology, testaceous abdomen alid stricture of male genitalia, The elytral markings are distinyt from other members of the group. Named aticr Mr G. Burns, Mornington, Victoria, Stigmodera (Castiarina) discolorata sp. nav. FIGS 38, 70 Holotype. it, Boxwood Hill, SE Ongecup, W.A., G/T AOKO, KL ke EL Carnaby. WAMA- Jilloivpe. 9, Haruitversly River crossing, 24.47, 1979, Th Houston, A. Chapnan, WAMA. Paratypes. W.A.: | ot, | O, Warren River, 10 kim SE Pemberton, 1711971, G 4. AHellawoy, Hughes, AMSA; 1%, same data as holotype, SAMA! 1 ©, 64 km NE Esperance, 18,4, 1982, 8. Burker, B Kempster W vanderwoude, SAMA, | 2, 55 km W Ravensthorpe, [5,4),1980, 7 AW, S, Hanlon, MPWA Colow. Head, antennae, scurelluim, uiidersul face and les blue, Pronolum dark blue in middle, blue wl sides. Elytra red with follawine dark blue tarkings: narrow basal margin; pre-medial fascia extending anteriorly and posteriorly ar ends, poslerior projection sometimes reaching margin; posi-medial fascia reaching margin, mark covering whole apex, all marks connected down suture. Hairs silver. Shape and sculpture. Head closely puncrured, median suleus, short muzzle, Antennae: sezmerrs 1-4 obconic: §-1) toothed, Pronotum closely punctured, basal fovea extending forwards to near apical margin as glabrous line; apieal margin broadly projecting in middle, basal margin hisinuate; laterally parallel-sided af base, rounded to widest part before middle, rounded anc narrowed to apex, Scutellum scuriform, few punctures, flac. Elvira punctate-striate, intervals conves, punctured; Juterally angled out from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded after middle atid narrowed to bispinase apex: small marginal spine, very small sharp sutural spine, margin rounded and iridented between spines, apices hardly diverging. Under- surface shallow punctures, edges of abdominal segments glabrous, moderately hairy, hairs short, 57: male |runcate; female indented i middle, Size, Males, 9.63.3 mm (2). Females, 8.9« 3.2mm (5) Male genitulia, (Fig. 3X). Parameres slightly angled ounvards from basal piece, rounded aut before middle ta widest part, faintly notched, parallel-sided uritil counded and narrowed to apices. Median lobe pointed and sharp, sides angled away. Apophysis of basal piece broad. Parameres in 5S, crherifata (Kirby) (Tig. 3¥) parallel-sided from basal pieve, rounded outwards before middle, distinctly notched at widest part after middle angled slightly ourwarcls, rounded abruptly af apices, Median lobe pointed but blunt, sides angled away then rounded. Apuphysis of basal piece broad. Distribution, This species helongs m the S. erueniata Speaes group on the basis of structure of mate venitalia and external morphology. It van be separated trom other species in the group by the bicolorous pronatum and red elytra, The specific name is derived from disco/or |. variegated, The following species are placed hy me in the sub- senus Stgmddera (Castiarina) together with the indicated synonyms. Genus STIGMODERA Esclhschaltz 1829 Sub-eenus CAST/ARIM4A Castelnal & Gary 1837 ubdaoinalis Saunders $868, 1 dim Sac, 9. 407 SA, V, O, SSW, acneitata Rerremans (B98, dyin Sav ent Bele. 42, 142 fo] O NSW. a8 8. BARKER acute Deuquet 1956, Proc, Linn. Soc. NSE 81, 154 [ol acuriceps Saunders (869, Inseet. Saund. 3, 19 WA. vdewahni Obenberwer 1928, Arch. Naturgesch. 1926, 92, 330 deiiieniiis Carer 916, Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 40, 133 Jo] 0. adorns, Deuquet $957, Prov Lind, Soc NSM, 82, ‘ee 4, 212 i SA, V 9,472 SA, V, NSW. Jgudabilis Kerrematis 1B98, Annis Soc. Fits Belg. "2, 14 avraticollie Carter (930, Proc. Lint. Soe NSW. 55, 182 adelailae Hope \846, Trans, ent. Sac, Lene, aeneicornis Saunders 1868, 4 Linn Soe [Ww] WA, afabilis Werremans (898, annls Sov, ent, Bele 42, 14} [q] oO Shipley Rerremuns (902 Gerera Insect. 12, 210 dlexwnery Carter 1916, Trans. R. Soo, & Ausr 40, 119 lil WA, alternecosta Thomson 1879, Tip, Bupr, App. la, 35 NSW, alacris Kerremans )840), Bull, Suc. ent. Bele. 1890, 47 disfeot Kerremans 1890, Bull. Soe. ent Bele. (890, 48 arenepean Kerrernans 1892, Wén, Soe, revit. Bele. , 143 quadeenorasa Blackburn 1892, Trans, R, Soc, & Aust 15, 49 libers Kerrenuins }902, Genera Inseet, 52. 209 alernozona Thomson (878, Ty Rupr. 34 [el SA amabilis C & G 1837, Man. Bupr 2, 19 WA. amplipennts Sayoders 1865, a Linn, " Suc, 9, 480 {d] SA, V¥, NSW. Q, amplicollis Carter 1931, Aust. Zoe! 6, LOT analis Saunders 1869. Insect, Sunn. 3, 7 niurpinicervex Theanson 1879, Tv Bupr App. la, 3 antharalix © & G 1837, Moa. Bupie 2, 26 WA, wrvor/fera Blackburn 1892, Trans R, Sow. 8. Aust, 15, Sl agresiis Kerremats 1B98, Annis Suc. ent. Belg, 42, 140) tantilla Ooenherger 1922, Arch. Naturgeseh, 1922, 88, iin andersuni C & © 1837, Mon. Bupr 2, 28 V, NSW, Q. veray Rerpemans 1898, Annis Soe. ent Bele, 42. 146 dieay Cibenbemer 1922, Arch. Natirweseh. 1922, 88, 119 agulla Barker L980, Trans, R, Suc. S. Aust, 104, § fal, WA onnillacen Curter (916, Trans. R. Soc. S Aust. 40, 126 fs] SA, ¥ oviel Cartes 1990, Proc. Linn Soc. NSW §5, $33 NSW armara thomsen 874 Tye Bupr App la, al NSW thea Caner (924, Proe, Linn. Sac, NSW, 49, 594 areistrome! Barker 1983, Trans. R, Sac. S. aust, 7, 152 ul SA, NSW, NT, @, wtherivnetsls Barker SRE, Trans R. Soe. 8. Aust. ue 1 (l crebetns Sauriders (859, Jrsect, Sewnd, 3, 22 [ul sh africatlis powlerensis Obenberger 1934, oon tsh Spal. en VW, 106 africolis moira Obenberger (933, Cas Msi. Spal, ent 30, 106 preacperuind Kerremans TR90, Bull, Seu ent, Adele R90, 47 (aq) Aust. airaRarted Waterhouse 1874, Trees, Ro ent. Sac, Larre. 1874. S42 O. uffenvala Carlier ISI, Trams, Ri Saco 8S. ctst, 40, 132 vy, audax Saunders (869, Jnserr, Sawed 4, 4 (k} WA, aurantiace Carter (931, lust. Zool 6, 346 WA, SA, Vv, aurea Barker 1980, Trans. R. Soc, 8 Aust 104. 6 My eureola Caner 1913, Proc. Linn, Sac, N.S.W. 37, 499 W.A. dustralasiae C & G A837, Mon, Bupr 2, 32° SA, V,'T, NSW, 0. assimilis Hope 1846, Tranny, ent, Soo, Lond, 4, 212 melbournensis Thamsan (879, Ty Buy App. Va, 44 ae Kerrenians [B98_ Aanis Soc. ent. Bele, 42, 147 hakevi "Burker 1979, Trans. R. Soe, S. Aust, 103, 5 [wl] WA fulieaia Saunders (869, Janseer, Suund, 3, 16 SSW, Q. postica Thomson 1879, Type Bupr. App. la, 37 balthasar/ Ohenberger 1928, Arch. Naturgeseh. 1926, 92, 30 WA bazilisea Obenberger 1923, Cay ts, Spol. ent, 30, Ws truncala Carter 1936, Proo, Linn. Sac N.S 61, 100 bella Saunders 1871, Car. Bupr, Syn. Syst., 7] Vv, NSW, Q. cruentata C & Ci WW37, Man, Bupr, 2, 29 hella dixon Carter 1926, Prov. Linn. Soe, N,S.M2 5), 57 bicdlar © & G 1837, Mon. Rupr 2, 39 [al SA. aliceae Barker (980, Trans, Ro Sow S. Aust, 104, 6 tsyn. hgfasciara (Hope) 183), Gray's Zoologica of iscelinny 1, 25 NSW, Q. bicincta (Boisdival) 1835, Voyage de Vastctene 89 bicingulata C & G 1837, ‘Mon. Bupr, 2. 30 dejeani Gory 1841, Mon, Bupr 4, err add, breinera Gary 1841, Mon, Bupr. 4, 131 tmspinosa Kerremans 1890, Bull. Soc env. Bele, 1890, 43 bicincta hina Obenberger 1922, Archiv. Naturg, 1922 Ws Sou itete Macleay 1863, Trans. ent Sac. NSM. 1, 24 himueulata Saunders 1868, 1 Linn. Soe. 9, 4¥1 WA, Q. Ainorata Saunders 1871, Cal. Bupr, Syn, Syst | e 3 id W, Q bimaculata Saunders 1869, Insect. Saune. . ; blackdawnensis Barker 1986, Trans. Ro See. 8. Aust, 110, 20 [i 0 eee Barker [983, Trams. R, Soc, S. Ausr. 07. 156 w W, booanvia Carter 1933. Proc. Linn. Soc. NSW 38, 162 WA boeyanta Carter 1933, Proce. Linn. Suc, NSM, S8, 162 (lnadvert. error) Barker & Edward (963, Hess, usr. Nav. 4, 170 borealis Barker 1979, Trans. Ro Sex. S Ausl, 103, (3 New Guinea. bremei (Hope) 1845, Trarts. ent. Suc. Lond. 4, 102 VY, NSW, brooks) Barker 1979, Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 103, 1 Q. broormensis Carter 1994, Proc, Linn, Soc, NSW 39,253 if] WA brawni Carter 1916, Trams, K, Soo. §. Aust 40, 12) [w] WA Rk Soe. browatne? Barker 1986, Trans. S. Aus. itd, 16 [pl Ww hruzella Thumson 1879, Typ. Bupr App. la, at at by a araphisure Thomson 1879, Jip. Bupr App. * wniformis Kerremutis |898, Annis Soc. ent. elt. 4. las viewrly Obenberver 1922, Arch. Nufurceseh. 1922, 88, Wo bavolica Kerremans 1898, Anny Soe, ent. Belg, 42, 152 fw) WA, TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) Kalbarri Barker 1983, Trans, R. Sov, S. Aust. 107, 156 noyn. burchelli © & G 1837, Mon. Bupr 2, 33 Ir) NSW, O, hurnsi Barker 1986, Trans, R. Soe. S. Aust. 1, 26 ui) SA, callubriensis Carter 1931, dust 2Zp0l 6, 367) Vy NSW. campestris Blackburn 1X97, Trans. R Sue S Aust, 2, 31 . delela Kerremans (902, Genera Insect. 12, 208 saundersiang Obenberger 1922, Ah, Natureesch, 1922, HH, 120 capensis Barker 1956. Trams. Ro Soc. So lust 110, 16 |e} 0, carinaiad Macleay 1863, Trans. ent Soc. N.SWO |, 26 Iv] epacula Obenberger 1922, Arch. Naturvesch, 1922, 8% Jt carmined Saunders 1868, 4 Linn, Suc, 9, 474 Id] SA, Vv, NSW, Jelix Kerremans 1898, Annals Soc, ent, Belg, 42, 142 carnabyi Barker 1979, Trnas, R. Soe S. Aust. 103, 12 WA. WA, SA, V. vasielnaudi Saunders 1869, Jasecr, Sound. 3, 9 thomsaniana Masters 1886, Cai, Coleap,, 97 custe(naud? Thomsen I878, Typ. Bupr., §3 laportet Kerremans IN90, Bull Sow. ent, Belz, (R90), 42 arial nuias Obenberwer 1933. Cus esd. Spal. ent, i), 104 chinnoeki Barker 1983, Trans. R. Soc, S. Asi, LOT, 166 WA, SA cincia Blackbur 1890, Trans, Ro Sac. 8. Aust, 13, 187 {s} WA, rubrocinets Kerremans 1890, Bull. See. evr, Bele. 1890, cincla tridens Carter 1931, Aust, #eol. 6, 340 cinnamamen Macleay 1863, Trans. ent Sau NoSMY 1, 2 ul Q. clancula Ohenberser 1922, Arch. Niturseseh, 1922, 4s, (A, SA. coceindta (Hope) 1843, Trans, ent. Sac, Lend. 4, (02 WA. Q elegontuly White 1846, Discnveries in Aust, I hart Stokes, 1, S07 coeriteipes Saunders 169, Inseet, Sauna. 4, 13° NSW. coeruleipes muntana Carter 91h, Trans, RB. Soe. S. Aust 40), 106 ornens Kerremans (890, Bull Soc. enn Bel. 1890, 44 NSW. coloraia Hope 1847, Trams. ent. Suc. Lone. 4, 284 fa] SA, commista Cartet 1924, Prog, Linn, Sec. NSE ah 2 thy NSW comin Walertiouse 1874, 7rans. R. ens Sae. band 1a74 Q aaa Carter 1930, Proc Lint Soe. NSM SS, 533 convexa Canter JOS, Proe, Lina. Sac. NSA 37, 506 m4 WA. coolst Barker 1986, Trans. R, Sue. S Anse ILO, 25 [wl WA. cornishi Barker 1983, Trans. R- See. 8. Aye, In7. Ha fv] WA, SA, costalis Saunders 1869, Insect. Sauncd. 3, 4 NSW, costar Saunders R68, Linn. Sac 9, 470 NSW. costipennis Saunders (869, /aseci, Suan. 3, 17 NSW. eracenta Barker 1986, /rans. Ro Soe. 20 |u| WA crenata (Donovan) ROS, Epyome Inseets New Halland, pl. 7, tig. 3 WA, SA, VT, NSW, ()! AL otis VOL 29 amphicrou (Boisduval) 1835, Voyage de VAstrolobe, 9) yexspilota C & G 1937, Mon. Bupr 2, 35 ons row dllecta Obenberwer 1933, Cus bv Spol. ent. 70, Ws amphicrog euterpe Ohenherver 1933, Cas esl. Spal. eni, 30, 10S crocicolor C & G 1837, Mon Bupr. 2, 44 WA, Fae mad Satinders (868, Trans, R. ent. Sac. Lone. 1B6 crockerae Barker 1974, Traris, Ro Soe. S Aust, (03, 4 WA, cruenta C & G UB3I7, Mon, Aupr 2, 29 NSW, Q, cruentala (Kirby) ISIS, Trans, Linn. Sav. 12. re cl V, NSW, @ neologa Thomson 18749, Typ. Bupr App. he eH stillata Clack burh 1890, Trans. R. Suc. §. Aust. 13, 148 coerulea Kecremans (892, Mem. Soc, rn enr Bele. |, 146 coeleslis Kerremans 1890, Bull, Sav ent Belg, 1890, 48 crane Saunders 1868, Linn. Suc 9, 473° WA, SA, VW cupida Kerremans (898, Anily See. ent. Belg. 42, 138 NSW, Q eupreoflavea Saunders 1869, Jrsect, Saund, 3, i WA, SA. V. mapnetica Carter (943, Prae Linn, Sov, NSH 358, 16L cupricauda Saunders (868, £ Linn. Sac. 9,475 SA, NSW. cupricalliy Saunders 168, J) Litin. Soc. 9, 470 [x] O. evanipes Saunders 1868, J. Linn. Soc, 9, 4G WA, SA, Gyan lalaze Obenberver 1933, as és) Spal. ens, OQ, 73 cydista Rainbow 1904, Ree. Aust Mus, 5, 246 NSW, 0. Mrhechana Deuquel 1963, Pree. Linn, Sao, NSM) 88, 337 eylimdracea Saunders 1868, 2 Linge Sow 9, 476 (wh ‘SW danesi Obenberger 1933, Can dsl. Spot entam. 30, 73 WA, SAL valding! Barker 1983, /rans KR, Soo N Aust 107, 148 nyo, decemgunara Gory 184i, Mon. Bupr. 4, \a2 WA parva Saunders 1864, Jasect. Saynd 3, 26 sanerdte calor Carter 1925, Proc. Linn, Saw NSAP 31), AR decermmaculata (Kirby) IMIS, Trans. Linn Soe 12, 456 Ip] SA, V, NSW, @ inaequalis Kerremans 1902, Genera Jisece. 12, 7 heliita Obenberger 1933, eas tot Spe, abn 40, 71, decipiens (Westwood) 1837, Maz, Zool, Mat 1, 2500, capucina Thomson 1856, Rev Aduy. Zral, 8, Lie mrreurinuia Macleay W863, Trans. end: Sac. N Su 1,14 vclocostata Carter 1916, Trans..R, Sou 8 4usf a), 190 delectabilis Hope (847, Trams. ne, Sc Lond 4, 284 [I] SA, Vv NSW, delectabilis (Vareiventris (henberper 1933, Cus Usi, Spol. ent. WL 106 delectabilis earneola Ohenberger 1993, Cys esl, Spol, ent, AU, 106 deliwurila Kerterjans TOL, Genera Inseci. 12, 209 jo} Q. delia Thomason IR79, Tee. Bxpr Ape tay 43 [ol Naw, deceptor Kerremans 1902, Gervera Tiseet. 12, 20% desert’ Blackburn 1892, Trans. Ro Sor S. Aus 16, de {uJ WA, desideria Carter 19l6. Trang. Ro Swe. S, Lust au, 122 {w] WA dessarit Barker 1986. Trans Re See Ss Tse TH, 24 Wy Wa, dengue Caner (827, Pree, line Soe NATH $2, as NSW, 30 §. BARKER suiond Carter 1932, Prov, Linn. Saw NSM 357, 104 palagera Carter 1937, Trans. R, Soc. S. Aust, 61, 125 devroller Thomson 1879, Bull, Soo. ert be 9, 125 [2h VY. NSW, QO. chabauti Thery 1895, Bull ent. Soc. Fr. (B95, 328 nsyuy sueeta Carter 1913, Prog, Linn. Soe. N.S.Ae AT, Sal nsyi, dilatate Carter 1927, Pray. Linn, Soc, N.S.W 52, 226 {ul ' dilaticollis Carter 1929, Aust. Zoal. §, 294 dlunidiaia Carter (908, Proc. Lina, Soe. NSW 33, 422 V, NSW, (2 dorsalis Obonberger 1922, Arch, Nalurgesch. 1922, 86, ith leat Jascjosa Obenberger (922, Arai Nurture, 1922, el dingucnsis Barker 1983, Trans: R, Soc. S. Aust. 107, diseuplava Carter 1930, Prov, Linn, Soc. NSW'SS, ay tidirotea Carters I933,-Awer. Zook 6,243 NSW, iiseolorifa Barker 1986, Trans. Ro Soe 8. Asi, 1, 37 |) user Blackburn 1892, Travis. BR, Soe. S Aust, 2 semenovi Obenherger 1928, Aveh. Nafureesch. 1926, 92, 329 fusrincra Saunders 164, 2 Lfan. Soe. 9, 974 fl}. stevnalis Mackburn 1892, Truns, RK. Sac. 8 Aust, 19,47 baliala Kerremans 1898, Annis Soc. ent, Bely. 42, 144 deliciosa Kerremans (898, Annis Soc. ent, Bele, 42, 145 distineuenda Saunders 1869. Jnsect, Sound, 3, 4 [| WA, SA, VV. NSW, flifferens Carter 1931, Aust. Zoul b, 364 doddi Carter 1913, Proc. Linn. Se, NSW, 37, $05 9 doming Carter 1931, lus. Zool 6, 344 [w] WA. penrgiana Barker 1979, Trans. R, Soo. S. Aust, 103, 7 dryadula Caster 1930, Prac. Linn. Soe. NSW. 55, 535 New Guinea, duaringae Carter 1929, Proc. Linn. Sac. NSE 34, 68 SA, NSW, (2. hogania Carter 1930, Proc, Linn. Sav, MSW. 353, 534 ehuricu Caner 1934, Prov. Linn. Sac NSW 59, eee elderi Blackburn 1892,, Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust, 16. 36 |p] WA, SA. diverse Kerremans (900, Amals Soe. ent, Belg. 44, 317 elongata Satinders 1868, J. Linn Soc. 9, 480 WA eneabba Barker VY83, Trans. R, Suc. S$. Aus. ah [u) ; eremifo Blackburn 1890, Frans, Ro Soc, & Ausn 13, 153 WA, k| clarki Carter 1922, Proc. Lint Soe NAHE A? a9 mayn, erubescens Blackburn 191, Trans. R. Soe, 8. Aust. 25, 23 Thurs, ts, Q, trom Kerremans 1908, Dr ent. 2.6, 64 unimaculara Carter 908, Pend. Linn. Soe. NSME 33, 420 ervthramelas (Boisduval) 1835, Voyage de |'Astrolobe_ 75 VT, NSW, NT. fongula Blackbur 1892, Trans. R, Sve, S Aust, 15,54 cicerini Obenherger 1928, Arch, Nainreesch. 1926, 92, 4341 erv(hroptera (Boixduval) 1835, Voyage de |'Astrolobe, 48 v WA, V, NSW, Q. canaliculata Blackburn 1892, Trans, Ry Soc. SL Aus/, 15, 51 migrolerminiia Carver (934, Prax, Linn Sec, NSH 59, 257 enclae Barker 1983, Trans. Ro Soc. S Aust. VOT. if SA. eyrensis Barker, 1986, Trams, &. Soc, Sotuse 10,9 IK] SA. feativa Carter 1916, Trans, R, Soe, S. Aun. 40, 138 OQ. Jilfermis Blackburn LB92, Trans, Ro See. Sv Aust 15, 217 WA, protersa Obenberer 1928, Areh. Nattirgeseh. 1926, 92. 332 flava Saunders 1869, /nsect. Saund, 3, 17 WA, SA, V- flavescens Masters 1886, Car, Coleop., 86 leva Thomson 1878, Typ. Bupr, 35 flavidula Kerremané 1890, Bull. Soe. ent. Belz. (R90. 47 flava Hotulata Obenberger 1922, Archiv. Naturgesch. 1922, 115 flaviceps Carter 1914, Prow. Linn, Sac, NSM, 47, S04 WA yllgarni Obenherger 1928, Arch. Narurgesch. 1926, 92, 333 navn, Jlaviceps cupriceps Carter 193), Ausr. Zool. 6, 340 Hlavapicra (Boisduyal) 1835, Voyage de VAstrotabe, 92 \a) SA, V, T, NSW, QO, Jlavavarta Saunders 1871, Cat. Bupr. Syn. Syst, 74 flavapicia © & G 1837, Mon. Bupr. 2, 44 Aavapicia nausicaa Obenberner 1993, Cas és, Spal. ent. 30, 110 flavapicta eruta Obenberger 1933, Cas és, Spal ent. 30, 1D , flavapicta palaend Ovenberger 1933, Cas esi Spel ent. 30, VI flavupicra iris Obenberger 1933, Cus &s/. Spol. ert. 4M, LL Jlavapicia phoedusa Obenberger 1944, Cus ts. Spal, el, 30, ILL Tlavapicta antiope Obenberger 1933, Cas esl. Spo. ent. 30. W2 flavopicta callidive Obenberger 1933, Cas est Spot ent 30, 2 Havopurparee Carer 1908, Prac. Linn, Sue. N.S HE 33, 421 V, NSW, Pluvosignara Macleay 1863, Trans, dar. Soe N.S.HE 1, 30 NSW, Q. clreumflexa Obenberver 1922, Arch, Nulurgesch, 1922, KR, 121 Jlayosiznata rufosignara Carter 1931. Aust Zuol 6, 349 fluvoyiridis Carver 1927, Proc. Linn, Sov. N.SJHE $2, 227 {vl NSW- [lindersi Carter 1922, Proe. Linn. Soe NSM 47, 70 WA, SA, furresti Barker 1983, Trans. R, Soe S. dust, 17, 154 [py] WA. Jfossoria Carter 1927, Pras Linn, Soc, WN SHE 52, 226 Iv V. Srauciaria Barker 1884, Trans. R. Sec, S$. Aust, V7, 143 2. \¥ as JSulviventres Macleay 1863, Trans. ent, Soc, NSHE 1, 22 [ll Vv, NSW, ©. gutrigera Blackburn (41, Trans, R. See. S. Aust, 25, 24 muckoyana Carter 1930, Proc, Ling. Sac, NSW 55, 536 Furliva Barker 1983, Trans. R. Soe. S. Aus WT, 14g fal fuseu Barker 1986, Trams. R. Soe. 8. 4use Vi, 22 la}Q. vurrawillae Catter 1931, Aus¢ Zool. 6, 348 [mn] NSW, penrilis Kerremans 1900, Annis Soe. ent Belg. 44, 316 NSW, ©. gibbieallis Saunders 1868, J, Lian, Soc, 9, 420 [k] WA, SA, VV NSW... Jascigera Kerremans 1890, Bull, Sou wnt. Belg. (RW), 42 everting: Carter (937. Trans, R. Soe, S, Aust. 61, 125 W, woodingi Barker 1983, Trans R. Sow S. Auer 17, 154 [ce] NSW. TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) 3] gravilior Carter 1915, Proe. Linn, Sow N.S.Wo 40, My 7 pracilis Cartel 1913, Proce. Linn. Sue. N.S.W. 37, 50% #rata Saunders 1869, /nsget. Saund, 3, Ut [ni] SA, erdivis Harold 1869, Col Heft. 5, 124 fw] WA, ahseuripennis Saunders (468, J. Linn. Save. 9 475 encarta Blackbur 1890, Trans, R. Soc. 8S. Aust. 13, (58 SA. gulaticollts Blackburty 1890, Trans, R, Sow. S. Aust. 13, 157 consularis Kerremans IBYR, lands Soc ent. Belv. p. 149 buiitfera Obenberwer 1922, Arch. Naturgesch, 1922, 88, 12) lo hanloni Barker 1983, Trans. R, Soc. S. Aust. 107, 1 (tl WA. haraldi Saunders 1871, Cat. Bupr. Syn. Syst, 74 Jel Aust, wiridiventris Saunders 1869, /nveet. Sand, 4, 20 harrisont Carter 1925, Prog. Linn. Soc. N.S.WE 50, 230 to} NSW, Q, harsietiaeé Deuquet 1957, Proc, Linn, Sov, NS Wo 82, 190 haywelli Carver 16, Trans, R. Sac. 8. Aust. 40, 128 hatelevi Barker 1980, Trans. R. Sue S. dust. 104, 4 i WA, SA, V, helmsi Carter 1906, Prac. Linn, Soo, N.S.Mo 31, 259 Vo NSW. Allaris Hope 1846, Trans, ent. Sav. Lond. 4, 213 |b| V, NSW, Q ans infasciata Carter 1933, Prov, Linn. Soc, NSM . 163 hillert Barker W86, Trans. Ro Sao A. lage 110, 21 OQ. talib ter 1916, Trarts. R. Soe. S. Aus. 40,137 WA. Carter 1922, Prog. Linn. Soc, NSW 47, 70 NSW, 9. muslersi Macleay 1872. Trans, ent Sov. NSM 2, 245 haffmiansege Hope 1846. Trarty, ent. Sov. Lane. 4, 211 hoblerag € NSW, QO. fairmairer Kerremans 1898, Annis Soc, ent, Bele. 42, 140 fsyn, hostiliy Blackburn (892, Treas, A: Sou, S. Awse. Mua ‘A Aumeralis Kerremans 1902, Genera Insect. 12, 207 [k] NSW, O. tillvdrdi Carter 1913, Prag Linn, Soe NSM 37, 502 humilis Deuquet 1947, Proc. Litin. Soc, N.SM* 72, 20) NSW, O: Aypocrita Barker 1983, Trans. kK, Soe. 5. Aust 107, us R, Soe S, Aust, 13, 219 ri WA, SA, V. unica Kerremans 1898, Avinds See. ent Bele 42, 150 iva Saunders 1869, /nvect. Saund. 3, 12) V, NSW, jenew Blackburn 1892, Trans. QO. dmitater Carter 1930, Proc. Linn, Soo. NSO 55, 180 NSW, Q. Inunaculata Carter 1915, Prov, Linn, See. NSA 40, 81 WA. impressicollis Macleay 1863, Trans. ent. Sac. N.S.WE 1, 32 NSW, QO incognita Harker 1986, Trans, R. Soc, S, Ausi. 10, V1 [ke] trconsipcua Saunders tes, £ Linn, Sow 9 476 v, NSW, 0. wlecia Kerrenans (R98. Analy Soe. ene, Belg, 42, 184 svi indistincta Saunders (86%, Insect. Sgund. 3 30 \, NSW, indistincta ancharifera Obenherger (945, Cas asi. Spol. entom, 30, 76 indistincta electra Obenberyer 1993, Cas ts. Spor. entom, 30, 76 indistinera acelivis Obenberver 1933, Cas byl. Spud entom. 30, 76 indistincta extrema Obenberger 1933, Cus es), Spot, enfom 30, 76 inermis Kerremans 1890, Bull. Sac ene Bele WH), 45 W nova Kerremans 1902, Genera Insect, 12, 20% rubella Carter 1931, Aust Zool 6, 35 inflata Barker |980, Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust. (0d, 4 fal NSW insculpta Carter 1934, Prac. Linn. See. NSM $9. 255 J. bretgetolhts Blackburn 1900, frans. Ro Sov S Aussi. 24. 5 |w] WA, Hiden Blackburn 1892, Trans. R. Soe. & Aus, 15, 217 {o] Vv. NSW, cauarg Kerremans 1900, Artis Sac. ent. Bely. 44, 316 insularis Blackburn 1897, Trris. R. Sac. S. Aust. 21, Fs tr cagnala kerremans 1898, Annly Soc. ent. Belg. 42, (36 intucta Carter 1930, Proce. Linn. Sav. NSAP SS, VAL QO interstitialis Carter 13h, Ause, Zou! 6, IAs [vl ¥, jeonde Barker 1983, Trans, R, Soc, 8, Alwsr 107, 164 {2. Jekelli Saunders 1868, 2 Linn, See. 9, 467 [If SAL, NSW, Jospitola C & G 1837, Mon. Bupr 2,38 WA, SA, NSW. laceria Ghenberger 1933, Cas éy/. Spal. ent. 30, 109 Janata Blackburn 1890, Trans. R. Soe. S. Aust. 13, 50 T tusunt Obenberger 1928, 328 pratensis Carter 1934, Proc. Linn. Soe. NSW. 59, 235 Jucunda Saunders 1868, J. Linn, Soe 9% 481 NSW, Q observans Kerremans SYS, 4linls Suv, ent. Bele. 42, (39 Julia Thomson 1879, Typ, Bupr App. ls, Alig] SA. blackburni Carter 1916, Trans. R. Soe. S Aust 40, WS, Hsyn, kemipstert Barker ORG, Frans, R, Soc S. dust U0, 12 |] WA. I, Arch Naturgesch, 1926, 92, kerrémians! Blackburn 1890, Treas. R. Sec. Abuse 13, 47 SA. Vy NSW, (). apicalis Kerremans 1890, Bull. Soe. ent, Bels, 1840, 4§ Kershaw) Carter 1924, Proc. Linn, Soc, NAME 49, sae V, NS - Kershaw curtere(la Obenberger 1933, Cas Msi Spel, entamt. 30, 104 kiatae Barker 1980, Trams. Ro Soe S Ause (dd, 6 V. kirbyi (Guerin) 1830, Voyawe Coquille 63 fw] SA, V. NSW- fgéily Kerremans |898, 4nals Soe. err Bele, 42. (55 Kirbyi pans Ohenberger 1922, Archivo Naturgesch. 1922, 4M, 118 kirby pereand Obenberger 1922, Arehi. Naturpesch 1922, 88, Kluge C&G 1834, Mon, Bupr. 2, 27. [hy NSW, kluigi nixa Obenberger 1933, 7§ Cas tsi Spal ent IO fuena Thorson 1879, Tip. Rupr vipp. ta, 36 fal WA, verna Carlier 1937, Trans. R, Soe 8. dusn Ol, 1ae Kascaly Pochon 1967, danas hist, nar. Vlas. Narn hunny. 59, 244) lgevinolata Carter (S34, Prog. Linn, San NOS ML S$, 154 {d| NSW. O 32 5. BARKER latipes Carter 1924, Prov, Ling. Sov, N SWE 49, 21 NSW, 0. legi Carter 1916, Trans, R. Soe. S. Aust. 40, 136 V, 7 lepida Carter 1916, Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 40, =< a Jilipatana Thomson 1857, Areh. Enz. 1, 4 NSW, 0. master’ (Macleay) 1872, Trans, ent. Soe. NSAV. 2, 241 acularis Kerremans 1898, Annis Soe ent, Belg, 42, “155 dawsonensis Blackburn 1890, Trans, BR. Sad, 5, AUST, 13, 135 asyn, pulchella Carter 1916, Trans. R Soo 8. Aust. 40, 135 lensicollis Saunders 1869, fnseer.. Saund. 3, 21 Wh ‘A. bicolorella Obenberger 1928, Arch, Naturgesch. 1926, 92.429 prolongata Carter 1935, Proe. Linn. Soe. NS ME 60, 179 Slavocoertilea Carter 1938, Rec. Aust, Mus, 20, 234 loriae Kertemuns 1896, Annali Mus. civ. Stor net. Giacomo Doria 36, 358 New Guinea, NT, O dukint Barker 1986, Jrans. R, Soe. S. Aust 110, 2H As / lureipennis Gory iB4l, Mon. Bupr. 4, supp, 130 NSW, Q- lureipennis distizma Obenberger 1933, Cas est, Spol ent, 30, 69 /uteovincia Saunders 1868, J. Linn. Soe. 9, 478 Uj) NSW, ©. macniitlani Barker 1979, Trans, R. Sac. 3, Aust, 103, § I mucvulicollis Carter 116, Trans, Ro See S. clase. 40, 2 0, macuilifer Kerremans 1902, Genera Jnsect. 12, 208 [}} NSW, ©. maculifer uerioollis Canter 1929, Proc. Linn. Soc, NSH §3, 273 mtoculipennis Saunders [R68, 4 Linn, Suc. 9, 480 . NSW. magnificollis Barker 1979, Trans. R. Soc. 8, Aust 103, 7 Q. magnifica Blackhurn 1896, Trans, & Soe. S. Ause 20, 35 mallecana Carter 193), Aust Zool 6, 340 |p| SA, V, NSW mansuela Kerremaus (898, Annis Soc, ent. Bele, 42, 155 mareinata Barker 1983, Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust. VOT, 151 SA, V. marginicollis Saunders 1868, 4 Linn, Soc. 9, 469 w NSW. bifaseiatella Obenberger 1922, Arch. Natureewh, 1922, BRL INS media Hope 1847, Trans, enn. Soc. Lond, 4, 284 Jul SA, V. septemnotata Carlier 1916, Trans. R. Suc, 5. Aust, 40, 86 sepremmaculata Blackburn 1892. Trans. &. Soe. 8. Aust, V5, 45 mmelrosensis Backer 1986, Trans. Ro Soc S Ausr WO 14 leh metallica Barker 1979, Trotis. R. Soe. 5S. Aust 103, > WA. militaris Carter 1922, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S We 47, 71 |r| Vv, NSW mimica Barker (980, Trans, R, Soe, S Ausi. 104, 3 [vy] Q minute Blackburn 1892, Trans, R, Soc, S. Aust US. 4131 maritizena Oke 1928, Prow Linn. Soe NAME S3, 25 tei , NSW, alpestris Barker 1983, Trans, R. Sov. 3. Aust 107, 146 nayn, thoribunda Saunders 1869, Insect. Sand. 3, 18 NSW. romuadata Saunders (869, Jaseer Suupd. 3. 19 raitundata enyo Obenberger 1933, Cas ts/. Spo. entome 12, 732 mustelamajur Thomson 1857, Arch. Brit, 1, WS WA, SA, VO NSW, Q. gibbosa Macleay 1463, Trans. ent. Soc. N.S, crasina Carter 1935, Prac. Linn, Sov. N.S.W 60, 180 manula Kerremans 1890, Bull, Soc. ent. Belg, (890, 48 (b] nasula Saunders 1869, Jnsect. Saund, 3, 15 v, NSW, Jossithorax Obenberuer 1928, Arch. Nururgzesen. 1926, 97, 429 neglecta Carter 416, Trans. R. Soe, S. Anse 40, 123 NSW, 103, 4 NT, 0. nigriventris Macleay 1863, Trans, ent. Soc, N.S.HE 1, 27 nigriceps Barker (979, Trens R. Soc, S, Aust. dbliqua Kerremans )902, Genera frisect 12, 209 [oj NSW, OQ. asiridae Deuquet 1934, Prac, Linn, Soe, N.S.M4 63, 309 oblita Carter 193), Aust. Zool. 6, 347 [al NSW, Q. vbseura Saunders 1869, Tasecr Saured. 3, 26 [e) SA, Q. obscura posticedivise Obenberger 1933, Cas tsi, Spal. ent. 30, 106 obseura anticedivisa Obenberger 1933, Cas évl. Spol. ent, 30, (06 phsepia Kerremans 1890, Bull. Sac. ent, Bely. (B90, 44 [d ; vevidentulis. Barker 1979, Trans. R. Soe §. Ause W3, 9 WA, delliperd Gory 14l, Mon. Bupr 4, 133 [q] Y. ochreiventris Saunders 1869, Jnseel, Suund. 3, 8 Ll NSW, Q, evra Blackburn 1892, Trans. R- Soo. S Ausr 15, 216, nsyn. actomaculata Saunders WOR, J Linn. Sac Fig 472 [t} SA, V, NSW, Q ectasignata Carter (919. Prov, Linn. Soe. NS. Wo 44, 139 0. aclaspiolg © & GUAT, Mon. Bupr. 2, 28 [4] NSW, jemarata C & G 837, Mon, Bupr 2, 37 oclaspilata raseipes Deuquer 1947, Proe. Linn, Sac, N.S. BL, 154 ornatd Blackburn 1892, Trans. R. Sae. §. Aust. 15, 53 Vv NSW ovata Barker 1979, Trans, R, Soe. & Ause 103, 10 WA, SA, ¥. Trans. R, Soe. S. Aust, 25. 22 Thursday 1s., ©. vuripennis Barker L979, Trans, R, See. 8, Aust, 103, 2 msyn, aurifera Carter 1922, Proc. Linn, Soe, NwS.HE 47, 68 pollidipennis Blackburn 1890, Truns, R. Suc, 8S, Aust 13. 5 WA, SA, ¥ pallidiventris © & G N37, Mon, Bupr 2, 42 |p| WA, SA, ¥. rustica Kerremans 1898, 4en/s Soe. ent Bele 42, 154 parallela White 1859, Prac. Zool. Sav, Land. 27, 9 WA. SA, VO SSW, O. elonwerila Macleay 1872, Trans. ent. Sov, N.S.WE 2. 246 parallelipencis Obenberger 19394, Coleap. Car. 12, 725 |W] WA, SA, V¥, NSW perallela Saunders 1869, Insee). Saund. 3, 16 parvula Deuquet 1956, Pree Linn. Sac, NSH RI, 155 (b] NSW, O. pearsoni Barker ORG. Trans, Ro See S Ause VO, V7 [A Q pallas Blackburn 10, TAXONOMY OF SHIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) 3 perlonga Carter 1931, dust Zeol, 6, 343 fw] SA, V, NSW, pertyi © & G 1837, Mon, Bupr 2. 23 NSW, @ minus Saunders (868, . Lina. See: 9, 479 phaeorhavea (Kirby) URIS, Troms. Linn. See 12, 456 WA, Q. picta C&G 18397, Mon, Super 2, 46 [pl WA. purpurea Hope 1846, Trans. ent. Soe, Lund 4.24 laetabilty Kerremans 1898, Annis Sac. ent. Bele. 42, 153 pictipennis Saunders 186%, J Link, Soe Y 471 WA piliventris Saunders (868, J Linn Sav, 9, 474 Jv] SA, Vv. NSW, generosy Kerremans 189%. Anais Soe. ent Bela. 42, 150 placens Kerremans 1898, Annals Soe. ev. Belg. 42, 143 |j] NSW. placida Thomson 1879, Typ. Bupr App. ta, 13 Ly) W. pPlanata Carter W916, Trans, B, Soe. 8. Aust, 40, = W, auricallts Thanisey W877, 4reh Ent |, V4 planipes Barker 1979, Trans. R, See. 5. Ausi. (03, 3 NSW, 0, powelll Barker 1983, Trans. R. Soe. S. Aust. LOT, 148 fal WA, SA. proetermissa Carter 1921, Proc, Linn, Sac, NSW. 46, 306 Vv, NSW, ©. producia Saunders (868, 4 Linn, Sov. 9, 482 [of NSW, O). acutipennis Thomsan 1879, Typ, @upr App. ta, 33 suicleoiis Kerremans 1902, Genera [seep 12, 209 producla pulymele Obenberger 1933, Guy est Spo, cnt W, U2 propinqua Carter 16, Trans. Ro Soe, 5. Aust. 40, 124 [aw] SA propingua cartériand Gbenherse, 1933, Cus bt Spot, ent 30, 109 pseudasilida Barker 1983, Trans, R, Soc. S Anes. 107, 16 [0] NSW, 0. puella Saunders 1869, dasect, Suvnel 3, 15 fe} Oo. auralintbata Carter V22, Brac Lin. Soe. NSM AT, 68 fisyn. puerilis Kerremans 1898, Analy Soc. enti, Belg. 42, 147 Te] NSW, © pulehra Saunders 1869, Inseet Suurie, +, 22 WA. pulehripes Blackburn (R97, Trans Ro Soe. 8, Aust. 21, 41 VO NSW pulla Barker W986, Trans, R, Soc S Ase V1, 24 i, of NSW, punctalissima Saunders 1R69 Mnseer Suuned 3, 14 NSW punctatosuleata Saunders WAY, Tisece Sauad, 3, 24 [dj v, NSW, Q. lifigiasa Kerremans 1890, Bull. Sac en), Bele. (890, 45 punctiveniris Saunders 169, daseer Sauna. 3, 17 WA, f pisciforris Carter Wh, Trans, R, Sac 8. Aust 40, 125 putenlata Carter 1999, Peo Linn, Sov. NOSE 64, 300 mf WA. SA. quadrifasciata Swunders 1869, J. Lan, Sac, 9, 477 WA. SA, NT quadriyutiata Macleay 1863, Trtis. ent Sue NSE 1, 28 t), sentellaris Kerremans 1900, Arnis See. ent. Bele. aa 316 quadriplagiata Carter 1930, Peace flan, Soe NSW SS, 453 quinquepuncala Waterhouse [RT4, Troan, Ro emt Soc, Lund. (874, S54] , radigns Carter, 1933, Brac, Linn, Soe. NSE 58, 160 WA recrd Saunders 1869, drseer Sune 3. 24 fu) WAL SA, Vv reclifasciala Saunders WOR, J Linn Suc, 9, 472 nsw viedluns Rerremans IR98_ 4 nals Sow ene Bele. 42, 143 richardst Barker 1979, Trans. &.. Sue. 8. Aust. 103, 7 {s] A robusta Saunders 1869, Insert, Sand, 4,0 WA, SA, conn oasniy Obenberger 1993, Cus tsi Spal, ent. 0, 75 robusta unifasctarella Obenberger 1933, Cus ésl. Spel ent, 30, TS robusta tristigmata Obenberger 1933, Cas est. Spol. ent, 3, 7S roller Kerremans $908, Di ent, Z. 6, 63 Q, hackeri Carter 1913, Proce. Linn. Soe. N.S.W. 37, 484 eagudara Carrer 190%, Proc. Land, Sac. NSE 33, als rasiralis Carter 1917, Prac, Linn. Sac, NSLHY 42, 718 WA. rostrata Thomson 1879. Ty Bupr App. ja, 36 WAL rubievnda Carter 1941, Aust. Zool 6, 346 [hy] Q. Winlaira Denguel 1956, Proc Linn. Soe NSW 81, 156 rubriventris Blackburn 1900, Trans. R, Soc. S, Aust. 24, 46 [J WA. inusitata Canter 1933, Proe. Linn, Soc, N.S.HE 58, 160 eudis Carter 1934, Proe, Linn. Sue. NSA. 59, 256 -T. rufa Barker 1986, Trens, R, Soc 8S. Aust. 0, 9 (kl WA, rufipennis (Kirby) 1808, Trans. Linn, Sac. 12, 456 WA, SA, V. tL. NSW, Q. crocipennis © & G 1837, Mon Bupr 2,21 cracipenis Hope (846, Trans. ent. Sac. Lond. 1846, 292 Winer wueiaie Ohenbemer 1993, Cas dsl Spol ert Y, 69 rufipes Macleay 1863, Trans, ent. Sov. NSW. 1, 23 QO. Stigmaticollis Gbenberger 1928, Arch. Naturgesch, 1926, 92, 334 rufotimbata Carter 196, Trans. R, Soc 3, Aust, a0, OHS! NSW, QO. souitiaria © & G 1837, Mom Bupr. 2, 3 WA. hopel Saunders. (868, 7rams. KR, ent, Soc, Lond, 1868, 39. sunuvinolenta © & G 1837, Mon Bupr 2, 45 [q] WA, scalars (Wosduval) 1835, Voyage de MAstrolobe, 89 [q] Vv, NSW, Q. evarieollis (Boisdiyal) 1835, Voyage de |'Astralobe, 9] erucigera © & G (R37, Mun, Bupr 2. 40 viridis C & G W371, Mon. Bupr 2, 46 erycizeru Hope (R38, Col Mun. 2, 162 trupsversepicta Thomson t87Y, Tip, Bupr, App ta, 35, Wo9he macleayi Blackbutl) 1892, Trans, fe Soe, 5. Ayest 15, 48 pradens Kerremuns (898, Annls Soe. enl, Belg, 42, 152 suauis Kervemans 902, Genera Insect, 12, 210 erucioiles Obeoherver 1922, Arch. Naturvesch, 1922, Ris, 118 centers acle Obenberver 1933, Cus tyl. Spal ent, 30, O8 sewlaris urehiunussa Obenberyer 1933, Cas &s/. Spol. ent 30, 108 sovmtillara Barker 1983, /rams. R. Sac, S, Aust, 107, 164 Q semiciivid C& GOIS37, Mon, Bupe 2,19 V, NSW seniilerd Carter SU. Prac, Linn. Sac. N.S.WE 7, 500 . wersuiuraliy Saunders (868, 4 Linn: Sac 9, 448 SA, NSW, V. speyose Kerremans [R98, eels Sue ent, Bele, 42, 47 seplemgaliaia Waterhouse 184, frais, ent, Soc. Lona, 174, 540 fi} NSW 44 % BARKER semensptlota Carter 1913, Prae Lian, Sac NAW 37, S03 sermalipennis Cazter 191, Trans, #. Sav, 8. Ause. 40, 127 WA- sexcuvita Deuguer 1948, Prov, Linn. Sac. NSW 63, 306 NSW, seveutata Macleay 1863, Trans. ent, Soc, NSE 1, 29 [0] NSW, eurien Obenberger 1922, Arch. Naturgesch. 1923, 88, 123 seveutiata Ayntermuttele Obenberger 1922, Arch, Nalureeseh, (922, 88, 123 sexnmtata Carer WG, Tras A, Soe, & Aust. 40, 131 WA. sexplagiata Gory |841, Mon, Bupe supp, 4, 132 [Vv] SA, V, NSW, ©. plagiala Gory W841, Mon. Bupr 4, ere add. crenata © & G 1837, Mon Bupr 2, 39 hope’ Boheman 1858. Bugenics Resa Zoologi, I él similata Bohemian 1858, Eugenics Resa Zoologi, |, 62 krepfti Macleay 1872, 7rans, eal, Soc. NSE 2, 345 variata Kerremans 1902, Gevera Insect, 12, 200 sevuatis Carter $929, Proe, Linn. Soc. NuSW. $4. 69 Q. siebaldi C & G 1837, Mon, Rupr. Z, 38 WA, signala Kerremans 1902, Geaera Insect. 12, 210 [p| WA. sunulaa © & €) 1837, Mon, Bupr. 2. 26 [r] WA, ar perplexa Hope 1846, Trans. ent. Sov, Lond. 4, ZL Ki helenae (Hope) 1846, Trans. ent. Sov, Land, 4, 215 lunuginosa (Hope) 1846, Trans, ent, Sac, Lond. 4, 215 fais Thomson 1X79, Typ. Bupr App. la. 93 Phryne Thomson 1R70, tp Bupr App la, 33 J/raterna Kerremans 1890, Aull. Soc. ent. Belg, 1880, 46 distinguenda Thomson 1897, Tha, Bupr App. la, 34 equing Blackburn [892, Trans, R. Soe S. Aust, 15, 48 revilla Obenberger 1922, Arch, Natureesvh, 1922, 88, N7 aenlangula Ohenberger 1928, Arch. Naturgeseh, 1926, 92, 333 ed ae Obenberger 1928, 4rch. Naturgesch, 1926, hurchelli dominula Obenberger 1933, Cas sl. Spol, ent, 30, 76 skuser Blackbur 1892, Tras, R. Sine, S. dvsr 15, 46 NSW, ©. Spectohilis Kerremans (91K), Annis San, eal, Bele, ty TS 0, lo] , spilota C&O 1837, Man. Bupr 2. 24 ASW. sepleminocu/ata (Mannerheim) 1837. Bull Soe. ump. nut, Mosca 8, 98 Aigo Qhenburger (922, Arc Naturgesch. 1922, 8&, 120 spilule polyeaste Obenberger 1933, Cay sl Spot, ent HW, 2 spinolue Gory 1841, Mon. Bupr 4, supp. 129 V_ NSW, ). sfetlata Barker ISRG, Trans. Ry Soo So ust. WO, 10 (k] WA, storey) Barker \983, Trans. RR. Soe. S. Aust 107, 152 [| a siraminca Macleay (863, Jrans, ent. San NSM 4, 25 [i] . uidilenda Kevremans (898, Anes Sve. ent. Bele. 42, 149 Johunnae Vhecy Wil, Mem. Soc e ent. Belg. 18, 335 strigala Macleay 1863, trans enn Sow NS ME | 27 fi subaeuticeps Barker 1979, Thats. kk. Sac S Auer weg WA, subbifasciata Saunders L684 Linn, See. 9, 279 WA, suberaa Blackburn 1800, Trans. R. Soe. S. aust. 26,41 {nj ris ‘ cumpesirig Kernemans (898, 4annls Sac, ent, Belg, 42, Way subnolate Carter 1933, Proc Linn, Sov N.G.HE SB, tr ra suhpure Blackburn 1903, Trans. R. Sue. S Aust, S 07 NSW, subrestacea Batker 1983, Trans. R. Sac, & Anh 150) WA, SA, subtineta Carter 1933, Proc. Linn. Soc. NSW. 58, 159 if WA, V swhtrifasciaia C & G i837, Men. Bupr 2, 41 tal WA, rubracineta Gehin 1855, Bull, Sac. Mist. nat, Meiz. 7, 63 rubrecincta evanthe Obenberner 1933, Cas ev. Spol. ent, 30, 107 subvielna Barkec 1983. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 107, 163 [dj] sulfurea Deuquet 1938, Proce, Linn, Suc. N.S. Woh 308 supergrata Barker 1983, Trans, R. Sac, S. Aust. 107, sabnirlenale Barker 1986, Trans. R, Soe, 5S, Aust. 10. series Kerremans 1890, Hu// Sov, ert Bele, 1890, 45 295 q tridngulose Kerremans (898, Annis Sac. eni, Bele. 42, 3,14 VY, NSW, fervaereginae Blackburn 1893, Trans. &, Soc S Ausr 17, 0. desiacea Saunders (469, /asecn Sauna. thomsani Sautiders 1808, J Linn. Sec. 9, 477 [a V, T, NSW. cordifer Kerremans 1890, Bull. Soe, ent. Belz, 1890, 44 nsyn, dulcis Blackburn. 1900, Trans, R. Sov. S. Aust. 26, 41 coloruta Kerremans 1898, Annis Soc. ent, Belg, 42, 141 sharmerae Barker 1983, Trans R, Soe. 8. Ausf, 107, 144 w WA. teris Barker L983, Trans. R. Soc. 8, Aus, V7, 143 by] Q. uacuicauda Carter L916, Trans. R. Sor 8. Aust. 40, 46 WA, filania Carter 1916, Trans. R. Soc, §. Aust, 40, 134 ©. ricalor (Kirby) 1818, Trans. Linn. Sec. 12, 435 NSW, curta Saunders 1868, J. Linn Soe. 9, 467 gpima Kerremans 1902. Genera (NE 12, 207 teifaseiuta © & G 1837, Mon. Bupr. 2 8 Iw] WA, apicalis © & G 1837, Mon. Bupr. 2 2ebhardti Obenberger 1928, Arch. Nasurgenert 1926, 92, 332 trimuculara Saunders (RAR, J Linn. Soe. %, 482 [I] Wa, Iripartita Kerremans 19), denis Soe: ent, Bele, 44, 317 Til iramose Thomson 1879, Tin Bupr App, lay 32 ri trispicults Carter 194, Awat, Zool 6, 340 ; 0: lropica Carter 1922, Prove. finn. Soe NSMOAT, 12 ), turtilenty Barker 1986, Trans. R. Soe 8. Ause (0, 22 |v] WA, turneri Barker 1983, Trans. Ro Sue. 5, Aust. 107, 166 bm] SA, MSW, ' tyra Blackburn 1903, Trans, & Soe. §. Aust 27, ang wanda Barker 1986, Trans. R. Soc. 8. Aust WO, Ud ii Vv undulaig (Wonovan) 1805, Epitone Natural tinted Hisewts New Halland pl. 7, fig, 3 , NSW, TAXONOMY Ob SLJGMODERA (CASTIARINA) 3 foporre: Boheman 1858, Eugenies Resa Zoologi, 1, 6b opacipennis Obenberget 1922, Arek. Narurgeseh, 1922, 88, 116 upton! Barker 1979, Trans. Ro Soc S. Aust. 103. 15 NT. vallis? Deuquer 1964, Prac, Linn Soe. NSA 89, 128 Q Varievara Warker 1983, Trams, KR. Soe. S. Aust. 107, 162 Vv. ACT. vuriopicla Thomsen t&76, Tip Bapr 54 Vv, NSW vegeta Hope 1847, Nuns, ent Sac. Lend. 4, 283 Ie} SA, mneruleWentrix Saunders b869, /avecr Sauna. 3, 20 vegeta Hopearia Unbennerger 1933, Cas és. Spol. ent, 30, 104 venusia Carter 19l4. Prow Ling. Soe, NSA 39, 84 suaves Carter 1913, Prac Linn, Soe. NSM 97, 507 modesta Obenbereer 1922, lech. Naturgesch 1922, 88, ¥ verdiveps Barker 1979, Truas, &. Sec, S. Aust, 103, 8 [w] WA. versivolor C&G 1837, Mon. Bupr 2, 42 sirandi (Obenberger) (920, Ent, Mitr, 1920, 165 vicina Saunders 1868, Trans. R. ent. Sac. Land. (868, 43 ld] ¥, NSW, hivineta © & 0 1837, Mon. Bupr 2, lal wivvoriensis Blackbura 1490, Trams, R. Soe. S. Aus? 13, 152 [k| V, NSW, Q: WA. sensiftiva Kerremiuns 1898, danly Sao ent. Belg, 42, 148. vinden Macleay 1463, 7rons, ern Soe, NSM 1, 23 NSW, G obliquefusciata Obenherer 1922, Areh, Natirgesch. 1922, 8&, LbS vireined Erichson 1842, Arch, Nalurgesch, 8, 135 7, viridiventris Macleay 1863, Trums enn, Sac. NSA L, 27 NT, Q. Ingutlala Macleay 1863, Trans, ent. Soo. NSW 1, 28 subeosiata Kerrernans (900, 4anis Sor, eat. Bele 44, an viridolinea Barker 1986, Trans. RK. Sov, S. Aust 10, 25 Hh viele Swunders LR6R, LF Linn. Soe 9, 478 SA, Vv vulgaris Carter 1931, Aus’, Zo0/, 6, 347 WA, walford! Barker 1974, Trans. Ko Soc §, Ausi, 103, Ul (i) wartingensis Barker RO. Trams. R. Soc. 5S. Aust. 110, 22 [v] NSW, QO, wilson’ Saunders (868, 4, Linn. Sav 9, 476 [al VT, NSW sipma Kerremans 1890, Ball Soe var Belg, 1890, 43 cnmfinis Kerromans (898, Aants Soc, ert. Bele. 42,151 seplentrionis Obenberuer (922, 4 eh. Nartrgese'h, 1922, 38, 116 yanthopilose Hope (B47, Trans. ent. Sac Land. a, 283 SA, V, NSW. splendida Gehin (855, Gull Soc. Hest ut, Metz. 7, 64 xonthosmilata subsascigera Obenberger )943, Fas tsi Spol ett 40, 70 santhuspilole dichropiera Oheatwrwer 19394, Cay esl Spol, enn 30, 70 vellowdinensis Barker 1983, Trams, & Suc, S. Aust 107, 151 |i) WA. feck) Deuquer 1959, Proce. Linn. Soe. NISMO B+, 124 {o] ; Acknowledgments I -wish to thank the following for assistance: Dr G. & Gross and Dr E. G, Malthews, Sauth Australian, Museum; Dr J, Lawrence and Mr T, Weir, Division of Entomology, C.S.1-R.0.; Dr G, B. Monteith, Queensland Museum; Dr T, F, Houston, Western Australian Museu; Dc A. Neboiss and Mr K, Walker, National Museum of Victoria; Mr G. Holloway, Australian Museum, Sydney; Miss A. Green, Tasmanian Museum & Art Gallery, Hobart; Dr G. F. Bornemissaa, C.S.1.R.0., Hobart: Miss C, M, H, von Hayek, British Museum of Natural History, London; Dr P. Dessart and M. J- Cools, Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Brussels; M. A. Descarpentries, Museum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris; Dr S. Bily, National Museun) Prague, Czechoslovakia, Dr K. Wise, Auckland Institute and Museum, Auckland; Mr kK. T. Richards, Department of Agriculture, South Perth; Mr R, | Storey and Mr T, Jacobson, Department of Primary Industry, Mareeba; Dr R. Chinnock, South Australian Herbarium, Adelaide; Mr &. E. Adains, Edungalba; Dr J. M. and Mr A. Barker, Adelaide; Mr and Mrs G, Burns, Morning- ton; Mr and Mrs K, Carnaby, Wilga; Mr M, Powell, Attadale; Mr R. P, McMillan, Cottesloe; Mr and Mrs P McQuillan, Hobart; MrG, Wilhams, Lans- downe: Mrs J. Harsletc, Amiens; Mr A.. Walford- Huggins, Mt Molloy; Mr A, Hiller, Mt Glorious; Mr J. Sedlacek, Brisbane; Mr A. Sundholm, Pen- rith: Mr R. 1, Westcott, Salem, Oregon; Miss H. Vanderwoude, Mrs J. Gardner, Me P. Kempster and Mr BD. J. Williams, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide; Ms J. Thurmer, Adelaide, for illustrations 5H, §J, 7K and Mr D, R, Goodwins, Adelaide, for the other 43 illustrations; Mr B. K- Bowen, Lhrector, Fisheries and Wildlife Depart- ment, Western Australia for a scientific permit to collect Ruprestids; The Director, National Parks atid Wildlife Servive, South Australia for permission to collect in National Parks; The Director, National Parks Service, NSW. for permission to collect in the Warrumbuneles National Park; Australian Researeh Gratis Committee, Australian Biological Resources Committee, Wildlife Conservation Fund, National Parks and Wildlife Service of South Australia, the Mark Mitchell Trust Fund and the Jan Potter Foundation for grants-in-aid of research, References BARKER, S (1979) New Species and 4d catulogue of Stiwmadéra (Castiurifia) (Coleapters: Muprestidae). Trans, Ro Soc. 8. Aust. WS, 1-27 (1980) New species and synenynts ol Sriemodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae) Tid Wa, 1-7, (1983) New synonyms and new species af 36 S. BARKER Stigmodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae). Ibid. 107, 139-169. BLACKBURN, T. (1890) Further notes on Australian coleoptera, with descriptions of new genera and species. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 13, 121-160. Carter, H. J. (1916) Revision of the genus Stigmodera, and descriptions of some new species of Buprestidae (Order Coleoptera). Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 40, 78-144. (1929) A check list of the Australian Buprestidae. Aust. Zool. 5, 265-304. (1930) New Guinea and Australian coleoptera. Notes and new species. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 55, 532-549. (1931) Notes on the genus Stigmodera (Family Buprestidae), Together with descriptions of New Species of an a Retabulation of the Subgenus Castiarina. Aust. Zool. 6, 337-367. (1940) XXXIX. Australian Buprestidae and the Junk catalogue. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, Ser. 11, No. 6, 380-389. DEUQUET, C. M. (1956) Notes on Australian Buprestidae, with descriptions of three new species and two subspecies of the genus Stigmodera, subgenus Castiarina. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 81, 153-156. Wart, J. C. (1979) Abbreviations for Entomological collections. N.Z. Zool. 6, 519-520. THE ULTRASTRUCTURE OF MALE NUPTIAL PADS IN SOME AUSTRALOPAPUAN FROGS BY MICHAEL J. TYLER & KERSTIN LUNGERSHAUSEN Summary Amongst Australopapuan hylid and leptodacytylid frogs the male nuptial pad has an elaborate surface pattern of multicellular elevations bearing intricate structures. The disposition of these structures in representatives of five genera is documented and examples are figured. The study constitutes the most extensive undertaken of nuptial pads in the Anura. THE ULTRASTRUCTURE OF MALE NUPTIAL PADS IN SOME. AUSTRALOPAPUAN FROGS by MICHARL J. TYLER & KERSTIN LUNGERSHAUSEN* Summary TYLER, M, J..& LUNGERSHALUSEN, RK. (1986) The ultrastructure of male nupnal pads in some Australopapuan frogs. Trans. R. Sae. S. Aust, 110(1), 37-41, 30 May, 1986, Amongst Ausiniopapuan hylid and leptodavtytid frogs the inate nuptial pad tas an elaborate surface pattern of mulucellitar elevations bearing intricate structures. The disposition of these structures: in representatives ol five senerst is documented and exainples are figured. ‘The study constitutes the most extensive ‘indertaken of nuptial pads in the Anura, Kev Worps: Anura, ultrastructure, nuptial pad, Australopapuan. Introduction Male froys are unique amongst vertebrates in the nature of their secondary sexual characteristics, These strictures comprise inflatable vocal sacs located beneath the floor of the buccal cavity and, in most species, pigmented nuptial pads on the first digit of the hand. The structure of vocal sacs and associated submandibular musculature has been demonstrated to be of considerable significance in delermining phylogenetic relatronships (Liu 1935; Tyler 1971, 1972; Drewes 1984). Nuptial pads enable the male to obtain a secure grasp of the female during amplexus. But even at a macroseopic level itis evident that the shape and appearance of ihe nuptial pad yaries between species. Amongst Middle American hylid frogs possessing nuptial pads Duellman (1970) observed three major structural forms: |. an enlarged and “ceneralised” nuptial excrescence; 2, a cluster af enlarged spines and 3. a single enlarged pre-pollical spine. Tyler (1968) noted that the shape and surface area of nuptial pads (that fit Duellman’s 1970 “generalised” category) varied amongst Papuan Species now referred to Litoria Tschudi. The male nuptial pad consists of a superficial, keratinous layer and a deeper layer containing large mucous cells. Hypertrophy of the mucous cells during periods preceding the breeding season is accompanied by an enlargement and elaboration of the pad (lwasawa & Asai 1959; Prakkal & Ellis 1963). Iniestectomised subadult Rang nigromeacu- fata i) bas been demonstrated that nuptial pads developed following the administration of testo- Slerone 15 pg/e body weight for 30 days (Ilwasawa & Kobayashi 1985), ‘There appear to be few studies of the ultra- structure of the surface architecture of nuptial pads. * Depariment of Zoolpgy, University of Adelaide, Box 498 CPO, Adelaide, S. Aust, SOO. Jleicheri, LL. There is. an SEM illustration of the nuptial pad in the pipid Xenopus laevis (Karabuchi & Inoue L981), whilst Zweifel (1983) has documented differences between two Papuan species of the hylid genus Nyetiniystes. As a part of a continuing interest in the phylo- geneli¢ relationships of Australian hylid and lepto- dactylid frogs we examined a diverse selection of species to document the surface architecture of nuptial pads, atid to explore the potential applica- tion of any variability as a fasonomi¢ character, Material and Methods Representatives were examined of adult males with pigmented nuptial pads of the follawing five genera and 36 species: Family Hylidae: Cuclorana australis, C. lorizipes, C. novaehollandiac, C vagitus, Liloria adelaidensis, L. ongiana, L. bicalor, lL. booradlengensis, L. caeruleu, L. chloris, L. coplandi, L. fallax, L. frevcineti, L. gracilenta, L. inermys, L, (nfrafrenata, L. latopalmata, L, lesueuri, L. meiriana, £, microbelos, L. nannotis, L. nasuta, L, nyakalensis, L. pallida, L. peroni, £, rubella, L, spencerl, L. splendida, L. tarnieri, L. woljulumensis; Family Leptadactylidae: Lechriodtes melanopyga, LimnodPnustes convextusculus, L£. ornatus, L. speneeri, Neobatrachus pictus. All of the Specimens used in this study had been killed in a 3% solution of chloral hydrate, fixed in 4% formalin and stored in 65% alcohol. Following removal from the thumb the nuptial pads were transferred (o absolute alcohol for a minimum period of 12 hr, air dried, mounted and coated with 15 nm carbon and 20 nm gold/palladium (80:20), and viewed in an ETEC scanning electron microscope. In all of the specimens selected the nuptial pad was black. 38 M. J TYLER & K. LLUNGERSHAUSEN Estimates of the frequency of the components upon each pad were obtained by counting within a transparent acetate grid (usually with a surface area equivalent to 100 ,2), placed in random positions upon photographs of the pad structure. Results In each of the species examined the surface of the nuptial pad was found to be composed of numerous, similar, multicellular structures, Interspecific variation involved the number of cells incorporated in each elevated structure, the nature of the surface, and the density of the elevations. Amongst the species examined we observed the following seven structural forms: (1) Large spines (Fig, 1)—very broad spines, each measuring approximately 200 , across the base; each terminating in a distinct papilla, Figs 1-2. Nupuat pad architecture: |, large spines in Lteria nennolis (seale bar « 100); 2, large thorns in Lechriodis melanapy ea (scale bars 10 je), (2) Luree thorns (Fig. 2)—ecurved, thorn-like structures 50 « in diameter at the base and 75 yy high, and terminating ina Sharp cone, (3) Conical elevations (Fig, 3)—conical elevations 25 j. broad at the base and 30 y high, and bearing sparse, short projections. (4) Radial processes (Fig, 4)—a series of separate, projecting processes arranged radially around a central spine. Some of the processes are slightly dilated at their extremities. Each process is approximately 20 « in length. (5) Alary processes (Fig, 5)—large, curved, wing- like projections, (6) Papillae (Fig. 6)—dense papillae borne on short processes, each of which is 20-30 4 diameter. (7) Rosettes (Fig. 7)—regularly or irregularly arranged projections covering the entire surtace of the elevation. In addition to each of these symmetrical structures we also observed in various species occasional preparations in which the structures were irregular (Fig, 8), compared with the normal symmetrical condition (Fig, 9), Systematic Account Family: Hylidae Cyelorana Steindachner All four species exhibited nuptial elevations in the fori of rosettes as depicted in Fig. 7, The density of elevations ranged from 106/mm? in C. australis to 235/mm- in C. /ongipes. Litoria Twehudi Three distinct forms of elevation are exhibited in this series. Firstly, large spines in L. nannolis (15/mm2) (Fig. 10) and L. nyakalensis (in which resolution is inadequate to calculate density). The second form is that of rosettes in L. buoroo- longensis (07/mm?), L. coplandi (218/nium*) and L. lesueuri (167/mm*), The remaining species of Litoriv examined all exhibited papillae: 1. udelaidensis (191/mm*), 4, angiana (120/mm2), L. bicolor (200/mm*), L. caerulea (92/mm?), L, chlorix (164/mm2), L. fallax (110/mm?), L. freveineri (188/mm?), L, gracifenta (225/mm2), L. latepalmata (195/mm?), L- infrafrenala (68/mm), L. inermis (280/mm?), 1. microbelos (222/mm*), L. meiriana (278/om*), b nasuta (104/mm?), 1, pallida (232/mivi’), L. perani (172/mm2), L. rubella (237/mm2), L, spencer’! (61/mm2), L. tornieri 153/mm2), Lo woljulumensis (158/mm?2) (Pig. 11). 'L itaria spéetieceri Dubois (1984) is a replacement name feir L. burrowst (Spencer) preoccupied, FROG NUPTIAL PADS i bigs 3-5. Nuptial pad architeciure: 3, conical elevations in Leehriodus fletchert (scale bare 10 py 4, radial processes in Lininadyvnastes spenceri (scale bar» 10 ja); S, alary processes in Limnodynastes ornatus (scale bar. 10 yl. Figs 6-7. Nuptial pad architecture: 6, papillae in Liforia hooroolangeasis (scale bar=l0 yy 7, rasetees in Ly nasuta (scale bar 10 y), Family: Leptodactylidae Lechriodus Boulenger The two species examined have different forms of nuptial elevations: L. fletcher comeal elevations (96/mm?) (Fig. 12) and L, melunopyea large thorns (33/mim?) (Fig. 2). Limnedvnasres Fitzinger The three species appear to passess distinet types of nuptial elevations: L. spencer? radial processes (221/mm?), 1. ornatus alary processes (212/mm?) (Pig. 13) and, although the resolution is poor, L. convexiusculus appear to exhibit papillae. Neobatrachus Peters The single spectes examined (N, picts) exhibits nuptial elevations in the form al rosettes (134/mm*), 40 M. J. TYLER & K. LUNGERSHAUSEN Figs 8-9, Nuptial pad architecture in Litoria caerulea: 8, symmetrical form (scale bar=10 y; 9, irregular structures presumed to be associated with degeneration of the nuptial pad (scale bar=10 1). Figs 10-13. Nuptial pad architecture: 10, Litoria nannotis (scale bar=100 y); ll, L. wotjulumensis (scale bar =10 p); 12, Lechriodus fletcheri. The arrow points to an individual squamous epithelial cell (scale bar=10 »); 13, Limnodynastes ornatus (scale bar=10 ,). FROG NUPTIAL PADS 4) Discussion We have demonstrated that in the species of Australopapuan hylid and leptodaetylid frogs examined the elaboration of the surface of the pad may be highly complex. We cannot exclude the possibility that some of the forms of elaboration that we have observed such as that of Limmno- dynastes ornatus and L. spenceri, represent intermediate stages in the development of other forms, but we suggest that the irregular form of the elevations upon the pad observed in some prepara- tions (e.g. Fig. 8 and Zweifel 1983, Figs 7 and 13) represent regression of the pad prior to sloughing and not the perfectly formed pads, Zweitel (1983) was the first contributor to note interspecific variation in the frequency of the elevated structures upon nuptial pads, citing counts of 700/mm? for Nyetinnystes trachydermis and N, disrupta. Our data range from 15/mm+ for Litoria nannotis to 278/mm* for L. meiriana. At the extremes of the range there is litle doubt that the differences between the figures are significant between species, but the lower end of the scale is no more than a quantification of the differences in Structure obvious to the naked eye. We experienced great difficulty in obtaining good quality images and were unable with a dissecting microscope to eliminate preparations disintegrating prior to sloughing. We did not find any features distinguishing hylid trom leptodactylid frogs, and there seems little likelihood of SEM appearance of nuptial pads providing a simple tool for studies af phylogenetic relationships in these families. Acknowledgment We are indebted to the staff of the Electron Optical Unit of the University of Adelaide for technical advice. Figures ]-7 are the work of Ruth Evans and the manuscript was (yped by Sandra Lawson. The work was undertaken with the support ofan Australian Research Grants Scheme award to M, J, Tyler and M. Davies. References Drewes, R, C. (1984) A phylovenetic analysis of the Hyperoliidae (Anura): treefrogs of Africa, Madagascar and the Seychelles Islands, Occ, Pup. Cal. Acad. Sc, 139, 1-70. Duiiow, A. (984) Miscellanea nomenclatorica batra- chologica [L.4/vres 3, 83-84. DuetiMan, W. E. (1970) The hylid frogs of Middle America. Vol. |. Monogr, Mus. Nat. Flist. Univ, Kansas, 1. Iwasawa, H. & Asai, O. (1959) Histological observations on the seasonal change of the tess and the rhumb pad in the frog, Rana nigramuculuta. 1 Fac. Sci. Niigata Univ, Ser 2, 2(6), 215-219, & KOBAYASHI (1985) Testosterone dose for the development of male sexual charaeters in young Rana nigromuaculata Trogs, Sei. Rep. Niigatu Univ. Ser. D (Biology) 22. |-6. KarABLCHI, 5, & INOUE, S. (1981) Small spiny projections in the epidermis of the mature Yenopus laevis: Annet Zool. Jap. 5403), 182-190. Liu, C. C. (1935) Types of vocal sac in the Salientia. Proce. Baston Soe. Nat. Hist. 41(3), 19-40. PARARKKAL, P. PF. & ELiis, R. A. (1963) A eyiochemical and electron microscopic study of the thumb pad in Rana pipiens. Exp, Cell Res. 32, 280-288. Tytler, M. J. (1968) Papuan hylid frogs of the genus Fiyla, Zool. Verh, 96, 1-203, (1971) The phylogenetic signilicance of vocal sac structure in bylid frogs, Univ Kansas Phi, Mus. Nat, Flist. 19(4), 319-360. (1972) Superficial mandibular musculature, vocal sacs and the phylogeny of Australo-Papuan leptodactylid frogs. Rec. S. Aust. Mis. 19), 1-20, ZWeltet, R, G. (1983) Two new hylid frogs from Papua New Guinea and a discussion of the Nyertmystes papua species group, Ammer Mus, Novir, 2759, 1-18- COLEOPTERA, SCORPIONIDA AND REPTILIA COLLECTED IN PITFALL TRAPS IN ENGELBROOK NATIONAL TRUST RESERVE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY G. H. BAKER Summary Engelbrook National Trust Reserve is an open forest of Eucalyptus obliqua and E. baxteri in the Mt Lofty Ranges, South Australia. Pitfall trapping there over a one year cycle yielded 21 species of beetles active on the soil surface. Celibe (=Saragus) simplex (Tenebrionidae) was especially common. Few predatory beetles (Carabidae, Staphylinidae) were trapped. One species of scorpion (Urodacus manicatus), five species of lizard (Lampropholis guichenoti, Leiolopisma trilineata, Lerista bougainvillii, Hemiergis decresiensis, Aprasia striolata) and one frog (Pseudophryne) were also trapped. COLEOPTERA, SCORPIONIDA AND REPTILIA COLLECTED IN PITFALL TRAPS IN ENGELBROOK NATIONAL TRUST RESERVE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA by G. H, BAKER* Summary KAKeR, G. A, (1986) Coleoptera, Senrpionida und Reprilia collected in pitfall traps in Engelbrook Nutional Trust Reserve, South Australia. Pras, Ro Soe. S. Aust, 110(1), 43-48, 30 May, 1986. Engelbrook National Trost Reserve is an oper forest of Evecalyptey obliqua and BE. baxteri in the Mi Lofty Ranges, South Australia. Pitfall rapping there over a one year cycle yielded 21 species of beerles active on the soil surface, Ce/ibe (= Surdgus) simplex (Tenebrionidae) was especially common. Few predatory heeties (Carabidae, Staphylinidae) were trapped, One species of scorpion (Uradacus municatus), live species of tigard (Lamprophols sutehenoti, Leivlopisnia trilineata, Lerista boueainvilllt, Hemiergis decresiensts, ‘prasig striotia) and one frog (Pseudophryne bitiront) were also trapped. C, simplex was most commonly trapped during summer, Cl manicatus (mostly male adults) in lite spring and early autumn, Z. fri/ineata in spring, and L, euichenort in late spring-early suramer on a North-west slope aod late summer-early auiumn on a south-west slope. Some beetles (e.g. Licinoma meridiana (lenebrianidae)), mygalomorph spiders (Araneida) and harvestmen (Phalangida) were trapped mare often on the south-west slope than on the north-west slope. L. euichenodi also was trapped more often on [hte south-west slope but the reverse was the ease for L. trilineata. Overall, arancomorph spiders Were mare commonly trapped than mygalomorphs but the latter predominated during late autunin to mid winter. Phalangida were mostly trapped in early spring. Kiy Worns: Coleoptera, Scorpionida, Reptilia, pitfall traps, slope aspeer. Introduction Open lorest dominated by messmate stringy-bark (Eucalyptus obliqua L'Herit.) is common through- out the Mt Lofty Ranges, South Australia (Boomsma & Lewis 1979). Such forest occurs in Engelbrook National Trust Reserve, Bridgewater where several biological studies have been made in recent years (Lee & Wood 1968; Wood & Lee 1971; Lee & Butler 1977; Lee & Correll 1978; Baker 1978a, b, 19794, b, 1985a, b,c; Theodorou & Bowen 1982: Hutson & Veitch 1983; Greenslade 1985; Hutson 1985), These studies mainly have concerned nutrient cycling, Ihe eflects of fire an microbjal populations and the ecology of some of the arthropods (Acari, Collembola, lsoptera, Diplopoda, Hymenoptera). Studies are curremily. being made on the effects of fire On litter fall, lider kayer mass and the numbers of soil ane litter invertebrates in general (B, Hutson & C. Kirkby, pers. comm,.). This paper extends the biological Knowledge of Engelbrook Reserve by reporting. the Coleoptera, Scarpionida and small Reptilia active on the soil surface. Some data for the Amphibia, Araneida and Phalangida also are given and the influence of aspect (the direction of the slope of the ground) on the numbers of some of these animals is investigated. The paper is a product of a study of the predators of the intro- * Division of Entomology, CSIRO, P.O, Box 2. Glen Osmond, 5, Aust. 5064. duced millipede Ommetorulus moreleti; (Lucas) (Diplopoda;: tulidae} (Baker 1985a). Stady Site and Methods Engelbrook Reserve comprises 15.4 ha of &. obliqua-E. baxteri Benth. association on hilly country at 320-380 m above sea level, 25 km south- east of Adelaide (grid reference 1774673 Barker 1:250,000 sheet $1 $4-13 Edition | Series R802), The soils are shallow, stony, acidic mottled soils formed on Proterozoic argillaceous sandstone of the Adelaide system and classified as yellow podzols (Stace ef al. 1968) and as Dy3,81 in Northcote's key (Northcote 1971), The average annual rainfall is 1050 mm (c.f. 1120 mm recorded during this stucy) Common understorey shrubs include Aanksia marginata, Acacia, Hakea, Leptospermum and Aibbertia spp. (Baker 19788). Much of the Reserve has been burnt by bushfire in recent years but the site reported here has fot been burnt tor at least 35 years, Forty pitfall traps (plastic jars 9 em diameter, 9 om deep) were set Mush with the soil surface in each of two areas, Both were on sloping ground: one faced north-west, the other south-west. The Iraps were set about 10 m apart in transects in March 1983 and were checked weekly until March 1984. Each trap was. covered by a ceramic tile (15 © 15 em) set approximately 2 em above the trap G. H, BAKER TAnte |. Nunthers of Coloeplera trapped in Engelbrook Reserve: Slope North- West South- West Month i F MAMI IA 38S ON DP Curabidae Promecoderus albaniensiy (Castelnau) Simedontus sp. Secal(ophus ausiralis (Hope) Surticus sp. —mthe— Staphylinidae Dabra sp. Aleocharinae sp. —-oS Scarahacidae Scitala sp. Heleronyx sp Liparetrus sp, Cryptodus sp. Elateridac Agrypnus sp. Conoderus. sp Ss re beatlh bond Tenebrionicdae Celibe simplex (Plupe) Celibeé costatus (Solier) Sefrotrany parallela Germar Adelium similatum Germar Livinama meridiana Carter Otrintus behri (German) Metistere sp, an Curculionidae Spl Sp.2 Total 10 102 Nae a La pee onl ca nm tw we ~~ a Whe —i— haw oe i 1 59 64 i 2 79 “ 12) 18 on three nails. These tiles prevented rain and litter from fouling the traps. Animals longer than 3 mm were collected. Smaller animals were ignored. Lizards were released near where they were trapped. Scorpions were frequently trapped, Each indivi- dual was sexed and the length of its carapace measured to an accuracy of 0.1 mm using an eye- piece micrometer. Results Coleaptera Table | lists the numbers of adults of each species af Coleoptera trapped on the different slopes, Seasonal incidence in the traps (both slopes combined) is also given. The majority of the beetles (90.6%) Were trapped in the warmer, drier months of the year (November-March), Beetles were more commonly trapped on the south-west slope than on the north-west slope (x7 =15.8, p<0.05) but species umbers were the same on both slopes (n=17). The tetiebrionid Celibe {—Saragus) simplex (Hope) was by far the most commonly trapped beetle, but there was no significant difference in its total numbers on the two slopes (x*=3.03, p>0.05). Another tenebrionid, Licinoma meridiana Carter, and an unidentified species of Aleocharinae (Staphylinidae) were very much more commonly trapped on the south-west slope, Seorpionida Only one species of scorpion (Urodacus manicatus (Thorell)) was trapped. Similar numbers were trapped on the south-west and north-west slopes (Table 2) (x2=0.8, p>0.0S). Most were trapped from late spring to early autumn, with peaks in November-December arid March (Fig. 1). The majority had carapace lengths of 6-7 mm (Fig. 2). Sexes were discernible in scorpions with carapace length >5,4 mm. Most scorpions were males (83.3% on the south-west slope; 81.8% on the north-west slope). Mast females (70.0%) had a Spermatocleutrum (vaginal plug). This indicates mating had occurred (Koch 1977). None of the five females with a carapace length <5.8 mm (see Fig. 2) had a spermatocleutrum. All the males had mature paraxial organs and were therefore adult. Araneida and Phalangida Araneida and Phalangida were trapped on both slopes, but these groups have not been identified to species. More Araneida were collected on the south-west slope than on the north-west slope GROUND FAUNA OF ENGELBROOK RESERVE 45 20 (a) 10 0 20 -(b) 10 40r (c) 30 Numbers trapped / week oOo i=] J FMAM J J Month AS OND Fig. 1, Numbers of Urodacus manicatus (a), Leiolopisma trilineata (b) and Lampropholis guichenoti (c) trapped per week on the north-west (shaded) and south-west (open) slopes in Engelbrook Reserve. Bo /- 50+ 3B 40+ a a = 30 o a E 3 2 20- iol (Table 2) (y7=5.4, p<0.05). This difference is more attributable to variation in the numbers of Mygalomorphae than Araneomorphae (Table 2). Overall, more Araneomorphae were trapped on both slopes than Mygalomorphae (Table 2). The latter however predominated during late autumn to mid-winter (April to July) (Fig. 3). TABLE 2, Numbers of Arachnida, Amphibia and Reptilia trapped in Engelbrook Reserve. Slope North- South- West West Arachnida Scorpionida Urodacus manicatus (Thorell) 125 111 Phalangida 17 58 Araneida Mygalomorphae 108 146 Araneomorphae 197 219 Total 305 365 Amphibia Pseudophryne bibroni Giinther 7 2 Reptilia Lampropholis guichenou (Dumeéril & Bibron) 331 499 Leiolopisma trilineata (Gray) 161 78 Lerista bougainvillii (Gray) 21 Il Hemiergis decresiensis (Fitzinger) 12 12 Aprasia Sstriolata (Liitken) 1 0 Total 526 597 5 6 7 8 Carapace length (mm) Fig. 2. Size (carapace length) distribution of all Urodacus manicatus trapped in Engelbrook Reserve, Females (shaded), males (open), sex not determined (hatched). 46 Gi, HW, BAKER Phalangida were more commonly collected on the south-west slope than on che north-west slope (Table 2) (2 -22.4, p<0.05), They were mostly trapped in early spring (September) (Fig. 3). Reprilia and Ariphibia Five species of lizard were trapped (Yable 2). The skink Lamprapholis euichenoti (Dumeri! & Bibran) was by far the most common, I was more often found en the south-west slope (x- =34.0, p<0,05) whilst the reverse was the case fur another skink. Leiplopisme trilineata (Gray) (x2 =31,3, p< 0.05). Overall, lizards were more commonly trapped on the south-west slope (x? —4.4, p<.05), L. guichenoti and L- trilineata were callected in all months of the year (Tig. 1), but especially from September to March. &. Irilineata was most common at the start of this warm, dry penod whilst 1. ekichenafi was most common later, especially on the south-west slope. The numbers of the other species rapped were too low to warrarit illustration of seasonal trends: Lerista bougainvillit (Gray) in all months from Navember to April, Hemiersis decresiensis (Pitanger) in all months from October to April and Aprasia strialata Liitken In October only, Five other species of repule, Crevrorus robusins Storr, Tilique seincoides (Shaw), Amphibolurus harbaius (Cuvier), Phyllodactylus marmaratus (Gray) and Pseudechis porphyriacus (Shaw) were seen but nat trapped, 70 - lal Numbers trapped / weels o | oe 1FMAMI J AS ON D Month bio. 3, Nurmbers of Mygalomorphae (aj, Araneomarphc (b) aud Phulangida (eptrapped per week on (he gotthe west tshaded! snd south-west (upen) slopes in Ungetbraok Reserve The toadlel Psevdophryne bibroni Gunther was collected during June, August lo November and Janwary, Discussion Animals active On the soil surface perform an important role in nutrient cycling (Wallwork 1976), They are also useful indicators of environmental disturbance (Grecnstade & Greenslade 1984), Despite these benefits, few contumunities of soil and liller animals have been studied in S. Aust., and eormparisons with the data in the present paper are impossible, However, the fauna of jarrah (EZ. inareineta) woodland and forest in Western Australia has beeri well studied (MeNamara 1955; Springett 1976, 1979; Koch & Majer 1980; Majer 1984; Majer & Koch 1982; Abbott 1984). Wherens predatory beetles (c.g. Carabidae, Staphylinidae) constituted only a small proportion of the total numbers of beetles trapped in Engelbrook Reserye (6.9% on the north-west slope, 26.5% on the south- west slope), they comprised 73.7; 82,8 and 92.6% of the catch in three jarrah habitats (Majer & Koch 1982). Qn the other hand, mygalomorph spiders constituted 35.4 {north-west slope) and 40.0%. (south-west slope} of the Araneida trapped in Engelbrook but Koch & Majer (1980) found they were negligible (< 2%). These apparent differences in the fauna may reflect real variation from one type of forest to another. They may also reflect differences in lrapping procedure: Majer & Koch included a mixture of alconal and glycerol as a preservative in their traps which is known ta influence the numbers of invertebrates |rapped (Greenslade & Greenslade 1971), There is a need for uniformity of sampling methods in future studies which wil then assist faunal comparisons. Litthe has been published concerning the intluence Of aspect on the abundance of animals (Tolbert 1975), although there is much information which demonstrates its influence on plants (Ayyad & Dix 1964; Odum 1959; Whittaker 1970). In Lhe mediterranean chmate of the Mt Lofty Ranges, soil moistures and temperatures are rast extreme on the poorly insolated southern slopes of hills in winter (high moisture, low temperature) and on the northern slopes in summer which are exposed to hot, dry winds (low moisture, high tempenalare), Effects on the purmbers of surlace active aninvals are therefore to be expected, Differences deman- strated here for beetles, lizards, spiders and phalangids as well ag termites (Wood & Lee 1971), millipedes (Baker 1985b) and ants (Greenslade |985) illustrate the Importance of dacumenting aspect 1 fufure surveys of fauna and in studies of Lhe population dynamics of individual species. GROUND FAUNA OF ENGELBROOK RESERVE 47 Jenebrionids are common in arid habitats (Britton 1970; Wallwork 1970, 1976}. The predominance of such beetles, especially G simplex, in the catch at Engelbrook Reserve and a similar finding by Majer & Koch 1982) for Svmperes sp. in jarrah woodland suggests chat tenebrionids can be imporlant elemerits of the fauna of temperate forests and woodlands as well, The seorpian UL manicatus is distributed frosn south-eastern Queensland, through N.SW., A.C and Vicloria io Yorke Peninsula and Kangaroo Island (Koch 1977). The lf municatus al Engelbrook Reserve are therefore close to the western limit of the species’ distributian. Koh (1977) listed the carapace length of adult males as 6,0+038 mm (x4 5.E.) (range 5.7-6.3 mm) and females 6.7+0,61 (5.8-7.3 mm). However, adull males up to 7,0 nim und females up to 7.5 nim were trapped at Engelbrook Reserve. U. manicarus lives in shallow burrows beneath stones (Southeott 1955, Koch 1978). Smith (F946) sainpled U. manicalus beneath stones in Canberra. He. found that mating occurred during Qetober/ November atid parturition 16 months later in February/March, Young mainly dispersed from their mother’s burrow from mid-March 19 May, The sex Falio of the young was even, but for adults there were three females for every male, Smith (1966) areued that immatures and ddult males were more active than adult females because when marked beneath rocks they remained there for shorter periods of time. A predominance of female LU manicalus tas been observed beneath rocks in Engelhrook Reserve (Baker unpubl, data), The trapping reported |jere confirms that acull males are more active than adult females. Presumably the sponge peak in numbers af &¢ manicafus jn the (raps. reflects activity assdciated with the mating season, The significance of the aulumn peak is not understood, Very few immature UL marticutes were trapped (four in Eebruary and one in August, October and Noyember). There was nu evidence to suggest an autumn dispersal of young as suggested by Smith (1966). Litde is known of the ecoloay or life history of the skinks “£. guichenoti and L, Irilineata (Rounsevell 1978; Cogger 1979; Greer 1980). Therefore an explanation of the higher numbers of L. guichenati in the traps on the south-west slope and (he converse for L. tilineara cannot be given- Iris Worth nating however that L. euichenati was most often trapped in summer-early autumn and L. trilineata in spring, Perhaps temperatures on the north-west slope were higher than optimum for active £, guichenoli, and temperatures on the south- west slope were lower than optimum for active Z, frilineata, Both species teed on a variety al Coleoptera, Araneida and Dermaptera (Baker 1979h). The possibility that competition for food influences the relative abundances of L. giuichenoti and 1, érilineala merils altention. Acknowledgments Liltank Margrit Keck for assistance jn) Checking the pitfall traps. The National Trust of South Australia kindly granted permission (0 work in Engelbrook Reserve, Eric Matthews, Barry Moore and David Lee identified many species References Annoy, L. (1984) Changes in the abundance and activity of certain soil and tiller fauna in the jarrah forest af Western Australia after a moderate intensity fire Aus. 4, Sail Res, 22, 463-469, Ayyap, M.A, G. & Dik, R.1- (1964) An analysis of a vegelation-inieroen\ironmental complex on prairie dopes in Saskatchewan. feol Menage 34, 42L-d42, Bakken, Go, (197Ka) The post-embryanie developaren| and life history of che millinede, Onivearaiudis mareient (Diptopoday lulidae), introduced i sourh-castorn Austria. £ Zool, ond, 186, 209-22k. ~ (978b) The population dynamics of ihe millipede Onmatoiulus moreferi (Diplopada’ lulidae), .. Zeal, Lond. Vt, 229-242. (19798) The aetivily patterns of Odiietelnulus moreloii (Diplopeda: tulidac) in Soar Australia £ Zool, Loe. VB8, (74-183. (1979b) Eruptions of the introduced millipede, Onmmatoiulus mtareletii (Diplopoda, [alidae), in Australia, with gotes on the aalive Aas/raliasemn castaneui (Diplopoda, Paradoxosomatidae), §. text Nat. &3, 36a. QU8Sa) Predators. of Ontiranaiulus rviureletsl (Licas) (Diplopoda;: Julidae) in Portugal und Australia, / Aust eny, Sag, 4, 247-252, (1983b) Diplopoda of o dry selerophyliods woodland (Eneulyptir vbliqua-E, buster) in (be Mount Lofty Ranges, Sonjh Austrailia. HIT Sch. Biol. Bull. Nu 12; S4-Se. — — {)983c) The distribution and ahundance of the Portugese millipede Omertafeiulys mureletii (Diplopada: Tuhdaey in Australia, Aus J Beal 1, 249-259. Boosisma, ©, D. & Liwis, SM, B. (L979) “The native forest dnd woodlind vegetation of Sourh Aucsimlia.” (Woods afd Forests Departrnent|, South Australia) Mullecin 24 BRITTON, EB (197D) Coleopiera te CSIRO, “Une insects of Australia,” pp, 495-62) (Melbourne Univ. Press, Mecthourne}, CmooeR, H. OG. UY83) “Reptiles and aniphibians of Australia,” Ord ed, (A, H. & AL WL Reed, Sydney). Cerens) Ane, P & GREENSLADE, Po. M_ (IS 71) The use of bairs ond preservatives in pitfall traps. J dus, enh Seu W, 253-260. CREINS) ADE, Po J, AT. (1985) Sone effects of season and the geopgraphical aspect on ants (Hymenoptera; hormicidac) in rhe Mr Lotiy Ranges, Sewih Australia. Trans. R. Soe. 8. Ausf, 109, 17-23, & GREENS AGE, FL (1984) Hwertebrates and cnViotnental assessment, Eavironnertund Planning a, 13-15, 48 G. H. BAKER Greer, A. E. (1980) Critical thermal maximum temperatures in Australian scincid lizards: their ecological and evolutionary significance. usr. J Zool. 28, 91-102. Hutson, B. R. (1985) Rates of litterfall and organic matter turnover at three indigenous South Australian forests. Aust. J Ecol, 10, 351-359. & Verten, L. G, (1983) Mean annual population density of Collembola and Acari in the soil and litter of three indigenous South Australian forests, Aust. J. Eeol. %, 113-126. Kocn, L. E. (1977) The taxonomy, geographic distribution and evolutionary radiation of Australo- Papuan scorpions, Rec. West, Aust. Mus. 5, 83-367. Kocu L. E. (1978) A comparative study of the structure, function and adaptation to different habilats of burrows in the scorpion genus Cradacus (Scorpionida, Scorpionidae). Ree. Mest, Aust, Mus. 6, 119-146, & Maser, J. D. (1980) A phenological investigation of various invertebrates in forest and woodland areas in the south-west of Western Australia. JR, Soc, West, Aust. 63, 21-28. Lee. K. BE. & Bute, J, A. A, (1977) Termites, soil organic matter decomposition and nutrient cycling. Ecol, Bull. (Stockholm) 25, 544-548, —— & Corre, R. L. (1978) Litter fall and its relationship to nutrient cycling in a South Australian dry sclerophyll forest, Aust, J. Ecol. 3, 243-252. & Woon, T. G. (1968) Preliminary studies of the role of Nasuritermes exitiosus (Hill) in the cycling of organic matter in a yellow podzolic soil under dry sclerophy!! forest in South Australia, Trans, LX Intern. Congr. Sail Sei, 2, 1-18, Maier, J. D. (984) Short-term responses of soil and litter invertebrates to a cool autumn burn in jarrah (Eucalyptus marginata) forest in Western Australia. Pedobjologia 26, 229-247. —_ & Kocn, L. E. (1982) Seasonal activity of hexapods in woodland and forest leaf litter in the south- west of Western Australia, 2 R. Sac, West, Aust. 65, 37-45, McNamaka, P. J, (1955) A preliminary investigation of the fauna of humus layers in the jarrah forest of Western Alistralia. Comm, Aust, For Timber Bur Leafl. No, TI NortHoore, Ko H, (1971) “A factual key for the recognition of Australian soils.” 3rd ed (Rellim Press, Adelaide), Opum, E. P1959) “Fundamentals of ecology” 2nd ed, (W. B. Saunders, Philadelphia). ROUNSEVELL, D. E, (1978) Communal egg-laying in the iain skink Leto/opisma trilineata, Tusm, Nat. $2, SmirH, G.. T. (1966) Observations on the life history of the scorpion Uredacus abrupius Pocock (Scorpioni- dae), and ar analysis of its home sites, lust. J. Zool. 14, 383-398. Soutucorr, R. V, (1955) Some observations on the biology, including mating and other behaviour of the Australian scorpion Uradacus abruptus Pocock. Trans. R. Soe. §. Ausi, 78, 145-154. Sprincert, JA. (1976) The effect of prescribed burning on the soil fauna and on litter decomposition in Western Australian forests, Aust. J. Ecol. t, 77-82. (1979) The effects of a single hot summer fire on soil fauna and on Jitter decomposition im jarrah (Eucalyplus mareinaia) forest in Western Australia. Aust, J Evol. 4, 279-291. Stace, H,. C, T., Hunsre, G. D,, Brewer, R., Norrucore, K. H., SLEEMAN, J. R., Mutcany, M, J. & Havtsworrn, E. G. (1968) "A handbook of Australian soils.” (Rellin Press, Adelaide), THEODoRGU, C & Bowrn, G. D. (1982) Effects of a bushfire on the nricrobiology of a South Australian low, open (dry scleraphyll) forest soil, Aust, For Res. 12, 317-328, ToLrerr, W. W. (1975) The effects of slope exposure on arthropod distribution patterns, Amer. Midl. Nar. 94, 38-53. Wariwork, J. A. (1970) “Ecology of soil animals.” (McGraw-Hill, London). (1976) “The distribution and diversity of soil fauna.” (Academic Press, London). WHITTAKER, R. (1970) “Communities ecosystems.” (Macmillan, New York). Woop, T. G, & Let, K. E. (1971) Abundance of mounds and competition among colonies of some Australian termite species, Pedobiologia 11, 341-366. and TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED VOL, 110, PAKT 2 DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS OF SMALL FRESHWATER FISH IN THE RIVER MURRAY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY L. N. LLOYD & K. F. WALKER Summary Most species of fish native to the lower Murray have declined over the past century, probably as a result of habitat changes and interactions with exotic species. Here, the range and relative abundance of the small species (17 native and two introduced) are assessed from collections made in 1982-84. Four habitat types are defined from 39 field sites. “River-edge” habitats have a more diverse assemblage (mean 7.6 species) than “backwater” (3.5) or “stream” habitats (2.6). Streams contain a distinct assemblage, but billabongs and backwaters have a subset species found in river- edge habitats. Distributions generally are patchy and densities are low, and none of the species can be considered secure. In the lower Murray four species are regarded as “endangered” and five as “vulnerable”. Surveys are needed to determine the regional status of other Australian freshwater fish. DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS OF SMALL FRESHWATER FISH IN THE RIVER MURRAY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA by L, N. Lloyp & K. Fo WALKER* Summary Lroye, LN. & Warker. Ke F (1986) Distribution and conservation status of small treshwater fish in the River Murray, South Australia. Trans. R, Soe. 8. Ause, 110(2), 49-57, 30 May, 1986. Most species of fish native to the lower Murvay have deelined aver the past century, probably as a result of habilat changes and intentions with exotic species, Here, the range and relative abundance of the small species (17 native and two introdticed) are assessed from collections made in 1982-84. Four habitat types are defined from 39 lield sites, “Riveredge” habitats have a more diverse assemblage (mean 7.6 species) thin “backwater” (5.1), “billabong” (3.5) or *stream” habitats (2.6). Streams contain a distinctive assemblage, but billabonygs and backwaters have a subset of species found in riveredge habitats. Distributions generally are palehy and densities are low, and none of the species can be considered secure. In the lower Murray four species are regarded as “endangered” and five as “vulnerable”. Surveys are needed ro determine the regional status of orhor Australian. Freshwator Fish. Key Woes: ish, conservation, billabongs, River Murray, South Australia Introduction Several authors recently have discussed the conservation of native Australian freshwater fish (¢2 Pollard ef al. 1980; Ride & Wilson [982; Cadwallader ef w/, 1984), Although i 1s widely believed that many species have declined (ef. Cadwallader 1979), most supporting evidence i5 circumstantial and ancedotal. Growing interest in this problem is shown in concern, notably by government agencies, about the vulnerability of certain species, and in the appearance of books concerned with regional faunas (MeDowall 1980; Allen 1982; Cadwallader & Backhouse 1983), Most information available for che fish of the Murray-Darling Basin is for commercial or recreational species, and very little is known of the status of the smallest species, sometimes mis- leadingly called “forage Sish", Llewellyn (1984) and Cadwallader & Backhouse (1983) mapped the ranges ol lish in the New South Wales and Victorian regions respectively, bul (here is no published information for the Murray in South Australia, arguably the most modified part of (he river system (Walker 198], 1982a, b, 1983, 1985), In this paper we report the status of the small species of the Murray below the Darling junction, as part of an investigation of the relationships between small species Of native and exotic fish in the lower Murray (Lloyd unpublished). Methods The area Surveyed wis the basin of the lower River Murray (AWRC Basin 1V-26: Dept National Development 1974), including the main channel, anabranches (Chowilla and Slaneys creeks), tributaries (Angas, Finniss and Marne rivers), backwaters and billabongs. During 1982-84 samples were taken from 39 stations (Fig, |, Table 1), Four habital types were defined, viz. “river-edge’ environinenis (along the banks of the main channel), “backwaters” (slack waters connected Tu the main channel), “billabongs” (still waters. isolated fram the main channel except in floods) and “streams” (small, moderate- to fast-flowing tributary creeks). All] had some aquatic vegetation, including stands of emergent and submerged plants. Mast sites were sampled once or Lwice, but stations 3-7 and 15-18 were visited at abour monthly intervals. Standard sampling included 10 hauls of a 2 m seine nef (2 mm mesh), three hauls of a 45 m seine nec (12 tim mesh), a dip-ner collection over a 10 m strip and, at most sites, three collections using (raps baited with meat, left overnight, Fish were identified using the keys of Scall e/ al, (1974), McDowall (1980) and Cadwallader & Backhouse (1983), Philypnodon graridiceps (Kret th) (bigheaded gudgeon), was distinguished from an undescribed dwarf convener, Carp-gudgeans were referred to Aypseleoiris Klunzingeri (Ogilby), although Hoese ev a/, (L980) suggest there are undescribed species in this taxon. Supplementary data were obtained from South Australian Museum records, the published literature and personal communications. * Departinent of Zoology, University of Adelaide, G.P.O, Box 498, Adelaide, S Aust. SD0L- At) LLOYD, L. N. & WALKER, K. F. Fig. |. Sites surveyed, 1982-84. See Table 1 for key. Results Our collections included 15 of the 17 known small native fish species of the lower Murray (Table 2), In addition, the exotic mosquitofish, Gambusia affinis holbrooki (Girard) (see Lloyd & Tomasov 1985), occurred at all sites except Point Sturt and three small tributaries to Lake Alexandrina (stations 1, 4-9), and goldfish, Carassius auratus L., occurred at I8 sites. Discussion Distribution The survey suggested that most species are widely but patehily distributed; examples are H, klunzingeri, P. grandiceps, Retropinna semoni (Weber) (Australian smelt), Craterocephalus sfercusmuscarum (Giinther) (Mitchellian hardyhead), Melanotaenia splendida fluviatilis (Castelnau) (crimson-spotted rainbowfish) and Nematalosa erebi (Gunther) Guvenile bony bream), Others are restricted either because the species themselves are uncommon, or because suitable habitats are uncommon. In the latter category, species that frequent estuarine areas, for example Wentworth Pseudaphritis urvilli (Valenciennes) (congolli), Pseudogobius olorum (Sauvage) (blue-spot goby} and Galaxias maculatus (Jenyns) (common galaxias), are most common in the region near the river mouth, Further, G. olidus Gtinther (mountain galaxias) is typical of mountain streams, ar environment virtually absent from the lower Murray, and G. rostratus Klunzinger (flatheaded galaxias) favours the billabongs and backwaters of the uppermost reaches of the Murray. Another group of special interest here occurs in the few sites where exotic species have not penetrated or where major habitat changes have not occurred. These include Mogurnda adspersa (Castelnau) (purple- spotted gudgeon), Nannoperca australis australis Gunther (pigmy perch) and Gadopsis marmoratus Richardson (river blackfish). H. klunzingeri was widespread and showed no preference among the four habitat types (x? = 6.0, 3 df, n.s.). However, other species did show an association with river-edge and backwater habitats; these were G. a. holbrooki (x? = 10, 3 df, P < 0.05), R. semoni 2 = 17, 3 df, P < 0,01), P. grandiceps (x22 = 7.6, 2 df, P < 0.05) and juvenile N. erehi (x* = 8.3, 2 df, P < 0.05). SMALL FISH OF THE RIVER MURRAY Tasle |. Survey Sites, 1982-1984 (see also Fig. 1) Site No. Site Name Location Habitat Type | Point Sturt 35°31 139°02' Backwater 2 Finniss R., Tosolints 35°26 138-351 River edge 3 Finniss R., Reedlands 35°25 138°50' River edge 4 Tookayerta Ck, Two Bridges 35°25 138-48" Stream 5 Tookayerta Ck, Tooperang 35°24" J4R°45' Stream 6 Dawson Ck, Sutherlands 35°15' 13p°50° Stream 7 Dawson Ck, HT Reserve 35° 18' (38°51! Stream 8 Angas R., CC Reserve 35°)5> 13854 Stream 9 Angas R., Airport Bndge 38°17 7° 138957" Stream 10 Angas R., Mouth 35°34" 138959" Backwaler ll Wellington 35°20' 139°23° River edge 12 Swaliport Billabong 35°08) 199°1N' Billabong 13 Zadows Landing 34°58) 139°18 River edge 14 Mannum 34°55° 139°18" River edge 15 Wongulla 34°43" 199°34° River edye 16 Marne R,, Mouth 34°43) 139933) River edge \7 Marne R., Wombat Reserve 34°18! 139931) Stream 18 Marne K,, Blackhill Reserve 34°42° (39°28 Stream 19 Blanchetown 44°18" 149937" Billabong 20 McBearis Pound 34°12) 139938 Backwater 2 Morgan 34°02) 139°40' Billabong 22 Overland Corner 34°09' 140°20° Backwater 23 Lock 3 oll 140°21 River edge 24 Chambers Ck 34°12) L40°24° Backwater 25 Spectacle Lakes Ck 34°29) 140023 Backwater 26 Dishers Ck Eyap, Basin 34°15) 140°40' Backwater 27 Murray at Dishers Ck Outlet 34°15 140-40 River edge 28 364 Mile Tree 34-07) 140545 Back water 29 375 Mile Tree 34°03) 140-49" Backwater 30 376 Mile Tree 34-0) Tae so! Billabong 3 Chowilla Ck F400" 140" 52° River edge 32 Lock 6 34°00 140-53" Billabong 33 Buityip Reach 33°5h' 140 SS’ River edge 34 Bunyip Reach Homestead 33°59' 140735! Backwater 35 395 Mile Tree 33-58' 140°56' Billabong 36 Sianeys Ck 33°57) 140°56' River edge 37 Border Cliffs 33°59 140° 58° River edge 38 404 Mile Tree 34°01) 14059" River edge 39 405 Mile Tree 34°02) 140° 59 Backwater Although there are insufficient data for more statistical comparisons, a few points deserve comment, © auratus, M. $s. fluviatilis and Philypnedon sp. (dwart bigheaded gudgeon) all occurred in three to four habitat types, G. muculaius, © stercusmusearum and © eyresit (Steindachner) (Lake Eyre hardyhead) were found only in river-edge and backwater habitats (and near the river mouth in ibe case of G. maculatus). P olorum and FB wrvilli occurred in river-edge colleetions; most of these were near the Murray mouth, although a single specimen af P wrvilli was collected at the Marne jnflow, 215 river-km upstream, Populations of NM. a, aus/rulis, G. marmoratus and G. olidus were found only in stream habitats, allhough two individual No a. ausiralis were found in river-edwe hubitars near stream-living populations of that species. No habitat preferences can be assiened [0 A, castelnaus G, rostratus or M. adspersa, as too lew specimens Were found. River-edge habitats supported sigmifivantly mare species (mean 7.6, N = 14) than the three other habitat types (Table 3; ANOVA, F - 10,6 with 3,35 df; P < 0.01), Backwaters had significantly more species (mean 5.1, N = 11) than billabongs (3,5, 4) and streams (2.4, 8) (ANOVA, F = 5,7 with 115 df; P < 0,05), Spearman rank correlanons sugest that billabong and backwater species may he regarded as a subset of river-edge species (rho. ~ 0,62 and 0.82 respectively, borh P< 0.05). There was no significant difference between the number of specics in billabongs and streams (ANOVA, F = 1.2 with 1,12 df; P > 0,05), but the species involved were different, Spearman rank correlations show that streams had a distinetive fish fauna, as there were no sighifieant correlations with assemblages in other habjlats (river-edge v. strearms: LLOYD, L. N. & WALKER, K. F. ion wm a aaa ytty ytSsS =n asa nd an (%0 )0 0 0 0 0 (neuyja}seD) vsvadspp ppusnsoy ‘uoaspns payods-ajdind 6] (%¢ ) T 0 0 0 I (AevapoeyA) inpujajspo sissoquipy ‘ysied epueyD gt (%8 ) € £ 0 0 0 UOSPIeYOIY SsnJoLolsDUE SISdOPDH “YSIJAIR|Q JA LT pasaduepuq (%S1) 9 t 0 0 z JYIUND sypaysno syosisno vIJadouuny *yd19d Award 9] (%¢ )Z 0 0 0 Z (adeanes) winsojo snigosopnasg ‘kqo# yods-anjq ¢} (%8 ) € 0 0 0 € (squuatouaTeA) pain situydppnasg ‘iJOsUod P| (%0 ) 0 0 0 0 0 JISUIZUNJY SMIDLISOs SDIXD]DD ‘seIxeles papeay-}elj €] (%O1) P 0 0 ra z (suduar) snyppnomiu soixnjoy ‘serxeyes uOUIWIOD Z] a[qesaujn, (%E1) S ¢ 0 0 0 JayIUNy snpiyo spixnjoy ‘seixeyes urequnow [[ (%>1) 9 0 0 Z P (sguysepulars) Msasda Snjpydasodajo41D *peaydpsey 31Xq xe] OL a1ey (%1Z) 8 | 0 € + ‘ds uopouddjiyd ‘uoaspns papeay-siq jIeMp 6 (%1€) ZI 0 0 ba 8 (ayIUND) wnsvIsnuisnosais SnjoYydaro0sa}DID ‘peayApiey UelfeyouW g (% SE) ST 0 z ¢ 6 (neujaised) siivianyf opipualds piuanjounjayy ‘yslyymoqured payjods-uosutio 7 (% 9%) 81 I € s 6 SNOBUUT] SMIDAND SNISSDIDD *YSIYP[OB, 9 (%9F) 81 0 I 9 Il (4ayIUND) Iqasa DsojDI DIAN “WIRI1Q AUD ¢ (%1S) OZ 0 Z 9 ZI (4jJ94y) Sdaoipuns3 uopouddiyg ‘uoadspns papeay-3iq p (GPS) IZ I Zz g €l (aga Ay) IMowas duUIdosjay *)\[aWS UeTesISnHYy € (% LL) OF t ¢ 6 ZI (Aq[t8Q) Masuizunpy stajoajasdapy ‘uoaspns dies Z uOWLUOS) (%Z8) ZE Z 9 ol tl (prelIg) 1yoosgsoy siulffo pisnquivy ‘ystyounbsow, | wees suogeyig Jovem yoeg adpq 1oAry (%}) [BIOL yenqey sad SMBS quasaid sais i nn nett “SHIDIS UONDAJASUOD Pun S]DIqnYy slay) ‘AdsinJy 4amO] AY] {0 YSIf 4a]DMYSadf ]]/DUS AY. saldads 31]0Xa SAaJOUIG, “Z amavis SMALL FISH OF THE RIVER MURRAY 53 TABLE 3. Site records (x) of small freshwater fish species in the lower Murray region. Species and sites are identified by numbers (see Tables 1 and 2, respectively). The bold numbers on the righthand margin indicate the numbers of species recorded at each site. Species | 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 It 12 13 14 #15 16 #17 18 19 Site 1 x x x x x 5 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 14 3 x x x x x x x x x x x il 4 x x 2 5 * x 2 6 x x x 3 7 x x x 3 8 x 1 9 x 1 10 x x x x x x 6 1 x x x x x x 6 12 x x x 3 13 x x x x x x x 7 14 x x x x x x x x 8 15 x x x x x x x x x 9 16 x x 4 x x x x x x x x x 12 17 x x x x x x 6 18 x x x 3 19 x x x 3 20 x x x 3 21 x x x x x 5 22 x x * x x x 6 23 x x x x 4 24 x x x x x 5 25 x x x x x x x x 8 26 x x x x 4 27 x * x x x x 6 28 x x x x x 5 29 x x x x x 5 30 x x x x x 5 31 x x x x “x x 6 32 x x x 3 33 x x x x x 5 34 x x x 3 35 x x 2 36 x x x x x x 6 37 x x x x 4 38 x x x x x . x x 8 39 x x x x x x 6 Sa LLOYD, L, N, & WALKER, K. rho = —0.35;backwaters 4. streams) rlio - -0,29) billabougs vstreams: rho — —0,25; all P > 0,05), Finally, there way me siguifivanr difference between the mean numbers of species in sites sampled once {rocan 4.8) and those sampled monthly (mean 6,5; Studen's t = Lb66, 3.df P > 00S), Conservation Status The conservation status accorded each species in the lower Murray J5 indicated in Table 2, using a scheme comparuble to that of the laternational Union for the Conservation of Nature (of, Goodwin & Holloway 1972). Cortnion species are widespread and probably form an important part of the food chain, For example, M. &funzinger! oocutred at more than 60% ol sites alibhough, a5 noted earlier, this taxon may contain more than one species, Other widespread species (a) more thar 30% of sites) were R, seertaens, P erandiceps. juvenile N, crebi, C stercusriuscarumn and Mf. s. fhiviarilis. All ave recorded as cammon (e.g. Scott er a/, 1974), None shauld be considered secure, however, glven their generally low numbers and the likelihood of continumy changes lo the Murray environment. Rure species are regarded as thase |hat occur in small populations and are elther restricted in range or svartered over a broad area, Thus © epresi’ and Philypnoden sp, were found at 15% and 20% of siles respectively, Usually in low numbers, © evresu was commonest in Dishers Creek Evaporation Basin, where salinities were high (o 10 e/'T) due ta the inflow of saline irfgation water. Vulnerable species are regarded as (hase |fkely to beeome endangered if their range and abundance decline farther, Galaxies spp., Bo wevili and F alarwn all have restricted distributions and probably are consiralned by the scarcity of suitable hubitars They may be considered vulnerable in the lower Murtay, althouvh each is well-represertes elsewhere iit Sk Australia, Poervilli, Refer anu G. maocudums are constrained by their need for gevess to the limited estuarine environment associated with barraves near the Murray mouth, As mentioned, G. olfdns is 1ypical of upland environments that are rare an the lower Murray, those that de occur are modified by avriculiwre or inhabited by (rou! (Sairiospp.), which are predatory G. rosivaius is commonest ii billabongs and haekwaters alone Ihe Murray in NSW, and South Australian Nruseum records sugeest thal it was never common in che lower Murray. Endangerca species are here regarded os those threatened by imminent loval extunccion. in the lower Murray four species may be sa classifieds Ambassls Castelraui (Maclesy), ML adspersa, Na. ausiraty and G, rrernrorams, Each of these specs appeurs (o have undergone a substantial reduction i range over the past 100 years or so, for reasons probably associated with habitat changes and interactions with exotic species (ef Pig, 2; Reynolds 1976; Cadwallader 1978). Their former ranges cannot be determined accurately, but from the few museum records and published reports it appears likely that all four species were once widespread in the lower Murray (Gale 1914; McCulloch & Waile 1918; MeCulloch & Ogilhy 1919, Scart L962; Scott ef al. 1974; Cadwallader 1977, 1979; Cadwallader & Backhouse 1984; Hoese e/ af 1980; Jackson & Llewellyn 1980; Pollard er af 1980; Llewellyn 1980a,b, 1984; Humeet a/. 1983; Jackson & Davies 1983; Walker & Hillman 1977), 4, cusielnani was collected only once im the present survey, although several specimens have been recorded by the Sourti Australian Museum over ihe last 20 years, the last being in 1973, This s\iggests tha’ populations are rare and patehily disir/buted, and may have declined in recent years. The species may never fave been regionally: abundant, bur mow appears threatened with local extinction, A similar deeline is evident in other parts of its range (Cadwallader & Backhouse LYR3, Llewellyn L984). M. wdspersa was not collected in this survey, but again isolated specimens from the Murray have been lodged with the South Australian Museum over the pasi 20 years, the last being jn 1973, These records and other observations (J, Pillar 8. Aust, Dept Fisheries, pers. comm.) suggest that populations now are Small and patchily distributed, whereas the species probably was common Iy) backwaters and river-cdge habitats, two of ibe principal habital types sampled in this survey. The apparent decline may he associated with the spread of G aw holirouki, allhough the supporting evidence is circumstantial. Similar declines have occurred elsewhere in SE Australia (McDowall 1980; Cadwallader & Backhouse 1983). No a. eusrrafis also was once widespread [i the lewer Murray but has apparently declined; (he last S.A, Museum record is 1446, and the only known regional habitats pow are two Sinall streams Mowing to Lake Alexandéina. The species prefers shaded, weedy habitats of the Kind often destroyed by “stream improvement” pracrices. La addition, its absence from suitable habitats occupied by CG. a, kalbrook?, and the absence of this species from the iwo streums menmliowed above suaggesc Lhal infteraeticns between these species could have been responsible A. ew. australis is locally common i ST S Aust, and Viet, (Cadwallader & Backhouse 1983; Glover 1983: Llewellyn 1984; Linvd 1984). G, mermoratus occurred in the Murray in (ite (930s, according fo SA, Museun fecords, and there SMALL FISH OF THE RIVER MURRAY Adelaice Murray Bridge Lake “> Alexandrina Fig, 2, is anecdotal evidence that populations persisted until the 19505 (R. Mason, Strathalbyn Naturalists Club, pers. comm,), In this survey only two populations were disvovered (lower Marne River and upper Angas River catchment). The species 1s not easily caught by seining, but is attracted to baited [raps. At one of the two sites juveniles are readily collecled using artificial substratum samplers, bul no juveniles have come {rom similar samplers used in extensive benthic surveys of the lower riyer (M. B. Thompson, Univ, Adelaide and P. J. Suter, Engineering & Water Supply Dept, Adelaide, pers. comms). G. marmaoratyus formerly ranged lrom southern Queensland to the lower Murray and now is most common in Victoria, although present also in SE South Australia and the upper Murray and Murrumbidgee drainages (NSW), The species is vulnerable particularly because of its unusual mode of reproduction, whereby the eges are attached to submerged hollow Jogs and the laryae remain attached until their yolk sacs are resorbed (Jackson 1978a), Hence, despite paremial care the egzs and larvae are exposed to predation for over ope month, Ir is notewarthy that Sanger (1984) has reported a new species of 1 Swan Reach un i Wentworth Renmark Gadopsis marmoratus Populations Nannoperca australis Populations Nannoperca australis \ndividuals Ambassis casteinau/ \ndividuals Survey records of the four species here regarded as endangered in the lower Murray, Gadopsis from ventral Victoria, and shown that other isolates may be genetically dissimilar (A. Sanger, Univ, Melbourne, pers, comm). Conclusion The maintenance of genetic diversity within animal populations is essential Yor effective conservation (6g. Ahern 1982). Fish, in particular, are easily isolated in separate drainage basins, or in habitats within the same basin, and may undergo genetic divergence as a result. Thus, even for the small Murray-Darling Fish fauna there ape recent instances of new species being found in groups. thought (o be taxonomically well-known (e.g. Hoese ef al. 1980; Merrick & Schmida 1984; Sanger 1984), Genetic diversity within species also is important, especially where populations have developed ecotypes to Survive in particular habitats. There is evidence of subspecific variation in the Murtay-Darling fauna (e.g. Allen 1980; Allen & Cross 1982; Ivantsoff 1980; Cadwallader & Backhouse 1983). In order to conserve genetic diversity, the survival of a species throughout ils range ts crucial, and knowledge of the range and the nature of the 54 LLOYD, L. N. & WALKER, K habiars within is no less important. Regional surveys provide this information, and are to be preterred to national of stale-wide surveys because they can be designed to correspond to manageable environmental units rather than arbitrary political divisions, The drainage basins recognized by the Australian Water Resources Coumcil (Dept National Development 1976) are environmental units (and hence potential regional survey units) as they are more-or-less discrete river systems and qarural boundaries to the distributions of lish (and many other aquatic animals). At least |hree steps might be taken to prevent the further decline and possible extinchion of alive Australian freshwater fish, Firsi, coordinated regional surveys could be undertaken of the distributions and abundances of fish throughout Australia, These would supplement existing collections, and provide a more comprehensive database for use in planning fujure conservation initiatives. Second, more could be done to promote research on (the biology of (reshwater fish, Many species are uniquely Australian but unknown to conservation authorities, and those without commercial value are often overlooked by (he fisheries authorities, All have conservation value nevertheless, and require protectian. Third, a watch vould be kept over threatened species (endangered, vulnerable and rare) lo provide far early diagnosis of problems and, when necessary, rapid implementation al protective measures. The fact that probably no native freshwater fish has become extinct in the past 200 years gives no assurance that none will became so in furure indeed, the threat of iniminent losses js 4 real one, eiven the declines in range and abundance how so general and apparent. Acknowledgments This work is from an MSe project undertaken by LNL and supervised by KPW (who also cantributed to writing). We are grateful to Mr G. Lloyd, Mr R. Mason, Mr M, Young and fellaw RMRU members for field assisraoee, and Mr John Glover (Curator of Fishes, South Australian Museum) for discussions and access to Museum collections. This work was supporied by the Peter Till Environmental Laboratory, Albury-Wodonga Development Corperation, Albury, the Dept Environment & Planning, Adelaide, and the Dept National Resources, Canberra. References AHERN, LC, BD. (1982) Threatened wildlife in Victoria anal Deve prior 10 its canservation. fish. Mildl, Pap, Vier 27. 1-44. Arcem, G. R. (1982) “A Tield Ciuide to land Fishes af Western Australia”. (Wo Aust, Museum, Perth), ome KH CROSS, N.S. (1982) “Rainbowlishes of Australia and New Guinea". (Angus & Robertson, Syvduey). CAbWaALLADER, PL. (1977) J. 0. Langury's 1949-5) Murray River Investigations. Fish, Wildl Pap, Vier. 13, 170, (1978) Some cuuses of (he decline in range and abundance of native fish in (he Murray-Darling river sysiom, Proce; R, Soc. Wiel, 90, 2bl-224, —— (1979) The distriburjon of native and iniroduced hsh inthe Seven Creeks River System, Victoria, “usr, JA. Beol, 4, 361-385. & Backtouse, G. N. (19835) "A Guide to the tieshwater Fish af Victoria”, (Gove Printer, Melbourne), -——_, , Boumer, TP A& Tackson, PDL (19R4) The conservation stulus of (he native freshwater fish of Victoria. Mier Ned. LOD, 112-114, Dirt National Deviwoumen’) (1976) “Water Resources of Austria, 19737, (Aust, Gove Publ. Serv, Canberra), CiATE, A. (914) Nores on the breeding tahins of the purple-spared gudveon, Kre/fiius adspresus, Aust, Zoal. A, 15-26. Cruoaven, C. 1. Mi. t6983) Freshwater and marine fisiws. iM. 4. len tC. R. [Wwidale, JK. Ling & |W. Holmes (Eats) ‘Naturil History of the South hast’ nye 1874167, (R, Sov, 5S, Aust, Adelaide) Crocpwins, by A. & Hor powar, Book" (LUN, Swilverland), CW. (1972) “Red Data HOeSsE, D, B, Larson, H. KR. & LieWweiivn, LC, (L880) Family Eleotridae—Gudgeons, Jn Ro M, McDowall (Ed), “Freshwater Fishes of South-Eastern Australia". pp. 169-185. (Reed, Sydney). Hume, D. J, buircHek, A. R. & Morrison, A. K. (1983) Carp Program Annual Report 1980-198], Fish. Wildl, Div. Viet, Carp Prog. Publ. 8, 1-100, Ivanisort-, W. (1980) Family Atherinidae—Silversides. or Hardyheads, [rn Ro M. MeDowall (Fd), “Frestiwarer Fishes of South-Eastern Australia”, pp. 132-137, (Reed, Sydney), Jackson, B.D. (1978) Spawning and early development of ite river blacklish, Gadapsis murmoratus Richardson (Gadopsiformes: Gadepsidae), in ttre MeKenzie River, Victoria, Aust, J Man Freshwail. Res 29, 293-298. a & Davies, JN. (1983) Survey of fish fauna in The C§ramplans rewion, south-western Vicloria. Prac. BR. Soc Viet, 05, 39-5] & LiLbwebiyn, » ©C, (1980) Family Gadopsidae— River Bloc Fishy tin R. M, McDowall (Bd), “Freshwater Fistes of South-Eusiern Australia’, np. 160-4161, (Reed, Sydney), Liewrirva, b.C. (1980a) Family Ambassidae—Chanda Perches, Jn R, M, McDowall (6d), “Preshwater Fishes of South-Eastern Australia’, pp, 140-141, (Reed, Sydney) —-- -- (J980b) Pantily Kuliiiidae—Pigmy Perches. Je kK. M. MeDowall (Ed), "Treshwater Fishes of South Lastern Australia’, pp, 153.155. (Reed, Sydney). we (J9R4) The distobatian of fish in New South Wales. Aust, Soe Limnol, Spec. Publ. 7, W235, SMALL FISH OF THE RIVER MURRAY 57 Lioyp, L, N. (1984) Exotic fish—Useful additions or “animal weeds”? Fishes of Sahul 1, 31-34 & 39-42. & Tomasov, J. F. (1985) Taxonomic status of the mosquitofish, Gambusia affinis (Poeciliidae) in Australia. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwat. Res. 36, 447-451. McCutitocH, A. R. & Oaitpy, J. D. (1919) Some Australian fishes of the family Gobiidae. Rec. Aust. Mus. 1, 193-292. & Waite, E. R. (1918) Some new and little- known fishes from South Australia. Ree, S. Aust, Mus. 1, 39-78. McDowatt, R. M, (Ed,) (1980) “Freshwater Fishes of South-Eastern Australia”, (Reed, Sydney). Merrick, J. R, & SCHMIDA, G. E. (1984) “Australian Freshwater Fishes: Biology and Management”, (Griffin Press, S. Aust.). PoLtarp, D. A., LLEWeLLyn, L. C, & Tinzey, R. D. J. (1980) Management of freshwater fish and fisheries. /n W. D. Williams (Ed), “An Ecological Basis for Water Resource Management”, pp. 227-270. (Aust. Nat. Univ. Press, Canberra). ReyNovps, L. F. (1976) Decline of the native fish species in the River Murray. SAFIC 8, 19-24. Ripe, W. D. L. & Witson, G. R, (1982) The conservation status of Australian animals. Jn G. R. Groves & W. D. L. Ride (Eds), “Species at Risk—Research in Australia”. pp. 39 (Springer-Verlag; Berlin). Sancer, A. (1984) Description of a new species of Gadopsis from Victoria. Proc, R. Soc. Vict, 92, 93-97, Scorr, T. D. (1962) “The Marine and Freshwater Fishes of South Australia”. (Govt Printer, Adelaide). , GLOVER, C. J. & SoutTHcort, R. V. (1974) “The Marine and Freshwater Fishes of South Australia”, 2nd ed. (Govt Printer, Adelaide). WaLkerR, K. F, (1981) The effects of weirs on the environment of the lower River Murray. SAFIC 5(6), 26-29. (1982a) The plight of the Murray crayfish in South Australia. Redgum 6(1), 2-6. (1982b) Natural history of freshwater mussels in the River Murray. Proc. 17th Assembly Aust. Fresh Water Fishermen, 15-20, (1983) Impact of Murray-Darling Basin development on fish and fisheries. HAO Fish. Rep. 288, 139-149, (1985) A review of the ecological effects of river regulation in Australia, Hydrobiologia 125, 111-129. & Hitman, T. J. (1977) ‘Limnological Survey of the River Murray in Relation to Albury-Wodonga, 1973-76’. (Albury-Wodonga Development Corp., Albury & Gutteridge, Haskins & Davey, Melbourne). A NEW SPECIES OF SUEZICHTHYS (PISCES: LABRIDAE) FROM THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN BIGHT BY BARRY C. RUSSELL Summary A new species of labrid fish, Suezichthys bifurcatus sp. nov., is described from two specimens collected from the Great Australian Bight, off Western Australia. It is characterised by having 2/2 transverse scale rows above the lateral line; a low scaly sheath along the base of the dorsal and anal fins; and a black spot at the upper origin of the pectoral fin. It is distinct from all other species of Suezichthys in having lateral-line scales with a bifurcate canal tube. A NEW SPECIES OF SUEZTCHTHYS (PISCES: LABRIDAE) FROM THE GREAT AUSTRALIAN BIGHT by Barry C, RUSSELL* Summary Russet, B.C. (1986) A new species of SuesicAthys (Pisces: Labridae) from the Great Australian Bight. Trans. R, Sow. S. Aust. 1V0(2), 99-61, 30 May, 1986, A new species of labrid fish, Sveaichtiws bifurcarus sp. nov., is described [rom two specimens collected trom the Great Australian Bight, off Western Australia. fi is characterised by having 242 transverse scale rows above the lateral line; a low sealy sheath along the base of the dorsal and anal fins; and a black spot al the upper origin of the pectoral fin. 1 is distinct {rom all other species of Suezichdhys in having lateral- line scales with a bilurcate lateroasensory canal tube. Key Words: Pisces, Labridae, Suezievthys, new species, Great Australian Bight, Western Australia, Introduction Labrid fishes of the genus. Suvezich(hys Smith are relatively small (maximum standard length about 140 mim), colourful fishes distribuled widely throughout the tropical and temperate Lndo- W. Pacific. Most af the species inhabit shallow coastal reels but several are known only from trawl collections in offshore warers to depths of 170 m. Suerichthys is most closely related to Pseudolabrus Rleeker and Halichoeres Raippell. In @ recent revision of the genus Russell (1985) recognised eight species, including six species from temperate-subltropical Ausiralia. An additional Australian species has since come to my attention and is here deseribed as new. The new species is based on previously unidentified specimens in the South Australian Museum (SAMA), collected by the CSIRQ Fisheries Research Vessel “Soela” from the Great Australian Bight, off Western Australia. Methods Methods and definitions follow Russell & Randall (1981) and Russell (1985), Measurements were made ro the nearest one-tenth millimeter (mm). Length measurements are standard length (SL). In the deseription, data foe the paratype where differenr trom the holotype, are given in parentheses. Suezichthys bifurcatus sp. nov, FIGS 1-2 Holotype. SAMA F5037, 69.5 nim SL, Western Australia, Great Austealian Bight, "Soela” Cr. 03/81, si 5 (3420'S, 123°42 B-34°21'S, 123'43'B), 80m, bottom Lrawl, 26yii,198t, * Northern Teruory Museum, P.O. Box 4646, Darwin, NG 3794 Paralype; SAMA F5038, 79.L mm SL, Western Australia, Great Ausiralian Bight, “Socla” Cr 03/81, stn 23) (33°04'S, 127°12’E-33°04'S, 127°10'B), 92-98 m, bottom trawl, Lvili1981. Diagnosis; Laterosensory canal tubes bifurcates 242 transyerse scale rows above fateral line; low scaly Sheath along base of dorsal and anal! tins; black spot present at upper origin of pectoral fin. Description; Dorsal-lin rays LX, 11; anal-fin rays LIL, 10; caudal-fin rays 6 +24 124245; pectoral-fin rays WW, Il; pelvie-fin rays 1, 5; lateral-line scales partly missing, 25? in holotype (257 in paratype); transverse scale rows above lateral line 2!3; transverse Seale rows below lateral line 7! (scales missing in paratype); cheek scale rows behind eye 1; cheek scale rows below eye 2? (scales partly missing in both specimens); vertebrae 9+16; epipleural ribs extending to V.13; well-developed haemal arch formed only on V1); gill rakers on first arch 18 (16), Body depth 3.7 (3,3) in SL; head length 2.8 (2.7) in SL; snouth length 4.2 (4.1) in head length; diameter of orbit 3.6 (3.8) in head length; interorbital width 6.0 (8,8) in head length; suborbital depth 7.8 (8.2) in head length; dorsal fin length 1:8; first dorsal spine 4.5 (4.8) in head leneth; ninth dorsal spine 1.6 (1.3) times Jength of first; ninth or tenth dorsal ray longest, 1.0 (1,6) tinies length of ninth dorsal spine; anal fin length 1.3 (1,2) in SL; first anal spine 6.3 (7.0) in head length; third anal spine 1,6 (2) limes length of first; ninth anal ray longest, 1.3 U2) times length of third anal spine; pectoral fin length 1.6 (1.5) in head length; pelvic fin length 1.6 (1.8) in head length. Upper jaw with pair of enlarged, recurved canines anteriorly; 12-14 progressively smaller canine teeth laterally in upper jaw, with inner row of 6-8 small canines behind anteriormost teeth; elarged canine Gt) B. C, RUSSELL ae | 10 mm Vig. |, Swezichthys bifurcaius, Holotype, SAMA F5037, preserved in alcohol). at posterior end of upper jaw; lower jaw with 2 pair of enlarged anterior canines, second pair shorter (han first; 12-14 progressively smaller lateral teeth in lower jaw, with inner row of 3-4 small canines behind anteriormost teeth. Laterosensory canal tubes bifurcate; low scaly sheath at base of dorsal and anal fins; caudal fin truncate to slightly rounded. ons OO a a Fig. 2 69.5 mm SL. (drawing based on damaged specimen Colour (in alcohol): Holotype (Fig. 1) light brownish, pale on sides; faint dusky band from tip of snout to anterior margin of eye, continuing behind eye as dark brown, broken band running along midline of body to caudal peduncle; series of two or three dark brown spots behind eye immediately above first band, these joining an indistinct and irregular brownish band running se oe ~~ fe > Suetichrays bifurcatus, Paratype, SAMA FS038, 79.1 iam Sh NEW SPECIES OF SUEZICHTHYS 61 parallel above first band and terminating near end of dorsal fin; dark brown spot on nape and indefinite brown markings (scales missing) on scaly base of dorsal fin; distinct black spot at base of last two dorsal-fin rays, and indefinite black spot dorsally on caudal-fin base. Interspinous membrane of first two dorsal spines dusky, and indications of dusky submarginal band along fin; small black spot on upper pectoral-fin base. Paratype (Fig. 2) with faint dusky band from snout Lo eye, but otherwise lacking any bands along body; four to five brownish irregular spots along sealy base of soft dorsal fin, posteriormost spot slightly darker and extending onto base of last three dorsal-fin rays; blackish mark dorsally on caudal- fin base; first dorsal spine dusky; black spot on upper pectoral-fin base. Etymology: The name bifurcatus refers to the bifurcate laterosensory canal tube of this species. Comparisons: Suezichthys bifurcatus appears most closely related to S arguatus Russell and S. cyanolaemus Russell. These two species share the following combination of characters with S. bifurcatus: 24 transverse scale rows above the lateral line, a low scaly sheath at the base of the dorsal and anal fins, and a well-developed haemal arch associated only with the anterior caudal vertebra (V.10). S. bifurcatus is distinct from all of its congeners, however, in having lateral-line scales with a bifurcate laterosensory canal tube (versus simple, unbranched canal tube in other Suezichthys). Remarks: Known only from two specimens, both in poor condition, trawled in moderately deep water (80-98 m) from the Great Australian Bight, off Western Australia. Acknowledgements I thank Rudi H. Kuiter for drawing my attention to the presence of unidentified Suwezichthys specimens in the South Australian Museum, and John Glover, South Australian Museum, who made available the specimens for study. Martin F. Gomon, Museum of Victoria, kindly provided X- radiographs of S. bifurcatus. John R, Paxton and John E. Randall critically reviewed the manuscript. References RusseLi, B. C. (1985) Revision of the Indo-Pacific labrid fish genus Swezichthys, with descriptions of four new species. Indo-Pacific Fishes No, 2, 1-21. , & RANDALL, J. E. (1981) The labrid fish genus Pseudolabrus trom islands of the southeastern Pacitie, with description of a new species from Rapa. Pac. Sci. (1980) 34, 433-440, A NEW STREAM-DWELLING SPECIES OF LITORIA (ANURA: HYLIDAE) FROM NEW GUINEA BY MICHAEL J. TYLER, MARGARET DAVIES & KEN APLIN Summary Litoria exophthalmia sp. nov. is described from localities at elevations of 730-850 m on the southern face of the cordillera of mainland New Guinea. The species is of moderate size (34-39 mm), and characterised by protruding eyes, basally webbed fingers and by the lack of a vocal sac in the male. The species is morphologically so distinctive that it is regarded the unique representative of a separate species group. A NEW STREAM-DWELLING SPECIES OF L/TORIA (ANURA; HYLIDAE) FROM NEW GUINEA by MICHAEL J, TYLER*, MARGARET DAVIES* & KEN APLIN} Summary Tyier. M,, Davies. M. & Aptis, K, (1986) A new stream-dwelling species of Citar (Anura: Hylidae) from New Guinea. Trans, KR, Soc, 5, Aus, 110(2), 63-67, 30 May, L986, Litera exophthaliia sf. nov. \s deseribed {fom lovalities af elevations af 730-850 m an the southern face of the cordillera of mainland New Guinea. The species is of moderate size (males 34-39 mm), and characterised by protruding eyes, basally webbed fingers and by the lack of a vocal sac in the male, The species is Morpholowcally su distinctive (hati (Ss regarded lle UN ue represenlutive Of @ Sepanale species vy roup. Key Worps: hylid, frog, morphology, osteology, Literia, new species. Introduction Herpetologists Working on New Guinea hytids are aware of the existence of a large number of undescribed species, Delay in resolving the bio- logical and morphological characters distinguishing closely related undescribed taxa (e.g, in the Liloria bicolor species-zroup where al least six ew species awail definition; Menzies & Tyler, unpubl) is a major contributing factor. However, the reeent deseription of a new species of Lifaria from Irian Jaya (Tyler & Davies, 1983) brought the total described species of Liforia known from New Guinea to 53. Here we describe a species which is so distinctive morphologically that it can be distinguished readily from all congeners and can be assigned to a separate species-group (sensu Tyler & Davies, 1978). Materials and Methods The specimens reported here are housed in the: Australian Museum (AM), National Museum and Art Gallery, Papua New Guinea (NMA) and South Australian Museum (SAM). Methods of measurement follow Tyler (1968), Measuretiients taken (in mm) Were: snout-lo-verit lenuth (S-V)y tibia length (TL); head length (HL); head width (P{W); cye-lo-naris distunce (E-N), internarial span (IN); eye diameter (E). ‘The format of the osteological deseriprion follows Lrueb (1979), Cleared und stained specimens were prepared using the techniques of Davis & Gore (1947) ane Dingerkus & Uhler (1977). Litoria evophthatitia sp, voy. FIGS 1-7 Haloivpe: AM R114751, an adult male obtained by K. Aplin on l4i.l984 at Haia village (6°42°S, * Dept of Zoology, Universiny of Advlaide, G.P.0 Bax 448, Adelaide, 5. Aust. S001. { School of Zoolowy, University of NSW. G.PO. Baw 1 Kensington, NSW. 2033. 145°00'B), South Simbu Province, Pupusa New Guinga, Definition; A moaderale-sized species (males 34.4-39.0 min), with basal webbing of the fingers, extensively webbed toes and protruding eyes. The male lacks a yocal sac. Description of holoivpe: Head slightly broader than long (HL/HW (1.97). Head length 0.37 snout-vent length. Snout prominent, slightly rounded when viewed from above, and truncated in profile (Fig. 1). Nostrils almost entirely lateral. Eye-to-naris distance grealer than internattal span (E-N/1N 1.17). Nostals much nearer to end of snout than eve, Canthus rostralis slightly curved and well defined. Eye large and protruberant (Figs |, 2), its diameter greater than distance separating it from nostril. Tympanum Prominent! and with narrow annulus, tympanum diameter 2/5 length of eve. Vomerine teeth on two large elevations between posterior margins of choanac. Tongue moderate and broadly oval. Vingers short, with moderate lateral [rinwes; finger lengths 3>4>2>1; terminal dises large (Mig. 3A). Web confined to base between (hird and fourrh fingers. reaching midway up the antepenultimate phalanx on fourth finger. Other fingers unwebbed, Hindlegs maderately long (tibia length/S-V 0.54); toe lengths 4>3>5>2>1. Web reaches midway on penultimate phalanges of thircl arid tytth toes, and the base of (he penultimate phalana of lourth Loe, continuing to each dise via narrow (rifwes (Fig. 3B). A small oval inner and no detectable outer metatarsal juberele. Skin of dorsum and lateral surtaces simooth. 4 narrow supratympame fold extending inferiorly beyond superior margin of tympanic annulus. No dermal folds on posterior margin of linibs. Distiner small tubergle on heel) paired, larwer tubercles beneath vent, Posterior surface of thighs smoarh In preservative dorsum yery pale brown wilh diffuse darker markings, Ventral surface creamish brown. 64 M. J. TYLER, M. DAVIES & K. APLIN Fig. I. A, lateral and B, dorsal views of the head of Litoria exophthalmia (Holotype). livanlinial Fig. 2. Holotype of Litoria exophthalmia sp. nov. Scale = | cm . Vocal sac absent. Large single nuptial pad on first digit. Dimensions (in mm): Snout-to-vent length 35.5; tibia length 19.5; head length 13.2; head width 13.7; tympanum diameter 2.2; eye width 5.5; eye-naris distance 3.8; internarial span 3.3. Variation: There are 14 paratypes: AM R114729, 114732, 114748 (cleared and stained), 114749, 114752-56; NMA UP7078; SAM R27831 (cleared and stained), 27832, taken at the type locality; AM R114758, Haia bush camp, 880 m, 6°40'S, 145°01'E, obtained on 19.iv.1985. All of the paratypes are adult males bearing pigmented nuptial pads. Snout-vent length ranges Fig. 3. A, palmar view of hand and B, plantar view of foot of Litoria exophthalmia (Holotype). 34.4-39.0 mm. Morphometric data obtained from the series are: TL/S-V 0.55-0.61, HL/HW 0.96-1.01, HL/S-V 0.34-0.39, E-N/IN 1.13-1.39. The only noteworthy feature in which there is variation involves the coloration. Several specimens exhibit darker markings upon the pale ground colour. In AM R114749 there is an hourglass-shaped patch on the head extending along the middle of the back. It commences across the centre of the head and upper eyelids and reaches posteriorly to the vicinity of the sacrum. This patch is composed of an area of sparse black stippling bounded by a continuous row of small, black spots. In this specimen, and others with less clearly defined dark markings, the tibiae bear broad bands of dark brown upon a paler background. The skin of the ventral surface is partly trans- parent and internal organs can be seen through the skin and body wall. NEW LITORLA FROM NEW GUINEA 6S Fig, 4, A, dorsal and B, ventral view of skull of Literta exophuhalmio (AM RL14733). Svale bar=5 nm. Osteology: Skull well ossified. Sphenethmoid well ossified extending between vomers ventrally and between nasals dorsomedially almost to level of medial exiremities of nasals; curved laterally to accommodate posterior edges of nasals with slight overlap of Jateral sphenethmoid (Fig. 4A). Prootic and exoccipitals compietely fused, Exoccipitals joined vertromedially by calcified plate, Crista parotica long, very slender, overlapped laterally by expanded otic ramus of squamosal. Frontoparietal fontanelle extensive; posterior extremities defined by medial calcified plate formed between poorly assified (rontoparietal elements (Fig. 4A). Anterior margin of [rontopariezal fontanelle formed by sphenethmoid at level of anterior extremity af anterior ramus of pterygoid; posterior margin slightly anterior to level of anterior extremities of epiohe eminences, Nasals very broad, displaced laterally such that medial edges orient anteriorly (Fig. 4A), Maxillary process long and slender, in bany contact with posterior extremity of exiremely deep pars facialis of maxillary. Palatines moderately long, expanded laterally, ridged and tapering acutely medially to overlie sphenethmoid posteriorly to vomerine (eeth (Fig. 4B). Cultriform process of parasphenoid very robust, slender and digitiform anteriorly; broad medially. Alae long, slender, very slightly angled posterolajerally; overlapped laterally by medial rami of prerygoids, Plerygoid robust. Medial ramus long, unexpanded, acuminate: amterior ramus long, slender anteriorly, in lane contact sath poorly developed pterygoid process of palatal shelf of maxillary; low truncate process dorsally-on medial ramus at proximal extremivy (Fig. $A). Quadrato- jugal slender, in long contact with maxillary. Squamosal moderately robust, Zygomatic rans moderately long and slender. Otic ramus broadly expanded distally. Culcilied projection forming an anteroproximal edge of shaft reaching dorsal proximal process on medial ramus of pteryeoid (Fig. 5A), Maxillary and premasillary inclined slightly laterally; perpendicular to pars dentalis. Palatine processes of premanillaries yery short (Fig. 4B). Vomers entire; dentigerous processes short, horizontal to palate; right provess missing in this specimen, Bony columella present. Processus coronoideus of mandible not hooked, Hyoid plate very short, Alary processes pedun- culate. Posteromedial processes ossified with proximal endochondral ossification encroaching upon the hyoic plitte such thal anteromedial exiremices of provesses confluent (Fig. 5B). Cricoid ring complete. Pectoral girdle arciferal and robust. Omosernum and Niphisternum present: clavieles moderately Slender, curved; coracoids moderately robust. Bicapilate scapula greater in length than elavicles. Suprascapula about |/3 ossified. Eight proeoelous, non-imbrigate, presacral vertebrae, Relative widths of transverse processes lil>sacrum>IV>Il>V-VI-VII-VIIL Sacral diapophyses poorly expanded. Urostyle bicondylar wilh dorsal crest extending aboul 2/3 iis length, Pubis caleified, Ital crest absent (Fig. 6A), Dorsal prominence lateral, well developed (Fig. 6B). Dersal protuberance slightly anrerolateral on prominence. 66 M. J. TYLER, M. DAVIES & kK. APLIN Fig. 5. A, anterior view of left posterolateral portion of Skull of Literta exaparhalmia (AM R114733); B, Hyoid apparalus of Litoria exophihalmia (AM R14733), ventral view, A Fig. 4. A, lateral and B, dorsal view of pelvis of Lireria exophihalmia (AM RI[473), Phalangeal formula of hand 2,2,3,3. Terminal phalanges clawed, intercalated structures cartila- einous, Well developed prepollex. Radiale, ulnare, os centrale postaxiale and os centrale preaxiale present (Fig. 7A), Phalangeal formula of foot 2,2,3,4,3; small bony prehalluy, Os distale rarsale 1, 2 and 3 present (Fig. 7B). Variation: Comparison of AM R114733 with a second cleared. and stained specimen (SAM R27831) reveals minimal variation, Variation observed involved slightly less overlap of the Crista parotica region by the otic ramus, and greater calcification (possibly ossification) of the yenteromedial process of the squamosal shaft. The endochondral encroachment of the postero- medial processes an the hyoid plate was slightly less extensive so that the [Wo bones are not confluent medially in SAM R2783), Habitar’ The two localities at Which the species was obtained are 3.5 km apart, on the eastern side of Fin. 7. Dorsal views of bones of A, hand and B, foot of Litoria exophthalmiu (AM R11473). the Nimi River. Most of the specimens were collected at night in low vegetation overhanging streams, and it wasin fact the most common species encountered there, The (oor of the streams were of sand, mud or exposed rock, and in some areas the streams were choked with leaf litter. The area was heavily forested, with an understory of numerous small saplings and oecasional palms, Fivmology: The specific name is derived from the Greek exophrhalmes meaning “with bulging or protruding eyes”, In the local Pawaian language as spoken al Haia, the species is called “Nonoli”. Comparison with other species: The combination of short, basally webbed fingers, protruding eyes, lack of a vocal sac in males and form of squaniosal and pterygoid processes are a suite of features not shared by any congener, and render the species so distinctive that we consider it the sole representative of a separate species-group (Tyler & Davies, 1978), Lack of a vocal sac is shared amongst Papuan Litoria by 1. eucnemis and L. genimaculata bowh of which can be distinguished by the less prominent eyes, their possession of crenulated dermal ridges on the posterior edges of the limbs and, commonly, more extensive finger webbing. Litoria exophthalmia also exhibits proliferation of ossification upon the posterior margin of the hyoid plate, a feature associated with vocal sae loss in hylid frogs (Tyler, 1972), Parasites: A series of parasites was obtained trom the body cavity of the type series and have been NEW LITORIA FROM NEW GUINEA 47 examined by Dr D. Spratt. They include a number of nematodes identified as a species of Wartonella (Filariodea), probably undescribed, and some encapsulated pentastomids probably representing Porocephalus, and also considered likely to be undescribed. Acknowledgments The fieldwork leading to the discovery of Litoria exophthalmia was funded in part by National Geographic Society Grant No. 2699-83 to Dr M. Archer of the University of New South Wales. K,A. was also in receipt of a Joyce Vickery Award from the Linnaean Society of New South Wales. Laboratory studies in Adelaide were funded by the University of Adelaide. We are grateful to Dr David Spratt of the CSIRO Division of Wildlife and Rangelands Research for prompt examination and comments on the parasites. For assistance and hospitality at Haia, K.A. wishes to thank Jack and Isa Douglas of the New Tribes Mission and the Yasa people in residence during his stay. We thank Lorna Lucas for typing the manuscript. References Davis, D, D. & Gore, Y. R. (1947) Clearing and staining skeletons of small vertebrates. Fieldiana; Techniques (4), 1-16. DINGERKUS, G. & Unirer, L. D, (1977) Enzyme clearing of alcian blue stained whole small vertebrates for demonstration of cartilage. Stain Technol. 52, 229-231. Truce, L. (1979) Leptodactylid frogs of the genus Telmatobius in Ecuador with the description of a new species. Copeia 1979, 714-733. Tyier, M. J. (1968) Papuan hylid frogs of the genus Hyla, Zool. Verhand. 96, 1-203. (1972) Endochondral ossification of the hyoid plate in Australo-Papuan hylid frogs. Zool, Anz. 189, 331-336. & Davies, M. (1978) Species groups within the Australopapuan hylid frog genus Litoria Tschudi. Aust. J. Zool. Suppl. Ser. 63, 1-47. & (1983) A new species of Litorte (Anura: Hylidae) from Irian Jaya, New Guinea. Copeia 1983(3), 803-808. REEF FISH POPULATIONS OF THE INVESTIGATOR GROUP, SOUTH AUSTRALIA: A COMPARISON OF TWO CENSUS METHODS BY K. L. BRANDEN, G. J. EDGAR & S. A. SHEPHERD Summary Fish populations were censused at five islands or reefs in the Investigator Group mainly in 1982 and 1983. The distribution of abundance of species was examined by visual census along belt transect lines and by recording the log abundances of fishes observed for a fixed time period in a variety of habitats. REEF FISH POPULATIONS OF THE INVESTIGATOR GROUP, SOUTH AUSTRALIA: A COMPARISON OF TWO CENSUS METHODS by K, L, BRANDEN*, G, J. EDGART & S. A. SHEPHERD* Summary Brasprn, K. L., Epcar, G. J. & SHEPHERD, S. A, (1986) Reef fish populations of the Investigator Group, South Australia: a comparison of two census methods. Trans, R, Sov, 8, Aust. 1L0(2), 69-76, 30 May, 1986, Fish populations were censused at five islands or reefs in the Investigator Group mainly in 1982 and 1983. The distribution of abundance of species was examined by visual census along belt transect lines and by recording (he log abundances of fishes observed for a fixed time period in a variety of habitats. The belt transect method gives consistent and hence repeatable results although it does not completely sample the fish community. Log abundance counts yield more species per site because the diver covers a larger area and presumably samples more habitats. The later method therefore seems most suitable for preliminary survey work. Key Worpbs: Reef fishes, census methods, Great Australian Bight. Introduction The composition and structure of reef fish communities are an important aspect of reef ecology, but have been largely neglected in southern Australian temperate waters. Most reefs are subject to spearfishing to varying extents (Johnson 1985a, b) so that there are few places where unexploited fish assemblages occur. Cruises to the N ... Hotspot fc MI 23 ‘© Ward Is S21 a Flinders |. 21 Pearson Is. Veteran Is. « a Q Dorothea I. Investigator Group of islands in the eastern Great Australian Bight from 1982 to 1985 gave the oppor- tunity to census reef fishes at places which are rarely fished (Fig. 1), Baseline information on these fish assemblages will be useful both in providing a general picture of the abundance of reef fishes in this poorly known region and as a comparison with mainland sites which are exploited by man. This Watchers ° Cp West Coast Waldegrave Is. (Mainland) Waterloo Bay eT opgailant Is. s Fig. J. Islands of the Investigator Group with location of censuses * Department of Fisheries, 135 Pirie St, Adelaide, S. Aust. S000. + CSIRO P.O. Box 20, North Beach, W.A, 6020 70 K. L. BRANDEN, G, J. EDGAR & S. A. SHEPHERD study supplements that of Kuiter (1983) who recorded 90 species of fish from this group of islands, Elsewhere, fish species’ lists have been given by Last (1979) and Kuiter (1981) for the Kent Group in Bass Strait, and Edgar (1984) for other Tasmanian locations. In this paper we use two visual census methods to provide data on the abundance of fishes at numerous islands in the Group and compare the relative effectiveness of each. Materials and Methods Two methods were used to census fish. 1. Log-Abundance Counts The diver swam at a constant speed along a predetermined depth contour ‘sampling’ a variety of habitats, and recorded on a slate the numbers of fish of each species seen during a 30 minute swim. Numbers were recorded on a log; abundance scale, i.e. Scale Numbers Scale Numbers 1 1 5 10-27 2 2-3 6 28-81 3 4-9 7 >243 4 10-27 The method is described in greater detail by Edgar (1981). 2. Belt transect A 50 m surveyor’s tape was placed on the sea bed perpendicular to the depth contours of the reef. The diver swam along one side of the tape and returned along the other, recording on a slate the identity and size of each fish within an estimated band width of 5 m bordered by the tape. The method is described by Quast (1968) and can be carried out much more rapidly than the original double line transect of Brock (1954). It has been used by a number of authors, including Russell (1977) and Willan er a/, (1979) in New Zealand, and gives an estimate of the numbers of fish in an area of 500 m* covered by the census. Sale & Douglas (1981) considered the method gave reasonably precise and repeatable results, although its precision in terms of species or numbers does not exceed about 80%. In order to compare replicate censuses at one site and censuses in different years at the same site the percent similarity (PS) index was calculated as follows: PS=_2” where A is the sum of the A+B ‘ P . measures for all species in one sample, B is the similar sum for all measures in the second sample, and W is the sum of the lesser measures for each species occurring in both samples. The measure used is log transformed (n+1) numbers. This transformation reduces the effect of a few very abundant species which would otherwise swamp an analysis (Field & McFarlane 1968). The measure has been used for visual census data by Sale & Douglas (1981). To determine if an optimal number of censuses existed, the increase in PS values and in number of species by stepwise pooling of censuses were computed for the data at Topgallant I. PS values for all possible combinations of censuses were calculated and the means and standard errors obtained. PS comparisons were between pooled censuses (from 1-5) and all censuses combined, Site Descriptions Topgallant I. The lee of this island drops sharply to a depth of about 30 m where broken rock and sand occur. At the site studied large, irregular limestone boulders lie scattered down the slope, and bear algal assemblages dominated by Ecklonia_ radiata, Acrocarpia paniculata, Cystophora spp or Sargassum spp as described for Pearson I. by Shepherd & Womersley (1971). Hotspot This is an extensive submerged reef, with several peaks awash at low water. Site I is on creviced granite bottom with high relief (to 5 m) of blocks and boulders. Sites 2-4 are of moderate relief (1-2 m) with numerous blocks and boulders. All sites are exposed to considerable wave energy from swell. Algal assemblages are as described for Topgallant I. Ward I. Site 1 is on sloping granite bottom of low relief. Site 2 is partly rubble or boulder bottom, partly of high relief (to 3 m) platforms, heavily undercut to form caves and overhangs. Site 3 is similar to Site 2 but with a greater proportion of low boulders. Site 1 is exposed to strong swell and Sites 2 and 3 to moderate swell. Algal assemblages are as described above. Pearson 1. All sites have sloping granite bottom. Site | has many blocks and boulders I-3 m high, Site 2 has many blocks up to 2 m high and Sites 3-6 have generally low relief with occasional boulders up to 1 m high, Wave energy from swell decreases from Site 1 (high) to 6 (low), Algal assemblages are as described above. 7 REEF FISH CENSUS METHODS rar tl ct 9 9 8 8 8 118 tI 6 RL St st OL Ot 1 i ! t 1 ot t i t tr Eats so oF | t 1 ¢ t £ 7 L a ra £ E Ff tT Tt se: $ cog gS SS 6 roS bt oF ror t ra [ tt ae —e | Zz of [ br OF zt f¢ gS ££ Loe Pf st bE & £ ( I ror pos t T I rd t 7 tot | \ s 49 9 Ss 9 t ‘ | t T Tc Ff YY 9 9 Y | £ ¢ Sof Et gs | ra tt t I | ro rl ££ Qos % -S i of Sof l if & I ae | i | ONS ants ONS aus ch/t/pl cay P/E ER/ PY TT es /r/ol 1LOdSLOH “TL OuvM | SHSQNITA g 8 B 8B Qt Of 4% €F T rd Ci&.0 £ t+ & F Ff t PAN oS Tr. J ef I t zc tet § AMET ws 5 oo YG roe rf Pf T AGEL FOS ! bt of 1 tr t+ fr FP fr &) £ | of fh ¢ FF £ € { ¢ ft | E t FP t zt ot Tt So ee EES § { ra 9 5 § 9 boreitl fp ¢€ f£ EOE fF £ AOR] as tod e Ek SP £ spe s I e g s I 9 § £ TF aus ERSP/R L NOSHVad VETOUULVUOVOUUUULULT moa SvoLveevc=ze ~ y2us Vu veaua adfj Bulpaas ysysuq Jayjnd panods anyy YS MOD sanys ysyxog yoeqduiny jayaRriiaylRayy sading ay saris TayoRLVY EIT AOys-assopYy joyorayiws 7] pauy-anig Taydeliay Pay Paul|-MolaA jayseluayiRay Yysnig yoo] laypehayieay ysnoy jyehayesyT] paymy Aujds FUIIY AY PII pasou-duRYyS TUTIY AL PAM ASOU-ptgy Ys waguley ayr_y Rutwsapy assy soy ASSEL yy PAIPOINI-2NiA YSLpsOIBUAS assPIM panlods yaryg Ayoq Ana PASEL MA ORLY Jadoiy ang Ul Appag ULpPMy | WOMIOD yinoy Awwoy Yalaq adBopy soddeug usangy USIBUOLIS ysydiay AYO 4a ayty YsjjEIO > JOYANUOOY daams popurg daamg Bag JWG Ysyriqa?y dary Bag SUNIY AY AMOaNy Fury USUEINH BaunpGON aad enyg (paag aaqueg Yuad Rag popury Ysijtnog paimous-du0 7 WIM PIO ATTRAALL D¥lq Pauly Fuoy YSIPRUIPAN Laynog yayeor ada-s]]Ng UOUIIOD UORRIC] RAS saddrugs pay Jaddeus |IP1-MoyRag ABy apaeq AWEU HOWLUOD “DAN yUEI = SUOALLIPD OY UAG= > AtOMUMIO-—C ALOAIQIAY = H ‘Salis SMatiba [Pp aauNpuNngY say fo sijnsaa yrim (u1) yidacy sajaads jo laquinyy (Jayiuansy) nyninds sdaz0ayo05 (SUIIINE, FW APB) S/OJoUNdOUNAD DIOYdOsauC) (MEYS) Mino puPIDIY (UOSPLEY NY) xaynoanuay so2o;dou Pp SUIYDINY DySMueA “fy (purer 2p Aongy) srdawveddiy py (Alig A) 170% “yy SUNINF, Olpawyorns, pruayosnapy (Neuapses) sat Psdlaiad (MEYS) SHOpNMa SAY TYAIH YON (uOspaey oy) saMasy seuedig (19S) syuyund “4 (UOUYOL) laWoppag snynUaouoydis (uosparyary) sayndeson -¢ UOSpPUPYaY snyatoUnd? xOPC UOSPABYatY Sninonyisd UOsPURIANY snoujay Snaynjopnasy (MOSPsRyay) Sayama) sMsqi ne (APA}IEIN) SHO) MODWE SHIQnposIsn ES (NRUAPSD) NtaMUAIND Snsquiniag NAUUAIIUA[RA W LIAN sMnpoany) sidajauryida (UOSpIeYy oly) HpEyNagy Snposaoyay (aayinant) aanojod Dutdng (Aqiicy W Kesey) sdeaneris myjason SSULAINUIIP A WD ASIAN SHuPIAOas sida HOSPURYOIY Sadan SnpApaopojTay> (Fa) ty AA) (SaUMaoUaDA Sn} ODPDUEaN (UOSPJPYOIY) SeMaae PLOYdoR20E7 JOA sMuMAGad smiuauntYy >) (NevaT St >) SNMOMMOgiatY byANbADe (ay) SHDOW sdaNowjayy UOspiRyory wininiasn[ xvas MATA SBUUAINUATE A WW DANS SNUPIaOeR “§ uospipyary sruudinban sidings (ay uanny) smundauprs snsoyday (UOSPIEY ry) Ovga> npjasy (uospseysty) syapiain snsunsopcj20q (SauUaIUAyE A W IRIAND) smpjaund sapowranyrys AAOYD andunjsnow sdourysniy (suaad) Sanaa sdotsajdDsng (uospieyory) Jasnd pavadoisany (SAULATDUAIEA W IAIAND) MimMQnsossu saposjoajdodayy (UOSPIBYAY) STPNOsAINIas SISMOIAID J Udef (ANY AA) Stimisn snsajdoug SauUaUayE A Xasvap XUPINIOpNAyy (WJ) IMay saisayourg (4auIZUNTY) Osvadsuos miyuaout 4 SAUUDIUALHA W Jaan weuUOA SAYIYaNad| JASUIZUNTY SIMIAN Staayduadey (apadaoe]) smsayoiwant KAsaidoyaye (aaywany) Ipioiwed “5 (SaUMAIIMALEA ZW LIAND) Smyoauy xtaaqgosiuad AmAPEPY SDUISND supQO Cy SEU dy NUaINS WANS IY TUNE Paasayya sarrads ysl fO IST] “TAN, n Flinders I. The sites investigated by loz abundance count here were close together. The bottom is relatlyely level with patches of sand and a lew large (3-4 m), overlapping blocks forming caves. Wave exposure is low relative to the other sites, The algal assemblages are dominated by Cystephora spp and Sargassum spp, Results. A species list, with common names, of fish observed on the various censuses is given in Table 1, together with che results of the log abundance counts for various sites, One species nol seen by Kuicer (1983) Le. Deetylosurgus aretidens (Richardson) was recorded at Pearson 1, The grealesl number of species sighted during half hour periods were recorded at Pearson [. and the fish faunas at the Hotspot were found to be the least diverse, Whether changes in diversity are a function of topographic complexity, walter movement, algal standing crop, or a combination of these and other factors is impossible to determine without additional censuses. The belt transeet counts of the lish species, anc their mean estimated lengths, are given in ‘Tables kK. L. BRANDEN, G, J, BDGAR & 8, A, SHEPHERD 2-6 for Topgallant [,, Hotspot, Ward |,, and Person J, respectively, Replicate censuses of the abundances and size structures of fish species observed along a single belt transect line show close correspondence, regardless of whether they were carried out by different divers or the same diver (PS =0,72 for census on 10.iv,1983 al Topgallant 1, (Table 2), and PS=0.74 at Site 2 and 0.77 at Site 3. Ward 1. (Table 4); PS=0,7) at Site 1 and 0,65 at Site 4, Hotspot (Table 3)), Even PS values at the same site between years were quite high (mean PS 0,66, 5.¢.=0.06 for all between year comparisons of censuses at Topgallant [,), The increase in cumulative number of species and in PS values by stepwise pooling of censuses (Fig, 2) shows in Gach case even curves without breakpoints. After the first 2 or 3 censuses species accumulate more or less evenly by the addition of chance sightings of mostly individual wandering species. Further sampling would presumably lead to level- ling, out of these curves. The numbers of fish species sighted during the belt transects were significantly correlated with the depth range, and hence gradient, of the transects (Fig. 3, r=0.56; P < 0,05). In this analysis, whenever a transect was duplicated the mean Tanie 2. Resulis of belt (runseci censuses al Topgaltant I, a» number of fish sighted; X=estimated mean length. Date Surveyed 1/4/82 29/4/82 10/4/83 10/4/83 21/4/85 21/4/85 Depth Range 5-17 m s-17m 6-17 in 6-17 6-17 6-17 m Diver KB KB GE. KBE kB KB nH oMem) on Xen) of xfem) of tem) on (em) no oxen) Centroberyvs gerrurdi 2 25 4 2 2 Ww «28 2 045 Pempheris multiradiatus 1 8 l 10 14s 3 12 (93 2 PL klungingerd tt Ww | 15 Upeneichihys vlamingit 2 8 Dinolestes lewini | 15 Caexioperca lepidaptera 1 VW 6 15 5° OW 34 7) OB 12 #2 065 Paraplesinps meleagris } 25 Trachinops nourlunvae 9 Kk &3 10» =tSS & 241 x YU 7 150 6 Girella zebra 9 26 8 21 2 25 4 s 16 23 it 23 Ayphosus. sydnevyanus 1 2S Seurpis qequipinnes 0 26 (0 1s 6 19 Hw li lh 28 12) 18 Vinculum sexfasciatunt 1 25 3 25 I 23 3 20 Chelmanoeps truncatus 2 20 ae. | 3°48 Dactylophera nigricans I 30) a” 38 Nemadacrylus valenciennest 3 47 i ab 3 Ww Cheiladactvlus nigripes 2 40) | 25 2 Ws 4 27 5 35 4 27 Parma victoriae 2 18 i \3 3.7 5 49 9 8 9 1b Athoerodus youtledii { 3| 3 al 1 WwW 4+ 654 2 43 1 50 Detalahrus auraniaens ! 15 Austrolabrus maculatus 2 45 Pictilabrus laticlavius 2 is I 2 a TI 2 AS i 10 2 2 Pyeudotubrus letricus 8 7 16 " 20 19 Ma 24 [2 24 lo = 38 Odax cranomelas t aw 7 Bit) f, 21 QO veroptilus I 5 Siphanaenuthus beddanrwei 4 15 S_ cuninus a 8 Meuschenia Jlavalineate 2 WwW ! 3M) 4 Gl 4 9) M. hippocrepis 2 2k 1 A) 1 30 2 4 NUMBER OF SPECIES 20 20) \4 i2 15 if oS REEF FISH CENSUS METHODS TABLE 3. Results of belt transect censuses at Hotspot, n=number of fish sighted; x=estimated-mean length. Site Number 1 ] Date Surveyed 1/4/82 13/4/83 Depth Range 13-14 m 13-14 m Diver KB GE n x(em) n x(cm) Pempheris multiradiatus l 15 Upeneichythys vlamingii ! 15 10 13 Caesioperca rasor 5 18 1 15 Girella zebra 1 25 Scorpis aequipinnis 5 26 Vineulum sexfasciatum 2 25 Parequula melbournensis 3 13 Dactvlophora nigricans | 7) Cheilodactylus nigripes ] 25 2 4] Parma victoriae 2 20 Achoeredus gouldii 3 68 2 61 Ophthalmolepis linealatus 1 30 Pictilabrus laticlavius 4 18 2 23 Pseudolabrus tetricus 5 22 11 28 Odax cyanomelas 2 28 O. acroptilus 2 15 Siphonognathus beddomei Meuschenia venusta I 18 M, hippocrepis 1 25 Aracana aurila NUMBER OF SPECIES 11 13 1 4 4 13/4/83 14/4/83 14/4/83 12-14 m 11-15 m 1-15 m GE GE GE =x(cm) n x(cm) nm x(cm) 5 20 1 15 | 10 1 10 ] 30 1 25 6 1S ! 15 4 34 1 25 i] 25 I 61 I 30) 6 24 é 2) 4 20 15 28 4 32 6 31 10 12 2 15 1 18 1 30 1 20 13 6 5 TABLE 4. Results of belt transect censuses at Ward J. n=number of fish sighted; x=estimated mean length, Site Number 4 2 2 3 3 Date Surveyed 31/3/82 12/4/83 12/4/83 12/4/83 12/4/83 Depth Range 20-27 m 4-12 m 4-12 m 9-12 m 9-12 m Diver KB KB GE KB GE n x({cm) mn x(¢m) mn = -x(erm) n= x(em) n x(cm) Myliobatis australis 1 230 I 150 | 230 Pempheris multiradiatus 60 8 25 13 15 13 24 13 Upeneicthys vlamingii | 15 2 13 2 1S 2 19 Caestoperca rasor | 20 2 18 1 20 ! 15 Paraplesiops meleagris | 20 Trachinops noarlungue 1 8 9 5 Girella zebra 1 25 Scorpis aequipinnis 40) 20 I 15 7 17 | 15 Vinculum sexfasciatum 2 6 Parequula melbournensis 3 10 2 9 8 a 13 9 13 13 Cheilodactylus nigripes § 22 4 34 2 25 3 29 Parma victoriae 5 15 3 21 2 15 | 2 Achverodus gouldii 2 44 7 37 3 44 5 42 3 42 Pictilabrus laticlavius 1 20 10 ia 12 20 in| 21 9 22 Pseudolabrus tetrieus 14 21 3 25 21 19 {2 25 Odax cyanomelas 3 27 z 28 2 28 2 33 Siphonognathus beddamei 1 Ww Bigener brownii 2 25 | 30 Penicipelta vittiger i 25 Meuschenia hippocrepis 2 24 | 30 NUMBER OF SPECIES 5 15 15 15 at number of fish was used to avoid pseudoreplication (see Hurlburt, 1984), The steeper transects showed grealer species richness, presumably because they incorporated overhanging rocks, and hence cave dwelling fish species (e.g. Pempheris multiradiatus, Pempheris klunzingeri,. Centroberyx gerrardi), and because habitats change relatively rapidly with depth. However, an unusually low fish species richness was found along a moderately steep transect at Site 1, Ward |. (see Table 4 and Fig. 3). 74 kK. L. BRANDEN, G. J. EDGAR & S. A. SHEPHERD 100 20 PERCENT SMMLARITY (Pa) . s : 4 MUMGER OF CENBUBES Fig. 2. Percentage similarity and mean number of species between pooled censuses (from 1-5) and all censuses combined for belt transect data at Topgallant [. Vertical bars are standard errors. This transect was the only one carried out in water depths greater than 20 m, suggesting that deeper environments may be more homogeneous than those in shallow water. Unlike the log abundance counts, there are only minor differences in the fish species richness of the bell transects between different localities in the Investigator Group (Table 6). Discussion The abundance of large fishes, such as the blue groper (Achoerodus gouldii) which was recorded in 20 ec Y=3.39+ 0.63% Ri=0.56 P«0.06 16 x g me rT we x a 42 ee 5 . . re) o 3 x = 4 4 2 4 6 a jo. 12 DEPTH(m) Fig. 3. Plot of number of species against depth range of the belt transect for all sites. 15 out of 18 belt transects, shows that these reefs are rarely visited by spear-fishermen. These data are therefore a record of fish abundances in virtually unexploited conditions. The two census methods produce quite different information about reef fish assemblages. The log abundance count provides a quick estimate of the relative abundances of the major fish species in an TABLE 5. Results of belt transect censuses at Pearson I, n=number of Jish sighted; x= estimated mean length. 2 4 Site Number Date Surveyed 27/3/82 27/3/82 27/3/82 27/3/82 Depth Range 10-20 m 10-20 m 5-ll m 7-10 m Diver KB KB KB n= x(cm) nm x(cm) nh x(em) n x(erm) Pempheris multiradiatus 30 15 3 15 Upeneichthys vlamineli 3 14 2 25 Pseudocaranx dentex 20 30 Caesioperca rasor 28 15 38 18 10 4 12 13 Trachinops noarlungae 170 8 Girella zebra 14 30 2 25 43 12 K\phosus sydneyanus 40 25 Scorpis aequipinnis 52 20 8 26 in] 30 Vinculum sexfascialum 1m 25 1 25 ] 30 Parequula melbournensis 25 13 Dactylophora nigricans | 38 Nemadactylus valenciennesi 4 38 1 30 Cheilodactvlus nigripes 5 30 Arripis georgianus 100 18 Parma victoriae I 20 1 20 | 13 Achoerodus gauldii a 64 2 56 2 20 Pictilabrus laticlavius 10 20 2 18 Pseudolabrus tetricus 8 20 6 24 9 26 5 24 P. psittaculus 1 8 Oduax evanomelas 3 6 O. acroptilus 1 20 Penicipelta vittiver I 20 Meuschenia flavolineata 5 23 3 20 8 28 2 25, M. fhippocrepis 3 25 ay 20 NSUMBER OF SPECIES 16 10 10 12 REEF FISH CENSUS METHODS 75 TAR A. Capipanson af niedn neriber (with slundard deviations) a” fish species at different sites by iwo methads. d= dara. Log abundance caunt (30) tins) Bell Transeet Topgallant Islands 16.5 (4.1) ned. Hatspot 9.6 (3.8) 13.3 (4.2) Ward Islands 12.2 (44) 21.5 (4,9) Pearson Islands 12.0 (2,8) 27.0 (2.9) Winders Island n.d, 15.7 (0.6) area, and js thus useful for camparing the fish communities at different localities. Log abundance counts give larger species lists because the diver covers a larger area and can sample more habitals. The area searched by a diver (assuming a bund width of 5 m is searched) was found by Shepherd (1985) to be 103 po* min |, 2iVing a mean coverage of 3090 m* in 30 minutes, compared with 500 m? by a belt transect which takes more than |wie that time Although the belt transect method shows signifi- cant differences in fish species richness between sites with different bottom gradients, it tells little about overall diversity differences between sites, Belt Iranserts are useful nevertheless because they provide quantitative information abour fish abundanves and size structures which can be used for estimating the fish standing srock (see Willan ef al, 79). Such estimates, hawever, are approximate because the diver relies on visual estimates of fish length and transect width, Moreover, some fish are attracted to the diver while others are repelled, and the abundances af active fish may be over-estimated because divers on adjacent transects could each record a fish passing perpendicular to the transect in front of them. Subject to these inaccuracies, the belt transect method is often the only practical method for determining fish standing stock (Quast 1968). The close correspondence between rhe size and abundance estimates of two divers in this survey (Table 4) indicates that the method is reasonably uccurate, Two or three replicate belt teansects will generally be needed because of the patchy distribution ol reef fish and the limitations inherent in the method. Like Sale & Douglas (1981), we found that a single census was inadequate, with only a gradual impravement with replicate censusing. There is no obvious “breakpoint” which might be used to argue for an optimal number of replicate censuses. The choice between (he two census methods is therefore one of purpose. A log abundance count will provide more information about the fish diversity in much less time and is therefore more suited to preliminary surveys, particularly when carried out at a number of different depths. Wf an accurate census of fish ina given babitat is required for standing stock information, or if.a single site is to be censused over a period of time to determine seasonal ar annual variation, then the bell transect method is indicated. Acknowledgments We are grateful to the skipper Mr M.. Leech and crew of the Cape Adieu for their thoughtful attention {o divers, and (0 the Fishing lndusery Research Trust Account for partial funding, Mr R. Kuler ave advice on some Species’ determinations, References Brock, VE. (1954).A preliminary reper! on a method of estimacing reer lish populanons. J Werledll Munuvement 1%, 297-308. Eotar. ©, J, (198l) Adm initial survey bf potential marine reserves in. Tasmania. Nat. Parks Wildl Serwice Ove. Pup. 4. 1-87 (84) General features of the ecology and biogeography of Tasmanian subtidal rocky shore Comumanitics, Pup Proo. R. See. Kayne 118, 17-0R6 Fito, 3G. & McFastant, G. (1968) Numerical mMcthods Wh Marine cooloey L A quaniuiative simukiaty analysis of rock shore samples in False Bay, South Altiva, Zuuf Afr 3, i8-)37. Hugi sori, S. A. (1984) Pseudorepliculion and the design of Eealagicn! field experiments. Rev! manoun $4, 187- Joyins mae Jb (85a) Spearlishing compennonsy im South Australia (1983/4) 1. Shere niet toes events. Fish, Res, Pap. Rep. Fish, tS. Aust. No. 12. 1) pp (198Sh) Spearfistung competitions in Sourh Australia (1983/4) HE. Aus malian skindiving convention Kish. Bes. Pap. Dep Fish. (8. Aust. No. ld. 15 pp: Ruling, Keo, (1981) The inshore fishes of the Kear Group i Bass Strait. Mret Net. OB L&4—7. (1983) An annotated fist of fishes of the Investigator Group, South Australia Fish. Aes. Page Dep. kish. ¢S. Aust.) No, 7 '2 pp. Last, P. (1879) Birst records of the Que Spot Puller (Chromis Aypsilepisy and the Spotred Sringuice (Uiralophus gigas) rom Tasmanian watery with ar annotated list of fishes recorded fran Kent tslunds, Bass Strait. Tas. Nat. 59, 5-12, Oblast, J.C, (1968) Estimates of ihe populayiens and the standing won Witney Calif’ Dept. Fish Game, Fist, Bull 199, 57 Russtin, By c. reen Population and standing crop estimates for rocky reef tishes of north easter) New eealand, NZ Moe hae Res. VW, 230- SAIN. & Dotcias, W, A, (981) Precisian and bai i, Vistfal census fechas for fish assemblages on corel puteh reets. Env. Biol Fish, 0, 343-439. SHNPHERD, S. AL (1985) Power aod efficiency of a research divel with a deseripriog of a rapid underwater NMeasvriie ealiwes Cher vse in measuring recruitment K. L. BRANDEN, G. J. EDGAR & S. A. SHEPHERD and density of an abalone population. In C. T. Mitchell | WILLAN, R. C., DoLLimoreE, J. M. & NICHOLSON, J. (Ed.) “Diving for Science ... 85” pp. 263-272. (1979) A survey of fish populations at Karikari (American Academy of Underwater Science, La Jolla). Peninsula, Northland, by SCUBA diving. N.Z. J. Mar. & Womers_Ley, H. B. S. (1971) Pearson Island Freshw. Res. 13, 447-458. Expedition 1969-7. The sub-tidal ecology of benthic algae. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 95, 155-167. 76 REDESCRIPTION OF TETRAMERES CERTA (LEIDY, 1886) NEMATODA: HABRONEMATOIDEA BY PATRICIA M. MAWSON Summary Tetrameres certa is redescribed from Diomeda cauta from Tasmania. It is a large worm with body spines and left spicule 2300-3300 mm long. T. diomedeae Johnston & Mawson, 1942a is considered a synonym of T. certa. The placing of T. certa as a synonym of T. paradoxa Diesing, 1935 by Walton 1927 is considered unfounded; the new specimens differ from T. paradoxa chiefly in the shape of the tail and the presence of body spines in the male. REDESCRIPTION OF TETRAMERES CERTA (LEIDY, 1886) NEMATODA: HABRONEMATOIDEA by PATRICIA M, MAWSON* Summary Mawson, P: M. (J986) Redescription of Terwmeres certa (Leidy, 1X86) Nematoda: Habronematoidea Trans. R, See, S Aust. 110(2). 77-79, 30 May, 1986. fetrarheres verta is redescribed [rom Diemedea cautu tram Tasmania, 10 is a laree worm with body spines and with left spieule 2300-3300 mm long, 7) diomedeae Johnston & Mawson, 1942a is considered asynooym of T ceria. The plaving of 7 certa as a synonym of T. paraduxe Diesing, 1935 by Walton 1927 iy considered unfounded; the new specimens differ from TZ paradoxa chiefly in the shape of the Wil and tle presence of body spines in ihe male Key Worbs: Telrumeres certa, To diomedeag, T. paradoxa, albarrosses, morpholowy. introduction The gift of a number of tetramerid worms from ali albatross in Tasmania, by David Obendorf, lias made it possible to redeseribe Jetrameres verta (Leidy, 1886), atid to.assess its position in the genus. Leidy (1856, p. 55) listed this species as ? Filaria dubia accompanied in sacs in the gastric mucous membrane by “enigmatic” globular brawn bodies. Later he dissected these bodies and redeseribed them, and (he “filarial’ worms with them, as Tropidocerca verta, Filaria dubia being pre- occupied, Walton (1927) reexamined Leidy’s material; he found that it had been relabelled (presumably by Leidy) as 7) paradaxa (Diesing). Mollhagen (1976!) in his comprehensive thesis on the genus Yetrameres found that Leidy’s specimens had disappeared from the Philadelphia Academy of Science, and that specimens of 7 paradoxa which had been redeseribed by Travassos (1914), were also unobtainable, Comparisons of these species is theretore only possible fram characters noted in the earher descriptions. From these, and Front the hosts noted, it seems that 7. certa (Leidy) from albatrosses is distinc from 7 paradoxes (Diesing) from American birds of prey. Terranieres verte (Leidy, 1886) ? Filaria dubia Leidy, 1856 (not Creplin, 1846), trom Diomedea exulans, southern Atlantic Ocean. Trapidocérca céria Leiay, (S86, from Dioriedea eculuns, southern Atanric Occan Ftrameres paradloxe (Diesinw, 1835) sensu Walton, (927, 'Mollhagen, [. Ro (97a) A study of the prarasine nematode genus Telrameres |Habronematoidea! Terraineridae). Dissertafin in Zoology, Graduate hacully oF Texas Tech, University, 846 pp, unpublished, * South Australiana Museuut, Noh Terrace, S. Aust, 5000, Tetrameres diamedeae Johnston & Mawson, 1942, from Diamedea chlororhynchus Pt Adelaide, 8. Aust. Host and locality; Diomedeu cauiu, Albatross 1., Tasmania, Coll. Dr David Obendorf, 64.1984, 20 on, WOE G_ Description: A large species, males. 1] mm long, max, diam. 400 ym, females from 3 nim » 1.5mm to 8-9 tim »* 7-8 mm, larger individuals more numerous, Males: Body curved, widest in posterior half, tail at an angle to remainder of body. Somatic spines small and sparse, in four rows starting just behind cervical papilla, and continulmg, though not salient, almost to cloaca, Lips prominent, dorsal and ventral labia depressed in midline (Fig. 1), each bearing two large laleral cephalic papillae; lateral pseudolabia longer than labia, indented anteriorly (Fig. 2), trilobed in en tace view, each lobe with ane tooth; broad lateral alae arising from pseudolabia, with strong intracubeular thickening (Figs 2, 3) and extending about 100-150 wm from anterior end, then narrowing gradually to about mid-body length. Buccal capsule thick-walled, 23-34 wm long, with circular groove externally at about mid-length, diameter 25-30 yim, base 40-45 pm from anterior end of lips, Cervical papillae, sometimes asymmetrical, ar about jevel oF nerve ring; nerve ring 359-440 pm, excretory pore 450-660 um, from anterior end of bady. Tail bent dorsad at cloaca, in most specimens also twisted on Jang axis through about 45% (Fig. 4). Four pairs of pre-eloacal, one pair of adanal, and six pair§ of caudal papillae. Caudal papillae lie in and project from caudal alae (or ala-like told of cuticle), and in addition preanal cuticle somewhat irregularly swollen or inflated, §o exact form of alae not certain, Left spicule 2300-3300 pam long with cyclindrical 160-210 pm Jone hilt (Pig. 3) and pointed tip: right spicule 300-400 um long, with 78 P. M. MAWSON Figs 1-8: Tetrameres certa. 1 and 2. Head of male, median and lateral views. 3. Anterior end of male, ventral view. 4. Posterior end of male, lateral view. 5. Proximal end of left spicule. 6. Head of female. 7. Anterior end of female. 8. Posterior end of female. slightly swollen, rounded tip. No gubernaculum but some irregular sclerotisation of cloacal lining. Female (Figs 6, 7, 8): Anterior extension from swollen part of body 200 um in smaller specimens to 600 pm in larger, posterior extension much shorter (100 um in smaller specimens and 500 nm in larger); overhung by the four body lobes in the larger. Bodies of all females present swollen in characteristic shape but no fertilized eggs present. In two specimens dissected, reproductive tubes contained many unfertilised eggs (without thick shells), about 25-30 »m diameter. In a female 6.2 mm long with body 4 mm diameter, anterior extension 2000 ym _ long, oesophagus 2000 nm long, its muscular part 500 pm, cervical papillae, nerve ring and excretory pore respectively 190, 220, and 300 um from anterior end. Buccal capsule 20 hm x 20 pm, its walls thickest at midlength. Tail length 200 um, vulva 250 um in front of anus. Discussion Only one species of this genus has all the characters: four rows of body spines, lateral alae arising from pseudolabia, and left spicule longer than 1000 pm. This is 7) australis Johnston & Mawson, 1942b from the Black Swan. This species REDESCRIPTION OF TETRAMERES CERTA 19 differs from T. certa in being shorter, bearing terminal spines on male tail, and in the larger body spines. The only species recorded from albatrosses are 7, certa Leidy, and T. diomedea Johnston & Mawson, 1942a; the latter was described from a single female, since lost, and was distinguished from D. certa because of its smaller size. In view of the variation in size among the females described above, this does not now seem a valid difference, and 7° diomedeae is placed as a synonym of D. certa. Leidy’s specimens, now apparently lost (see Mollhagen, 1976!) were examined by Walton (1927) who noted that Leidy had restudied his specimens of 7 certa, and relabelled them 7. paradoxa (Diesing, 1835) which was described from a South American vulture. However, there are distinct differences in the males of 7: paradoxa as redescribed by Travassos (1946) (and by later authors), and Leidy’s material as described by himself and redescribed by Walton, not only in the measurements given, but in the number of postanal papillae (up to nine pairs in 7) paradoxa, always six in 7. cerfa), and in the presence of caudal alae (figured by Walton and not described or figured by Travassos). Neither Walton nor Travassos mentioned the twisting and recurving of the tail, which is described by Leidy, and present in the males from Tasmania examined here. In view of these differences and of the difference in hosts, it seems likely that 7. certa is a separate species from 7: paradoxa, the new material agrees with the descriptions of Leidy and of Walton, and is certainly not 7. paradoxa, for which body spines have never been described. References Diesina, K. M. (1835) Tropisurus und Thvsanosoma, wei neue Gattungen von Binnen Wiirmern (Entozoen) aus Se Med. Jabrb. K. K. Ostern, Staates. 16, NF V7(1), -116. JOHNSTON, T. H, & Mawson, P. M. (1942a) Nematodes from Australian albatrosses and petrels. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust, 66, 66-70, & (1942b) Some avian nematodes from Tailem Bend, South Australia. [hid. 66, 71-73. Leipy, J. (1856) Synopsis of Entozoa and some of their Ecto-congeners observed by the author. Proc. Acad. nat. Sei, Philadel, 8, 42-58. (1886) Notices of nematoid worms. /did, 38, 308-312. Travassos, L. (1946) Sobre a especie lipo do genevo “Tetrameres” Creplin, 1846 (Nematoda: Spuroidea). Rev. Brasil. Biol, 503-504. Watton, A. C. (1927) A revision of the nematodes of the Leidy collections. Proc. Acad. nat. Sci. Philad. 79, 49-163. THE 1984 FILLING OF LAKE EYRE SOUTH BY ROBERT J. ALLAN, JOHN A. T. BYE & PAUL HUTTON Summary The meteorology and hydrology of the 1984 fillling of Lake Eyre South and flooding of Lake Eyre North has been investigated using rainfall and evaporation data, and a water budget analysis. It is estimated that the total inflow, including rainfall over the lake, was 11.4T1 (about 30 % that of the great filling of Lake Eyre in 1974). The special feature of the 1984 flooding was the violent flow through Goyder Channel from Lake Eyre South into Lake Eyre North in which it appears 0.6 Tl of water was transferred in a period of about 5 weeks. This unique historical event lowered the sill level in Goyder Channel by about 0.5 m, and returned about 40% of the salts introduced into Lake Eyre South in 1974 back into Lake Eyre North. THE 1984 FILLING OF LAKE EYRE SOUTH by RoperT J. ALLAN* JOHN A. T, BYE & PAUL HUTTON] Summary Attias, R,ob, BYE, fA. T & Hylrtos, P. (£986) The 1984 filling of Lake Eyre South. Trams, R, Sac, S, dust, 112), 81-87, 30 May, 1986, The meterology and hydrology of the 1984 filling af Lake Eyre South and fooding a! Lake Eyre North has been investigated using neinfall and evaporation data, and a walter budyet analysis. I is estimated that the tau inflow, inchiding rainfall over the lake, was 11.4 TI (about 30% that of the great filling of Lake Evrein 1974), The special feature of the 1984 loading was the vjolent Now (hraugh Goyder Channel froin Lake Eyre South into Lake Eyre North in which it appears 0.6 Tl of water was transferred in a period of about § weeks, This umque historical event lowered the sill level in Goyder Channel by about 0.5 m, and returned about 40% of the salts introduced into Lake Eyre South in 1974, back into Lake Eyre Norttr. Introduction The 1984 flooding of Lake Eyre was notable for the major flow through Goyder Channel from Lake Eyre Sourh to Lake Eyre North, bc is clear that the much smaller storage of Lake Eyre South compared with that of Lake Eyre North causes an asymmetry of conditions in Goyder Channel. The flow jnto Lake Eyre South during the great filling! of Lake Eyre in 1974 occurred over an extended period with relatively small water Velocities, The 1984 filling of Lake Eyre South on the other hand was accom- panied by a short period of very rapid flow into Lake Eyre North in which Goyder Channel acted essentially as another nver mouth for Lake Eyre North. We attempt here a reconstruciion af the 1984 flooding. We have been unable to obtain ary good eyewitness accounts of the peak flood in Goyder Channel, but our valculations and circumstantial evidence indicate that it must have been an awesome phenomenon, A series oF satellite images (Landsat PS 23/85 for 20 Decenyber 1983, 21 January 1984 and 22 February 1984) however show the evolution of the flood including the breakihrough of fMouad- water in Goyder Channel which occurred at ubout the Lime of the second image. Metcorology Laree-Seale Circulation and Synapric Condirians Meteorological conditions required to penerace the rainfall necessary to produce Nooding in the * Flinders Institute for Armaspheric und Marine Sciences, The Flinders University ef South Australia, Bedttrd Park, S.Ausr, S042, t Enginecring and Water Supply Depariment, Water Resourees Branch, Thebarton, S.Ausl. "The use of the rerm filling’ is cunsistertt with the terinindlogy adopted by the Lake Eyre Committee of Royal Geographical Soiety of Australasia, South Australian Braach Lake Eyre Basin are primarily of trapical origin, and range from transient disturbances through to major monsoonal incursions (Allan 1983, 1984,* 1985), Transient systems, in particular rain depres- sions and tropical cyclone remnants, can produce a variety of floadiny scenarios bat it appears to require the type of precipitation intensities and distributions that result from monsoonal incursions for the Lake Eyre salt pan to be completely filled (Lake Eyre North and South) (Allan 1984, 1985). In such situations the greatest volume of flood waters is usually in the northeastern portion of the basin in the major Queensland “Channel Country" rivers, the Diamantina, Coopers Creek, the Georgina and their tributaries, In 1984, (he flooding resulted from a transient cisturbanee and rainfall was more localized, In a swath from northwest to southeast on the immediate western margin ol Lake Eyre, Monsoonal Incursions and the [984 Flooding Aparl from the 10 years of observations by Bonythion (1960, 1963), most documentation of flooding in the Lake Eyre Basin has foeised on periods when the lake was either substantially flooded or filled (Bonython 1951, 1959; Bonython & Mason 1953; Mason 1955; Douglas & Hobhs 1974; Vickery 1974; Serventy 1975; Dudhunry 1984), However, a detailed study of the nature of the meteorological conditions responsible for such extremes bas only recently been atrempred (Allan 1985). This researeh bas aflirined that the four mosr documented foodings ‘fillings ol the lake in 1949.50, 1955, 1974 and 1976 all resulred from large-scale mansoGnal incursions of varying intensity Which are part of a pear-global flueruation “Allan, R. J. (1984) Variations in low latittide circulauion and raintall over Australasia during the soulherd hemisphere summer monsoon fewiic. PHD thesis, Dept of Geography, Latverity of Adelaide Linnpubl B2 R. J, ALLAN, J. A. T. BYE AND P. HUTTON in the oceat-atmiosphere system over the Indo- Pacific region (the El Nino Southern Oscillation phenomenon) In 1984, however, the flooding cannot be put down to the type of large-scale circulation changes indicative of pronounced monsoonal incursions, This can be seen in Fig, 1, which shows 850 hPa atmospheric circulation (streamlunction), and the location of the Southern Hemisphere near- equatorial trough over Australia for January 1974 and 1984. The 1974 filling of Lake Eyre (North and South) occurred in the presence of a major monsoonal incursion, while in 1984 the situation was one of weak monsoonal conditions, Such major differences are alsa observed in terms of the indices of the El Nino Sourhern Oscillation (ENSO) fluctuaton- The January 1984 Transient! Disturbance The January 1984 transient disturbance influenced the west-northwestern portion of the catchment of Lake Eyre, in particular, Lake Eyre South. This disturbance formed around 7-8 Fig |. 850 bP streamline patterns over Ausrinia afd south-east Asia for (a hanuary 1974 god tb) January 1984. Contours in 10" ays January near the Kimberley Coast of Western Australia and progressed to the southeast across inland Australia until it dissipated around (he 14-15 January (Bur, Met. 1984), Transient systems are not an unusual influence onthe Lake Eyre Basin (Allan 1985), however the development of a persistent rain depression on this Occasion, accompanied by heavy rainfalls (of the order of 200- 350 mm) in the immediate vicinity of the lake, was an exceptional event. Rainfall and Runoff Jn South Australia, the highest raintall caugings (Fig, 2), with the exception of Arkarovla in the Flinders Ranges, were recorded in the area west of Lake Eyre to the Stuart Highway, Rainfalls of up to 350 mm produced high flows In the western (nibutaries of both Lake Eyre South and Lake Eyre North, In particular, the major western tributaries of Lake Eyre South (Warriner and Margaret Creek) attained record historical heights. Al the same time, the caichments of the western tributaries of Lake Eyre North received high rainfalls, The Macumba, Peake and Neales Rivers produced high inflows. High flows were also recorded jn the Frome Creek, which drains the north-western Flinders Ranges and also flows into Lake Eyre North, The major rainfalls occurred in the period 8-15 January bul the distribution within this period was erratic (Hutton 1984) vonsistent with mesoscale convective activity, By 17 January, aerial photography indicated thal most tribularies were flowing strongly, The Moods were, however, of short duration as by 28 February, inflow into Lake Eyre South was negligible, This can be confidently stated as the Warriner and Margaret Crecks were crossed by vehicle in the vicinity of Lake Eyre South on that date. Water Budge Mater levels Water level measurements during the Flooding wete reercttably eather infrequent There were four main sources of data. Firstly, on 27 and 28 February, water levels were recorded on Engineering and Water Supply Depart- ment (South Australia) gauge boards which had been erected and surveyed jn 1974 in Lake Eyre South, Goyder Channel and Lake Eyre North (Hulton 1984), These observalions gave [he waler level al the time of the measurement, and also by survey of the level of Mood debris, estimates of the maximum flood levels. Secondly, two land expedinans by The Flinders Institute for Atmospheric and Marine Science in Mareh 1984 (Bye 1984) gave water level observations 1984 LAKE EYRE FILLING 33 y = y 300 \. | 200 % \ Sp Bay ’ b Sy a . Xe 300, \wacumaice ha : ps A ooo yuo 200 ar EALES R a | 6, . pte WS Nk oaee oe gs as y=, ~ a emny Oe a . ~ e&. Manes 4 3 ie RRINE cK san RP caotic rR —~as- Sp < ~ aha eae rrr ce _ PER cman tT ere ae SS 7 ~ es (400! ™ AA (ON ery ~ TSA\z-. eas ae “hy \ . . 3 * * SS Mey THO ois 2 ' ~ ah Soe fon { 25 ce —j32ts id ° - Jo ep , / ih a ‘ /? Ry . + , . Ew) ct: 130°E i4o*e Fig. 2, Rainfall (R) in the Lake Eyre catchment in January 1984, --— contours in mm. « Denotes a rainfall station. on the level post in Level Post Bay in Lake Eyre North, and aerial expeditions in March, May and August 1984 and in May 1985 gave further estimates of the water level throughout Lake Eyre by reference to the lake bathymetry (Bye e/ al, 1978). Thirdly, measurements of water depth by Mr Bob Mossel (private communication) in various locations in Lake Eyre North during 1984 enabled the water level to be determined also by reference to the lake bathymetry, Fourthly, in Lake Eyre South during the period March-September 1985, the water level was inferred from the variation in total dissolved salts (oS) in which @ is the water density and § is salinity, under the assumption that there was a constant mass of salt in solution such that, eS Ve =const (1) where V< is the water volume (storage) of Lake Eyre South, eS was obtained by interpolating a series of approximately monthly data from Curdimurka, kindly made available by Professor W. D. Williams ol the University of Adelaide. The constant in Eq. (1) was determined by calculating Ve at the end of March from the water level ohservations. The relation between the volume, surface area and water level in both Lake Eyre South and Lake Eyre North is obtained throughout from Bye er al. (1978). Fig, 3 shows the water level variation in Lake Eyre South and Lake Eyre North derived from these various sources, It is clear that the water level in Lake Eyre South attained a maximum value about 1.6 m greater than that in Lake Eyre North, and that there was no period during, which the water levels in the two portions of Lake Eyre were similar. The rise in Lake Eyre South was very rapid, and after the original sill level in Goyder Channel (. 10.6 m A.H.BD.) was attained, the water level continued to rise by 0.5 m to a peak of -10.1 m A.H.D. This peak in Lake Eyre South was related to rhe height of the causeway across Goyder Channel, installed and used by Muloorina Station. The exact level of the top of the causeway prior to the flooding is not known, but is thought to be approximately 10.0 m A.H.D, Once the water level exceeded rhis level on about 2) January 1984, the causeway was overtopped and washed away, allowing water to flow from Lake Eyre South to Lake Eyre North, It is thought that afer the causeway was washed away, this flow was largely governed by “The Neck” 84 R. J. ALLAN, J. A. T, BYE AND P, HUTTON — || x D J F M A M 1983 LAKE cl EYRE SOUTH a Om 5 m LAKE EYRE NORTH eee —~o 1984 Fig. 3. Water level in Lake Eyre South (hg) and Lake Eyre North (hy) for the period January-September 1984. x estimates from water level measurements, o estimates from total dissolved salts (eS) observations using Eq, (1). in Goyder Channel, cf. Water velocity in Goyder Channel. The onrush of water gave rise to a local peak level in Level Post Bay of -11.7 m A.H.D., which was not representative of conditions elsewhere in Lake Eyre North. Subsequently a maximum water level of -12.3 m A.H.D. was attained throughout Lake Eyre North in March 1984, It was observed (P.H.) that water was still flowing from Lake Eyre South to Lake Eyre North on 28 February 1984. In early March, however, the flow had ceased, and hence the two parts of the lake were connected for a period of about five weeks. The new sill depth was estimated to be —11.0 m A.H.D. During the period March-September 1984 the water level in Lake Eyre North fell by 1.2 m, and in Lake Eyre South by 0.9 m, and by May 1985 Lake Eyre South was dry, and the water level in Lake Eyre North was - 15.1 m A.H.D. Water balance We apply the water balance method (Tetzlaff & Bye 1978; Bye & Will in press) separately to both Lake Eyre South and Lake Eyre North. Thus, we have, AVs = Rs = Eg 4 Ie -T (2) AVy =Ry -En +Iy +T (3) in which AV is the change in volume of water, R is the precipitation on the lake, E is the water loss by evaporation, and | is the net inflow including surface and groundwater exchanges, The subscripts S and N refer respectively to Lake Eyre South and Lake Eyre North, and T is the transfer (positive towards Lake Eyre North) through Goyder Channel. Eqs. (2) and (3) were applied to deduce Is, Iy and T. The evaporation (E) was estimated as the average of the measured pan evaporation rates at Oodnadatta, Woomera and Moomba multiplied by a factor of 0.67 (Tetzlaff & Bye 1978), and the rainfall (R) was estimated by interpolating over Lake Eyre from neighbouring stations, cf. Fig. 2. The monthly increments (AV) were obtained from the water levels of Fig. 3 (except for the period 1984 LAKE EYRE FILLING &S Taw) |. Bvaporarion (Ej, rainfall (Rj and change in storage (AV) and water levels (Ah) for Lake Eyre South and Lake Eyre North, and total dissolved salis (05) in Lake Eyre South for the period Januury-Seplember 1984, a Ne ean NA en ca A Ae a ST, SU RS dl eit et Mates ih Leia etek ae E Rs Ry AVs AVS Ah, Ahiy os mm mm Tl mm g/l January 170* 300 250 1.33 7.98 ~ - February 280 0 0 0.46 ~ 0,82 410 — 150 28 Murch 222 0 0 O17 ~O,55 — 220 ~ 100 43 April 14k 8 3 0.10 ~ 1,86 150 — 400 4b May 105 2 2 ~ 0.06 0.88 110 ~ 200 44 June 69 5 5 0.08 0.83 ~ 90 250 60 Juty 64 8 8 ~ 0.04 ~ 0,33 - 60 100 63 August [2 0 0 0.06 -(7 ~ 120 - it 69 Septentber 143 § 8 ~ 0.09 ).31 - 140 ~ 100 86 “ For the past-rain period Jan. 10-31. { Tl-10? m?, April-September 1984 in Lake Eyre South during which AV¢ is given by Eq. (1). Table ] shows the monthly average values, TaslLe 2. Welter budget of Lake Eyre South and Lake Evre North for the period January—September 1984. . nal 7 Lake Eyre Lake Eyre There are two distinct periods in the water South North balance, The first period (January-March) vay . TI TI encompasses all the main inflow into the lake, Rainfall (R)* 0.4 34 whereas in the second period (March-September) — Inflow (1) 1.6 6.7 inflow is negligible. Transfer (T) _ 0.6 In the second period, the change in water level 2.0 a4 is caused only by evaporation as can be verified for Evaporation (E)* 1.f 7.2 Lake Eyre South by the agreement between (— dhs) = Transfer (1) 0.6 oe and £ (Table 1), In Lake Eyre North however Balance 13 55 (—Ahy) is greater than E, on average by a factor of 1,35, We attribute this enhanced evaporation ta the movement of water over the bottom of rhe unfilled lake by wind. This process, which has important geovhemical consequences, is discussed in Torgersen (1984), In the first period, inflows oceur into both Lake Eyre South and Lake Eyre North, and there is also a transfer through Goyder Channel. This occurs in the (approximately five week) period between the attainment of the maximum water level (-10.) m A.W.D,) and the withdrawal to the new sill level (-{L0m A.H,D). The change in starage (0,95 TI) between (hese two water levels, minus the loss by evaporation (0.35 Tl) during the period is equal to the transfer, TV0.6 TL. Using this estiraate and with reference to Table 1, Eqs. (2) and (3) vield the water budget (Table 2). The (ofal inflow and rainfall into Lake Eyre during the 1984 flooding was 11.4 T1, or 30% of the great flooding (39.0 Tl) of 1974 (Bye & Will in press). ‘The inflow was approximately four times (Lake Eyre South 4.0, Lake Eyre North 3.5) the rainfall over the lake. By reference 10 Fig. 2, itis clear that this inflow indicates a remarkably high catchment efficreney. Salt balance One of the intriguing features of the [984 Nooding is the transfer of salt which accompanied the llow trom Lake Eyre South to Lake Eyre North. * Raintall and evaporation were assumed to have ocewred over all the Jake surface in Janwary, In the 1974 flooding, salt wansfer ocourred in ihe Opposite direction, and led to the formation of a salt crust in Lake Eyre South which was pweviousty absent (Dulhunty 1978), Remarkably, ten years later the 1984 floading returned a Significant faction of This salt to Lake Eyre North. The magnitudes of the transfers can be estimated as follows, In May 1975, the average total dissotved salts (pS) in Lake Eyre was 46,5 g/l, and the volume ot Lake Eyre South (Vs) was 1,1 T] (Bye & Will in press), and hence 5] Mt of salts resided in Lake Eyre South. In May 1984, (0S) and Vs were respectively $4 g/land 0.57 T! (Table 1), from which we obtain a salt mass of 31 Mr. Thus, 20 My (abour 40% of the total dissolved salt) Was returned to Lake Eyre North. This result implies thal in the transfer (T) the average value of (oS) was 33 g/l which is in approximate agreement with observation (Table 1). Dulhunty (1978) observed that the cotal mass of the salt crust in Lake Eyre South was 30 Mt (about 60% of the total dissolved salt). This suggests that the post 1984 salt crust in Lake Eyre South should have amass of about 18 Mt. The proportionality between the masses vf the toial dissolved salts and the subsequent salt erust 86 R. J. ALLAN, J. A. TL BYE AND P. HUTTON appears similar to that found in Lake Eyre North (Bye & Will, in press). Water velocity in Goyder Channel It is interesting to estimate the flow velocity (u) in Goyder Channel which would account for the transfer (T), On assuming that T occurred during a penod of § weeks and considering “The Neck” at the northern. end of the channel, which has an approximate mean cross-sectional area of 100 m2 (width 100 m, depth (H) 1 m) we find that v2 m rr This velocily was driven by a pressure head of avout 1.5 m (Pig. 3), which on assuming the water level change to have occurred in 3 km implies a surface slope (a) of 510-4. This inference leads to an independent estimate of u. A simple balance between bolfom [fiction and pressure gradient forees (appropriate co the flood conditions) yielus the expression, (4) where g is the acceleration of gravily and K is the bottom drag coefficient, which over the silty channel hed would have a value of about 1072 (Bye 977), and hence on using Eq. (4), we find that uvzms! These eslimates are necessarily of only order of magnitude accuracy, however they suggest the ferocity of the flow in Goyder Channel during this exceptional event. Diseussion 1ei8 clear that the 1984 filling of Lake Eyre South has caused important changes in Lake Eyre. Firsely, the sill in Goyder Channel has been eroded by the two successive floodings (1974 and 1984), The sill level has been reduced trom -10.1 m A.H.D, (Bonython 1961), through —- 10.6 m A.H.D. (Bye et a/, 1978), fo - 11,0 m A.H.D. Secondly, aénal observations over (he western end of Lake Eyre South in August 1984 strongly suggested that a shallaw groove had been formed by the entry of the floodwaters from the Margaret and Warriner Creeks, This feature has yet ta be confirmed by bathymetric survey. Thirdly, the distribution of salts within the lake has been partially restored to the pre-1974. state, suggesting thal surface hydroloyy is che major factor in the salt balance, It Was also interesting thal the juxtaposition of silly water and the dissolving salt crust in western Lake Eyre South led to the formation of myriad sharply defined and beautiful mixing patterns, as observed in an aerial reconnaissance in March 1984 (Bye er al. 1986). These observations draw attention fo the fine balance that exists in Lake Eyre with respect not only to the quantity of rainfall in iis catchment, but also to the distribution amongst the various inflows. It Would be iftefesting to extend the valuable study of Kolwicki (1986) on the statistics of historical floodings of Lake Eyre to an examination of the details of inflaw variability under differing climatic regimes, References Atiam, Rf (1983) Monsoon and teleconnection yariahiliry over Australia diving the sourhern Pens oage summers OF 1973.77, Man. Wea, Rev. IVE, {(3-142. (1985) The Australasian summer monsoon, teleconnectiyns and Mooding in the Lake Eyre Basin South Australian Geographical Papers, Monograph No 2, Royal Geagraphieal Society of Australasia, South Australian Branch, 47 pp. Bont tHom, C. W.fL951) The evaporating waters ot Lake Eyre. Weather 6, 310-314. (1959) The Lake Lyre depression. Proc. Roy, Gengr. Soc, Aust. S Aust Branch 60, 1-16, 01960) A decade of watching for water in Lake Eyre, (bid. &1, 1-8. ———~ (1961) The accurate determination of the level of Lake Eyre. Jf, #2, 57-63, (1963) further light on river floods reaching Lake Lyre, Ibid, 64, 9-22, & Masos, B (1953) ‘The fillinu and drying of Lake Eyre Geogr 2 Lt9, 321-230. Ben Met (1984) Mouthly weather review Seuth Australia, January (984 Bur. Met. 14 pp. Bye, |, A. T. 1977) The Flow: series of rhallasso-models Sel. Top. Atmos. Mar Seif, The Flinders Institute for Atmospheric aod Marine Sciences, 60 pp. (1984) A teconnajssatice of Lake byre i Lake Lyne Newslewer 3, 4-7, The Flinders Instinae for Armosphene and Marine Sciences, , Dittos, PJ, VANDENAeRG, C.1L & Wire. G. BD (1978) Barhymetry of Lake Eyre. Trans. R. Soc. 5. Aust. 102, 85-89. & WILL D. (in press) The hydrofogy of tre “ floading. tn the great fillinw of Lake Eyre in 1974, Royal Geovraphica! Socety of Australasia, South Australian Branch. , ByRon-Scarr, R. A, DB, MAAWORTHY, TA Nunes, R. A. (1986) Natural flow visualisation in Lake Eyre, South Australia. FOS mer Geop. Un, 67, 58-59. Dororas, f & Hows, J, EG. (1974) Deluge in Australia Geographical Magazine 40, 465-471. Duinonty, A, (1978) Sati mransters berween Nurth and Soulls Lake Eyre, Trans. Ro Saw S Aust, WR 7-12 Oulsunty, R. (1984) When che dead heart beats Lake Byre lies. 2nd Ed. (J. A. & R. Dulbunty, Seaforth, NSW 1984 LAKE EYRE FILLING 87 Hutton, P. (1984) Field report Flooding in the Lake Eyre Division, January 1984. (Eng. Wat. Supp. Dept. S. Aust.), 14 pp. Kotwickl, V. (1986) Floods of Lake Eyre. (Engineering and Water Supply Dept., S. Aust.) Mason, B. (1955) Rainfall in the Lake Eyre catchment, pp. 11-26. Jn Lake Eyre, South Australia—The Great Flooding of 1949-50. (Royal Geographical Soc. of Australasia, South Australian Branch.) SERVENTY, V. (1975) The Lake that is that wasn’t. Hemisphere, 19, 2-6. TETZLAFF, G. & Bye, J. A. T. (1978) Water balance of Lake Eyre for the flooded period January 1974-June 1976. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 102, 91-96. TORGERSEN, T. (1984) Wind effects of water and salt loss in playa lakes. J. Hydrol. 74, 137-150. VickERY, J. (1974) The greater flooding of the Lake Eyre Basin—1974. Proc. Roy. Geogr. Soc. Aust. S. Aust. Branch, 75, 23-36. THE OCCURRENCE OF HEMIERGIS INITIALIS (WERNER, 1910) (LACERTILIA: SCINCIDAE) IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY GLENN M. SHEA AND BRIAN MILLER Summary Four species of the genus Hemiergis are currently recognised: H. initialis (Werner), H. decresiensis (Fitzinger), and H. millewae Coventry. The latter three species are widely distributed and abundant in southern South Australia. However H. initialis has been reported only once from S. Aust., a single specimen (Western Australian Museum R24577), from 8 km W of Ceduna. BRIEF COMMUNICATION THE OCCURRENCE OF HEMTERGIS INITLALIS (WERNER, 191) (LACERTILIA: SCINCIDAE) IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA Tour species of the genus Hemiergis are currently recon mised! > AL fritiufis (Werner), HW. decresivnsis (Fitvinger), H. peromi (Fiteinger), and A. millewae Caveutev. The fatter three species are widely distributed and abundant io southern South Ausiralia.s-+ However, Hi. initiulis has been reported only once [rom -S. Aust. a single specimen (Western Australian Museum R24577), from 8 km W of Ceduna Storr? recognised two subspecies of HM, inifialisy H. i. thitialis and Tf. i. broekeri. The nominate subspecies, ty which Storr assigned the S. Aust. specimen is otherwise restricted to rhe south-west of W.A,, and ciffers from H, i. broakeri of south eastern WA. in possessing prefrontals (fused to Uie frontonasel in H. & brookeri), fewer muchals (mostly 0-1 vs 2-3), larger size (snoul-vent length 20-47 mm ys 21-38 mm) and stronger dark dorsolateral stripe?) ‘There is, however, some variation in the prefrontal condition in H. 1. braokeri. We have examined two specimens (Australian Museum (AM) R1O026), Evicla, and RIOZ91S, 50.4 kin east of Madura Roadhouse) with both prelrontals distinct, and a further two specimens AM R10)272, Eucla, and R1IOS9I4, 50.4 km east Of Madura Roadhouse) with the right prefrontal only, distinct. Of 26,1,1982, a specimen of A. © tnitialis AM RI05526) was collected 31.9 km air distance cast-north-ecast of Kimba, 8S Aust. (23°04'S 136°45'F) by G. Shea and R. Wells, It was Found beneath a dead mat of Triedia in malice woodland over Triedla on red sand. On 284.1982 &. Miller collected a single spetimen of H. &. brookeri (South Australian Museum [SAM] R23069) trom benearh a woodpile | km east of the 8, Aust/W. Aust. border via the Eyre Highway al 31°38’S 129°0) E. A further five specimens of Ff. &. initialis have been lodged with the Sourh Australians Museum trom S. Aust: SAM R280, “West Coast. S. Aust.”, Survey Camp; Deeres Bay; R2004}, 60 km south-west of Whyalla (33°25'5 137°02'B), and R21172-74, Laurd Bay Conservation Park (32-455 13349 FE). The latter four specimens had been oisidentified as HW, milfewae. An additignal specimen lrom near Ceduna has been lodged since in the Westeri Austrahan Musewn collection (R7045)). This additional material of AL fb inifialis allows the following deseriprion of the S. Aust. population. Nusals separated: prefronrals present and separated: suprauculucs 4+; anterior fwo in contact with [rontal; frontopartelals paired (25%, m=8), partially fused (62.5%) or completely fused ()2.5%0), (he suture curving 10 the tight anteriorly so that the right frontoparietal is smaller than the let; parietals in contact behind interparietal; 2 temporals bordering each parietal; nuchals absent (S0%, n=), a Single parr (12.5%) or a single nuchal on one side (37.5%); loreals 2; supracitiaries 7 (we include tn our vount Fig. |, in. Aust. Dots = MH. millewae; Squares initialis,; Open Circle — H. inittalis brookeri. Localities for Hemiersis mitialis and H, millewae H. initialis (he Vertically enlarged seale Interposed between the fourth supraocular and postocular series; Storr does nat include this scale), firs) and lost largest, remainder subequal, posteriormost supraciliary divided into an upper and lower scale? Subocular series complete; a single primary and an upper and lower secondary temporal; 2 scales bordering free edge of lower secondary temporal; supralabials 7, fifth subocular; infralabjals 6, postmental in contact with anterior two; three pairs of enlarged chin shields contacting infralabials, anterior-most pair in contact medially; external car a scaled over depression. Midbody scales in 20-22 longitudinal rows (% =20.6, n=), paravertebral scates (from first scale behind panetals ta level of groin) 6)-73 (X =69.6, n=8); lamellae below fourth Loe 8-10 (¥ =8.4, n=8) granules on plantar surfaces enlarged. Presacral vertebrae 36-40 (¥ = 38.3, n» 4); postsaeral vertebrae 39-43 (n- 2); phalangeal formula of manus and pes 2,3,4,4,9 and 2,3,4,4,3, Snout-vent tength 28,0-46.0 mim (% -38.2, n=8); tail length LIO1-115.9% of SVL (ne2)k forelimb length 9.8-12.7% of SVL (X=114%, n=8); hindlimb length 14.1-19,6% of SVL (X=16.9%, n=8). Head dark grey. Dorsum brown with or without an olive tinge, and with two or four longitudinal sows of 50 moderately conspicuous dark spots. A faint to moderate dark dorsolateral stripe. Lateral scales grey with darker spots. Venter orange (translucent While i) alcohol) with dark edges to the scales, espevially on the throat. AM R105543 is a gravid female containing 2 near full- term embryos. The single 5. Aust. specimen of /7, i broekert has nasals separated, pretrontals fused lo frontonasal; completely fused frontoparietals; 2 pairs of nuchals; 7 supraciliaries; 7 supralabials; 6 infralabials; 20 midboady scales; 68 paravertebral scales and 8 lamellae below the fourth toe, SVE, 38 mm, tail length 107,9% ot SVL, forelimb length 10.5% of SVL, hindlimb length 11.8% of SVI.. Head dark grey. Dorsum reddish-brown With an olive tinge and two longitudinal rows of faint darkspots, Dark dorsolateral stripe present, Ventral seales unspotted, dark-edwed anteriorly. H. initialis may be dilferentiated from AY mrillewae, the only other pentadactyle Memiergis, by its complete subocular row,S shorter toes with fewer subdigital lamellae (7-11 vs 12-14)? shorter hindlimbs (14.1-19.6% of SVL vs 21.0-29.9% of SVL)" dark head, the colouration obscuring the sutures between the head shields, and dark edged ventrals on the throat.® Our field experience with W.A. H. /aitid/is populations Suygesis That some degree of habitat separation exists between the subspecies (itialis and brookeri. W.A. initialis collected at three localities by G. Shea and R, Wells in Jan. 1982 were taken from undulating dense mallee heathland (Ravensthorpe), dense eucalypt/Casuarina heath on white sand (Albany) and dry sclerophyl! forest (Mundaring), In contrast, specimens of 1. 7, broakeri were 'Copland, S. J. (1946) Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S, 70, 62-92. *Storr, G. M. (1975) Rec. W. Aust. Mus, 3, 251-260, ICoventry, A. J. (1976) Mem. Natl. Mus. Viet, 37, 23-26, ICogger, H. G. (1983) Reptiles and Amphibians af Australia, (A. H. & A. W. Reed, Sydney). ‘Storr, G. M., Smith, L. A. & Johnstone, R. E. (1981) Lizards of Wester Australia. [, Skinks. (LIniversity af WA, Press & W.A. Muse im, Perth). found at seven localities, all in Meirewna/A triples heaths and steppes with varying densities (usually sparse) of cucalypts and acacias on reddish or greyish soils. Storr eral’, recorded this subspecies from eucalypt woodlands on loamy soils and Banksia shrubland on greyish-white sawic, Our record of 5. Aust. A. initialis from Triodia is apparently quite atypical of the western populations and approaches the habitat preference of the castern H, tnillewae} AIDS. Aust, records of A. jni/tlalis are from the Central Mallee Plains and Dunes Environmenial Region,’ and the population may prove to be restricted (o this region. The peculiar distribution of HM. i Ininalis, with two isolated populations in S, Aust. and W.A. separated by Hf. brookeri is, similar to that reported in Lerista microtis,? L, microtis trom (wo S, Aust. offshore islands agree With ZL. mm. wrenivola in sealation, but with 2. m, snicroris in colouration, the nearest populations of L. m. microtis occurring in southavest W.A. Both H. initialis and L. micfotis ae fossorial, We would like to thank Drs T. D, Schwaner (South Australian Museum), H. G. Cogger (Australian Museum), A. E, Greer (Australian Museum) and G. M. Stor (Western Australian Museurn) for loan of specimens and use of facilities. Drs Cogger, Ginter anid Schwaner also provided useful comments on the manuscript. Field work of G. M, Shea was funded by a grant from the Peter Rankin Fund for Herpetology, R. Wells is acknowledged pratefully for field assistance, L. Schwaner and D. Brunker typed the manuscript. "Shea, G. M., unpublished data, 7Storr, G. M., Hanton, ‘tf, M.S, & Harold, G, (1981) Rec W. Aust. Mus. 9, 23-29. ‘Laut, P., Keig, G., Lazarides, M., Loffler, E,, Margules, C,, Seott, R. M. & Sullivan, M. E. (1977). Environments of 8. Aust. Province 4 Eyre & Yorke Peninsulas. (CSIRO Divn. Land Use Res, Canberra), °Schwaner, T. D. & Miller, B. (1984) Trans. R- Soc. § Aust. 108, 215-216. GLENN M. SHEA, Department of Veterinary Anutamy, University of Sydney, NSW. 2006 and BRIAN MILLER, Lot 53, Hospiml Road, Mr Pleasant, S. Aust. 5$238- ON THE SYSTEMATIC POSITION AND TYPE LOCALITY OF THE FROG PACHYBATRACHUS PETERSII KEFERSTEIN, REPORTED FROM AUSTRALIA BY MICHAEL J. TYLER Summary The frog genus Pachybatrachus Keferstein (1868) was erected for a single specimen of the new species P. petersii. The type locality was reported to be “Neu-Siid-Wales”’, and the collector Keferstein’s brother-in-law Dr R. Schuette. Keferstein referred the genus to the Engystomatidae (now a synonym of the Microhylidae), a family that in Australia is confined to northern Queensland and the northern extremity of the Northern Territory. BRIEF COMMUNICATION ON THE SYSTEMATIC POSITION AND TYPE LOCALITY OF THE FROG PACH YBATRACHUS PETERSIT KEFERSTEIN, REPORTED FROM AUSTRALIA The frog genus Pachvbarravhus Kelerstein (1868) was efected for a single specimen of ihe new species # petersii.' The type locality was reported to be "Neu-Siid- Wales", and the collector Kelorstein's brother-in-law Dr R. Schuette.? Keferstein referred che genus to che Engystomatidae (now a synonym of ihe Microhytidae), a fatnily that in Australia is continéd (Oo northern Queensland and the northern extremity of the Northern Terrilory, In a review of the Micrahylidae Parker? dic not examine the holotype, but nevertheless referred 2 petersii to the synonymy of Uperadon systoma (Schneider) of Indi and Sri Lanka, clearly disbelieving the accuracy of the type locality, and supporting {he opinion of other contributors.’ This view was fallawed by Manre.® More recenily Cogger ev al.’ jnetuded P petersi’ as a species inquirendd in Uneic annotated fist of the Australian herpetofauna, listed at Under “Microhylidae?”, and elaborated by stalin that the family allocation of the species is uncertain. Bohme & Bischatl do not question the family dispasiion but, confirming that the colleeror visired New Sout Wales ji7 1467, anc.also that Parker did not examine the holotype, allach more eredence co the reported type locality than to Parker's opinion. They therefore regard FP. perersiia member of the Australian fauna. Zweitel® figs erilicised [hal action, None of rhese contributors appear ta have exaniined the holotype. &’ £ "4 Kw. 1 Holotype of Parktbatrachus perersit Kelersteig (7.E.M.K, 28358). Phota: B. Rermipster. Seale in em, 'Kelerstein, W. (1868), Arch. Naturgesch., Berlin 34, 27% “Bohne, Wo & Bischoff, Wo (1484) Bonner rit Monogr. (9), USE 213. "Parker, 1h Wi (93a). Crags of the barnily Microliytlidae. (British Museum Trustees, London). Through the courtesy of Dr W. Bohme of the Zoologisches Forschungsinstitut und Museun) Alexander Koenig, Bonu, | have been permitted to examine the Specimen involved (ZPMK 28388), with the objective of clarifving the systernane position of PA pelersii, and determining whether it should be regarded a respresen- tative of the Australian fauna, The tolotype (Pig. 1) is a gravid female with a snout ro vent length of 57 mm, [nits gross habitus it resembles fossorial species referted (o the leplodactylid genera Notaden, Neabutrachus and. particularly Jeleiaporus, The specimen is in a good state of preservation but portions have been dissected extensively. Almost the entire pectoral musculatiire is missing, but the bones of the girdle appear complete. IL is firmisternal with massive coracaids and @ vast xiphisternum; there is o0 trace of procoracoids, clayicles or omosternum, and its appearance is therelore in accord with the figure accompanying the original desuription. The reduged and firmisternal nature of the pectoral girdle demanstrate that this species cannot be associated’ wilh Australian leprodactylids which are arciferal The massive reducuon in the number of clemerts cf the pectoral girdle, combined with the presence of a broad, fimbriated, pre-pharyriyeal ridge, preceded by @ shorter curved one (also illustrated by Keterstein) are consistent with the association of Pachvbarrachus with Uperodon. In ils site and external morpholopy P petersit conforms in every respect lo the redescription of Li sysrema and | hive oo hesitation in supporting Parker's? view of considering These species synonymous. The argument of Bohme & Bischotf* that (he holotype came from New South Wales hinges entirely upun the substantiation that Schuetie collected there. This issue is not in dispute, but confusion af a rype locality oecurs elsewhere in Kelerstein's paper: he described Ayla sehuetieli from Sydney, whereas Copland” demonstrated iL lo be synonymous with Liftoria adeluidensis (Gray) Which is confined to the southwest of Western Australia, |” Knowledge of the Australian flerpetolauna, and its continental relavionships, is sufficiently well developed to fettite the possibility of u large microhylid frog occurring in both phe Indian and Australian continents, How a specimen trom India or Sri Lanka came to be included in the reporr of a collection from Australia remains Wiknown. Nevertheless, L can find no justification tor believing that the holotype of F petersit came from Australia or that (here remains sufficient doubt tu even mere its lishing a5 a speies inquirencdd. *Boulenyer, G. A, (1842), Catalogue of ‘The Batrachia Salientia 5. Ecaudata in the eollectian of the British Museum, 2nd Edition. (Boosh Museum, London). “Nieden, B (1926). Das Tierreich 49, |-110, Moar J. A. (1961). Bull. Amer. Mus. mat. Mist, 121(3), 149-486, 92 7Cogger, H. G., Cameron, E. E. & Cogger, H. M. (1983). °Copland, S. J. (1957). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.SW. 82, 9-108. Zoological Catalogue of Australia. 1. Amphibia and !°Tyler, M. J., Smith, L. A. & Johnstone, R. E. (1984). Reptilia. (Bureau of Flora and Fauna, Canberra.) Frogs of Western Australia (Western Australian Museum, 8Zweifel, R. G. (1985). Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. Hist. Perth). 182(3), 265-388. MICHAEL J. TYLER, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, Box 498, G.P.O., Adelaide, S. Aust. 5001. VOL. 110, PARTS 3 & 4 28 NOVEMBER, 1986 Contents x Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia Incorporated Koste, W. & Shiel, R. J. New rotifera (Aschelminthes) from Tasmania - - - Davies, M. & Littlejohn, M. J. Frogs of the genus Upero/eia Gray (Anura: Rapid actyittiae) in south-eastern Australia- - = _ a 5 é x Greenhalgh, S. A., Singh, R. & Parham, R. T. Earthquakes in South Australia- - - Burton, T, C. & Stocks, R. A new species of terrestrial microhylid frog from Papua New Guinea - - - 2 ~ <4 C 2 = . _ Thomas, I. M., Ainslie, R. C., Johnston, D. A., Offler, E. W. & Zed, P. A. The effects of cooling water discharge on the intertidal fauna in the Port River Estuary, South Australia- - - - - - - - - Brief Communications: Lange, R. T. A systematic effect of stocking intensity upon the specific defoliation rate of saltbush by sheep - - - ~ = 2 a = ki Guerin, B. New records of spiders (Arachnida: Araneae) from South Australia- - - Guerin, B. Celaenia atkinsoni (Arachnida, Araneae): new record for South Australia with a description of the male- - - > = = = z = Jago, J. B. An alleged Archaeocyath from Cape Denison, Antarctica- - - - Barlow, B., Denham, D., Jones, T., McCue, K., Gibson, G. a Grecubalgh$ S. The Musgrave Ranges earthquake of eines 30, 1986 - - - - Shepherd, S. A. & Gray, J. D. Food of the anemone Anthothoe albocincta at West Island, South Australia = - - S a ms a = 5 2 = Tyler, M. J. & Watson, G. F. On the nomenclature of a hylid tree frog from Queensland- PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000 93 111 145 155 159 173 177 181 183 187 191 193 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED VOL. 110, PART 3 NEW ROTIFERA (ASCHELMINTHES) FROM TASMANIA BY WALTER KOSTE & RUSSELL J. SHIEL Summary One hundred Tasmanian aquatic habitats were surveyed for Rotifera in Spring 1985. Of 130 species identified, 63 were first records for Tasmania, 17 new to Australia and four (Brachionus lyratus tasmaniensis ssp. nov., Lepadella tana sp. nov., Cephalodella lindamaya sp. nov., and Testudinella mucronata tasmaniensis ssp. nov.) new to science, bringing to approximately 200 the rotifers known from the island. New taxa are described and figured; several of the first records for Australia are also figured, and ecological and zoogeographical peculiarities of the Tasmanian Rotifera are discussed. NEW ROTIFERA (ASCHELMINTHES) FROM TASMANIA by WALTER KOSTE* & RUSSELL J. SHIELT Summary Koster, W. & Stet, R. J. (1986) New Rotifera (Aschelminthes) from ‘lasmania. Trans. R. Soc, S. Aust. 110(3), 93-109, 28 November, 1986. One hundred Tasmanian aquatic habitats were surveyed for Rotifera in Spring 1985. Of 130 species identified, 63 were first records for Tasmania, 17 new to Australia and four (Brachionus lyratus tasmaniensis ssp. nov., Lepadella tana sp. nov., Cephalodella lindamaya sp. nov., and Testudinella mucronata tasmaniensis ssp. nov.) new to science, bringing to approximately 200 the rotifers known from the island. New taxa are described and figured; several of the first records for Australia also are figured, and ecological and zoogeographical peculiarities of the Tasmanian Rotifera are discussed. Kry Worps: Rotifera, new species, new records, Tasmania, zoogeography. Introduction Until recently rotifers were considered cosmopolitan, but it is becoming increasingly evident that there are distinct zoogeographic associations (Dumont 1983). Some 600 species of more than 2000 rotifer taxa known worldwide are recorded from Australian inland waters, and there is increasing evidence for the radiation of some groups in southern Australia [e.g. >30% endemicity in the brachionids (Shiel 1983)]. Tasmanian records were necessary to define the zoogeographical trends apparent across the south-east and south-west of the continent; however, the literature on the Tasmanian rotifer fauna is notably sparse (Sudzuki 1967, 1985; De Deckker & Williams 1982). The abundance of permanent standing waters on the island and high rainfalls relative to the mainland suggested a rich fauna should occur. The first surveys of Tasmanian waters specifically for rotifers established that a diverse planktonic and littoral rotifer association was present: 131 taxa in 34 genera were identified by Koste & Shiel (1986a). Only 3% of these appeared to be restricted to Tasmania, and a radiation of brachionids comparable to,that of the mainland was not evident. Notable, however, were the “tropical” affinities; in sample series from April 1980 and May 1984, rotifers previously considered pantropical in distribution were widely distributed, possibly reflecting Tasmania’s moderate maritime climate. To investigate further these unexpected rotifer associations, and to add information on seasonal variations in species composition and diversity, a further survey of >100 fresh-saline habitats was made in Nov.-Dec. 1985. This paper reports on the results, and in particular the Rotifera new to *Ludwig-Brill-Strasse 5, Quakenbriick, D-4570 Federal Republic of Germany {Botany Department, University of Adelaide, Box 498 GPO Adelaide, 5001, 5. Aust. Tasmania and Australia, We summarise ecological observations in the context of this survey; full details of ranges of water quality for each species are included in a continuing revision of the Australian Rotifera (Koste & Shiel 1986b, 1987). Other components of the survey, particularly Protozoa and microcrustacea, will be treated later (Shiel & Tan in prep.). Materials and Methods Sites sampled are shown in Fig. 1. Most sites sampled in the two earlier autumn surveys were visited again. However, unusually high rainfall and flooding in early December prevented collections in some of the midland localities. Habitats sampled in 1985 ranged from ephemeral flooded roadside ditches (15), permanent marshes (5), stock dams (46), streams (4), rivers (5) and their impoundments (18), large natural lakes (10), a marine-associated basin (1) and the Hobart Botanical Gardens duck pond. All sampling was from margins in small habitats, from wader-depth in larger habitats, and where possible from the retaining wall over deep water in impoundments. More stock dams were accessible by road than other habitats, hence the greater sampling frequency. Physical parameters measured in the field were: temperature (hand held 50°C alcohol thermometer), conductivity (TPS LC81 Conductivity meter) and pH (Radiometer 29 portable pH meter). Plankton samples were collected using a 37 »m-mesh cone net (3 x 6m tows), littoral taxa by a 50 wm-mesh cone net fitted with a 30 cm-aperture stainless steel Birge cone, and small lentic habitats were sampled using a 10 / bucket and pouring 2-3 volumes through a 37 «um stainless steel mesh fitted to a specimen vial. All samples were concentrated to 100-120 ml and preserved with 4% formalin in “Whirl-Pak” plastic bags for transport. 94 W. KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL 145 146 a id | . BASS STRAIT ae ( x?) 25, oa Burnie 2 = 54, aes 22: Y 52.53 57; St fiplens 21 in ? 58 ces Ls, 50 Launceston '50 a, 19, or® ; a 49 30 29 ‘4 Great Lake ‘i 0 5 % 3, 48, 61, ap Fed) gy( 337", , ; Queenstown. 3! Lake sion !.95% 40 99 1 s on : 13012 69 y, XQ es 100, A é HOBART 86. 4 —43 79 s\, SOUTHERN OCEAN <1 80-84 . = TASMAN SEA ' 1 ! | Fig. 1. Sampling sites from 1984-85 surveys. Results Ranges of water quality recorded were as follows: Water temperature 12.0-29.0°C; conductivity (Kjg) 14,6-34 800 nS cm~!; pH 3.1-8.9. Most localities sampled had dark, tea-coloured humic waters, 81% below pH 7.0, and were low in electrolytes (52% <100, 40% 100-1000, 8% >1000 »S cm!). The few higher salinity localities either were influenced by proximity to the sea (e.g. Diana’s Basin and stock dams near St Helens) or were subject to increasing salinization from human activities (eg. Lake Dulverton, Oatlands). Predictably, rotifer communities of most Tasmanian waters were dominated by acidophils. NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA "4 One hundred and (hirly rotifer species were identified from the 1985 sample series; 63 of (hese are Tiyst peeords (Table 1), bringing to approximately 200 (he known Tasmatian taxa, and |7 are new ta Australia (total now 620), including four new taxa desorbed here, Systematics Brachiomes Iyratus fasmaniensis ssp. noy, FIG, 2a-c Material: 244 females in formalin, sample No. 1477, 36 @ D sample 1478. Holotwpe: Fenrvale Jorica on microshde, sample 1477, Coll, 7.977,1985, R J. Shiel. South Australian Museum, SAM V4018. Paratypes; Bates and place of collection as for haloyrpe, two slides in the South Australian Museum, SAM V4026, SAM V4027. Type locality: Turbid stock dam 200 m east of Karanju (Pig. 1:94,.42°45'S, 146°30 B], east side of Strathvardon road. Also present in a second dam about 45 m west. Neither dum had emergent vegetation, 19,5-22.0°C, pH 4,0-6,2, 228-242 1S cin |. Dig. 2. Brachionus Wratus rasmaniensis ssp..noy, a. lorica, dorsal, b. loricva ventral, e-d. lovica, lateral, sublranvous egg, Seale bar 100 yim. Deseripiion: Lorica shape resembles Bo lyralus Shephard, 1911, but.at anterior dorsal margin of head opening onty short inwardly curving median spines present; intermediate spines absent. Laleral spines relatively long, blunt, curved towards ventral plate (Figs 2a-c pr). Dorsal surface facetted, with caudal median projection overlapping fool-opening. Club-shaped posterior projections curve oulwards as in type, but covered with minute papillae. Ventral plate ornamentation resembles & pinneenaus Koste & Shiel, 1983, but caudally a long ventral facet is lncking. Lorica granulated, more strongly on the dorsal plate, Measurements: Lorica length 100-152 pm; width 75-120 ym; foot-opening dorsal 27 36 jum subitaneous cey (Fig. 2e) 50 =» 75 pm, Diseussion: The new taxon belongs to the endemie and morphologically distinet Brachionus group comprising B lyratus Shephard, 1911, B Keikoa Koste, 1979 and B pinreenaus Koste & Shiel, 1983, These taxa can readily be separaied from the Brachionus angulatis evoup atter Ahlstrom (1940). Another distinct morph has been found recently in material from N.SW. (T. J. Hillman, pers, comm,), Until this population is described (Koste & Shiel in prep.), and the extent of variation in the above Australian endemics is Cully detailed, the Tasmanian muterial is regarded as a subspecies. The need for vontinued use of trinomials in rotifer systematics, which still is founded mostly on morphological and anatomical characteristics, is discussed by Koste & Shiel 1987. Literature: Shephard (1911), Koste (1979), Koste e/ al. (1983), Cephalodella lindamaya 5p. nov, FIGS 3a-f, 4 Material Four more or less contracted females in formalin, sample No. 1432. Holotype: Fernale with contracted head in lateral position on slide, sample No. 1432. Coll, L.xii.1985 R. J_ Shiel. SAM V4019. Icanotype microphoto- graph Fig.4. Paratype: Date and plage of collection as for holotype. SAM V4028. Tepe locality: Stock dam 1 km south of Copping (Fig, (:73, 42°49'S, 47°48'B), west side Hwy 7; black, humic water, peripheral reeds; 21.7°C, pH <4, 80 pS em. Descripiion: Body stiort, stout; head shert, very broad, slightly dellexed, oblique anteriorly; meek well-marked, Larica weak, plates not readily visible. Foot normal, toes relatively long, somewhat swollen basally (Fig. 3c), medially slender, terminating in slightly curved claws with acute points. Pour small, avute spinules inside rhis well-marked terminal part, 96 W, KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL e Fig. 3. Cephalodella lindamaya sp. nov. a. female, lateral (slightly contracted), b. completely contracted, ventral, c. toe enlarged with claw and spinules, d. trophi, e. manubrium, apical, f. uncus, Scale bars a, b 100 um, c 10 pm, d-f 10 pm, Mastax large (Fig. 3d); rami spherical, with denticulate inner margin behind points; fulcrum long, slender; uncus with one tooth, lamellar projection attached at its base; manubria unusual, terminally crutched and leaf-shaped, enlarged and distorted (Fig. 3d). This can be observed only in lateral view, cf. apical view (Fig. 3e), Foot-glands large and club-shaped (Fig. 3a). Measurements: Total length of slightly contracted individual 245 wm (Fig. 3a); toes 68 wm (spinules 4-6 «m); trophi 43 wm (manubrium 38 pm, fulcrum 24 wm, unci 17 wm, rami 14m). Discussion: Only one individual was. slightly extended; the others were contracted, however a valid species can be defined on the basis of hitherto unknown characteristics of trophi structure and toes with claws. Only Cephalodella panarista and C. Sorficula s.l. have spines or spinules at the edge of their toes (cf. Koste 1978 Pl 129:2d, 6b, e), but these are inserted dorsally. The construction and dimensions of the trophi, with distinctive manubria, differ from other taxa in the genus. Etymology; named after Dr Linda May, Institute of Terrestrial Ecology, Edinburgh, in recognition of her work on Rotifera. Fig. 4. C. lindamaya, iconotype micrograph of contracted animal. Cephalodella mucronata Myers, 1924 FIG. 5h This pantropical and subtropical species is known from isolated occurrences on the mainland (Mungindi R., northern N.SW., Magela Ck, N.T. and ephemeral water of south-west W.A.). Three contracted individuals were recorded from separate localities in Tasmania: No’s 1456 (Lake Pedder, 4.xii.1985), 1460 (roadside pool 4.xii.1985), 1506 (pool, buttongrass plain near Tullah, 11.xii.1985). All were contracted, with diatoms in the digestive tracts. Measurements: Body to 173ym, toes to 137 um. Ecology: 17.5-29.0°C, pH 3.4-5.5, 34.1-59.3 pS cm r Lit: Koste (1978), Koste & Shiel (1980). Proales cf. fallaciosa Wulfert, 1937 FIGS 5a-e In samples 1458 and 1460, both roadside pools near the Strathgordon road (4.xii.1985), and 1475, Lake Fenton, Mt Field National Park (7.xii.1985), were more or less contracted illoricate vermiform rotifers (n=6, 4 and 2 respectively) which had a short papilla between the bases of the toes, as in Proales fallaciosa (cf. Koste 1978 Pl. 92:5a). Trophi analysis revealed a relatively long fulcrum and unci with only four teeth, in contrast to the asymmetrical trophi with 5-6/7 teeth of P fallaciosa. See also the extraordinary toes with well-marked claws NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 97 ! 4 1 1 ‘ ‘ \ \ \ apes 4a, *.. wt f Fig. 5. a. Proales cf. fallaciosa Wulfert, 1937, contracted female, ventral, b. trophi, c. trophi compressed, d. manubrium, lateral, e. foot and toes, lateral. f. Encentrum cf. diglandula (Zawandowski, 1926), trophi, g. fulcrum. h. Cephalodella mucronata Myers, 1924. Female with contracted head. Scale bars a, h 100 wm, others 10 pm. os W.KOSTE & R J}. SHIEL (Fig, Se). This probably is a distant species, however an exact identification was not possible from the material. PF fallaciosa is known from the Magela Creek, N.T, (Koste 1981), Measurements: Toral length (Fig, 4:1a) 160 am, toes 18 wnt, trophi 21 pm, manubria 17 wm, fuleruin 12 prt, longest tooth of uncus 8.5 pm. Encentrum cf. diglandula (Zawadowski), 1926 FIGS Sf, 2 In sample 1460 (roadside pool, Strathgordon road, 4.xii.1985) were two contracted illorivate rotifers which (on digestion in hypochlorite) had irophi almost identical to those of E. diglanilula, known till new only from Europe. Meaywrements; Trophi length 25 ym (unei Spr, intramallei 3 um, fulerum Spm, manubna 18.5 wm). cf. Koste 1978497, Collotheca campanulata longicaudata (Hudson), [883 FIGS Gad In} samples 1381 (stock dum, Si Mary's road, 29.81 1985), 1457, 1459, 1462 (Lake Pedder, A.xii.1985) were populations of individuals attached io filamentous algae. Sudzuki (1985) recorded C. campanilata campanulaia from Tasmania; it appears to be widely distributed in Australia, Fig. 6 shows individuals from sample 1462 (Scatt’s Peak Dam arm, Lake Pedder) in which we found §2 specimens of the ssp. Cc. fongicaudata, mostly with contracted coronae and feet (Pig. 6d), but a few were well-extended (Figs. @a-b), They had the sume trophi as the type (Fig. 6c), but the peduncle was never drawn together and of a previously undescribed length (cf. Koste 1972, 1978). For development of the peduncle see Summerfield- Wright (1959), We regard this population as a new form, Measurements: Toial length 300-800 fm, corona width 100-150 jam, peduncle 300-426 jum (in lit, only fo 200. um), Lit! Shiel & Koste 1979, Collatheca edentata edentata (Collins}, 1872 FIGS 7, 8 syn: Ploseularia edentata Collins, 1872. Not previously recorded from Australia, this species was represented by a single female in sample 1485 (roadside pool, Queenstown road | kim cast of walking track to Frenchman's Cap, 8.xii.1985), Mastax and stomach (Fig. 8) were filled with four large Euastrum, many phtyto- and zoollagellates and nearly LOO Bacillariophyceae. The species has been recorded from Europe, N. & S. America and B. Asia, and apparently is cosmopolitan (Kurikava 1970; Koste & Jose de Pawgi 1982). For biology see Penard (1914) and Koste (1978). Measurements: Total length 490 put, corona with 100 jam, body width 173 ym, foot incl, peduncle 158 xm, peduricle 18 pm, peduncle plate 20 pm. Ecoloyy: 18°C. pH 4.6, 36.4 pS cm |. Lit, Collins 1872, Koste 1986, Lecane (su) pumila (Rousselet), 1906 FIGS 9a-b L, pumila also ts new for the Australian region. This species belongs to the few taxa in the genus which do not have separate dorsal and ventral lorica plates, but a soft undivided integument. Hauer (1936), ina monograph on L. pumila, poinied out that rather than a notammiatid, as intially described by Rousselet, this taxon is a Lecane which lives in ilgae and mosses of running waters. The localities int which this minwe snimal are found are widely separated: N. Germany, Scotland, Sweden, Java and Sumatra Kutikova (1970) includes Czechoslovakia, Roumania and Canada, but locality details are nat given, A single animal was present in sample 1482 (Lake St Clair, 7.xi), 1985, near kiosk). 17°C, pH 7.3, 20,1 bS cm |, Measurements. Lorica length 72 jan, toes [2 ray) incl. claw, claw 4 pm. Litr Rousselet 1906, Voigt 1957, Levune nana (Murray), 1913 FIG, 10 A population of L. nana occurred in a stock dam 5 km south of Tunbridge (1471, 5.xii,1985), and is a first record for Tasmania, The specimens did wot correspond to the figure given by Harring & Myers (1926 Pl, 34:1-2). The lorica was not se subcircular, but more elongated and the toes not so attenuated. The Tasmanian forms showed more conformity with the taxon drawn by Hauer (1925:Fig. 8) (see also Kaste 1978:205, Pl. 68:10). The toes are very straight and the terminal claws curve outwards. Measurements: Dorsal plate 6] ywm, ventral plate 8 um, lorica Width 58 wm, anterior margin 43 pm, toes incl, claws 28-29 pm. Exology: 185°C, pH 7.4, 565 nS em~!, L. nara is distributed in the Palae- and Neoarctic, Neotropics and Oriental region, and was recorded from Queensland by Russell (1961). Lecane (s.sir) ohivensis appendiculata (Levander), 1894 FIG. Insample [381 (brackish stock dam, St Mary's road near St Helens, 29.x) 1985) wete 34 specimens i NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 99 Fiz. 6. Collotheca campanulata longicaudata (Hudson), 1883. Lake Pedder form. a. female, lateral, b. dorsal. c. irophi, ventral, d. contracted, Secale bar 100 pm. 100 W. KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL Fig. 7. Collotheca edentata (Collins, 1872. Female, dorsal, Scale bar 100 um. belonging to the taxonomically difficult Lecane ludwigi-ohioensis group. All taxa are distinguishable by the different appendices of the ventral lorica plate (see Koste 1978 Pl. 71:1-10). There are, however, intermediate forms to L. /udwigi and also to L. ohioensis. The present population is uniform (Fig. 11). The appendices are all short, slightly narrowed laterally before the end (marked by a convex line), Such a taxon was described as Cathypna appendiculata by Levander in 1894. Koste (1978) called the brackish water rotifer Lecane ohioensis f. appendiculata (Levander), 1894. In view of its specific ecological demands we probably are justified in changing its rank to that of ssp. (see also Koste 1978:213; De Ridder 1961). Fig. 8. C. edentata, micrograph of specimen with gut distended with algae. Figs 9, 10, 9, Lecane (s. str.) pumila (Rousselet), 1906. a. dorsal, b. toe, lateral. 10. Lecane (s. str.) nana (Murray), 1913. Ventral. Scale bar 20 pm. Measurements: Total lorica length 132 ym, dorsal plate length 87 ym, dorsal plate width 86 »m, ventral plate width 72 um, anterior margin 52 um, toes 39 pm, Ecology: 19.0°C, pH 7.8, 6120 nS cm-!. Cosmopolitan in oligo-mesohaline waters. Recorded NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 101 11 Fig. 11. Lecane (s. str.) ohioensis appendiculata (Levander), 1894. Ventral. Scale bar 20 pm. from Queensland (Colledge 1914) and Tasmania (Koste & Shiel 1986a). Lepadella acuminata (Ehrenberg), 1834 FIG. 12 First record for Tasmania, commonly in stock dams, acid waters. Probably pancontinental, recorded from Qld (Colledge 1911), Vic. (Green 1981), N.T. (Koste 1981) and W.A. (Koste ef a/ 1983). Measurements: Lorica length 90 um, lorica width 60 pm, toes 22 wm. Ecology: 16.0-23.5°C, pH 54.4-7.8, 42-1020 uS cm~'. Lepadella ovalis (Miller), 1786 (?f. nov.) FIG. 13 A minute form, possibly an ecotype, occurred in sample 1469 (Lake Dulverton near Oatlands, 5.x1i.1985). Measurements: Lorica length 87 »m, lorica width 83 wm, toes 25 um (cf. Koste 1978 Pl. 60:1). Ecology: 18.0°C, pH 7.7, 3330 pS cm—!. Lepadella patella (Miller), 1786 FIG. 15 Another extremely small form co-occurring with L. ovalis in sample 1469, and also found in two acid stock dams at Huonville (1435/37, 1.xii.85). Measurements: Lorica length 79 um, lorica width 54 wm, toes 18 um (cf. Koste 1978 Pl. 59:2). Ecology: 18.0-24.5°C, pH 3.4-7.7, 45.5-3330 uS cm~". Lepadella patella biloba Hauer, 1958 FIG. 14 In sample 1502 (stock dam 36 km south of Burnie, 11.xii.1985) was a population resembling this subspecies, which was first described from Australia in Yarnup Swamp, W.A. (Koste ef a/ 1983). There is considerable variation in the described lorica forms of L. patella, particularly the foot opening. In the absence of a detailed study of morphological variation, we retain the subspecific ranking for this Figs 12-15. 12. Lepadella acuminata (Ehrenberg), 1834. Ventral. 13. Lepadella ovalis (Miller), 1786. L. Dulverton form, ventral. 14. Lepadella patella biloba (Haver), 1958, ventral. 15. Lepadella patella (Miller), 1986. L. Dulverton form, ventral. Scale bar 100 pm. 102 W, KOSTE & R. J. SHIELD, form given by previous reVisers (ez. Kutikova 1970; Koste 1978), It is likely that a species complex is involved. Measurements: Lorica length 109 ym, lorica width 65 pm, toe$ 22 pm. Ecology: 16.5°C, pH 4.7, 42 pS cm |. Lepadella rhomboides haueri (Wulfert), 1956 FIG. 16 The type probably is pancontinental in Australia, Four individuals of this subspecies co-occurred with the above Lepudella, Measurements: Lorica length 110 pm, lorica width 70 pm, toes 36 pm, Lepudella tripiera triptera Ehrenberg, 1830 FIGS 17, 18 An unusually small variant co-occurred with L. ovalis and L. patella in Lake Dulverton, Oatlands (sample 1469, Pig. 17), while the typical form occurred in Lake Augusta (1497, Fig, 18), This also may be an ecotype. Measurements (Fig. 15): Lorica length @1 jam, lorica width 54 am, toes 18 ym. (Fig. 16): length 76 am, width 61 am, toes 20 am. Lepadella tana sp. nov. FIG 19 Materials; Four loricate females, samples 1457 (3), 1458 (1). Halotype: Loricate female, sample 1457, collected 4.xi1.85 by L. W, Tan. SAM V4020. Paratype’ Date and place of collection as for holotype, SAM V4026-7. Type localiiy: Lake Pedder, deep bay south side of Strathgordon road 10 km east of Strathvordon (1 km east of boathouse). Dark, humic water, >2 m deep, no emergent vevetation, 16.5°C, pH 5.3, 46.2 «Ss como. Description: Lorica broadly ovoid, ventral flat, dorsal medially convex in median cross section; amterior margin of head opening nearly straight, ventral margin with a weak v-shaped aperture, Behind the middle of the body a fold, on cither side of which is a pointed, slightly curved spine, both directed apically. Foot-opening broad. Foot as usual with four segments; toes relatively long, straight and sharply pointed. Measurements, Lorica length 79 pm; lorica width (medially) 61 um; anterior width of lorica 29 um; foot opening 18 « 18 ym; Jength of toes 29 pun; Jength of lateral spines 18 pm. Discussion: This species is distinctive in the genus (see Koste 1978); the only other taxon resembling it is Léepadella neboissi, an apparently endemic Figs 16-19, 16, Lepadella rhontboides haueri (Wullert), 1956. Dorsal, 17. Lepudella triptera Ehrenberg, 1830. Ventral. 18. Lepadella triptera. Dorsal..19, Lepadelle tend sp. voy. Ventral. Seale bar 100 pin. Victorian species described by Berzins (1961). The latter has lateral folds, but no spines, and its toes are curved. Etymotogy; Named after the collector, Ms Lor Waj ‘lan, Department of Agricultural Biochemistry, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of Adelaide. Proales similis similis De Beauchamp, 1908 FIGS 20a-d Sample 1380 (Diana’s Basin, near St Helens, saline) contained sixteen females resembling FP similis exoculis Berzins, 1953, which was recorded from Western Australia. There is Some doubt on the validity of this ssp. (Koste 1978) and we have referred the material to the lypical form, although we could not detect a median red eye as described tor P similis type. In our experience the colour of rotifer eyes disappears in minute Species if they are NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 103 Fig. 20. Proales similis De Beauchamp, 1908. a, Female, ventral, slightly contracted, b. female, ventral (coll. Dr C. K. Brain, Transvaal Museum, S. Africa), c. trophi, d. toes with foot glands. Scale bar 100 um. retained in formalin-preserved collections. The type is known from saltwaters in Europe, Africa, N. America, S. America. Measurements: Total length of stretched but preserved females 133-150 ym; toes 13 wm; trophi 15-20 pm. Ecology: 19.0°C, pH 8.9, 34 800 pS cm~!. Ptygura barbata Edmondson, 1939 FIG, 2la Sample 1421, a stock dam 9 km north of Triabunna, contained 4 9 9 of P barbata, which resembles P longicornis (Davis) (recorded from the mainland by Whitelegge 1889 and Anderson & Shephard 1892). The best morphological characteristic of P barbata is the dorsal projection between the lateral antennae, which is formed as a bun-shaped process. A peduncle was not visible. Measurements: Tube length — 400 um, contracted animal — 200 pm. Ecology: 16.5°C, pH 5.2, 216 pS cm~!. Lit: Edmondson 1939:463, Figs 21-24; Koste 1974336, Figs. 23a-c. Ptygura ct. brachiata (Hudson), 1886 (?f. nov.) FIGS 21b-c Sample 1447, a roadside pool, Hartz Mountains National Park, containded 309 9 in brownish tubes with a more yellow transparent top. Contracted animals with long lateral antennae and a double pointed blunt hook above the head closure. A very long peduncle unknown in this species resembles P /inguata Edmondson, 1939, but other Met Seat Bee EI Fig. 21. a. Ptygura barbata Edmondson, 1939. Female contracted in tube. b-c. Prygura c.f. brachiata ?n.f, Females contracted in tubes. Scale bar 100 pm, 104 W. KOSTE & RK, J, SHIEL morphological characteristics are like those of P brachiata (Hudson), 1886 (see Koste 1970, Pl. 4a-e), Determination of the status of this taxon awaits further (uncontracted) material. Meusuremenis: Tubes 792-798 pm; contracted animals 340-420 pm; lateral antennae 35-40 am: peduncle 170-216 um; subilaneous egy 36 «= 78 wm. Ecology: 16.6°C, pH 3.8, 63.6 pS em !. Lit. Edmondson (1939, 1940), Koste (1978), Plygura tacita Edmondson, 1940 FIG, 22 Sample 1435 (stock dam, Huonville road south of Hobart) and. 1446 (roadside pool 12 km trom Hartz Mt National Park, west of Geeveston) coniained 6 and 12 females respectively in broad hyaline tubes, the inner lumen with a characteristic narrowing at the bottom. Measurements: Tubes 450-800 pm; peduncle 200-270 pm; subitaneous egg 25 «= 82 ym. For other measurements see Koste 1978:546. Ecology: 16,5-24.5°C, pH 3.9-5.7, 45.5-65.0 pS emt, Lil: Edmondson 1939, 1940. Prygura melicerta socialis (Weber), 1888: FIG 23 In sample 1490 (Botanical Gardens Pond, Hobart) some contracted and also extended Prvgura were found in cyanophyte colonies, Fig. 23 shows a free-living female. A circular corona and very long foot were present. A tube was not visible; nor were two minute hooks in the neck under the dorsal corona, an important characteristic of P meficerta meélicerta (Bhrenberg, 1832). Whilelegge (1889) recorded a P mrelicerta trom N.SW., however the deseription is incomplete; the morphologically distinctive presence or absence of hooks in the neck is not mentioned, The animal resembles P meticerta socialis (cf. Weber 1888 p. 647 Fig. 28:1-4). The N.SW. record also muy be this taxon. See Koste (1978:550-S551, Pl. 205:2a, b). Testudinella. mucronata tasmaniensis ssp. nov. FIGS 24a, b, 25 Material: Ten loricate females were present in samples 142] (stock dam, Triabunna) and 1457 (Lake Pedder). Holotype: Lorieate female. sample 1421, on preserved slide. Coli. R- J. Shiel 29.x7,1985. SAM V4021, Paratypes: Dave and place of collection as for holotype, two slides, SAM V4029, TBipe locality: Siock dam 9 km north of Triabunna (1 km north of Ashgrove Creek) (42°26'S, 147°55'E), 165°C, pH §.2, 216 wS em-!, wee” AD AT) > vee ae yer Fig. 22. Prvgura racita Edmondson, 1940. Female contracted i tube, Seale bar 100 pm. Description: Shape resembles Tesrudinella mucronata (Gosse), 1886 (cf Koste 1978 Pl. 195:5a-c). Head-aperture normal but directed ventrally, with a collar, Dorsal posterior lorica with symmetrical folds, tte median with a Short rounded top. The type has a soft lorica surface and na folds, NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 105 Fig. 23. Ptygura melicerta socialis (Weber), 1888. Freeliving female, ventral, Scalar 100 ~m. Fig, 24. Testudinella mucronata tasmaniensis ssp. nov. a, b. loricas of different females. Scalar 100 pm. Foot-opening median at beginning of second third of ventral plate. Measurements: Lorica length 200-210 pm; lorica width 176-198 pm; foot-opening 28 x 29 wm; head aperture 70-75 pm wide, 35-39 wm deep. Discussion: T. mucronata (Gosse), 1886 has not been recorded from Australia. It is smaller than the Tasmanian material (lorica length to 170 wm, width to 140 wm). Larger size, head-opening projection and presence of a collar distinguished the Tasmanian specimens from the type, however the morphological variation in the 7, patina-ohlet- mucronata group suggests that specific ranking for the new taxon is not, on present evidence, warranted. 106 W, KOSTE & R. J. SHIEL Fig. 25. T. mucronata tasmaniensis, micrograph of loricate female. In a collection from the south-east of S. Australia (W. D. Williams, 10,ix.1982) we found ten specimens with all characteristics of 7: mucronata tasmaniensis; the rotifer may be more widely distributed across southern Australia. Discussion Community composition There were marked differences in rotifer communities between habitat types. Using the Shannon-Weaver index (H’') as a convenient measure of species richness, the habitats sampled can be ranked in order of decreasing rotifer community diversity: natural lakes (x H'’ =2.44) > rivers flowing from them (H' = 2.40) > marshes (H’ = 1.80) > streams (H' = 1.77) > impoundments (H' = 1.66) > roadside ditches (H' = 1,44). This apparent reduction in community complexity in part reflects increasing habitat ephemerality, although there were extremes within each category resulting from site-specific factors. Stock dams, for example, ranged from saline to fresh, and from turbid with no emergent vegetation to clear waters with marginal emergent reeds. Rotifer diversity correspondingly showed a wide range, from a H’ of 0.31 (#76 Fig. 1; 3 spp.., 99% Keratella australis) to 3.31 (#86 Fig. 1, 11 taxa relatively evenly distributed). In some habitats the presence of predatory cyclopoids and small corixids may have depressed rotifer community diversity. Because the H' index takes into account apportionment of the taxa, sites with the greatest number of species did not have the highest community diversity. For example, Lake Dulverton (#42 Fig. 1, H'’ = 3.21) and Lake Pedder (#88, H’ = 1.74) each had 17 rotifer species on the sampling date, but whereas the Lake Pedder community was dominated by Keratella cochlearis (70%), at least six taxa made up of 70% of the Lake Dulverton community. The greatest number of species in the 1984 sample series was 25 rotifer taxa from a dam (site #22, Fig. 1) near Ulverstone in the northwest. The highest in 1985 was 18 from a stock dam (#85) at Huonville. In comparison, rotifer communities on the mainland appear to be more diverse. Collections from Goulburn R. billabongs in Victoria two days after the last of the Tasmanian series in Dec. 1985 produced up to 32 rotifer taxa (H' = 4.24) in a single habitat. H'>5 has been recorded for rotifer communities on the floodplain of the Magela CK, N.T. (> 80 species present) (Shiel & Koste 1983). Few Tasmanian localities sampled had comparable emergent vegetation to effectively partition the habitat and provide microniches as is seen in mainland billabongs. Acid waters are not seen as an inhibitor of community diversity in this study; the most common Tasmanian species are acidophiles or eurytopic (Koste 1978), and the highest community diversities in the Magela Ck study were from waters more acid than those sampled in Tasmania. The noted disparity in species diversity between habitats included marked differences in species composition within each category of habitat; even adjacent stock dams usually had different species dominants, and the number of shared taxa decreased with increasing geographical distance, Stock dams (#80-84) near Southport, for example, within 200 m of each other, contained 21 rotifer taxa. Only two occurred in all four dams, and another two occurred in three of the four, This restricted distribution of most rotifers is reflected in Table 1, where 81% of the new records for Tasmania were found in only one or two habitats, and is in accord with observations from the mainland, where >50% of taxa are known from only single localities. Seasonality Seasonal changes in community structure were reflected in the disparity of species recorded in NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 107 Taplb J, Systematic list of Rotifera recorded from Tasmania for the first time, An asterisk (*) indicates a new record for Australia. Occurrence js shown by + = rare (one or two localities), ++ = limited distribution (<20% of localities, +44 = more widespread (> 20% localities). Habitat type is given by § = stack dam, P ~ pond or small roadside pool, L. = Jake or large impoundment, R = river or siream (flowing). wu pe u Ss o 5 £6 as 5 oa os 2 io] xz = <= I Bdelloidea 1. Dissatrocha macrossyla 32, .N. teipus Ehrbg | tibercuilata (Gosse)* + P 33. Pleurotrocha petromyzon Ehrbg te 2. Habrotrocha Bryce sp. + P 34, Cephalodella gibba microdactyla 3. Rofaria macrura (Bhrbp) * Ob Koch-Althaus* + fF 4. R. ratateria (Pallas) t+ §/P 35. C. intuta Myers + “5 5. R. rardigrada (Ehrog) + P 36, C. mucronata Myers t+ P/L 37. C. lindamaya sp. novt + 3 Ploimida 38. Trichocerva rattus carinara (Ehrbg) + -L 6. Epiphanes macrourus (Barrois 39, T. insignis (Herrick) + Sf & Daday) # OL 40. T. cf. insulana Hauer o- VE 7, Brachionus ureeolaris Miller) + 3S 41. Gastropus hyptopus (Ehrbg) r § 8. Wratus tasmaniensis ssp: nov? + 6§ 42. G. stiviifer Imhot yoL 9, Euchlanis incisa Carlin eS 43, Ascomorpha ovalis (Bergendahl) t+ SAL 10. EL cf. orepha Gosse r § 44, Polyarthra cf. dongiremis Carlin + U1. Colurella obtusa (Gosse) ++ $/P 4§. Dicranophorus forciparus (Muller) > #F 12. Squatinella mutica (Erbe) + S$ 46. Aspelia aper Harring +b 13, Lepadella acuminata (Ehrbg} + -§/P 47. Encentrum cf. diglandula 14. L. ovalis Miller) ft OL (Zawandowski)* + #F 15. L. patella (Miller) ++4+S/L/R 48. Tesfudinella patina (Hetmann) ia ER 16. .L. patella biloba (Hauer) ' § 49. T, mucronaia tusmaniensis ssp. nov* * OL 17. L. rhomboides hauveri Bartos rho oS 50. Beauchampia crucigera (Dutrochet) 4 8 18. L. triprera (Ehrbg) oe SL 51. Floseularia janus (Hudson) + § 19, L. dona sp. nov + P/L 52, Plygura barbata Edmondson* + § 20. Leewne (M.) acus Harring* i mA 53, PB. brachiata (Hudson) + P 21. L. (Mt) hornemanni (Ehrbe) i+ S/L, 54, P erystallinu (Ehrbg) + oP 220 OL. (ML) nana (Murray) + S/L 55, P melicerta socialis (Weber)* fF & 23, L. (M.) ef. sinvata Hauer* 4 S/L 56, P tacita Edmondson ++ 8 24. 1. (8, stv.) pumila Rousseler* r oL 57, Sinantherina cf. socialis (Linnaeus) K <8. 25. L. (s. str) sienifero (Jennings) + FP 58. Hexarthra fennica (Levander) + S/L 26, Proales falleciasa Wultert + o- 59. Collotheca cl. ambigua (Hudson) = P 27. Proates et. similis De Beauchamp* ‘OL 60. C. campanulata longicaudata 28. Lindia truncata (Jenning) + Rk (Hucson)* ++ S/L 29. Irura aurita (Ehrbe) + $/L 61, C. edentuta Collins)* 4 oP 40. Resticula melandacus (Gosse) + iP 62, C. libera (Zacharias)* yr «i 31, Notermmata pachyura (Gasse) tL 63. C. arnata natans Tschugunott* > OL nO successive sample series, The autumn series in 1984 produced 118 taxa, 75% of which were first records. The spring 1985 series from the same localities produced 133 taxa, 47% of which were lirst records. Further collecting from these localities probably will add a decreasing proportion of new records, however only about 100 localities have been sampled. The profusion of standing waters in ‘Tasmania would suggest (hat the total rotifer fauna is considerably greater, possibly exceeding that of the mainland (at present 600 + taxa). Most abundant species in the 1984 series, occurring in >20% of localities, were Keralella slacki > K. cochlearis > Trichocerca similis > RB. ausiralis > Polyarthra dolichoptera > Filinia longiseta > P. vulgaris > K. procurya/F. pejleri > Lecane lunaris, Fewer taxa occurred in > 20% of the 1985 samples: (K. s/acki) (35%), T. similis (32%), L. lunaris (29%), K. cochlearis (26%), P. vulgaris (25%) L. hamata (24%) and X. australis (22%). Only K. australis and K. slacki are endemics (pancontinental on the mainland). The remainder are widely tolerant cosmopolitan taxa. Zoogeography To date, the following rotifers are known only from Tasmania: Brachionus lyratus tasmaniensis, Lepadella tana, L. tvleri, Lecane tasmaniensis, Cephalodelia lindamava, Aspelta tilba, Testu- 108 W. KOSTE & R. J. SEUEL dinella husseyi, To mucronata tasminiensis and T unicornulo. This represents abour 4% endemicily, cf, approximarely 12% on the mainland (Dumonor 1983). Undoubtedly the degree of cndemicity will prove higher with more intensive collecting. The anomaloys distributions of warm- stenothermal “cosmotropical” rotifers at 42-43°S Was noted in our first Tasmanian survey report (Roste & Shiel 19864). The spring 1985 collections provided further evidence: 14 of the taxa listed in Table | aré Kviown only from Qld or the N.T, Several others are koown from single localities in northern N.S.W. or the southwest of W.A, These distributions probably reflect real spatial patterns rather (han patchy collecting; more than 1000 collections from southern Victoria 16 southern Qld 1976-81 over all seasons and all habitat types did hot contain them. The nature of the habitats provides part esplanation’ acid waters are abundant in Tasmanian and tropical nother Australia. The waters of our other major collecting areas 1o date (the Murray-Darling basin and south-west W.A,) are predominantly alkaline. The rotifers preferring alkaline waters, particularly species of Brachionus, have diversified in these habitats (Shiel 1983), bur notably are absent from tropical Australia and Tasmania. The few Brachionys recorded trom these areds are tolerant of extreme biotopes (Koste 1981) or are new, and presumably acidophiles. It is Mteresting ta speculate that these disjunct distributions may represent a relict rotifer fauna in Tasmania waters persisting from a period when the clunate was tropical. Fossil studies (e.g. Hill & MacPhail 1983) have demonstrated that parts of Tusmania (and south-eastern Australia) had temperate raifforest in the Oligovene. Environmental stresses (principally Miocene cooling) led to reduction in floristic diversity and ultimately jhe modern Tasmanian vegetation. An aquatic group such as the rotifers would be buflered against environmental stresses, particularly when these events were less severe than the glaciation in the northern hemisphere. The persistance of a faunule in the more stable conditions of lakes is perhaps more plausible than invoking large-scale dispersal trom northern Australia by wind or on the feet af birds. Fossil evidence would answer the question, but small size and poor preservation provide few rotifers in the fossil record. They were present during the tropical period in southern Australia; Southcow & Lange (197) )identilied a ?Keraredla from the Miocene o! South Australia, but there aré no Tasmanian records. Ackaowledements This study was.supparted by a grant to RIS frorn the Australian Biological Resources Study, Field water chemistry measurements were taken by L. W. Tan, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of Adelaide, whose perseverence and assistance in collecting while extremely damp are much appreciated. Thanks also to Drs R. L. Croome and P. A. Tyler, Department of Botany, University of Tasmania for access to facilities and equipment, and ta Dr D, Duckhouse, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, and an anonymous teteree, for helpful comments on a draft MS, References. AHLStROM, FE. H, (1940) A revision oF the rararorian gener Brachionus ant Ple/vies wih deseniprions of One Hew species Lud (we new varictics. Bull, An, Mins. Nat. Fist. 17, 143-184. Aspensas, H. Ho & SHEMARD, J, (1892) Nores on Viclurian Rotifers, Proc, Rk, Sov, Vict. 4, 9-80, Bekyins, Bo (0953) Zur Kenntnis der Rertoren. aus West-Ausiralien, Lavads Univ, Arnvkr, Nob 249, 1-12. (1961) New Rotaloria (Konfera) trom Victoria, Austvatia, Proc, R, See. Viet, 74, 82-86, CoO Lebur, W. R. (1911) Notes on the rotifers or wheel- animucwlae of Brisbane. Proc, R. Soe. Ql. 23, 87-91 —— — (1914) Addinons to the Rotifera of Queensland, Wed 27, 70-75. Comins, FL (1872) New species of Rotator. Science Gassip London &, Y11, De Decker, PL & WILLIAMS, W, D, (1982) Chemical and biological features of Tasnisajan salt lakes, dase, J. Mar. Freshwar. Res. 34, A89.494, Dr Rinook, M. (L961) Brude atin rnd ef conloawique des Rorifires de la Camargue, Biol, Jb Dodane 2, IGO241- Domost, Hot, (1983) Biogeography of rorilers Nydrobiologia Wa, V0. Lonionpsen, W. T. (1999) New species of Retatoria, Wilh noles on heteroganio erowih- Tras. ln. Mierase. Sac, 58, 458472, . ~~ - (1940) The sessile Rotatoria of Wisconsin, Trans, Am, Microsc. Soe. 59, 434.559, Gren, J, (1981) Assoviaiions of rotifers ia Avistealian crater lakes. J) Zanl. Lond. 193. 46%4k0. FarkieG, H, Ry & Mynes, FJ. (1926) The roller fauna of Wisconsin. IU. A revision Of the genera Lecane aod Morastyvla. Trans. Wise. Acad. Sei, Arty Log, 22, 3) 5423. PPyuek, J. (1925) Rotatorien aus den Salgvewissern von Oldesioe (Holst.). Att. Geogr. Ges. Nat. Mist, Mus, diuheek W Ser. 4, 452-195- (1936) 4ur Kotatorienlauna Deinsehlands (¥), foal, Anz. WS, 154-157. Hilt, B.S. Macpiaiy, M.K. (1983) Reconstruction of the Cilpocene vegetalion at Pioneer, rortheast Tasmania, Aeheringe 7, 28-299, NEW TASMANIAN ROTIFERA 109 Koste, W. (1972) Collotheca campanulata longicaudata. Mikrokosmos 61, 79-99. - (1978) Rotatoria. Die Radertiere Mitteleuropas. Uberordnung Monogononta. 2 Vol. Revision of M. Voigt. (Borntraeger, Stuttgart). (1979) New Rotifera from the River Murray, southeastern Australia, with a review of the Australian species of Brachionus and Keratella. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwat. Res. 30, 237-253. — (1981) Zur Morphologie, Systematik und Okologie von neuen monogononten Rdadertieren (Rotatoria) aus dem tiberschwemmungsgebiet des Magela Ck in der Alligator River Region, Australiens, NT. Teil 1. Osnabriicker naturwiss. Mitt. 8, 97-12. (1986) Collotheca edentata, ein sessiles Radertier “ohne Zahne”? Mikrokosmos 75 (in press). — & JosE E Paaai, S. (1982) Rotifera of the Superorder Monogononta recorded from Neotropis. Gewass. Abwass. 68, 71-102. & SHiet, R. J. (1980) New Rotifera from Australia. Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust. 103, 133-144. & (1986a) Tasmanian Rotifera: Affinities with the Australian fauna. Hydrobiolgia (in press). & (1986b) Rotifera from Australian inland waters. I. Bdelloidea. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwat. Res. (in press). & (1987) Rotifera from Australian inland waters. II. Monogononta: Ephiphanidea and Brachionidae. [bid. & Brock, M. A. (1983) Rotifera from Western Australian wetlands, with descriptions of two new species. Hydrobiologia 104, 9-17. Kutikova, L. A. (1970) [Rotifer fauna of the U.S.S.R. Fauna of the U.S.S.R. 104, 1-744. Acad. Sci., Leningrad]. (in Russian). PENARD, E. (1914) A propos de Rotiféres. Rev. Suisse de Zool. 22, 1-25. ROUuSSELET, C. P. (1906) in Murray, J. The Rotifera of the Scottish Lochs. Trans. R. Soc. Edinb. 45, 183. RusseLt, C. R. (1961) The Rotatoria of Queensland, Australia. R. Soc. N.Z. Trans. 1, 235-239. SHEPHARD, J. (1911) A list of Victorian rotifers, with descriptions of two new species and the males of two species. Proc. R. Soc, Vict. 24, 46-58. SHIEL, R. J, (1983) The genus Brachionus (Rotifera: Brachionidae) in Australia, with a description of a new species. [bid 9, 533-37. & Koste, W. (1979) Rotifera recorded from Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 103, 57-68. & (1983) Rotifer communities of billabongs in northern and south-eastern Australia. Hydrobiologia 104, 41-47. SouTtHcorTt, R. V. & LANGE, R. T. (1971) Acarine and other microfossils from the Maslin Eocene, South Australia. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 16, 17-19. Supzuki, M. (1967) Rotifers from South Australia. 1. A taxonomical note on Keratella quadrata from Tasmania. Proc. Jap. Soc. Syst. Zool. 3, 17-19. (1985) Tasmanian rotifers in mid-August (winter). Zool. Sci. 2, 1005. SUMMERFIELDWRIGHT, H. G. (1959) Development of the peduncle in a sessile rotifer. J. Queck. Micro. Cl. Ser. 45, 231-234. Voict M. (1957) Rotatoria. Die Réadertiere Mitteleuropas. 2 Vols. (Borntraeger, Berlin). WEBER, F. (1888) Note sur quelques Rotateurs des environs de Genéve. Arch. Biol. Liege 8, 647-722. WHITELEGGE, T. (1889) Marine and freshwater invertebrate fauna of Port Jackson and neighbourhood. Proc. R. Soc. N.S.W. 23, 163-323. FROGS OF THE GENUS UPEROLEIA GRAY (ANURA: LEPTODACTYLIDAE) IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA BY MARGARET DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN Summary A review of the species Uperoleia of south-eastern Australia has resulted in the clarification of the status of several taxa and the description of two new species. Recent redescriptions of Uperoleia laevigata and U. rugosa are expanded to incorporate data on morphology, osteology and structure of advertisement call from across their extensive geographic ranges. Variation in these features is examined and, in many cases, the limits of variability for certain characters are established. U. fimbrianus (Parker) is placed in the synonymy of U. rugosa (Andersson). Two new species, U. tyleri sp. nov. and U. martini sp. nov. are described from south-eastern coastal N.S.W. and eastern Victoria. FROGS OF THE GENUS UPEROLEIA GRAY (ANURA: LEPTODACTYLIDAE) IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA by MARGARET Davigs* & M, J, Lith esOHNT Summary Davins, M. & Lirrnesoun, M. J, (1986) Frogs of the genus Uperoleia Gray (Aura: Leptodactylidac) in south-vastern Australia. Trams, R. Soc, S. Aust, 1V0(3),, 111-143, 28 November, 1986, A review of the species of Uperoleia of south-eastern Australia has resulted in the clarification of rhe status of several taxa and the description of wo new species. Recent redescriptions of Uperoleia laevigata and Of rugose are expanded to incorporate data on morphology, osteology and structure of advertisement call from across their extensive geographic ranges. Variation in these features is examined and, in many causes, the limits of variability for certain characters ure established. Lt fibrianus (Parker) is placed in the synonymy of U. ragesa (Andersson). Two new species, U. veri sp. nov, and U! martini sp. noy. are described [rom south-eastern coastal N.SW. and eastern Victoria. The dominant frequencies in advertisement ¢alls of all species discussed are similar and within the rate, 1927-2432 Hz, deprhs of amplitude modulation generally exceed 90% for all taxa. Most differentiation between species is evident in call duration, in the number of pulses in the call, or in the dependent character, pulse rate, Key Worps: Uperoleia, Anura, new species, morphology, osteology, advertisement calls. Introduction The Australian leprodactylid genus Uperoleia Gray comprises a group of small, myobatrachine frogs exhibiting limited morphological diversity. Tyler, Davies & Martin (198la, b,c) revised the genus and expanded the known species from three to 18. More recently, an additional species has been described by Davies er af. (1985) from the Pilbara region in Western Australia. All of the above contributors investigated species principally from the north and west of Australia, leaving the faufa of the eastern stares largely unknown. Tyler ef wh (198la) and subsequent authors (Cogger 1983; Cogger ef al. 1983) recognised three species in eastern Australia’ the edentate U. rugosa (Andersson) and Uf fimbrianus (Parker), and the dentate U /aevigaia Keferstein, ‘These species were tedescribed from information obtained trom the type specimens, in the former two cases, and from the rype series, in the last (Tyler ef al. 198la)s the presence of a number of undescribed species in eastern Australia was indicated by these authors. Davies & McDonald (1985) stipplemented the redescriplion of Gf rugosa with data on ostealogy and advertisernent call of males, derived from topotypic material, thus facilitating the identifi- cation of specimens in various museum collections. * Department of Zootoxy, University of Adelaide, G.PO. Box 498, Adelaide, 5. Ausf S001. ) Department of Zoology, University of Melbaurne, Parkville, Vietorta 3052. On the basis of the advertiserment call, Littlejohn (1967) recoxnised three species from south-eastern Australia; a large dentate species which he identified as U. marmorata Gray, and two other species whose identities were undetermined, so designated “U. rugosa (form A)" and “U. rugosa (form B)". Tyler ef al. (198la) showed that U) marmorata was restricted to the northwest of Western Australia, thus leaving the identity of the large, dentate species undetermined, Here we identify and amplify the undetermined species of Littlejohn (1967), and provide further information on the named species of eastern Australia. Materials and Methods Specimens examined sre deposited in the Australian Muscum, Sydney (AM), British Museum (Natural History), London (BMNH), CSIRO Division of Wildlite Research Collection, Canberra (ANWC), University of Kansas Museum of Natural History, Lawrence (KU), Museum of Victoria, Melbourne (NMV), Queensland Museum, Brisbane (QM), Sotith Australian Museum, Adelaide (SAM), Museum of Natural History, Stockholm (NRAM), and the University of Adelaide osteological collecrion (UAZ), Morphological measurements (in mm), obtained by the methods of Tyler (1968), are: snoul-lo-vent leneth (S-V), tibia length (TL), eye diameter (E), eye- to-naris distanee (E-N), internarial span (IN). Becatise of the large parotoid glands covering the 112 M. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN side of the head and the obscured rympana, customary measurements. of head width and head length could not be taken, Results are expressed as mean + standard deviation with ranges in purentheses. The presence or absence of teeth were determined externally by using the following procedures: when dentate species are yiewed from the ventral surface, ihe upper jaw 1s notched to receive (he superiorly protruding symphysis of the mentomeckelian bones; the snout is rounded in ventral view and the ventral curvature of the upper jaw is slight. Conversely in edentate species, the upper jaw is not prominently notched anteriorly, although the mentomeckelian symphysis is prominent, and the ventral curvature of the upper jaw is deep. These features are shown in Fiz, J. In doubtful cases, fine forceps or a mounted needle were used to check for the presence of serrations. Osteological data Were obtained Irons cleared and stained specimens, prepared afer the metlrods af Davis & Gore (1947) for bone and Dinyerkus & Uhler (1977) for bone and cartilage. Osteological descriptions follow Trueb (1979), Material that has been cleared and stained is indicated by (A) following the museum abbreviation and registration number or by specific designation. Advertisement calls were recorded in the field, and the appropriate (effective) temperature (water, wet-bulb air) measured at the calling sire. One of a selection of tape recorders (EMI 12B, FI-CORD 202, NAGRA IIIBH, NAGRA 4.2, VHER Report 4000L) and one of the following microphones (AKG 19B, BEYER M69, BEYER M88, ELECTRO-VOICE 644, GRAMPIAN D119, RESLO DPH) were used. All recordings were analysed on a NORLAND 3001/BDMX processing digital oscilloscope, with playback on a REVON B77 tape recorder, An ALISON 2AB variable filter, set-ata low pass of 4800 Hz, was inserted between the output of the tape revorder and the oscilloscope in order to prevent alfasing al the minimum sampling interval of IDO us (i.e. at a frequency of 10 000 Hz}, Overall temporal variations during recording and analysis are estimated to be less than + 15%, and lrequency responses of all items of equipment are more than adequate for the narrow range involved (1900-2500 Hz). One clear call, usually the last in the recorded sequence, Was analysed, and values for each of the following five attributes determined: number of pulses (direct count), duration (ms), average pulse rate (pulses '; from the peak of the first clear pulse to the peak of the last clear pulse), dominant frequency (Hz; power spectrum analysis—froim whole call if short, or {rom middle quadrant if long), and depth of amplitude modulation of pulses ("0+ near the middle of the call). Hard copies of the displays on the monitor sereen of the processing digital oscilloscope were prepared on a LINSEIS LY 1800 X-¥ recorder. Line drawings were obtained with the aid oF a Wild M8 dissecting microscope with an attached 0.4% reducing lens and 4 camera lucida. Results Taxonomic decisions Lynch (1971) illustrated the skull of a specimen of UL. rugosa tram St George, Qld (KU 109861. Comparison of the illustration,and of the specimen examined by him, with the data obtained from lopatypic specimens of LU! rugesa (Davies & McDonald 1985) indicates that all of the specinens are conspecific. St George is the type locality of U4 Jimbrianus (Parker 1926), a species separable from big, T, Ventral views of the lead of A, dentate species of Uperoleiy and B, un edentate species of Upereleta: UPEROLEIA (NS SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA a P Bay fe aes engeating he 1 dy pure 4 » a 2 vlad’ \ Yeu} f ra sa % Tay ony © ~ Bn & Fig, 2. A, Lateral. and B, dorsal views of the head; C, palmar view of hand and D, plantar view of fool of Uperaleia rugosa (NMY 1925090) from Savernake, N.S.W. U. pugosa only by size (Davies & McDonald 1985), Examination of call data from edentate specimens assigned to U. rugosa (form A of Littlejohn 1967), and the examination of external morphology and osteology of material deposited in many Australian museums, conlirms [he identification of LL rugosa (form A) as UL. rugosa and provides no support ta the recognition of U. fimbrianus. Accordingly, we uansfer U, fintbrianus (Parker) to the synonymy of U. rugosa (Andersson). U, rugosa (form B of Littlejohn 1967) is a dentate species (Davies unpubl.). The only other dentate species described from eastern Australia is U- laevigata Keferstein 1867. Our examination of preserved material deposited in Australian musejums, and our data on call structure, indicate thal U. rugosa (form B) is U. laevigata Keferstein. Our data on the type series include only external morphology, but we remain confident in this identification. On the basis of our studies of morphology and vocalizations, it is clear that “U. marimorata’\sensu Littlejohn 1967) comprises two undescribed dentate species, which are now described and named. Uperoleia rugosa (Andersson) FIGS 2-8 Hyperoleia murmorata: Fletcher, 1890, p. 672 (part.). Pseudophryne fugosa Andersson, 1916, K, Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl, 52,9, p. 13. Pseudaphryne fimbriunus Parker, 1926, p, 669; Wilkins, 192k, p. 278. Upernleta rugosa: Parker, 1940, p. 70 (parts Erspamer, il4 M. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN Fig. 3. Uperoleia rugosa (in life) from Anakie, Qld. de Caro & Endean, 1966, p. 738 (part.); Lynch, 1971, p. 99; Erspamer, Negri, Erspamer & Endean, 1975, p. 41 (part.); Roseghini, Erspamer & Endean, 1976, p. 35 (part.); Erspamer, Erspamer & Linnari, 1977, p. 68 (part.); Barker & Grigg, 1977, p. 188 (part.); Archer, 1978, p. 112; Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981a, p. 17; Cogger, 1983, p. 86; Cogger, Cameron & Cogger, 1983, p. 34 (part.); Davies & McDonald, 1985, p. 37; Tyler, 1985, p. 408; Mahony & Robinson, 1986, p. 120, Uperoleia rugosa (form A): Littlejohn, 1967, p. 153, Blake, 1972, p. 122. Uperoleia marmorata: Moore, 1961, p. 219 (part.); Brooker & Caughley, 1965, p. 239. Uperoleia sp. Davies, 1984, p. 790 (part.). Uperoleia fimbrianus; Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981a, p. 18: Cogger, 1983, p. 83; Cogger, Cameron & Cogger, 1983, p. 32; Tyler, 1985, p. 407. Definition: A small to moderately-large species (oo 18-32 mm S-V, 99 18-30 mm S-V), characterised by short to moderately-long hind limbs (TL/S-V 0,29-0.41); fringed toes with usually a trace of basal webbing; prominent subarticular and palmar tubercles; frontoparietal fontanelle not exposed; carpus of five elements; anteromedial processes of anterior hyale of hyoid slender; ilial crest absent; advertisement call a short pulsed note of 3-5 pulses with a pulse repetition rate of about 31 pulses sec~!, Material examined: Qld: NRAM 1630 (Holotype Pseudophryne rugosa), SAM R27052-3, R27054(A)-5(A), Mt Colosseum; BMNH 1947.2.18.70 (holotype Pseudo- phryne fimbrianus) St George district: QM J25078(A) 48 km E St George, SAM R3688, R3737, St George; KU 109861(A), St George; NMV D25105-6(A) 3.2 km E Gracemere; D25107, 6.4 km E Gracemere; QM J12673 Burpengary; J14385, Gilruth Plans via Cunnamulla; J17754, Alton; J18819, 318824, J18840(A)-41(A) E of Withcott; J18818(A), J18821, J18826, J18829, J18835-6(A), J18842, Waratah Station via Cunnamulla; J18830, E of Laidley on Granchester Rd; J28239(A), J28240-43, J28244(A), J29067-9, 24 km W Moonie; J42543-4, J42546, J42550(A), Moonie; J42538, Roma; J31961-2(A), Bollon; J38654(A)-5(A), Hornet Bank, Injune Rd; J12354(A), J12366, 312371, Wilkie Ck, SW Dalby; J12722-3(A), J12725-6, AM R5822-3, Eidsvold; QM J18827, J18846, South of Gayndah; J18828, Rocklea, Brisbane; AM R16910, Brisbane; QM J19538, Warrawee; J19539-41 Flinders Peak Rd, turnoff from Boonah Rd; J19928, 4.6 km § Ferndale; J19950, Ban Ban; J19954, 3.2 km W Beenleigh; 125922, J40429, Texas Caves Area; J28510(A), J28515-6, Gin Gin; J29014-6(A), Waterford Rd, 6 km E Beaudesert Rd; J35436-7, Old Dump, Inglewood; J42539(A), J42551, J42553, Causeway on Beaudesert Rd between Jimboomba and Cedar Grove Rd (27°51, 153°01'); J42540, J42542, Crossing Beaudesert Rd, Tamborine Rd (27°48', 153°02'); 342541, Beaudesert; 342545, J42547-9, 342552, Mt Lindsay Highway, S of Beaudesert (25°00', 152°59'); J37704(A), 3J37705-6, J37707(A), between Anakie and Sapphire; J37708-9, J37710(A), J37711-16(A), Mowbray; J37717-18(A), J37719-20(A), Tomahawk; J37721, Anakie; SAM R29672(A)-3(A), QM J45975, Springsure; QM J45977, Anakie; SAM R29674(A), R29675, 1.7 km from Cabbage UPEROLEIA. IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 115 } 1 ss, L Fig. 4, A, Dorsal and B, palmar view of bones of carpus of Uperoleia rugosa, UL, ulnare; RA, radiale, POC, ©. centrale postaxiale; PRC, O, centrale preaxiale; C(2+3), fused carpal elements of ©. distale carpale 2 and 3; PS, palmar sesamoid; PO,, basal prepolligal element. Tree Creek, Nathan Gorge Rd; QM 145973-74, Cabbage Tree Creek; QM J45976, Glenleigh Station beside road to Glenhaughton Stadion; QM J45980-86, J45987(A), SAM RILS@48-50, R29676-78(A), R29679(A), R296R0-1(A), R29682-4(A), R29GRS(A), R29686 R215958-61(A), UAZ Al012(A), Al013(A), Dynevor Downs; QM J45978-9, SAM R29687, Boorara Station; AM RI15652, 17.6 km N Moura; R115306, R113367-69, Cecil Plains Rubbish Tip; AM R5822-3, Eidsvold; SAM R29688-90, DPI Swamp, Charleville. N.S: AM R46862-4, 19.2 km W Tenterfield; R37052(A), R37053-4(A), R37055-6, 22.4 km SE Bonshaw on Bruxnor Highway; R37096, 56 km W Tentertield, Mole River; R90659-6], Blacklands Gap Rd, 6 km NW Maids Valley (29°05', 151°35"); AM R66557-60, R66562, 22.4 km downstream [rom Dungog on Williams River; R93727-31, 5 km N Whiporie an Casino-Gralton Rd; AM R784, R984, Yandembah, 32 km W Hillston; R12806, Welby, Nyngan: R28O4(A), R28005-6, R24475-6(A), R24477-78, R244K0, R24482-3(A), R24484, R24486-91(A), R24492, Nyngan; R28635-8, between Nyngan and Nevertire; R15315-7, 50 km W Byrock; R16040, 51 km W Byrock; RIS800-4, R15803, Byrock; RIG098 Brewarriria; R28357-8, R28624-5, Lake Caregelligo; NMV D55117-21(A), QM _ 339239, 739242-6, West Wyalong; J28450-2(A), Condoblin; SAM RI4187 Moulamein; NMY D9199(A), D9200-1, D9WMWHA)-A2(A), 19263, D9264(A)-5(A), D9266-7(A), Tocumwal: DIS%56-6)(A), DIB862-84(A), DIRB85-900, 4.8%km S Cowra; B25077-79(A), D25080, 6.4 km SW Cowra; D25001-3, D25005(A)-9, D25011(A)-14, Savernake; D25086-91(A), D25092(A)-25101(A), D25102-4, Lignum Swamp, Savernake; D25004, 20.8 km N Mulwalay D25015-6 9.6 km N Mutwala; D25082, 4 km N Tomingley; ANWC A936-84, Lake Cowal; A1070-72, 4kmn N Warren; ANWC A1140-2, Sandy Camp Macquarie Marsh area; AM R115632-44, R115646, 5 km E Eulo; R92159, Buckingbong S.F., S of Narrandera, RIS647, Glenelg; R45105, 32 km § Condoblin, RISS88-28, R11S648-50, Caragabal; R112299 Bom Bom 8.F, (29°44), 152°58'); RIiSS84, Nettle Creek, 19.2 km trom Copmanhurst 6n Tabulum Rd; R5590-1, Cumborah, NW Walvett; R50493-500, 11.2 km W Glen Innes on Inverell Rd (29°43, 151958’); RINS575-6, RW5579, RIUSSHL-2, nr Bulgandramine; R102886, Thurloo Downs Hst, SAM eee UAZ A816, UAZ B8I4, Severn River (29°28), 51°29"), Variation in External Morphology There is a considerable range in the size of specimens of U. rugosa (males |8.4-32.0 mm S-V, fernales 17.7-30.4 mm), Specimens from southern coastal arcas of Queensland and northern N.S.W. are smaller than those from more arid inland areas, with the exception of a series from Tocuniwal, NSM, (co cf 18.4-26.2 mm S-V, 9 9 20.2-25.3 mm SV from coastal areas, compared with ranges ol 116 M. DAVIES & M. J, LITTLEJOHN Fig. 5. A, Dorsal and B, plantar views of tarsus of Uperoleia rugosa, PH, O, centrale prehallucis; T,, lateral tarsal clement; T3, second tarsal element; T3, medial tarsal clement. 20-32 mm S-V for males and 22-30 mm lor females in inland areas). Geographic variation in size is reflected also in relative lengths of the hind limbs in these populations (TL/S-V 0.34 4 0,02 [0.29-0,39] coastally, and 0,36 4 0.02 [0,32-0.41] inland), For the species over its entire range, TL/S-V js 0,36 + 0.03 [0,29-0.41}. The head is usually small in relation to the bady, and is separated from the axilla by the well- developed parotoid glands. The shape of the snout in dorsal view is either truticated (Fig, 2A), or slightly rounded (see Davies & McDonald 1985). Each condition occurs in about equal proportions in the material examined. The snouts of some specimens may have been incorrectly recorded us blunt because poorly preserved specimens (as indicated by dehydrated fingers and toes) always have truncated snouts. Most well-preserved specimens from Savernake, N.SW., at the southern extremity of the species’ range have truncate snouts (Fig. 2B). The eye-to-naris distance is always greater than the internarial span, and is subject to little geographic variation (B-N/IN 1,61 40.28 [1.12-2.3]), The nostrils are located more laterally than dorsally (Fig 2B), The hands are broad, and with short fingers (occasionally slender) béaring poor or moderate fringing in the approximate ratio of 1:2. There is no webbing between the fingers. Subarticular and palmar tubercles are prominent (Fig. 2C) in about *4 of the specimens. There is no webbing between the toes in '/, of the specimens examined, and minimally basal in the remainder, Fringing on the toes varies: about ye have reduced fringing, about 's moderate, and the remainder have well-fringed toes (Fig. 2(D). Subarticular tubercles on the toes are usually conical. The inner metatarsal tubercle is angled along the axis of the first toe and the outer is angled to the long axis of the foot; occasionally, the inner metatarsal tubercle is not angled, but perpendicular to the long axis of the foot. Rugosity of dorsal skin varies; poorly, moderately und very rugose specimens occur in equal Proportions, Dermal glands are well developed (Fig. 3), but occasionally poor development of the parotoid glands is recorded. Development of UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA uy Fig. 6, Hyoid of Uperaleia rugosa, Cross hathing inclicates cartilage (UAZ BR14) inguinal and coecygeal glands are similar (i:h:4, poor:moderate:well developed), Submandibular gland is discrete or disrupted in approximately equal proportions, Scapular plicae are TOL apparent, and coloration of the dermal glands is poorly developed. Hence lateral golden or cream stripes, as found in U. lithomoda (Tyler etal. |98la), are not apparent. Dorsal colour pattern varies. Strong patlerning is rare in specimens with very rugose dorsa, but is common in other matenal (Big. 3). Cloacal flaps occur on all specimens, with long finger-like fimbriations on most female specimens (as noted by Parker 1940), Some males possess short fimbriations on the cloacal flap bui most show scalloped or slightly indented cloacal flaps. Anterior eye (laps are poorly developed or absent. A granular ventral surface oeccurs.in about $4 of the specimens, The granularily usually is poorly to moderately developed, except in material from the southern extremity of the range. Ventral pigmentation ix absent in about '/, of the specimens, and only a faint dusting of pigment is detectable in 44; islands of pigment (as described in topotypie material by Davies & McDonald 1985) are found in the remaining 4 of the material, Osteology Davies & McDonald (1985) described the osieology of Lopolypic specimens of C, rugosa; and Lynch (1971) iUlustrated and deseribed certain features of U. rugosa from St George, Qld. We have examined a further 58 specimens from across the species range for osteological varianon. Davies & McDonald (1985) omitted deseriptions of the carpal and tarsal bones and hyoid in their osteological description of U. rugosa, We have ieluded these. Carpus: The carpal type consists of five elements. Linte torsion occurs. Both the ©. ulnare (UL) and hig. 7A, Dorsal and B, ventral views ol (he skull of Uperoleia rugosa (NMYV 125104) from Savernake, NSW, Seale har-3 oi. 18 M. DAVIES & M., J, LITTLEJONUN Fig. 8. Sonagrams of the advertisement calls of A, Uperoleia rugosa, Savernake, N,SW. (RIEL #1 NMV D25085), 27.vii. 1969, AW=14.3°C; B, OF laevigata, Oakdale, N.SW. (R304 48), 30.ix.1975, AW 12.7°C; CL UL teleri, Jervis Bay, A,C.T. (R135 #5), 174.1963, AW=15.5°C; UL martini, 4.8 km SW Nowa Nowa, Vic. (RIS3 #2), 7-411.1963, AW=15.0°C. Time marker: 100 ms intervals between peaks. the ©. radiale (RA) are present. The O. radiale is the larger. These elements articulate with the O. radioulna proximally, and with each other at their proximomedial border, Distally both elements articulate with the large transversely elongated O. centrale postaxiale (POC). The ©. radiale articulates laterally with the O, centrale preaxiale (PRC), The ©, centrale postaxiale articulates distally with the bases of ©, metacarpi Il, ['V and V. From the lateropraximal corner, a small flange extends proximally onto the lateral surface of the O, ulnare. Ventromedially is a depression on which a palmar sesamoid (PS) is situated. The O. centrale preaxiale articulates laterally with the © radiale, distally with the O. centrale postaxiale and with the fused carpal elements of the O, distale carpale 2 and 3 (C2+3) and laterally with the basal prepollical element (POT) (Pig. 4). This description coincides most closely with Andersen's type 2, found in leptodactylids, and not with his myobatrachid pattern (Andersen 1978!). Tursus; The ©. tibiale and O. fibulare are elongated elements fused at either end. The O. tibiale extends as far as the distal end of the O. fibulare. Three distal tarsal elements are present, The lateral element (T3) is the largest and lies at the base of O, metatarsus IIL, and extends laterally to articulate with the medioproximal side of the base of O. metatarsus 1V and medially to the base of O. metatarsus Il. The second element (T2) lies al the base, slightly laterally to O. metatarsus LL. The medial element (T)) lies at the base of O, metatarsus I and also articulates with the O. centrale prehallucis (PH) (Pig. 5). This description corresponds to tarsal type I (Anderson 1978!). Hyoid: The hyoid plate is slightly broader than Jong. The hyale are slender with well-developed slender anteromedial processes. Alary processes are broad, and not pedunculate. Posterolateral processes are moderately long, and slightly expanded, The pasteromedial processes are ossilied (Fig. 6). Anderson, M. L, (1978) The comparative myology and osteology of the carpus and tarsus of selected anurans, Ph.D. dissertation, Dept of Systematics and Ecology, University of Kansas. Unpublished. UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA ah) oe rane pe Po — ~ “J ra f — Fig, 9 Distribution of Uperoleia rugosa. The arrow indicates (he (ype lovality, Variation Skull: All but two of the adult specimens examined show 4 consistent overlap of the sphenethmoid by the posterior extremities of the nasals. Nasal contact with the anterior extremities of the frontopantetals is variable; bur, where no contact occurs, separation of these elements is slight, Medial extension of the nasals. varies, With approximately equal proportions of no extension, moderale extension and extreme exlension (a5 illustrated by Dayies & McDonald 1985), Variation also oecurs in the crescentic shape ol the anterior edges of the nasals, ranging from the curved condition illustrated by Davies & MeDonald (1985) and by Lynch (1971) to almost straight, The anterior extremities of the frontoparietals usually are crenale, and, occasionally, are extended anjerolaterally. The more usual condition is one af truncated untenior extremities (Fig. 7). All adule specimens have minimal exposures of the frontoparietal fontanelle, ranging from that shown in Fig. 7 to slightly greater. The medial margins of the frontoparietals usually are crenate, but occasionally are almost smooth, Variation occurs in the form of the carotid canal groove on the posterolateral frantoparietals. In most specimens, the grooves are deep (Pig. 7); oecasion- ally they are partially roofed, and very occasionally they are extremely shallow, or not detectable. The palatine processes of the premaxillaries range from almost abutting to moderately-widely separated (Fiz. 7). The pars facialis of the maxillary is moderately-deep in all specimens, but in some itis foreshortened and shallow anteriorly. Ina tew specimens, the dorsal surface 1s mot straight, but is irregularly produced, The palatines are expanded medially in same specimens, particularly those from central Queensland. Vomerine remnants vary consider- ably—from completely absent (Fig. 7), through present on only one side medial to the palatines, io small fragments at the edges of the choanae. Carpus and tarsus: No wtraspeeifie varialion 15 apparent in tarsal bones, Some variation is apparent in the fusion of carpal elements 2 and 3. These bones ure not fused in five adult specimens, NMV D9199, D9264, D9259 and OM JL8841, JIBSIR. In NMY 199267, (he bones are fused on one hand and unfused on the other. In two specimens (AM R24483, SAM R29681), the bones are fused but suture lines aré apparent, In one subadult specimen (UAZ AI012), the carpal bones are not fused: but in two other subadult specimens fusion has occurred (NMV 025101, UAZ Al013). Other Specimens (OM J18840, JI8&836, NMV 1D9260-1, 19265) from the same localities a§ those in which fusion of carpalia 2+3 has not occurred, exhibit fusion Advertisement call Davies & MeDonald (1985) reported that the call of U. rugesa consisted of four pulses, with a pulse repetilion rate of about 34 pulses sec | and a dominant frequence of about 2583 Hz. Values for calls of five individuals from a population at Savernake, N.SW,, near the southern limit of distribution, are given in Table 1. An oscillogram of the call of one of these individuals is presented in Fig. &. Comparison with other species Uperoleia rugosa is an edentate species with an unexposed [rontopanetal fontanelle; these features are shared with U. minima, UL aspera, atid same U- Zz x= o 4 w a al 5 =| M. DAVIES & 120 *S[aAa] PUNOISYxIVQ YSIY JO asnvraq paulwaiap ION MESA MMR Oe Mp abs Soll a (0° 66-156) (8S17-1S07) (0°96 -L°L8 ) (9p-Zr) (3°7@S-ZE9p) (V-LI-S"S1) O86 LIE] £°L6 8° £607 S16 aad Dest SOL 5 “OLA “WIRLIEA JO ANN Wy 9 SROLXU9Z “OLA ‘DY eal] aaeqqey (0°66-£ 86) (891Z-OL07) (L'L9 -o'8s ) (tP-ZE) (Z°91L-9' L9P) (8 -7L ) -urluOy adey uo 8°86 LUZ ora) LE 6 S6S we £ Pa sUIe]g ‘OLIRWY § WY 67] (Pp 86-L°L6) (€8€7-LOZ) (PLL -8°TL ) (So-Lp) (p9FL-0° £09) (S'P1-@'FD) SRO XU PZ 186 S677 Vs ols Lrlg Srl z “ASN “BQueqeuueyy (1°66-8'88) (1S07-Z661) (E48 -@°ZL ) (Z9-€) (O°ESL-7'LIS) (S'9[- st) C9GTUX'L £96 8° £107 8°08 8 6F TOI9 g°S1 g “SIA “EMON BMON MAS UY 8'P iio Diajosady (86-6 'P6) (€9€7-8FI7) (VZ1I-9' SoD) (9¢-7z) (0° T#Z-0°707) (9°LI-F'9T) [R61 ELT O16 CCSZT £801 £7 9°S7Z OL £ “OTA ‘OLEIN JO ANF wy L (L°66-8°S6) (QETZ-Z107) (6°56 -1'78 ) ($z-61) (ZES7-9' TIT) (QFI-LE1) S61 XPT 1°86 Q'LOTZ rar) SIZ ZT OET rl t "M'S'N “Biqeqviey E96LVLT (6'L6-F' 76) (0607-1 £07) (6°S8 -l'es ) (97-81) (0° TT£-0° 807) = ‘Lorw ‘Aeg siaer i 756 £090 SPs red 86ST ost Zz asayfOD [EARN aRaU Maja] Diajosady) (9°66-0°68) (ZEPZ-SLITZ) (0°S6 -L°69 ) (9S-Tt) (9° €TL-0'66r) (S'1I-9°01) S961 EX'S 1 9'L6 SS0ET ROR 8°8r L°€09 Vil 8 “AV'S'N ‘SERA M WY Bp (ZOPT-LZ61) (O'8L -F'69 ) (pP-Ze) (Z°809-0' SOF) = PIBUXET * Q PPT EL 9'6E S'1es ool ¢ DTA “BATE AY MN WY p°9 (S'96-£°16) (ELET-6017) (O'€8 -O'LL ) (Ss-8r) (0°089-9°ZLS) (“TI-L 1) SLOVXVOE €°F6 ZPPEZ L'08 ozs 8 LE9 OT! ts “ASN “2]BPALO nins}aany viajosad/) 6961 HA LZ “ASN ‘OYBUIIARS (8°66-£°86) (LOZZ-EP61) (‘OF -8°7Z ) (p -€) (8°ZOI-#'Ig8 ) (ErI-97D “UOURIG SYEUIBARS 1°66 9 PSOT Ve PE PPG fel s dweag wnuary psoans nlajosadyy (ZH) Oy Aauanbaay (,-s"d) (u) sul (9s) (a1eq) ‘pow ‘duy JuRuIWog a1B1 aging sasind uoneing ainjesedwia y. N uoles07 satdeds _L___ Este Rh aimiy ai Geeoh God MOT LAE lity Glo enn Cn pen nails nn SS es ‘sasaysuaind Ul Sasuns YIM Suda asD SanjnA “Blajosad—) Jo Saivads anof fo sanstajavapya jJo9 Juawiasileapy *| AAV, UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA Fig. 10. A, Dorsal and B, lateral views of the head; C, palmar view of hand and D, plantar view of the foot of Uperoleia laevigata (NMV D25110) from Langley Flats, Qld. lithomoda (Tyler et al. \98la, b; Davies ef a/. in press). U. rugosa is distinguished from U. minima by the pulsed call). From U. aspera, U. rugosa is distin- guished by its unwebbed toes (basal webbing in U. aspera) by its ventral pigmentation (absent in U presence of fringed fingers and toes, and by well- aspera) and by its call—a short, pulsed click, pulsed developed inguinal and coccygeal glands (the call at about 170 pulses see! in U. aspera (Tyler et al. of U. minima is a very short unpulsed click (Tyler 1981b). et al. \98la), whereas that of U. rugosa is a longer, U, rugosa is distinguished from U, lithomoda by 122 M. DAVIES & M, J. LITTLEJOHN Fig. 11. Uperoleia laevigata in life from Severn River, N.SW, (UAZ A815). the presence of ventral pigmentation (absent in U, lithomoda), by the absence of a preorbital process on the pars facialis of the maxillary (present in U. lithomoda), and by advertisement call. The call of U. rugosa is clearly pulsed, whereas that of U. lithomoda is a short, unpulsed click (Tyler et al. 198la, c). Distribution Uperoleia rugosa has a wide ranging distribution in south-eastern Australia (Fig. 9). It occurs to the west of the Great Dividing Range at the southern extremity of its range, but is found coastally as well as centrally from as far north as about Armidale in N.SW. The northernmost locality from which material has been collected is Tomahawk in Central Queensland. Uperoleia laevigata Keferstein FIGS 8, 10-16 Uperoleia marmorata var. laevigata Keferstein 1867. Nachr. Ges. Wis, Gottingen 18, p. 349, Uperoleia marmorata: Keferstein 1868, p. 270 (part.); Moore, 1961, p. 219 (part.); Erspamer, Negri, Erspamer & Endean, 1975, p. 41 (part.); Roseghini, Erspamer & Endean, 1975, p. 35 (part.); Barker & Grigg, 1977, p. 186 (part.); Erspamer, Erspamer & Linnari, 1977, p. 68 (part.). Uperoleia rugosa (form B): Littlejohn, 1967, p. 153; Littlejohn, 1969, p. 111; Martin & Littlejohn, 1969, p. 170. Uperoleia rugosa; Brook, 1975, p. 83; Cogger, 1975, p. 83 (part.); Barker & Grigg, 1977, p. 188 (part.); Humphries, 1979, p. 15*; Robertson, 1981, p. 4; 1982, p. 6; 1984a, p. 283; 1984b, p, 56; 1986a, p. 773; 1986b, p. 763; Erspamer, Negri & Endean, 1975, p. 41 (part.); Cogger, Cameron & Cogger, 1985, p. 34 (part.). Uperoleia laevigata; Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981a, p. 11; Cogger, 1983, p. 84; Cogger, Cameron & Cogger, 1983, p. 33; Tyler, 1985, p. 407; Mahony & Robinson, 1986, p. 120. Uperoleia sp.: Davies, 1984, p. 790 (part.). Definition: A moderately-large species (oo 20- 28mm, 9 9 22-32 mm) with maxillary teeth; fingers fringed; toes usually fringed, unwebbed; large light triangular patch on the anterodorsal surface of the head; ventral surface never fully pigmented; frontoparietal fontanelle unexposed; carpus of six elements; anteromedial processes of anterior hyale of hyoid in form of medial dilation; ilial crest absent; a long, pulsed advertisement call of 32-56 pulses with a pulse repetition rate of about 79 pulses sec ~!, Material examined: Vic. NMV D18776-8, D18779, D18780-1, 6 km W Walwa; D25083, Talgarno; D25017-20, D25021(A), D25022-4, 2.4 km E Burroweye; D25038(A), D25039, 8 km NW Walwa; D25034-7, 6.4 km W Walwa. N.S.W.: NMV D18763-66, D18767(A), D18768-9, 3.2 km E Rosedale; D25025-8, D25029(A), D25030-3, Braidwood; > Humphries, R. B. (1979) Dynamics of a breeding frog community. Ph.D. thesis, Australian National University, Dept of Population Biology. Unpublished. Robertson, J. G. M. (1982) Territoriality and sexual selection in Uperoleia rugosa (Anura: Leptodactylidae). Ph.D. thesis, Dept of Zoology, Australian National University. Unpublished. UPEROLEIA (IN SOUTH-BASTERN AUSTRALLA 3 Fi, 12. A, Dorsa] and B, ventral views of the skull of Uperoleia laevigata (NMV D2siil). ——_ “\ Fig, 13. A, Lateral view of the ilium and B, ventral view of the hyoid uf Uperoleia laevigata (UAZ BR17). Hatched uréas are cartilage. Some calcification is indieated by superimposed regular stipple. 1924039, B kr NW Walwa; 225034-7, 6.4 kin W Walwa. NUSW: NMV. DI8763-66, DI8767(A), DIBT68-9, 1.2 km & Roseutale; D25025-8, D25029(A), D25030-3, Braidwood; 25043, 3.6 kim W Yagobie; D25058-70, D25071A), 125072-6, 4.8 km W Delegate; D25040-2(A), 3.6 km W Coonbarabran, D59508-9, 16 km S Brocklesby;, D59507, 1k km NNW. Nimitibels QM J19949, 1.6 kin SW Singleton, Putty Ra; J1995], 319962, Wilberforce ar Windsor; 119948, 16 ku N Windsor, Putty Rd; J26940-41, AM R68451, km E Vittoria; OM J34227-8, Heathcote, AM RIB731, RI87S2,. Picton Lakes; R20391, R20393-4, Bundeena; NMV D25952(A), Couer Dam (ACT); AM R25803-4, R25K66, RI753I7, R27S8I-R4, Baulkham Hills; RI7520, Londonderry via Richmond ; R30267-8, R30271, Tarana: R44024-4, R350R4-7, LL km NW Marengo Station via Hernani) R341S7.8, Greenhill Rd, 11.2 km from Goyra/Bbor Intersection, R36432, R36434, RS1092-5, R78956, Llangothlin Lagoon nr Guyra; R36484-6, §km NW Ebor on Guyra Rd; 836046, Oban River, Eof Guyray R36545, Mitchell River on Wards Mistake Rd, R36713-5, R36717-20, Oakey Creek; R36785-7, 6.4 kin N Aberfoyle; R36838-9, 19.2 km W Tenterficld; R45125, 64 km S Tenterfield; R50148, 9.6 km E Keera; R50347-8, Oakey River Dam, Armidale-Kempysey Rd; R50382, Racecourse Lagoon, Uralla; R50462-3, 6.4 kim SE Uralla; R350549-50, 9.6 km S Armidale on Dangersleigh Rd; R50905, 3.5 km W Uralla; RS0907, 35.6 km NW Guyra; R50909, 1.6 kro SSW Barruba, R50779, 1.6 km N Wallan: RS0603, 12.8 km ENE Guyra; R50915, 8 km 5 Guyra on Armidale Rd; R50936-7, Paddys Land, 56 km E Guyra; RS0979, & km SE Tenterfield; R51174-6, 52.8 kim W Armidale on Bundarra Rd; R64284-7, 65 km SW Inverell on Bundarra Rd: R654), R66595-6, 22 km doWnstream from Dungox on William River; R75017-20, Mi David nr Oberon R78957-60, 4.6 km S Guyra, New England Highway; R8Od71-81, 17 km S Cooma; RK7488, R8&7490, 14.2 km SW Cassitis on Ulam Rd; R9OIS2-3, 32 km from Canberra along Cooma Rd; R9VISS-7, Rose Lagoon nr Collector; R9N662-3, Blacklands Gap Rd, 6 km NW Maids Valley; R92820-31, R92833-40, 75 km N Tarana; R92872-6, R939]3, R92K7], 10 km W Taruna; R96256, R96269-70, Bogyy Plain 24 km E Coon; R99423, R99429, R103/52-4, Horsley Park; R1049d4-51, R104954-5 , RI04957-8, RIO4AIGI-S, RIW4970, R104972, R1O4978, R104980, R1IG49H2-5, Ri04989, R10d994, R1O4995, R107122, RIO7I24, RIO7127-8, RIO7I31-5, Maroota S.F. 33772-5, R33777, Gwydir River, 4.6 km E Bundarra; R33761-2, R34222, Littl Lagoon, Arding; R34057, Rockvale Rd, 32.4 km from Armidale; R33797, Rockvale Rd, 0.8 km E Thalgarrah; R19472-3, Tamworth; R34211, Armidale; R35650, 49.6-km NE Guyra, Mitchell River at Kookabookra; R35691-2, R35785, Uralla Lagoon; R35713, Cherry Tree Hill, 6.4 km SE Graman: R36747-72, 70.8 km E Armidale; R37024, 32 km NW Emmaville; R36100, 42 km S Bendemeer, R45727-8, The Lake, 32 km 5 Walcha: R42964, R42966, R42968-70, west of Armidale, R43193, |.6km N Nowendoe lunction, 40 km $ Witlehia; 124 M, DAVIES & M, J. LITTLEJOHN B Vig. 14. A, Dorsal and B, plantar view of the carpal elements of Uperoleia laevigata (NMV_ 025038), R49988, Serpentine River Pt Lookout; R49998, Emmaville/Glen Innes Rd; R50308, 28.8 km NE Guyra; R50323-4, 10.4 km W Ebor on Guyra Rd; R50482-3, Tia nr Walcha; R50548, 30.4 km SSE Hillgrove on Narrow Neck Rd; R50570, 8 km NNE Glen Innes on Emmaville Rd; RSO886, 25.6 km W Bendemeer; R51189, Loch Abbon; R51008, 20.8 km S Uralla on Walcha Rd; R51200, Bullock Creek; R51734, 12.8 km S Uralla on New England Highway; R52645, 22.9 km SW Bundarra on Barraba Rd; R51799-803, R51805-6, 3.8 km SW Bundarra on Barraba Rd; R54474, 2.5 km N Marengo S.F. Forestry Hut; R56978, Gate to Blue Knobby; R57151, Putty Rd: R57268, Loch Abbra, 32 km NNE Armidale; R68458, 5 km N Kandos; R70199, 12.8 km along road to Wiseman’s Ferry UPEROLEIA \N SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA \2 wv Fig. 15, A, Dorsal and B, plantar view of the tarsus of Uperoleta laevigata (NMV D25038), from Kariong; R71805, Bagot Rd Lagoon yia Llangothlin; R93563, Bungongo S.F.; R115538, 1 km S National Park level crossing; R115539-43, R115544-53, Colo; R115562-4, 11.2 km S Putty on Windsor Rd; R115555, Bundanoon; R115556-8, 0.8 km N Tallong; R115565-71, nr Putty; R115572, Lapstone slopes above Great Western Highway; R115573-4, RI15577-8, RII5S580, RI1S582, nor Buleandramine; R115586-7, R115653-4, Tooloom Falls; R115585, Nettle Creek, 19.2 km from Copmanburst on Tabulum Rd; RIO8914-5 Mandurama; R110432, Parsons Gully, Merriwa; R115645, 4.8 km E Eulo; A483, A612, 6 km N Mogo Hstd (Shoalhaven River); Al118, Half Moon, Mongarlowe River; A1283-4, Menangle; A1610-12, 3 km N Sutton. SAM R12309-12, Stanwell Park; R13004, 38.5 km E Cooma; SAM R28781-3, R28784(A), R28785(A), UAZ A60I(A), B8I7(A), Oakdale estate N of Sutton; UAZ B815(A), Severn River (29°28), 151°29'). Qld: NMV 1D25108-9, 35.2 km N Eidsvold; AM R5818-21, QM J12724, J12727, Eidsvold; NMV D25110-I1(A), 8 km E Langley Flats; SAM R29665, QM J45968-70, J42558, Giraween N.P.; QM J45971, Blackdown Tableland in Forestry Camp; QM 134242, J39314, Mimosa Creek, Blackdown Tableland; J28504(A), Blackdown Tableland; J18820, S of Gayndah; J18831, J18R34(A), BE of Witheort; J18830, East of Laidley on Granchester Rd; 318833, 319924, J19940, Lancewood Hstd on Ripley/ Brooklands Rd; JI8838, J18843, J18845(A), 1.6 km N Helidon on Toowoomba Rd; 119923, 1.6 km W Stanthorpe; J19931-3, 1.6 km S Rathdownay on Mt Lindsay Highway; 319926, 319948, 16 km N Beaudesert; J27749, Gallangowan; J28177, J30941-2, Eukey; J34815-6, Tom Plants Hut via Amiens; J35535, Mt Taramba; J42554-7, just W Kalbar turnoff, Cunningham Highway; J40485, Dalby; J42559-60, about 1.6 km W = Beaudesert along Beaudesert/Boonah Rd; J42562, Moonie; J29015, Waterford Rd, 6 km E Beaudesert; SAM R29666(A)-7, QM J45966-7, Glenleizh Station beside road to Glenhaughton Station; QM J45972, 1.7 km trom Cabbage Tree Creek on Nathan Gorge Rd; SAM R29668-71, QM J46003, Pony Hills S.F. (149°03', 25°49'), External morphology Tyler et a/. (198la) redescribed the species from nine syntypes. We have examined the external morphology of a further 459 specimens. 126 M. DAVIES & M. J, LITTLEJOHN 1 4 | t \ “ r s | ' H at ! | ol 1 “I ‘\ izes a ! “s } ° ° Se | Pie ee ee | ae i ‘e . ' s ute I “2 L y I 1 . I. y% o/ NP a zy | \q on, i a é Z ae | te ne s 1 Ore Nh Fig. 16. Distribution of Uperoleta laevigata. Vhe arrow indicates the type locality. Uperoleia /aevigata is a moderately large species (oo 20-28 mm S-V, 9 9 22-32 mm 5-¥V) with relatively long hindlimbs (TL/S-V 0.37 4.0.02 [0.30-0,43]), The snout is moderately long, usually evenly rounded when viewed [ram above (Fig. 10}, but occasionally truneated. In profile, the snout is usually evenly rounded (Fig. 10), but sometimes slopes gently posteriorly, The nares customarily are subterminal and dorsolateral but terminal in specimens. With truncated snouts. The canthus rostralis usually is distinct and straight, bat sometimes is not clearly defined, Typically, fhe loreal region is gently Mlaring giving width and curvature to the dorsal view of the snout; occasionally it is straight (Fig, 10). The eye-to-naris distance Usually is much greater than the internarial span (E-N/EN 1,38 + 0.19 [.1-1.72)). The fingers are long and slender, unwebbed and usually well fringed. Palmar and subarticular tubercles are prominent (Fig. 10), Toes usually are moderately fringed, but occasionally fringing is lacking (as in the syntypes). Basal webbing between toes 2 and 3 was observed in only one specimen. The inner metatarsal tubercle is angled along the long axis of toe 1; and the outer is small, rounded and acutely angled to the long axis of the foot (Pig. 10). Texture of the dorsum yaries from smooth ta moderately rugose, Parotoid glands are usually very prominent and, in some specimens, appear hyper- trophied, Occasionally inguinal glands are prominent, and coceygeal glands rarely are conspicuous. Submandibular glands vary from scarcely detectable to discrete and elongate. Nuptial pads are present at the base of the first finger and ure unpigmented and glandular (Fig. 10). No scapular plicae. Cloacal laps are prominent and fimbriated in most, but nor all, females. Eye flaps are anterior to the eye and vary in development from scareely detectable to moderately developed. Most specimens have a smooth ventral surlace, the remainder have a moderately granular belly. The prominent pale triangular patch on the anterodorsal surface of the head, described by Keferstein (1867), 18 found in almost all specimens (Fig. 11). Dorsal markings are not conspicuous and are usually in the form of islands of dark pizmen| on a lighter-grey or brown background. Ventral pigmentation varies considerably, Pigment is absent in many specimens; and when present consists of a fine suffusion of pigment uranules on all or part of the ventral surface, except the ventromedial portion of the thighs, or as islands of pigment either pale grey or darker brown, on part or much of the ventral surface. The ventral surface is never entirely pigmented. Pigmentation on the ventral surface of rhe hands, if present, usually is slight. Inguinal and thigh markings vary from scarcely detectable to prominent, aod in colour from grey to cream. Axillary colour patebes on the forearms are absent. Some of the specimens examined had been infected by batrachomyid cipterous parasites. The parasites usually were lodged behind and beneath the parotoid glands. on one side, but occasionally on both sides. Similar parasites were observed in the type series (Referstein 1868, Tyler er.a/, 1981a). During this study, batrachomyid parasites. were observed only in specimens assigned to Of leevigara. UPEROLEIA \N SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 127 Fig. 17, A, Dorsal and B, lateral views of the head; C, palmar view of the hand and D, plantar view of the foot of Uperoleia martini sp. nov. (Holotype). Fig. 18. Uperoleia martini sp, nov, in life. From nr Yarram, Vic, (NMV D59497), 128 M, DAVIES & M. .. LITTLEJOHN Fix. (9 A, Dorsal and J, ventral yiew of rhe skull of Uperoleta martini sp. nev. (NMYV 123636). Scale bar~ 5 unt Osteology (based on NMY D25111) Skull well ossified, sloping anleroventrally (Fig. 12), Sphenethmoid not confluent medially and poorly ossilied, not extending anteriorly to extremities of frontoparietals in dorsal view and ventrally extending posteriorly for about 4 of length of orbit, Prootic not fused with exoceipital,, either dorsally or ventrally. Exoceipital not ossitied dorso- or ventromedially, Crista parotica short and stocky and well developed, not articulating with alice ramus of squamosal. Carotid canal nor exposed on posterolateral surfaces of frontoparietals. Epiotic eminenves moderately developed, and not roofed posteriorly, Frontoparietal fontanelle barely exposed between almost confluent frontoparictal bones. Extensive lrontoparietals angled posterolaterally on orbit, Faint trace of carotid canal groove present posteralalerally on lponloparietals, Nasals moderately well Ossified and closely applied anteromedially, moderately separated posteromedially; maxillary processes shorr and not in bony contact with well-developed preorbital processes of shallow pars tacialis of maxillary. Palatines moderately Jong, unridged, reduced laterally to just underly preorbital processes of pars facialis of maxillary, Medially they overly spheneth- moid at leyel of anterior extremity of culrriforin process of parasphenoid. Parasphenoid robust, cullriform process Lruncate and moderately broad, alary processes moderately broad and Slightly angled posterolaterally, just reaching distal extremities Of medial rami of pterygoids (Fig. 12). Pterywoid robust, atedial ramus short and in contact with prowtic. Posterior tamus short and moderately broad. Anterior ramus in short contact with moderately well-developed pleryzoid process of palatal shelf of sphenethmoid, Cartilaginous quadrate present between base of squamosul and qguadratojugal. Quadratojugal robust, in firm contact with maxillary, Squamosal sroeky with short, knobbed zygomatic ramus and long unexpanded olic ramus. Maxillary and premaxillary dentate; Palatal shell’ deep with well-developed palatine processes, closely applied medially, Alary processes of premaxillaries very broad, bifurcate, perpendicular to pars dentalis. Vomers absent. Bony columella present, Hyoid plate slightly longer (han broad, Alary processes large, not pedunculate, Anteroproximal portions of anterior cornua dilated, anteromedial processes of hyale absent, Posterolateral processes moderately long, broad, Posteromedial provesses ossified, Some calcification apparent on plate (Pig. 13). Pectoral girdle arciferal and robust, Omoslernum and xiphisternum present, Sternum cartilaginous, Clavicles slender, curved, moderately separated medially, Coracoids robust, moderately separated medially. Bicapitate scapula, about equal in length to clavicle. Suprascapula about 34 ossified, Humerus with well-developed anteroproximal crest. Phalangeal formula of hand 2,2,3,3. Six curpal elements present. Consideratile torsion apparent, Prominent flange extends proximally from. lareroproximal corner of ©. centrale postaxiale, Carpal elements of ©. distale earpale 2 and 3 oot fused (Fig. 14). Palmar sesamoid present, Eight nonimbricate presacral vertebrae Sacral diupophyses poorly expanded, Relative widths of UPEROLETA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA my transverse processes 11] > 1V¥ >sacrum > ll > V=VI- Vil-VIll. Dorsomedial ossification incomplete on verlebrae, {, 1, and UWI, Ilia extend ameriorly to sacral expansion, Well-developed crest on bicondylar urostyle extending, along !’2 dorsomedial length, Pubis cartilaginous. Ilial erest absent, dorsil prominence, very small; dorsal protuberance small, more lateral (han superior (Fig. 13). Phalangeal formula of foot 2,2,3,4,3, Bony prepollex. Three distal tursal clements present, Lateral element (T3) is largest (Pig, 15), Variation The sphenethmoid is never confluent medially, The carotid canal groove is barely observable, deeply grooved or ogcasionally partly roofed, The epiotie eminences usually are prominent. The (rontopatietal fontanelle is always as in the described specimen. The palatines are long, slighily reduced laterally and usually acuminate laterally. The cullriform process of the parasphenoid is of varying lengths and is usually more slender ariteriorly; the alae are either horizontal or inclined posterolaterally. They are usually broad. The medial ramus of the pterygoid is usually acuminate; (he anterior ramus is usually short and sometimes in slightly longer contact with the pterygoid process of the palatal shelf of the manillary than is described, The zygomatic ramus of the squamosal 1s not always knobbed, occasionally it is elongated, The otic radius is always long and unexpanied, ‘lhe alary processes of the premaxillaries are always very. broad, curved at the base, bifurcate and sometimes inclined slightly medially or slightly posteriorly. The pars facialis of the maxillary 1s moderately deep; somelimes it is reduced anteroventrally and sametimes stepped down to be shallow, The preorbital process is always prominent! andl 1s usually, bur mor always, discrete. Vomerive fragments are rarely present and confined lo small, asymmetrical siructires, usually medial to the palatines. Advertisement call Robertson (1982, 1984, 1986a, b) described Lhe wl of this species ina populadian near Sulton. NSW, We have recorded cally rom U. vevigate at a nimber of localities in its range and Table | provides data to supplement Robertson's mlarmea- tion. An oscillogram of the call is presented in Fig. &. Comparison with dither species Uperoleia laevigaia is a toothed species with a tooled frontoparietal fornanelle, features shared only with UO, marmorata. From Li marmorata, U. laevigata is distinguished by (ringing on the invers and toes, and by size (males 20-28 mm in & /vevigata, UL marmorata mule 30.) min). From the sympatric Uo teri, UL laevigata is distinguished by the absence of heavy ventral pigmentation and by the presence of a roofed {rontoparietal fontanelle. L. /aevigata differs from the sympatric species U. eegose by the presence of maxillary teeth, Distribution Uperoleia laevigaia occurs throughout the central und south-eastert coastal regions of SM, Australia and also occurs on the Great Dividing Range as far north as the Blackdown Tableland (Fig, 16), Comment Uperaleia laevigata is sympairie with an undeseribed tuuthed species (Davies, MeDonald & Corben in press) found coastally trout about Kempsey in N.S.W. tO Eungella in central Quvenstand and can be distinguished from this species by inconplere ventral pigmentation, Uperoleia natin’ sp. toy. PIGS 8, 17-22 Uperoleia marmorata: Lintteyolin 1969) po TWO (pet); Cogser 1975, p. TRI (yrart.) Holotype: NMYV 123635, an adult male collected by M. J. and 2... Littlejohn, 4.8 kot SW of Nowa Nowa, Victoria (37°44) 148°06') on 7.x11.1963, Definition A large species (or 30-33 mm SV) characterized by the presenee of maxillary teeth; hypertrophied paratoid glands; heavy ventral pumentation, mottled dorsum; very pourly-exposed fronloparietal fontanelle; no webbing between the Togs; vornering [ragmenrs present; carpus of six clemenis; anteromedial processes of anterior hyale of hyoid in the form of medial dilation; tial ¢rest absent advertisement calla single long pulsed nore J30 M. DAVIES & M, J}. LIT TLESOLIN Fig. 20. A, Laterial! view of the ilium and B, ventral view of the hyoid of Upernler martini sp. nov, (SAM R29652). Of 32-62 pulses with a pulse repetition rate af about 78 pulses sec Description af holotype: Maxillary teeth present, yomerine teeth absent, Snout short, slightly rounded when viewed [rom above, rounded in profile (Pig. 17). Internarial span just less than eye lo naris distance (E-N/TN 1.10), Canthus rostrahs inconspicuous and straight. Tympanum not visible externally. Fingers short, slightly fringed, unwebbed. In order of length 3>2=4>1, Prominent subarticular and palmar tubereles (Fig. 17). Hind limbs moderately long (TL/S-V 0,39). Toes long, unfringed unwebbed. In order of length 4>3>5 >2>1 (Fig. 17), Metatarsal tubercles large and prominent, Subarticular tubercles conical and prominent, Dorsal sartace rugose, Parotoid glands hyper- trophied (Fig, 18), Inguinal and coceygeal glands poorly developed. Submandibular gland indeter- minate. Well-developed supractoacal flap. Ventral surface soTooth. Male with unilobular submandibular voeal sae. Dorsum mottled yellow and chocolate on grey background in preservative, Cream patches yentro- medially on thighs and in groin. Paroloid glands mottled as on dorsum. Small white palch on dorsal surface oF furmerus in axilla region, Ventral surface chocolate stippled with white. Throat dark grey. Dimensions (in mim); Snout-vent length 30.0; tibia length 11.4; eve diameter 3.4; eye-naris distance 2.8; infernarial span 1.10. Etymology: This species is named for Angus A, Martin in recognition of his contribution to the studies of Uperoleia. Variation There are seven paratypes, all adult oot. NMV D23634, D23636 collected with the holotype; SAM R29650, NMV D59496-7, 6 km NNE Yarram, Vic M. J. and T. G. Littlejohn, ixii1980; SAM R29648-49, 6 km NNE Yarram, Vic, G. F Watson and M. J. Littlejohn, ix1976. The paratypes vary little from the holotype, although back patrerning is pot as strongly developed in all specimens collected trom sites. other than the type locahty, Adult males range 26.7-31.8 mim S-V. The hind limbs are uniformly long (TL/S-V 0.37 * 0.02 [0.34-0.39]), Eye-to-naris distance approximates internarial span (B-N/IN 1.07 +014 [0,92-1.30]). The slight fringing which is Apparent On the toes of one paratype may be an arlilact of preservation. The parotoid glands are uniformly hypertrophied and the dorsum is smooth Io only moderately rugose. Osteology (based on NMV 123636) Skull moderately-well ossified sloping antero- ventrally. Ossified portion of sphenethmoid not confluent medially and extending slightly anteriorly to anterior extremities of [rontoparietals and posteriorly about 44 of length of orbit in ventral view. Posteromedial processes present dorsally projecting into anterior portion of frontoparielal fontanelle (Fig. 19). Proplic and exoceipiral not fused, large areas. of prooti¢ calcified postero- laterally, Exoecipitals nor fused dorso- or ventromedially, Crista parotica short and stocky, slightly overlapped by oti¢ ramus of squamosal but not in bony contact with it, Carotid canal a shallow channel in posterolateral frontoparietal bones. Fronloparietal fontanelle exposed only as two small triangular partions (Fig. 19). Nasals moderately ossified, tnangular, poorly separated medially, gently sculpted medially and posteriorly. Maxillary process of nasal moderately developed, mucronate, nol articulating with well-developed preorbital process Of pars facialis of maxillary, Palatines moderately broad, reduced very slightly laterally; medially in long contact with spheneth- moid al angle of about 45° (Fig, 19). Parasphenoid UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 13 L ¢ Fig. 21. A, Dorsal and B, ventral view of the carpus; C, ventral view of the tarsus of Uperoleia martini sp. nov. (NMV 123636). robust with terminally bifid cultriform process reduced anterolaterally, Alae short, moderately broad, at right angles to cultriform process. Anterior ramus of pterygoid in long contact with well-developed pterygoid process of palatal shelf of maxillary; medial ramus short, slightly rounded terminally, not in bony contact with prootic; posterior ramus moderately broad and stocky. Cartilaginous quadrate present between base of squamosal and quadratojugal. Quadratojugal robust, in firm contact with maxillary, Squamosal stocky with knobbed zygomatic ramus and long unexpanded otic ramus. Maxillaries and premaxillaries dentate. Palatal shelf deep. Palatal processes of premaxillaries long, almost confluent medially. Alary processes of premaxillaries moderately broad, perpendicular to dentigerous processes. Pterygoid process of palatal shelf of maxillary well developed. Vomers present as tiny remnants one on medial edge of choana and second on anteromedial extremity of sphenethmoid, but on left hand side only. Bony columella present. Hyoid plate slightly broader than long. Antero- medial processes not elongate, in form of medial dilation of anterior hyale (Fig. 20). Posterolateral processes of hyoid plate moderately broad. Posterior cornua ossified. Pectoral girdle arciferal and robust. Omosternum and xiphisternum present. Sternum cartilaginous. Clavicles slender, curved, coracoids robust. Scapula bicapitate, suprascapula about '4 ossified. Well- developed anteroproximal crest on humerus. Phalangeal formula of hand 2,2,3,3. Carpus of six elements. Moderate torsion occurs. Both O. ulnare and larger O, radiale present. Both articulate with O. radioulna proximally, with each other on medial border and distally with large transversely-clongated O. centrale postaniale (Fig. 21), ©. radiale articulates laterally with O. centrale preaxiale. 132 M. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN Fig. 22, Distribution of Lf martini sp. hoy. Open circles are call records. The arrow jndicates (he type locality. O. centrale postaniale articulates distally with bases of O. metacarpi V, LV and Ul, From lateroproximal corner, small flange extends proximally onto lateral surface to ©. ulnare, Palmar sesamoid ventromedially (Pig, 2}), O, centrale preaxiale articulates laterally with O: radiale, distally with O. centrale postaxiale and with carpal elements of O, distale carpale 2 and 3, laterally with basal prepollical element. Right non-imbricate, presacral vertebrae, Incomplete mediodorsal ossification on vertebrae 1-V, Vertebral column abnormal in sacral region with fusion of one sacral blade with vertebrae VII|. Relative widths of transverse processes cannot be ascertained, Urostyle bicondylar, well-developed crest extending about !\ length, No ilial crest; prominence small, gently monticu- line, dorsal protuberance posterolateral. Pubis calcified (Fig. 2D). Phalangeal formula of foot 2,2,3,4,3. Three distal tarsal elements present. Lateral element largesr, lying at base of ©. metatarsus HL, extending laterally to articulate with medioproximal side of base of Q. metatarsus 1V and medially to base of O. metatarsus 1), Medial clement at base of O, metatiarsus t, articulates with ©. centrale prehallacis. Distal prehallical element small and narrow (Fig. 21). Variation Two other paratypes were cleared and stained, one for bone and one for bone and cartilage (SAM R29648, R29650), Frontoparietal fontanelle exposure is greater than that shown in Fig, 19 and similar to that of the sibling spevies UL ryleré. Ossification of the nasals is slightly less than that of the described specimen. The carotid canal eroove is present, but not deep. The epiotic eminences are Incomplete but ossification is greater than that shown ln Uf veri, Vomerine lragments are present inedial to the palatines and at the edges of the cloanae, but these are variable in development. There is no variation detectable in other skull elements, Advertisement call The call of this species is very similar to rhat of the allopatric species U. /aevivata (Table 1, Fig. 8), Distribution Uperoleia martini is known lrom coastal regions of eastern Victoria and N.SW. (Pig, 22), Comparison with other species U martiniisa large species wilhin Lhe size range of U rvleri, UL crassa, Ue marmorata, U. orientalis, U. russelli, U, (alpa, U. borealis and U. aspera. The species is toothed, a feature shared only with UW tyleri and U marmorata. From U, marmurata, U- martini is distinguished by the hypertrophicd paroloid glands and a chocolate ventral surface. From U. tvlert, UL martini is distinguished by the presence ol a rugase dorsum With yellow motllings, and by gall, Lperoleia tyleri sp. poy. FIGS 8, 23-30 Uperaleia marmoreta: Relerstcin, 1867, p. 349, 1468, p. 220 (part.); H. W. Parker, 1940, p. 69 (party Moore, L961, p. 219 (part); Liulejohn, Martin & Rawlinson, 1963, p, 225; Littlejohn, 1967, p, 153; Lildejoln, 1969, p. 110; Martin & Littlejohn, 1969, p, 171; Litrlejahn, 1971, p. 9: Watson & Marlin, 1973, p. 42; Cogger, 1975, p, 83 (part.): Brook, 1975, p. 119: Grigg & Barker, 1977, p. 186 (park. /yperalius (Uperoleia) marmoratus: W. K. Parker, 1881, rm 1, Uperoleia pugesa; H, W. Parker, 1940, pr 68 (part). Uperoleia sp: Davies, 1984, p, 790 (part.). Holotype: NMV D23633, an adult male collected al Jervis Bay, A.C.T. (35°03, 150°44') by Mu I. Littleiohn, A. A. Martin and P, A, Rawlinson on 17.1.1963. Definition: A large species (oo 22-33 mm, 9 e 26-34 mim S$-V) characterized by the presence of maxillary teeth; hypertrophied parotoid glands; heavy ventral pigmentation; poorly-exposed frontoparietal fontanelle; no webbing between the toes; presence of vomerine remnants in lwo lragments; carpus of six elenients; anteromedial processes of anterior Hyale af hyoid in the form of medial dilations; ilisl cres! absent, Matiny eall a UPEROLEIA {N SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 133 Fig. 23. A, Dorsal and B, lateral view of head; C. palmar and D, plantar views of the foot of Uperoleia wleri sp. nov. Holotype. single short pulsed note of 18-26 pulses with a pulse repetition rate of about 100 pulses sec Description of holotype: Maxillary teeth present, vomerine teeth absent, Snout short, slightly rounded when viewed from above, rounded in profile (Fig. 23). Internarial span less than eve-to- natis distance (E-N/IN 1.65). Canthus rostralis inconspicuous and straight. Tympanum not visible externally (Fig. 24). Fingers short, slightly fringed, unwebbed. In order of length 3>2-4>1. Prominent subarticular and palmar tubercles (Fig. 23). Hind limbs long (TL/S-V 0.38). Toes long, poorly fringed and unwebbed. In order of length 4>3>5>2>1 (Fig. 23). Metatarsal tubercles large and prominent; inner elongate, slightly truncated dorsally extending onto axis of toe 1; outer small, rounded, moderately acutely angled to horizontal axis of foot, Subarticular tubercles conical. Dorsal surface faintly rugose. Parotoid glands hypertrophied (Fig. 23). Inguinal and coccygeal glands poorly developed. Submandibular gland indeterminate. Well-developed supracloacal flap. Ventral surface smooth. Male with unilobular submandibular vocal sac. Dorsum dark slate in preservative. White patch ventromedially on backs of thighs and in groin. . DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN Fig. 24. Uperoleia tyleri sp, nov, in life (SAM R29652) from 7 km ENE Marlo, Victoria. Parotoid glands slightly lighter than dorsum. Small white patch on dorsal surface of humerus in axilla. Ventral surface chocolate stippled with white. Throat dark grey. Colour in lifes Dorsum dark brown-black with orange-yellow spotting over glands. Ventral surface blue-black with white spots. Inguinal and femoral patches yellow. Dimensions (in mm): Snout-vent length 29.8; tibia length 11.4; eye diameter 3.4; eye-naris distance 2.8; internarial span 1.7. Etymology: This species is named for Michael J. Tyler in recognition of his contribution to studies of the genus Uperoleia. Variation There are 61 paratypes 46 oo and 15 9 9. A.CT:: NMV_ D23632 collected with the holotype; D23620-2 Jervis Bay, M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, P. A. Rawlinson, 26.1.1964; D23644, Jervis Bay, M. J. Littlejohn, A, A. Martin, G. F. Watson, 21.x.1969, N.S.W: D23631, Batemans Bay, M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, P. A. Rawlinson, 2.xi.1964; D23640, 3.2 km N. Batemans Bay, P. A. Rawlinson, 13.1.1966; D23628, 28.8 km S. Bombala, M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, P. A. Rawlinson, 24 viii.1963; D23641, 23.2 km S Bombala, M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, 6.xii.1965; D23638-9, Boyd Town, J. A. Owen, AM R4754-9, R4761-2, Tamworth, A. H. S. Lucas, 4.iv.1910; R15683-5 Burrawang, A. Holmes; R421I, Maroubra, D. B. Fry, Ross, 5.x.1908; R5286, R78655, Maroubra Bay, D. B. Fry, Ross, 20.iii.1911; R6930, Kensington, W. W. Thorpe; ANWC A1174, Beecroft Peninsula, 8.ii.1978; NMV D59495, SAM R29653-58, Narrabarba, M. J. Littlejohn, G. F. Watson, 24.1x.1985. Vic. NMV D42741-5, Malacoota Inlet, 12.i.1972; D23623-7, 23629-30, 3.2 km N Cann River, M. J. Littlejohn, A. A. Martin, P. A. Rawlinson, 24.viii.1963; D33598-601, Mouth of Cann River, Tamboon, A. J. Reid, 23.v.1973; D23643, 22.4 km W Cann River, P. A. Rawlinson, 20.viii.1968; D48595-7, 30 km W Genoa, A. J. Coventry, K. C. Norris, 1.xii.1976; D47319-20, 12 km E Currajong, A. M. Gilmore, 28.ix.1975; D51238-9, 2 km WNW Golden Beach, K. C. Norris, 26.ix.1978; D51216-7, 2 km NE Craigs Swamp, Holey Plains State Park, C. Belcher, 20.xi.1978; SAM R29659, Cape Conran, M. J. Littlejohn, G. F. Watson, 26.ix.1985; SAM R29652, 7 km ENE Marlo, H. C. Gerhardt, 27.xi.1981. Size range of the males is 22.0-32.4 mm, and of the females 28.0-34.1 mm. Hind limbs are long (TL/S-V 0,39+0,03 [0,35-0.44]), and paratypes UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 134 Pig, 25. A, Dorsal and B, ventral views of the skull of Uperalera tyleri sp, nov, (NMV 1923639), have variable snoul proportions (E-N/IN 118 + 0,19 [0.87-1.65]). All paratypes have hypertrophied parotoid glands. Variation occurs in the presence and extent of a white patch on the dorsal surface of the arm, Some specimens are dark slate cather than chovolate ventrally, and others are not as evenly pigmented as in the holotype, but all are heavily pigmented, The dorsa of some specimens are rugose with small tubercles. Lightish coloration occurs on the parotoids, and a very faint midvertebral stripe occurs in some specimens. Some specimens exhibit fringes on the toes. Ostevlogy (based on NMV D23634) Skull moderately-well ossified sloping sharply anteroventrally (Fig. 25). Ossified portion of sphenethmoid not confluent medially and extending slighty anteriorly ro anterior extremities of fronta- parietals and posteriorly about 44 of length of orbit in ventral view. Prooti¢c and exoccipital nor fused. large areas of prootic calcified posterolaterally Exoceipitals dot fused dorso- or ventromedially. Crista parolica shor and stocky, not in bony contact with otic ramus of squamosal, Carotid canal a deep exposed channel in posterolateral frontoparictal bones. Frontoparietal fontanelle narrowly and irregularly cxposed medially, exposure greatest about 24 posteriorly along length of frontoparictals, Frontoparieta! elements broad, angled sligltly posterolaterally along orbital edges Neither anterior nor posterior extremitics of frontoparietal fontanelle can be defined because of lack of medial ossification of sphenethmoid and exoceipital respectively. Nasals moderately ossified and triangular, moderately separated medially. Maxillary process of nasal moderately developed and mucronate, not articulating with well-developed preorbital process of shallow pars facialis of mavillary. Palatines moderately broad reduced laterally to level of preorbilal processes of manillaties, niedially in Jong contact with sphenethmoid at angle of about 45° (Fig. 25). Parasphenoid robust with moderately slender, long, truncate cultriform process extending anteriorly to level of articulation of anterior arm of pterygoid with palatal shell of manillary. Alae short, moderately broad and at right angles to cultriform process. Anterior ramus of pterygoid in long contact with well-developed pierygoid process of palatal shelf of maxillanes; medial ramus short and acuminate, nor in Contact with prootic; posterior ramus moderately broad and stocky, Cartilaginous quadrate present beiween base of squamosal and quadratojugal. Quadratojugal robust and in firm contact with maxillary. Squamosal stocky with ony blunt zygomatit ramus and moderately long unexpanded otic ramus. Maxillaries and premaxillaries dentate, Palatal shelf deep. Palatal processes of premaxillaries long. almost confluent medially. Alary processes of premanillaries long, narrow, perpendicular to dentigerous processes. Prerygoid process of palatal shelf of maxillary well developed. Vomiers present bul reduced to two small remnants of bone, one on medial edge of chouna and second on anteromedial extremity of sphenethmoid. Dentigzerous processes absent. Bony columella present. Pectoral girdle arciferal and robust. Omosternum 136 M. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN Fig. 26. A, Palmar and B, dorsal views of the carpus of Uperoleia tyleri sp. nov. (NMV D23623). and xiphisternum present. Sternum cartilaginous. Clavicles slender, curved, moderately separated medially. Coracoids robust, moderately separated medially. Scapula bicapitate, slightly longer than clavicles. Suprascapula about %_ ossified. Moderately-developed anteroproximal humeral crest. Phalangeal formula of hand 2,2,3,3. Bony prepollex and palmar sesamoid present. Six carpal elements present. Considerable torsion apparent. Prominent flange extending proximally from lateroproximal corner of O. centrale post axiale, Carpal elements of O. distale carpale 2 and 3 not fused (Fig. 26). Eight non-imbricate presacral vertebrae. Sacral diapophyses poorly expanded. Ilia extend anteriorly to sacral expansion, Relative widths of transverse processes: [Il >sacrum>IV>II1>V=VI-VIl- VIL. Incomplete mediodorsal ossification on vertebrae I-Y. Short transverse processes present an urostyle. These are probably anomalous structures often occurring in single specimens of Uperoleia, Urostyle UPEROLETA 1N SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA \a7 “ae: Fig 27 A, Laterial view of the ilium of Uperalela iylert sp.nov (NMV 123623}. B, Hyoid of Uperaleta tylerisp. now (NMY 103360)), bicondylar, well-developed crest extending dorsomedially about 2 length of urostyle. No ilial crest. Dorsal prominence monticuline; dorsal protuberance posterolaterally placed on prominence (Fig. 27). Pubis cartilaginous, Phalangeal formula of foot 2,2,3,4,3. Bony prehallux. Three distal tarsal elements present. [Lateral element (T) larzest (Fig. 28). Hyoid plate about as broad as long. Alary processes large, not pedunculate. Anteroproximal portions of anterior cornua dilated, anterior processes of hyale in che form of thickenings. Posterolateral processes moderately long. Postero- medial processes ossitied (Pig. 27). Variation A further nine paralypes were cleared and stained (NMY 1)23622-3, D42743, D42745, D48597, 133601, AM R4755, SAM R296358, SAM R29652). Phe osteological features of this species are remarkably constant. Some differences sit ossification and calcification in the crista parotica region are evident, but the deseribed condition is that of minimal ossification. The vomerine vestiges ure absent [rom one side in one paralype and absent trom the edges of the choanae in a second, Other specimens, have the zyzomatic ramus of (he squamosal developed more extensively and kaobbed, Advertisement call Characteristics of the advertisement call of U iyleri ave shown in Table I, Fig. 8: Life history Watson and Martin (1973) deseribed the larval morphology and life history of this species (as U muarmoratd). Distribution Uperoleia ryleri is & coastal species extending as far north as Tamworth in N,SW. and just penetrating south-easterm Vicloria (Fig, 29). Comparison with other species Uperoleia tylert is a large species (29 23-33 mm, 2 9 26-34 mm) with manillary teeth and with a moderately-exposed frontoparictal fortanelle. These features are not shared by congeners. From the toothed species, U. martini, U. marmorata, U, laevigata, U. miobergi and micromeles (vestigial teeth), the species can be separated by a number of features’ From U, martini, U, tyleri is separated by a relarively-smooth dorsum, the reduced mottling on the dorsum and by call. From U, marmorata, U. tvleri is distinguished by its moderately-eaposed frontoparietal fontanelle, hypertrophied parotaid glands, and densely- plemented ventral surface. From OU. /agevizala, U. iylertys separated by exposure of the lrontaparictal fontanelle and heavy ventral pigmentation. mjoberei is a small species (males 19-25 mm, females 21-23 mm ‘S-V) with a characteristic lyrale pattern on the dorsum and a prominent heel papillit lacking in congeners. U, micromeles has a very narrow head (E/N/IN ().83-0,90, 0.87-1.65 in U. twleri) and is not fully toothed, Other material examined; An aberrant population from Treachery Head, Seal Rocks, N.SW. (AM R27656-7, R27662-5) was examined, All are small, bur adult (evidenced by calling) males with a size range 18-22 mm. The ventral pigmentation is no! as exlensive ag that of the type series, but is dappled 138 M. DAVIES & M. J. LITTLEJOHN Fig. 28. A, Dorsal and B, plantar views of the tarsus of Uperoleia tyleri sp. noy. (NMV D42743). and approaches the pigmentation of material from Tamworth. The parotoid glands are not hyper- trophied as in the type series. Osteologically (Fig. 30), and in external features such as finger and toe webbing and subarticular, palmar and metatarsal tubercles, the series conforms to U. tyleri (Fig. 25). Other material assigned to this species but excluded from the type series, is as follows (much of this material is badly faded): N.S.MWi: NMV D6987, Sydney; AM R4213, Maroubra; AM R5285, R5287, Maroubra Bay; AM R78649-53, Maroubra; AM RS5435, Randwick; AM R18696, Picton Lakes; AM R115560, 8 km N The Oaks on Wallacia Rd. Habitat and calling site in south-eastern Uperoleia In general, breeding habitats are similar for all species, Males usually call from the borders of UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 139 g & rf 4 (| | i } ~ i } \ Le ‘a | Ve 1 5} ! oe \ 4 | % | ‘ ! 1 { St \ \ —_ Y | ! | a = e-+---+-5-= ay ane | } ! 7 1 ! BE | F Kn Pf. of ag OH ee Ki, ’ \ balla oI 2 \ Baden we Aw, Fig. 29. Distribution of Uperaleia tylert in eastern ‘Australia, The arrow indicates the type locality, shallow, temporary ponds, or from small islands of soil or vegetation in such ponds. Robertson (1984, 1986a, b) has provided a full description of the calling behaviour of CL laevigata (as UL rugosa). Discussion The limited morphological diversity, and marked intraspecific variation within characters, in species of Uperoleia impose constraints on their identification, The value of osteology and call in the identili- vation of species of Uperalete was demonstrated by Tler er al. (198la, b, ¢); but early workers (to whom call data were not available) recognised the importance Of some osteological features such as the exposure of the frontoparietal fontanelle, This latter character (together with the degree of toe webbing) was used to define (he genera Uperoleia Gray and Glauertia Loveridge (Loveridge, 1933), Subsequently, Tyler ef a/, (198la) showed that the states of exposure of the frontoparietal fontanelle and of toe webbing exhibited by these genera represent extremes in continua, and, in consequence, they suppressed Glavertia. intraspecific variation in osteological characters, both within and between populations, has been investigated in U, dithomoada (Davies, McDonald & Corben in press), and in the species in this study, Many osteological features vary to such am extent that they are not useful in diagnoses at the specific level. However,.a number of characters are valuable, and particular combinations of characters can be effective diagnostic tools. The presence or absence of maxillary and premaxillary teeth was recogmsed by Parker (1940) as being of paramount importance in species recognition but Moore (1961) considered the presence or absence of teeth to refleet no more than geographic variation; Whilst Straughan (1966)* considered the presence of teeth to be variable within species and even between the sides of the maxillae in the one specimen. We have never encountered bilateral asymmetry in tooth development in any of the specimens of Uperolela examined, and thus find the presence or absence of teeth on the upper jaw (o be a most useful specific diagnostic feature. Extent of exposure of the frontoparietal lonta- nelle is an effective character in species recognition. This feature is under ontogenetic influence (Davies unpubl.) and account must be taken of the relative age of the specimen (as indicated by ossification of key features such as the prootic and exoccipitals and the epiotic eminences, the sphenethmoid and the carpal bones) (Davies unpubl.). However, because most of the material was in breeding condition when collected, adult features formally are apparent; and hence the usual condition of the frontoparietal fontanelle is present. It seems that the frontoparietal elements continue to grow, although probably slowly, and in ‘aged’ individuals (as instanéed by calcification of various skeletal and cartilaginous elements and by minor exostosis of cranial bones), expasure of the 4 Straughan, I. R. 1966. An analysis of species recogni: tion and species isolation in certain Queensland frogs. Ph.D. thesis, University of Queensland. Unpublished 140 M, DAVIES & MJ LITTLE IOHN Fig. 30. A, Dorsal and &, yentral view of skull of Uperalev ivleri from Treachery Head, Seal Rocks (AM R27656). Seale bar = 5 mm. lronteparieral fortanelle is less than in ‘mature! specimens. The shape and degree of ossification of the nasal bones rarely vary within a species, and the relationships of these bones with the sphenethmoid and with the anterior extremities of the frontoparietal elements are constant, The shape of the pars facialis of the maxillary, and the presence or absence of a preorbital process on his shell, are characteristic of Uperaleia. The length of the otic ramus of the squamosal, and ils relationship to the erista parotica, are useful diagnostic tools for Lhe species with relatively- restricted ranges, The shape of the alary processes al the premaxil- laries can be useful, as cay (he shape of rhe palatine processes of the premaxillaries, The relative lengths and inclinations of the palatines fo the spenethmoid are consistent, bul some features of shape, parti- cularly medially, tend to vary within a species. Iniraspecifie variation is apparent in the inclinations of the alae of the parasphenoid, and also in the shape of the cultriform process. The shape of the distal end of the medial ramus of the pterygoid is not diagnostic but the shape of the posterior ramus is. Post cranially, the most useful diagnostic features are the carpal elements, in particular the condition of the carpale 2 and 3, and in the ilium (see Tyler 1976; Davies ead. in press). The dominant frequencies in advertisement calls of all species discussed here are similar and within ihe range, 1927-2432 Hz (Table 1); likewise depths of amplitude modulation generally execed 90% for all taxa (Table 1). Most differentiation between species is evident in call duration, in the number Of pulses in the call, or in the dependent character, pulse rate (Table 1, Fig, 8), Accordingly, these attributes may be used for effective diagnosis of the syipalric species. Identification of specimens of Uperoleia from south-eastern Australia has been uncertain due to the instability of nomenclature within the genus prior to the revision of Tyler e/ af, (198ta), and to the lack of knowledge of extent of morphological variation in eastern Australian species. As (he stuchies of early workers were restricted to external morphology and lo some osteological features and because information on fugitive characters, such as colour in life and call were not available, few species wele recognised. Subsequently, Parker (1940) on the basis of a limited morphological analysis, synonymised U/ rugosa and UL fimbrianus, He also commented that exalnples of 'U. marmarata' trom the coastal region of N.S.W, are very dark and may represent a distinet race, Moore (1961) recognised only one species of Uperoleia in eastern Australia—U marmorata, and cousidered that the differences in anorphology he observed shoulcl be interpreted as intraspecific geographic variation, Tyler er al. (198la) showed thal UPEROLE(A IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 14] Uo marmorala was testrieted bo north-westert Western Australia, and they resurrmeted Jinbrianas from the synonymy al LL rugesa on the basis of their experience with restricted distributions of species of Uperoleia in the north of Australia and because of its larger size. Wher & Davies (1984) ialcr Showed that Uf /itfomouda has a wide ranging disiribulion across the north of the continent. Ceopraphival differences in size also are apparent within Lf lithomoda (Tyler & Davies 1984, Dayies et al. in press) and. the staius of Cf finbrianus remained jenuaus. Uperoleia Wwlert sp. nov. and U. martini sp. nay. are yery dark coastal species, and uo further undescribed species trom the sorthern coastal region af N.S, and the south-west of Qld awaits recognition (Davies eral in press), Our data do not support recogninion of U, fiebrianus and this the species if again synonymized with U. rages Uperaleid ldevigata js a wide ranging Species in soulh-easiern Austraha (see Fig 16), Both Huophries (1979) and Robertsan (1I98L, 19823, 1984a, b, }986u, 6) have mude detailed studies of populations of this spacies (as UL rugosa). Some reproductive data were collecied al Mosman, NSW, by Harrison (1922), bur it is nat possible fo determine whether the specimens which he had observed were of U. laevieara or oF L ryleri, bow of which occur iv the Sydney area. Pleieher (1890) reported on specimens of Uperoleia trom several localities in N.S, Burrawang, the neigh- hourhood of Sydney, near Cullenbone, near Mudgee, Narrabri and Dandalog. Three of the species discussed in this paper could be represented aiMiongst this material He also sradied material (ram two other localities in NSW. Kiueatoa Station, ear Condoblin (probably {4 rugosa) and Fmv Plains, Urana (probably 0. rugosa) (Pletcher 1891), Material fron: Lucknow, N.SW. (near Grange}, Pumpana, Qld (south of Brisbane), and Waroo, Inglewood, Qld probably represents U. rugese and OU. laevigata or an undescribed species (Davies ec at in prods) (Fletcher 1892). Fletcher (1893) also identified material from Jervis Bay, ASUT (U. trlers), Inverell, 64 kim west ol Glen Jones, NSW. nd Bungendare, NSW. CU. loevisaia) and lamwarth, NSW (Ul. ty/eri or lueviguta). Unloriunately oo records of the specimens examined are available, so that the lenlatiye ideniificalions cannet be confirmed (t is probable that many of the specimens examined by Slevin (1955), and referred to Lt ruuesa, are identified correctly, However, we have nut examined tas matedigl and henee cannot comment further. The skins of Uperoleia spevies have heen a rich source of polypeptides with pharmacological activily. Erspamer ef af. (1966), Erspamer et al. (1975), Roseghini e¢ af, (1966) and Erspamer ef al, (1977) obtained a non-mammalian tachykinin which they named Uperolein fram thousands of skins of (rozs from Queenstand and NSW. and identified as U. rugosa and U mermorata, Oyher pharmocologically active peptides also were obtained by these authors. However, [he activiry ratio among the various peptides varied not only for the different preparations but also within a single preparalion (Erspamer ef a/, 1975). The batches of skin obtained clearly represented more vhan one Species, From N.SMW. we bave demon- strated (he presence of four species (and a fifth is known to occur there, Davies ef a/, in press). Clearly the resolution af species of Uperalei in eastern Australia is essential for this type of pharmacological work to be maximally effective. Acknowledgments For loa of material in (heir care and for permis- sion to clear and stain material for osteologival examination we would like co thank the following instiiulions and their curators: British Museum (Natural History) (A. G. C. Grandison), C.S.1,R.0, Wildlife Collection (J. Wombey), Naturhistoriska Tijksmuscel Stockholm (CG. Astrom), Museum of Victoria (J. Coventry), Australian Museum (A Greer), Queensland Museum (G. Ingram), South Australian Museum (M. J. Tyler), University of Kansas, Museum of Natural History (W. E. Duellman), Queensland National Parks and Wildlife Service (R. Ro MeDonald). We also thank M. Mahony, A. Wells, DB Carter and R, B. Humphries for prowisiva of addinenal marerial. We thank Graeme Watson, Angus Marlin and Peter Harrison for assistance with call data and Michael J, Tyler for support, enthusiasm, endless discussion and for critically reading the manuseript. Lorna Lucas, Heather Kimber and Sandra Lawson (yped the manuscript, This work Was supported by [he Department af Zoology, University of Adelaide (M,D,), an Australian Research Grants Seheme Granctto M.J.L. and G. P, Watson, and the Nuffield Foundation. References Apentie M. (L978) Moder Taina ane flora of the Tesas Caves ared, siutheasicen Queensland Menn Gad Mus. VO), HU Barkhe, fo ak Cree, Cy OPT, A lel voile ie Awotratioe tops {Righy, Adelaide 92 M, DAVIES & ML LITTLEJOHN Brake, A. J. D. (1972) Taxonomy and relationships of myobatrachine frogs (Lepltoducylidae): a munmerival approach, Awst 2 Zeal, 21, 119-149, Broo, A. J, (1975) The distribution of anural amphibians in Victoria. Me. Pield Nat, 92(6), 10a 120, Brooker, M. G. & Cauca ty, Ci, (1965) The veriehrare fauna of Giruih Plains, south west Oucensland Prov, Linn, Sav, N.S.MA2 90(2), 238-241, Coocer, H. G, (1975) ‘Repiiles and amphibians of Australia,’ (Reed, Sydney.) (1983) ‘Reptiles and amphibians of Austeatia,’ dru Edition. (Reed, Sydney.) ~—, CAMeRon, B, EB, & Cocicinh, Hy My (1983) ‘Zoological Catalogue of Australia, Volume) Amphibia and Reptilia,” (Aust. Govt Publishing Service, Canherta,) Davits. ML (1984) Osteolopy of the myobarraehine fron Arenophryne ratinda Tyler (Anura: Leptodactylidae and comparisons With other myobatrachine penera, Aust, J. 200,32, 789-802, » Manowy, M. & Ropeets, J. DB: 1985) A new species of Uperolen (Anura: Leptoductylidae) fron the Pilbura Region, Western Australia. Trans R&R, Sue, §. Ause 109, 103-108. — & McOdnatp, K. R. (1985) Redefinitian ot Uperoleia rugosa = (Anderssen) (Anura: Leptndactylidac). Jhid WY, 37-42. \ & Coreen, C.J. (in press) he genus Upereleia Gray (Anura: Leptodactylidae) jn Queensland, Australia, Brac R, Saw, Vive, Davis, DD & Gorn, VR, (1947) Clearing and staining small vertebrates. Fleddiana Techniques 4, 16. Dincckkus, BG. & Uncer, L. D. (1977) Enzyme clearing of alcian blue stained whole small vertebrates for demonstration of cartiiave, Stain Teefral. $2, 229-231. ERseamen, Y., bt Cara, G, & Expr as, R. 11966) Occur- rence of physalaenin-like polypeptide (Uperolein) anc otlet wetive polypeptides in the skin of Uperateia rugase. Expereiua 22, 738. , PRSPAMER, 4, EF & Linn, G, (1977) Geou- renee of Luchy kinins (Physalacmin or substance Pike peplides) in the ampinibian skin, and (heir actions on smoot muscle preparations. d7 US. von Euler and B. Petnow (Eds) ‘Substance PY (Raven Press, New York,) . Neort, Li, Erspamen, & & Betiban, R, (1975) Uperalein and other active peptides i) Wie skin of Ihe Australian leptodactylid) trags Cperoleja and Taudaciylus, Arch. Pharmacal, 89, 41-54 FLetchita, J. 0, (1890) Conrriburions to 9 more exact kKnowledme of the geographical distribution of Australian Batrachia. No | Proc. Linn Seo, NSE Sep 2. 5, 667-476, (1891) Conmibutions to @ more exact knowledse of {he geographical distribution of Austratiin Batrachia. No, 2. Jbhid. &, 263-274. (1892) Contributions to d more exact knowledge of ihe geographical distribution of Australian Batractia No.3 bid, 7, 7-19. - (1893) Contributions to a mone exact Knowledge of the geographical distribition of Australian Batrachia, No. 4. Mbit & 524-533, Harrison, L. (1922) On the breeding habils of same Atistivlian frows. Ausé Fook, 17-34, REFERS) EIN, W. (1868) Ueber die Barrachier Mest talions. elreh. Nanirgesch. 34, 253-290. LEnit tain, M. 1. (1967) Patterns af zoageopraphy and speciation in south-castern Australian aniphibia pp, 150-174, fa ALT. Weatherly GEd.) “Australian titan Waters and their fauna.’ (AN, Press, Canberra.) (1969) Amphibia of Past Ciyppstand. Proc, R, Soc. Met, BIC), 15-11% rey (1971) Aimiphibia of Victoria. Viet, Year Book 8&. » Magriss A. AL & Rawrinso, FAL (1964) New records of frogs in east Goppstand, Piel Nui. 8t, 225-226. Lovexibuik, A. (1933) A new genus and three new species of crinine frogs from Australia, Ovcus. Pap. Boston Soc. Nat Hist, 8, 89-94, Lywen, J.D (1971) Evolutionary relationships, osteolopy and zooweography of leptodactyloid frogs. Mise. Publ Mus. Nat. His, Univ, Kans. 53, 1-238. Manony, M, J. & Romssow, E. S. (1986) Nuclewlar Organiser region (NOR) location in karyotypes of Australian grounds frogs (Family Mvobarrachiclac), Genetica 68, 119-|27. Martin, A, A, & Liptihaionn, M. J. (1969) The amphibian fauna of Victoria, two vew records and a checklist, Fen Nat. 86, 170-172. Moore, fA. (96D The frogs of caster New South Wales, Bull, Aan Mus, Near Hist (24, 195-385. Pakkek, H, W. (140) ‘The Australasian fros of the family Leptodietylidue, News. Zool 42, 1-106, Parker, WK. (SRT) On Ute structure and developorent ofthe skillof the Batravhiu. PAIL Trois. R. Soe. Lone. 172, 1-266, Rowreisom, FG. M. (19K1) Sexal selection and spacing i) Uperoleta rugosa (Red-proined toadler) (Anura: Leplodactytidae), dC, B, Banks & A.A. Martin (Eds). Proceedings of the Melbourne Herpetological Symposium, (Zoological Board of Victoria, Melbourne} (984a) Acoustic spacing by breeding ales of Uperaleia tygosa (Anura: Leptodactylidac), & Tierpsvchol. 4, 283-297. ~—— (1984) A tech pique for individually marking frogs for behavioural studies, Herp. Rev. 15(2), 56-37. —— (1986a) Fernale chvice, male strategies and the role of vovalizations inthe Ausiralian frog Upercleia ragosa. elnint. Behav, 34, 773-784. (19866) Male territoriality, fehting and assessment of fighting ability in the Australian Iroe Uperoleia rugosa. Ibid. 34, 763-772. ROSEGTIINI, ML, Erspamer, Vo & Enbeas, R. (1976) Indole-imidazole and phenyl alkylamioes iv the skin of one hundred amphibian species from Australia and Papua New Guinea. Comp. Biochem. Physiol 54, 3143, Stpvin, J, BR, (955) Notes on the Austeatian ainphibians. Proce. Califarnia Acad, Sc}, 28, 455-392, TRUER, L. (1979) Prous of the genus Je/wutebre in Ecuador with description of a new species, Copel 1979(4), 744-733. Tyipk, M. J. (1968) Papuan hylid frogs of the venus i ball Zval, verhandl. Rijksmus. Nat. Hist Leiden 96, (1976) Comparanyve ostealogy af the pelvic girdle of Australian frogs and a ceseription of a new fossil genus. Trans. R. Save. 5. Anse WO), 3-l4. (1985) Myohatrachidae. Jr Frost, DD. Ro (bd.} ‘Amphibian species of the world. A 1axonornie and geographical reference.’ (Mien Press Ind & Asso Syst, Coll, Lawrence) & Davies, M, (L984) Uperolefa (Gray) (Anura: Leptocacrylidae) in New Guinewt. Trans. Soe. Susy. M8{2), }23-125, —-,- & Maniiny AL AL G9Sla) Auseratiaa frogs of ihe lemodperylid genus Upercleta Gray, less, 4. Zool. Suppl, Sen 79, 1-64 UPEROLEIA IN SOUTH-EASTERN AUSTRALIA 143 & (1981b) New and rediscovered Watson, G. F. & Martin, A. A. (1973) Life history, species of frogs from the Derby-Broome area of Western larval morphology and relationships of Australian Australia. Rec. West. Aust. Mus. 9(2), 147-172. leptodactylid frogs. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 97, 33-45. & (198lc) Frog fauna of the WILKINS, G. H. (1928) Undiscovered Australia. Being an Northern Territory: new distributional records and the account of an expedition to tropical Australia to collect description of a new species. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. specimens of the rarer native fauna for the British 105, 149-154. Museum 1923-1925. (Bern, London.) TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED VOL. 110, PART 4 EARTHQUAKES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY S. A. GREENHALGH, R. SINGH & R. T. PARHAM Summary Since the turn of the century eight earthquakes of Richter magnitude 5 or greater have been experienced in South Australia, the most recent in 1986. The 1954 (My, 544) Adelaide earthquake was the most damaging shock to have occurred in Australia since European settlement, with a damage bill of $50 million on present monetary standards. EARTHQUAKES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA hy S.A. GRERNHALGH®, Ro SINGH? & RO" PARHAM) Summary Girerwiiaron, 3. A. SINGH, Re & Param, R. T, (1986) Earthquakes in South Australia. Tras, R. Sae S. Aust 1004), 145-154, 28 November, 1986. Since (he turn of rhe cenrury eight earthquakes of Righter magnirude 5 or grealer haye been experienced in South Australia, the most reeent in 1986, Vhe 1954 (M, §%4) Adelaide earthquake was the most dumaping shock to haveovcourred in Australia since Huropean senlement, With «damage bill of $50 million on present monelary standards. be hquake acrivity is monitored with a statewide network of twelve setsmograph stations. Approsimarcly 700 eanthquakes are Ineated cach year. The greatest conventranon of carrhquakes occurs in the Flinders Kanges adiucent lo the northern (ip of Spencer Gulf and Lake Torrens. The other major zones are Eyre Pommsula (pacicilarly the eastern sidey und the South-Fast camer of the State, The focal depths. for most Sourh Australian earthquakes are quite shallow, being confined to ihe upper enust. The toml energy release is essentially constant with fneal depth, which is consistent will an increase in rock strength with dept) i the crust, Recurrence relations have been established for che various seismic zones: For (he Whole of the State, the date imply an average rerun period of 142 years for ap earthquake of magnirade M, greater than 6, Focal mechanisms of six curthquakes oceurring in the central Geosyneline Zone have been deduved from analysis of P wave first motions, The fault planes are all steeply dipping and the motion is essenially srike-slip, in response to horizontal compression of the Australian plate, Key Woros: Earthquakes, South Australia. Seismic zones, Adelaide, focal depth. Introduction South Australia contains some of the most active carthquake vones in Australia (Burke-Gattrey 1952; Doyle et al. 1968; Denham 1979), Seismic activity is only minor ina global context, but occasionally damaging earthquakes do occur. In the last 100 yeurs, Soutl) Australia has experienced seventeen caurthquakes of Richter magnitude 442 or greater (Table 1). OF these only six events were of magnitude larzer than 5}4, the most recent being in LY86. The largest earthquake to have occurred jn the State's history was (he Beachport-Kingston earthquake of 1897 (M; — 644). Earthquake monitoring is carried out by the University of Adelaide using a state-wide network of 12 seismograph stations (Mig. 1), Information derived from the network has enabled a detailed risk map of Sowh Australia to be drawn (MeCue 1973!; Denham (979; Stewart 1984), The populuiion cenire of Adelaide bas the highest earthquake risk of any capital cily in Australia. The 1954 (M, ~ 5!) Adelaide earthquake invalved * School of Karth Seiences, Vlinders University of South Australia, Bedford Park, S.Ausr, 5042. * Deparment af Mineral Resources, Suyat, Fil. | Department of Physics, South Austrahan College of Advatived Bdiwation, Salisbury, S.Aust, Metue, K. (1975) Seismicity and Seismic Risk in South Australia, University of Adelaide, Dept. of Physics, Report ADI 137, a 30,000 insurance claims totalling £4 million, The cast today of an equivalent size earthquake has been estimated as in excess of $50 m. (Fred Pairhead Pers. comm.) In this paper we review of the broad pattern of South Australian seismicity, paying particular atlention to epicentral distributions, local depth relations, and earthquake focal mechanisms, Much of the data used are post-1978, when [te network underwent significant expansion, The last published account of South Australian seismicity (Stewart 1984) inclades data only up until 1979. Historical Seismicity The earhest reported earthquake in South Australia occurred in Adelaide on 28 July, 1837, oly six months after proclamation of the new colony. Blackett (1907) deseribed the effeets of this earthquake and the concer) if caused amongst the new settlers, The Rev. Julian Edmond Wood reported a further severe shock felt in Adelaide in June 1856 and one at Lake Bonney in the Sourh- East during December 1861 (Howehin 1929; Kerr- Grant 1956), Barthquake etivity throughour the following years Was reported in the laval press and noted in records kept by observers of the Bureau of Meteorology aiid Tocal lighthouse keepers, Howehin & Gregory (1917) give a summary of shocks for the period 1883 ta 1903, Ayre re, bet ‘ CLV oe Vig. 1. Location map showing stations of the South Australian network, The adjacent stations. BFD and STK al the Bureau of Mineral Resources Eastern Australian network, are also shown, 8. A, GREENHALGH, R. SINGH & R, T. PARHLAM The Government Asironomer, Sir Charles Todd, volleeted reports from 1887 10 1908 which were published in the proceedings of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science. A summary of this early seismic activity was given hy Mr G. F. Dodwell, Todd's successor (Dodwell 1910), The greatest concentration of felt reports came from the vicinity of the Flinders Ranges from such places as Quorn, Hawker and Blinman, The main area of acuivily was at Beltana, situated in the hilly country east of Lake Torrens (Fig, 1), Twenty-six earthquakes of MM Intensity 1V to Vi Were reported for the Iwenty-seven year period 1881-1908, Kapunda anc Budunda, i the Barossa Valley district located 90 km north-east from Adelaide (Fig. 1), reported 22 less severe carthquakes in the same period, A tabulation of felt South Australian earthquakes to 1918 is given in a Bureau of Meteorology publication “Rainfall Records for South Australia und the Norther Territory”. (t lists eight tremors for the city of Adelaide, During this pre-instrumental period some of the largest ¢arthquakes (o be experienced in Australia occurred (see Table 1), Most notable were the Beachport-Kingston (1897) M, = 6! earthquake mentioned earlier, and {he Warooka (1902) M, = 6 earthquake on Yorke Peninsula. Both shocks catised considerable damage in the epicentral area and were strongly felt at distances of hundreds of kilometres. Bach was accompanied by numerous fell aftershocks over the following yearn, An exhaustive description of the macroseismic effects of these Tater t. South Australian earthyuakes of Magnitude M, = fh, Origin Tuhe Location Date (UT) (Lat.)°S) Twit, RES 13:58:00 Motini Barker 35.1 HOV L897 (5;26200 Beachport 37.30 19.ix.1902 10:30:00 Warooka 75.00 28,8.1937 0934243 Simpson Desert = 26.10 26.1999 OF'5HeF Motpena 31.20 diy. J941 22:07:90.0 Sinpsen Desert 26.30 G.viii L948 | 03729¢23,0 Robe 47 36 24.1954 1 8209:452.0 Adelaide 44.93 2.41.7959 O117:57,.2 Eyre Peninsula 33.36 (6.v-1962 21;41;38,5 Kangaroy Island 335,51 257.165 21:22754.9 Howker 31.928 Dili, W9GS S27 R:53.9 Leigh Creek 30.525 14.10.1965 = 12:47:42.3 Hawker 31.949 2o.vii19T) OF:50:33.0 Blioman F378 Ih.iv. 1972 22:30:39.7 Wilpena BV .578 IO NUAYSFT VF4251.2 Bellini W794 Wii TRH | (82 83:52.4 Musgrave Runges 26.280 Depth Mag. Long. (FR) (km) = -M,; ~—- References i38.7 4,5 BG, DES, M 139,75 6.5 D, BG, DES, M, SMB 137.40 4.0 D, BG, DES, M 136.50 — 5? BG, B2 138.00 _ 5.1 BG, BB, SW, DES 136.90 _— 5.1 B2, SW, DES 134.68 138 4.6 BG, SW. DES, M. SMB 13ak 67 4 4.3 KG, Bl, B2, DES, M {35.98 y 44 SW, DES 137.66 0 46 SW, DES 138,496 0 46 SW, DES 138,222 10 48 SW, DES. M 138,569 ) 47 SW, DES 134.756 19 4.8 SSS 138.619 2 33M 138.405 2) 435 Ov (32.898 if fil Relerenees: BI, Bolt (1957); B2, Bolt (1959); BB, Bullen & Bolt (1956); BG, Burke-Ciallney (1952); D, Dadwell (L910); DES, Doyle, Everingham & Sutron (1968); KG, Kerr-Grant (1956); GD, Greenhalgh & Denham (986) My MeCue (1975), SMB, Sutton, MeCue & Bugeja (197 7); SSS, Stewart, Slade & Sutton (L973) SW, Sutton & White (19648), EARTHQUAKES IN SOULH AUSTRALIA 147 varihyiakes is given by Dyster (1979)% The references ited in Fable 1 should also be consulted for further details. Karly insinimental Period (1909-1962) Prior to [962 Only one seismic Station wus opening i South Australia at the Adelaide Astronontical Observalary (Doyle & Underwood, 1965). The instruments, a Milne N-S horizarital pendulum and i Milne-Shaw EW horizontal semouraph, were of low sensitiviry ind long period and nol well suved ro the study of loeal earthquakes. The nearest stations to Adelaide were at Melbourne (600 kin) to the south-east, Sydney (1100 kin) ta the east, Perth (2000 km) to the west, und Brisbane (500 kin} and Rabaul (3800 km) to the north-east. There were few earthquakes large enough to be recorded at these distances to enable locations to be made, For those that were recorded, cpicentral localions was not precise (no better than 100 km) due to the small number and unfavourable distribytian of seismie stations. A brief discussion of Australian seismicity for the first half of ihe 20th Century Was piven by Cutenberg, & Richter (1954). They lisied onty 10 earthquakes of magnitude M ercater than 3.3 for the whole continent. This was followed by a more detailed study conducied by Burke-Galfney (1952) and the redeterminacion of same epicentres by Bullen & Bolt (1954) and Holt (1957, 1959). The epicentral map produced by Burke-Gaffney (1952) identified the South Australian reeion from Spencer Gull to Lake Eyre as the most active seismic area of Australia. Table 1 lists some of the larger events which took place during this early insirumental period. The 19594 Adelaide carnthquake was the niost damaging carhquake to have occurred since European seUlement of Australia, Detailed sewmological descriptions of this important eariliquake ale given by Kerr Grant (1956) and MeCue (1975)! Other notable damaging earthquakes in this period were the Matpena (1939) My = 3,4 and the Robe (1948) M, — 4.6 carthquakes. MeCug (1975)! discusses these and other earthquakes elt jn South Australia prior ro establishment of the ML Bonython seismic station un 1959. Insirumental Date Aceitate, instrumental Jocations of South Australian earthquakes buve only been possible “pystern T. (1979) Strong shock of Earthquake: The stery QF ihe four severest Of varthquakes a South Australia’s history. Dopubbshed report. department of Physics, University ol Aceltide, since the establishment by the fate Dr D. Sutton of the first ipartite seismig network in 1963. With the gradual expansion of the network over the follawnne Iwo decades, the location capability increased considerably as did the umber of locatable events. At the present time approximately 300 earthquakes per year are sufficiently well- recorded to enable a location to be made. The geographical distribution of earthquake epicentres may be strongly biased by the density and location of seismograpl stations. (For historteal data, there is a corresponding bias in terns of population), Only those events recorded by at least three stations will be reported. Fuhermore, lovation errors may be large for events ovcurring ourside the network. The present location limits tor the 14 Station network (including two adjacent stations of the BMR’s Eastern Australian tetwork) have been determined by Cireerihalgh, Parham & Singh (1986). During the 1960'S when there were fewer than Seven operational stations, small magnitude earthquakes would have been completely missed, From 1969 onwards nearly all events of My prealer tin 2 in the known seismic regions of South Australia should have been located. fhe main limitations i (he present coverage are in the far north and west of the State. Seismieiy studies for the South Australian region have been reported at regular intervals since 1968 by Sutton and colleagues ar the University of Adelaide (Sucron & White 1968; Stewart, Slade & ‘Sutton 1973; Sutton, McCue & Bugeja 1977; Stewart 198d), ‘Tectonic interpretations Of the seismicity have also been undertaken (Dovie, Everingham & Sutton 1968; Stewart 1976; Stewart & Mount 1972; MeCue & Sutton 1979; Singh 19853). Results Epicentral distrifuition Fig. 21s an epicentral plot forthe region oF South Australia below tattude 26°S. Ir contains all earthquakes in the archives from 1897 to 1984 which have magnitude (M,) 3.0 or greater, The plot repeats the earlier established seisnticity patreru (Stewart er @l, 1973) with most of the acivity occurring ait the Adelaide Geosyneling Zone from Leigh Creek inthe north to Kangaroo Island in the south, The preatest conceniranon occurs uv the Flinders Ranges adjacent to the northera end of Spencer Gulf and Lake Torrens. The other two zones of seismic activity are also clearly identified; namely Eyre Peniosula (particularly the eastern * Sinvh, R. (M85) The semmiciry aod erustil structure of South Austratit. MySey Chesine Winders Universily of South Australia (Unpubl) 148 S. A. GREENHALGH, R. SINGH & R. T. PARHAM 138 SIMSON DESERT, Wisc sim AUSTRALIA A ray LEIGH CREEK, 1965 4 8M, BELTANA,1983@ OMA, 4 a A AA MOTPENA,)939 95 1M na ages a BLINMAN, 197] WILPENAD 45M 1972 5.3M, awker,& As ra eo EN A HAWKER, 1965, ry vayay vay ° EYRE PENINSULA MAMBLIN.I959MH52M, AV a 4 ADELAIDE, 1954 m5 em MT. BARKER, KILOMETERS 100 200 ROBE, 1946 SCALE As5 MAGNITUDE KEY Fig. 2. Epicentral map for South Australia 1897-1983, The plot includes events of Richter magnitude 3 or greater. The major seismic zones, in order of decreasing activity, are Adelaide Geosyncline, Eyre Peninsula and South-East Region. EARTHQUAKES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA lay side) andl Lhe South-East comer af the State (around Mr Gambier). Nig, 3 shows the earthquake epieentres in the magnitude range My 1.9 jo 4.4 for the relatively recent seven year period Jaiuary }978 to Decenrber 1984. The standard errors in the epicentral co- ordinates have been greatly reduced in the post-1978 period, and are approximately + 2 km. The diagram also depicts the main geologic provinces. Again che major earthquake zanes are clearly seen, It is obvious that the Geosvncline Zone beiweeit Quorn and Leigh Creek exhibiiy the yrealest number of evenis. The epicentres appear to be assuciated with a narth-south chain of about 40 diapirs, which have been interpreted by Leeson (1970) as intrusive features which occur ar che intersection. of deep faults and shears in the basement systems, They are zones of structural weakness which may promote ctusral stress release. Many of the seismic events of Fig. 3 are below sediments of the Geosyncline where basement struc- ture may bear lirtle resemblance to surface geologic features, The epicentral pattern is rather diffuse bat shows @ predominant orth-west and north-cast lineation, These trends correspond with the general structure fabne of the area, Several new features are evident.in Big. 3 which were not clearly defined in previous. studies. A possible branching of the Flinders Ranges zone ovcurs near Jamestown (lat. 33 ¥2"°S, long, 139"E), where the epicentres may trend sorth-cast and join up with (he group of events centred on Broken Hill. The Anabana and Redan Faults are almost co- incident with ¢his projected tine of activity. Stewart (1971) reported on tWo carthquake sequences in 1969 which were centred east of te Geasyncline on the Willyama Blowk. Another neighbouring area of setsmicity is the small eroup of epicentres in New South Wales at latitude 30°S and longitude 41.5 EF, The seismouraph coverage in this area is poor but |t is evident thal (his zone may be geologically associated with the Frome Embayment (Fig. 6). North of Leigh Creek the major earthquake zone swings round to the west of Lake Eyre and (erininates tear Oodnadatta (to the north of the urea Shown i Fig. 3—see Figs | & 2), resumes an the western edve of (he Great Artesian Basin and extends northwards into the Simpson Desert. Most of the activity is an the Northern Territory side of ihe State border. Several moderately large earthquakes have oecurred there, but the network Uoes not provide adequate montoring of rhe north- central zone for events of magnitude less than My 2.5. Eyre Peninsula is much less active than the Geosyneline bul some large earthqyakes have occurred there (Table 1), The magnitude My; ~ 4.9 earthquake of 2 November 1959 triggered 3 events in the magnitude rarige 4 to 449. Several other felt swarms have been observed in this zone. Epicentres along the eastern side of Eyre Peninsula appear to be associated with the Lincoln Fault Zone. This fault marks the Western boundary of sediments within the Spencer Gulf Graben, There is a gapr in the seismicity north of Cleve berween Eyre Peninsula and the Geosvncline Zone. West of Eyre Pemisula there are few data con- vecning earthquake activity. Events occurring in the Eucla and Offiver Basins would have to be of magnitude greater than 2 to be locatable by the seismic network. The population density of this revion is also low bat reports of Tell earthquakes are occasionally received from towns on the Great Australian Bight. The South-East seismicity zoue has been the site of two of South Australia’s largest earLhquakes— Beachport-Kingston, 1897 and Robe, 1948, (mentioned earlier). Until the recent expansion of the network in this area small earthquakes off the east coasl went ummoticed. Seismicity is relaled to the western (offshore) margin of the Giway Basin and an onshore volcanic belt. The data for this grea are sparse. A review has been given by Sutton, MeCue & Bugeja (1977). Foval-Depth patierns The foval deprh distribution of focal earthquakes in South Australia is summarised jn histogram forin in Fig, 4. The two diagrams correspond to the Adelaide Geosyneline and Eyre Peninsula setsmic zones, The data are for the period 1978 ro 1983, when all 12 stations of the network were operating. The standard errors in focal depth determination are approxiniately 2 kn for earthquakes within the Geasyneline and 2 to 5 km lor events outside ir The number of earthquakes. and the perind of observations are sufficient to attach significance ta the result. Furthermore, the data set has mot been contaminated by any large earthquakes or altershock/foreshock Sequences. The two-laver crustal models los each cone (Shackleford & Sutton 1981) are shown to the right of the foval depth diagrams. For the Geosyncline, abour 80% of the earthquakes takes place within the upper crus(-ar depths of less than 20 km. On Eyre Peninsula, the Conrad discominuity Geeurs at shallower depih (& to 12 km), with 70" of earthquake activity concentrated ja the upper crust. At wbese depths (conlining pressiires) stress is relieved by brittle fracrare rather than duccle low (Mar 1967). 150 S. A. GREENHALGH, R. SINGH & R. T. PARHAM STUART SHELF GAWLER PLATFORM _s4{(8) Ceduna -1s"ADELAIDE | ‘ , +—_. LINCOLN FAUz, ss, "GEOSYNCLINE = : AUSTRALIAN BIGHT | \_/- /fSlavevaive MURRAY BASIN ee * EPICENTRE M, > 19) KILOMETERS 100 200 SCALE Fig. 3. South Australian earthquake epicentres for the period 1978 to 1984, in relation to the major geological zones. Dots denote magnitudes in the range M; = 1.9 to 4.4. EARTHQUAKES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 15] Number of events per Skm depth interval a 100 200 depth {km} Focal w 3S km ) a i \ depth | Focal & (no) (bh) CRUSTAL STRUCTURE MODEL (Shackleford and Sutton, 1981) 300 ¥ E SURFACE Vp = §-94 km/s ? CONRAD = 6.42 km/s MOKO Vp = 7.97 km/s SURFACE Vp = 5.95 km/s ? CONRAD Vp = 5-42 km/s MOHO Vp= 7-97 km/s Fig. 4. Focal depth distributions for earthquakes if) (a) Adelaide Geosyncline, and (b) Eyre Peninsula Seismic Zones. To the right of the diagrams are the local crustal velocity functions, established by Shackleford & Sutton (1981). Most foci are confined to the upper crust. The total energy release per 3 km depth interval is obtained by summing the seismic energy E or individual events (Richter 1958): logioE = 9.9 » 19M, ~ 0,024 M,? The result is given in Table 2. The energy distribution in the upper crust is essentially constant, implying a balance between the size (ability fo accumulate stress) and the number of earthquakes. This implies that faulting/fracturing must extend to considerable depth in the South Australian crust. TAuih 2. Semmie Energy Release per 5 kim Depth Interval for South Australian Earthquakes (1978-1983). Depth Interval Total Energy (km) (loules » 10!" Q-5 4.6 5-10 3.2 1-15 2.f 15-20 6.5 W-25 0.9 Recurrence relations A recurrence (frequency-magnitude) relation of the form logygNe =a-b M, is commonly used in statistical studies of seismicity, where N,. is the cumulative number of earthquakes per year for magnitude greater than or equal to My. (Evernden 1970; Bath 1981). The coefficient a is a measure of the relative seismic activity of a region and b is the ratio of the number of small to large earthquakes. The value of b generally lies in the range 0.5 to 1.5. The value of a is dependent on the geographic region and the time scale used. We have computed the recurrence relationships for the entire state as well as for the Geosyncline and Eyre Peninsula seismic zones. There are statistically too few earthquakes in the South-East tegion for a reliable recurrence to be determined. Only data since 1969 were used in the study. The analysis commenced at M; = 1.8 in magnitude intervals of 0.3. The total number of earthquakes was 1094, Data for the whole of the State are strongly biased towards the Geosyncline Zone. EARTHQUAKES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 152 141° 139° [ 435° 137° “ts ‘x FROME 308 EMBAYMENT | 4 Cc a GAWLER CRATON - - o - - - < ' t : I Mt 32" 5 31 , ot Bihics Ur ~ = PORTA 7 = wy vt = : n 2 . Hi o oe) / a af : \ vA F s |= ADELAIDE GEOSYNCLINE .- ¢ uw of 1 “ 4 z es ' a ¢ | a oe / -- , | ‘ Y | ‘ ry ot | q ° ‘ on! 34 ‘ | Sea, ; 7 RENMARK v | PORT rT | LINCOLN | | i ‘ Z | by PINNAROO 7 °| MURRAY BASIN KANGAROO | ISLAND | jae" | a oa oO | Lo vo > MOUNT GAMBIER it] 50 100 (km) L__ Fig. 6. Focal mechanisims for six South Australian earthquakes in relation to major tectonic features. All earthquakes belong to the Geosynclinal Zone. The predominant direction of principal stress (shown by the arrows) is northeast- southwest horizontal compression. The sense of motion is predominantly strike slip on steeply dipping faults. §. A. GREENHALGH, R. SINGH & RK. LE. PARHAM 15 Approximately 73% of cl earthquakes occurred within this Zone. The results of least-squares. fitong of the data are summarized in Table 3. A plot of the recurrence relationship for (he entire State 1s piven in Fig. 5, The regression fit of the 1969-19841 iat is: logy. - 3,89 (+ 0.18) - 0,99 (+ 0,05) M, Linear extrapolation of this relation implies an average return period of 112 years for a magnitude M, = 6 of greater earthquake. In view of the large radits of perceptibility of an earthquake of this size it may be safely assumed that a magnitude M) = 6 earthquake occurring anywhere in the State would have been fell alter 1840. The historical record reveals only three earthquakes of this size— Beachport-Kingston (1897), Warooka (1902), and Musgrave Ranges (1986), wo SOUTH AUSTRALLA SEISMIC ZONE * 1969 —1984 Y © 1959—19R4 |, 4 ; iT T in v = + Historical date ~-- Extropalated o Cc a a 3 £ 2 3 > ea) a tod ‘a x fy. “+ oo —— ee... 3 4 5 6 Magnitude M (SA) Pi 3. Earthquake peeurrence relation for South Ausimiian carthanakes, 9691984 bo. The solid line t5 the regression In of the post-1959 dara, When extrapolated it yields renin periods consisiene with the histerical data for the larger magnitude events, which are also shown. ces Fuult planes solutions Focal mechanisms of six earthquakes occurring in the Adelaide Geosyneline seismic area have been determined from the distribution of P wave first motions (McCue & Sutton 1979; Singh 19853). Fig, 6 shows the fault plane solutions (plotted in lower hemisphere, equal area stereographic projections) in relation lo the muin tectonic features, The sense of motion is mainly strike-slip on steeply dipping faults, The predominant stress appears to be NE-SW horizontal compression, The actual principal stress direction vould vary by up to 45" if pre-existing faults act preferentially as failure planes, which is quite possible for the strongly folded Geosyneline, The present day tectonics of the Australian continent, in terms of seismicity Irends and plate motions, have been discussed by Cleary & Simpson (1971). They sugeested that Australia may be considered as four adjacent crustal plates divided by ancient fracture zones, one of which is the fracture zone associated with the Adelaide Geosyncline—Gulf Graben system, Stewart Mount (1972) developed the model further, postulating a regime of tension throughout the major seismic zone of South Australia. Whilst tension is possible Where a kink occurs in a strike-slip fracture zone, the fault plane solutions show the mechanism to be essentially compressional . Denham e7 a/. (1979, 1981) have reviewed the fault plane solutions for Eastern and Western Australian earthquakes and found horizontal compressive stress to also dominate throughout the rest of the continent. Conclusions The South Australian Seismic Network has grown steadily from its original three stations in 1963 to twelve in 1979, The network provides moniloring down to magnitude M,; ~ 2 for mast of the State. The seismicity map compiled for post-1978 data conlinns the thajor zones recognised in eartiet studies, viz. Adelaide Geosyneline, Eyre Peninsula. and South-East seismic zones, The greatest concentralion occurs in the Flinders Ranges adjacent to the northern end of Spencer Gull, Taps © 4, Recurrence relations for South Australian earthquakes 1969-1984, Revion Constants b Marnitude Range M, a koure State 3.89 + 0.18 0.99 + 0.05 2.4-5.1 Adelaide Geosyneline 3.41 + 0.06 0.92 + 0.02 1.8-3.1 Eyre Peninsula 2.19 + 0.06 0.69 + 0.02 18-42 (54 §. A. GREENHALGH, R. SINGIL & R. T. PARELAM Approximately 80% of earthquakes take place within the upper crust al depths of less than 20 km. Fault plane solutions for six earthquakes occurring in the central portion of the Geosyneline indicate strike-slip motion on steeply dipping faults. The principal stress is north-east-south-west horizontal compression,. Recurrence relations have been established lor the various zones. The b-value ranges fron 0.7 to LU, The average return period for a M, = & varthquake in South Australia is 112 years, though three have occurred in the last 90 years. Acknowledgments The Australian Research Grants Seheme and the Bureau of Mineral Resources have provided financial suppert (owards the cost of establishing and running the sersmograph nelwork., Messrs, R. J. Nation and R. McDougall maintain the stations and perform the tusk of routine earthquake analysis. References Baru, M, (1981) Earthquake magniludesrecent research und current trends, Barth Set Rev. 17, 315-398, Biacktrt, Rev. J. (1907) “Barty History of South Australia”. (Vardon & Sons, Adelaide). Bort, B. A. (1957) The epicentre of the Adelaide earthquake of 1954, March 1. 4 Proc. R, Soc. NSW H), 39-43 (1959) Seismic travel Gimies in Australia, fbid. 91, 64-72. BuLLen, K, E, & Bory, B A. (1956) The South Australian earthquake of 1939, March 26. /bid. 90, 19-28, BURKE GateNey, T. N. (1952) Seismicity of Australia, Thid, 85, 47-52. Cheary, JR. & Simpson DoW. (1971) Seismorectonics of the Australian continent, Nature 2M), 299-24), Drsiiam, D. (1979) Earthquakes map sheet, Garth Science Atlas, 1:10 000 000 series (Bureau of Min. Resources, Canberra), «, ALEXANDER, L. G. & Wororsiert, G. (1979) Stresses in the Australian crust; evidence from earthquakes and in-situ stress measurements, RATR J. Aust. Geol, Geophys, 4, 289-296, - Weekes, J. & Kraystien, C, (1981) Earthquake evidence for compressive siress in the southeass Australian crust. 4 Geol, Soe. Aust. 28, 323-332. Doowetr, G. F (1910) South Australian earthquakes, Report of the Australasian Association for the Advancement af Science 12, 416-423. Doyiw, H. AL & UNverwoon R. (1965) Seismological stations in Australia. duse J Setefice 28. 40-42. EVERINGHAM, TF. B. & Sutron D. J. (1968) Seismicity of the Australian continent. 4 Geol See. Aus! #5, 295-312- EVERSDEN, J, F. (1970) Studies of regional seismicity and associaled problems, Bull, Seis. Sac. Am, 6, 393-446, OREEMMALGH, S. A, & DENHAM D, (1986), The Beltana, South Australia earthquake of December 29, 1983 and aftershocks, 4usr, 4. Barth Seiences (in press). PagHAM, R. T.& Sima. R. (1986). Earthquake monitoring in South Australia, Avs), J Barth Sei, (in press), GuUreNBeRG, Bo& Rictybe, C. B (954) “Seismiely of the Earth und Associuicd Phenomena” (Princeton University Press, Princeton). HowcHin, W. & Greoory, J. W. (1917) “The Geography of South Australia” (Whitcomb & Tombs Lid., Melbourne). Howenim, W (1929) “The Geology of South Australia’ (Gillingham & Co. Lid., Adelaide), KoreGuanr, C. (1956) The Adelaide earthquake of Ist Marel), 954. Trans. Ro Soe. 8S. AWS 59, 177-185, Lepsos, B, (1970) “Geology of the Bellana 1:63,300 map area” (South Australian Depariment of Mines, Adelaide). McCnre, Kk. &. & Sutton, Do. (1979) South Australian Barthquakes during 1976and 1977. 2 Geol. Soe. Aust. 26, 231-236, Mooi, RK, (1967) Earthquakes Jectonaphysicy $, 93-35, Richter, C. P. (M958) “Blementury Seismolony” (Freeman, San Francisco). Suackeiforn, Po & Supe Do t (L981) A) Pirate interpretation of erustal structures in the Adelaide Geosyneting in South Australia using quarry blasts, 7 Geol. Sov Aust. 28, 49)-S00. Srewart, [. C. F (987i) Seismic aetivity in 6u associated with the eastern margin of the Adelside Geosymcline, 7bid. WR, 143-147, (1984) Earthquake risk in South Australia using arenes seismic moment. Aust. JZ Barth Sevences 31, OLS. & Moon ¢. J. (1972) Bartheuake mechanisms ia South Australia io relation to plate leetomes. / Geol. Soc. Aust. 19 41-52. , Strang, A. & Suirow, D. J. 973) South Austrahan seismicity 1967-1971. /bie, 19, dat-d52. sunos, Do & Write R, E. (1968) The seismicity ol South Australia. hid. 08, 25-32. Surtox, DJ, Mecug, Kk. b & BliogtA, A, (977) Seismicily of the Southeast of South Australia. /bid. 25, 357-364, n and fractures, A NEW SPECIES OF TERRESTRIAL MICROHYLID FROG FROM PAPUA NEW GUINEA BY THOMAS C. BURTON & RUPERT STOCKS Summary Copiula pipiens sp. nov. occurs in the Wewak area, on the north coast of Papua new Guinea, 500 km north-west of the known range of its congeners. It is characterized by a relatively long snout, relatively high-pitched call and possession of a ligamentous connexion between the ilium and sacrum. Analysis of its relationships will follow description of other new species. A NEW SPECIES OF TERRESTRIAL MICROHYLID PROG FROM PAPUA NEW GUINEA by THOMAS C, BURTON® & RUPERT STOCKS| Summary Burrow, TC, & Srocks, R. (1986) A new species of lerrestrial mictolylid frog from Papoa New Guinea. Troms. R. Sue: S. Aust. V4), 155-158, 28 November, 1986. Copinla piplens sp, nov, occurs in he Wewak trea, on the north coast of Papua New Guinea, 500 kin north-west of (he kriown range of is congeners. 11 is characterized by a telatively Jone snuur, relatively hinh-pitehed call ancl possession of a ligamentous conresion benween the ilium and sacrum, Analysis of its relationships will follow descriplion Of other new speeies: Kev Worns: frog. micrebylu, Copiuia, new species. morphology, Introduction the microhylid fauna of Papua New Guinea is speciose and diverse, containing over 100 deseribed species in 14 venera (Zweilel & Tyler 1982; Burton 1986). The taxonomic diversity is related to the ecological diversity of the family: Menzies (1975) and Tyler (1976) discuss species which are fossorial, terrestrial, arboreal and aquatic. Copiula Mchely was resurrected from the synonymy of Cophixalus by Menzies & Tyler (1977) fo accommodate three species: C._fistulans, C. minor and C. oxyrhina, characterised by a thick rostral dermal gland which gives a white projecting lip to the snout; premaxillae which possess alary processes which are relatively broad at the base; and Terminal finger-pads which are smaller than the terminal toe-pads. C. fistulans and C. minor are described by Menzies & Tyler as lossorial whereas C. oxprhina is terrestrial, i.e, hiding underground by day, and moying about on the ground by night (Menzies 1975). In March 1983, one of us (R.S.) collected nine specimens of a new Species of Copiula trom the floor of a secondary growth forest at Wirui, neat Wewak, slightly above sea level. The site is more than 300 km north-west of the Known ranges af previously described Copiu/a species, Materials and Methods The specimens reported here are deposited in institutions abbreviated in tne text as follows: Ametiean Museunt of Natural History (AMNH); British Museum (Natural History) (BMNH); South Australian Museum (SAM); University of Papua New Guinea (UPNG). * Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, 1.P:O. Box 498, Adelaide, S- Aust. S001. | PO, Bos 21, Taraka, Papua New Guinea, The following Specimens of Cupinla were examined for comparison with the new species; C. Jistulans Menzies & Tyler AMNH &]}129, 8TI30; SAM R5852, RS879, R6382-3, R9443-9448, R14239-14250, R14497 (holotype); C. miner Menzies & Tyler AMNH 56908 (juy.), 56939-40, 56958, $6960, 56971-2, 36986, 56997-8, 57046-7, 57050-5354; SAM R15245 (paratype); C axyvrhing Boulenger BMNH 1947.2.11.99, 1947.2.12.4 (syntypes); AMNH 59894-59896: UPNG 1371, 2612, 4311, 5204, 3205. Methods of measurement lollow Tyler & Menzies (971) except that the measurement of the length of the hind leg follows Zweite! (1972). Abbre- vistions: S-V, snout-vent length; HW, head width; HL, head length; TL, tibia Jength; 6, eye length; E-N, distance between anterior edge af eye opening and centre of external naris; IN, internarial distance; T, diameter of tympanum; SN, snout length- distance between centre of external naris and tip of snout. Tape recordings of male calls were made in the field using a Sony TC-D5 tape reearder with a Sony BHF 60 cassetle, and analysed subsequently with a Kay Digital Sona-graph Madel 7800. Field temperatures were taken with a tnercury total immersion thermometer. Drawings were made with the aid of a Wild M5 stereo microscope with a vamera lucida attachment. The specimen SAM R29782 was cleared and double-stained for skeletal examination by the alcian blue-afizarin red technique of Dingerkus & Ubler (1977), Copiula pipiens sp, nov. FIGS 1-3 Holotvpe: SAM R29779, an adult male collected at Wirui, 1 kim fram Wewak (3°35'S,143° 35°F) by R. Stocks on 29.11.1983. Definition: Small terrestrial species (males 23.0-24.7 mm: female 27.8 am S-V) characterized by a high- piched call (dominant frequency 4-5 kHe), possession of a ligamentous altachmenr berween 156 CC. BURTON & R, STOCKS Vig. 1A, dorsal and B, literal views of the head of the holotype of Copiula pipiens ap. noy, lium and sacrum, and a relatively long, pointed snout. Description of holotype: Head almost triangular because of protruding snout (Fig 1); longer than broad (HL/HW 1,18); head width less than one- third snout to vent length (HW/S-V 0.31); snout long, culminating in rounded white tip from dorsal aspect; length of snoul much greater than length of eye (SN/E 1,50); distance between eye and naris inuch less than internarial distance (E-N/IN 0.67): nares lateral; eye small; interorbital distance equivalent to more than twice length of eyelid; canthus rostralis well defined and strotyly curved When seen from above; loreal region concave; tympanum small and indistinet (Pig, 1); prepharyngeal ridge single and denticulate; tongue moderately browd, more that '4 free posteriorly, Vocal sac single, medial entry via gaping holes. Hind limbs moderately long (TL/S-V 0.45), Fingers and toes bearing small terminal dises with marginal grooves (Pig, 2); toe dises larger than finger discs. Fingers in order of length 3>4>2>1, toes 4>3>5>2>1 ; subarticular tubercles poorly or uot developed on digits: inner metatarsal tubercle small, oval; outer metatarsal tubercle absent; fingers and toes Unwebbed (Fig. 2). Dorsal and ventral skin smooth; no supratym- panic fold, In preservative dorsal surface mid-brown, darker medially than laterally, uniformly spotted darker brown; tip of snout unpigmented; faint raised midvertebral line from snout to vent; loreal region dark brown with cream blotches; broad, irregular dark brown postocular stripe extends from orbit to beyond scapular region; Tanks light brown mottled wilh dark brown blotches; anterior and posterior surfaces of legs dark brown spotted lighter; undersurface cream, faintly mottled with brown pigment in submandibular region and thigh, pigment becoming more intense towards knee. In lite, ground colour of dorsum pale orange- pink; ventral surfaces creamy-white with brown markings; vent region suffused by orange-pink, Ditnensions of holotype: SN 23.5 mm; HW 7.3 mm: HL 8.6mm; TL 10.5 mm; E 2.3 mm; B-N 1.6 mm; IN 2.4 mm; T 1.3 mm; SN 3.4 mm, Etymology: The specific name refers 1o the high- pitched call of the males of this species. A i QAP I — f] LZ | O, ] hip. 2. A, palinar surface of lett hand and B, plantar surface of left foot of the holotype ot Capiule pipiens sp. no\ V / / / i y a NEW SPECIES OF NEW GUINEA MICROHYLID 157 Variation There are eight paratypes: AMNH 123698 (adult ot), SAM R29780-2 (3 adult oo) (SAM R29782 cleared and stained), UPNG 7205-6 (adult oo) 7207 (gravid 9), 7208 (adult o”), All specimens were collected with the holotype. Much of the skin of the trunks and limbs of four specimens (UPNG 7205, 7207, SAM R29781-2) had been removed for chemical analysis elsewhere before the specimens became available for measurement and close examination, The adult males measure 23.0-24.7 mm S-V, and the single female 27.8 mm S-V. The mean diameter of 2 unpigmented mature ova in the body cavity is 2.3 mm. Hind limbs are moderately long, compared with those of congeners (TL/S-V 0.44-0.49). HL/HW varies from 1.02-1.18 (n=5). SN/E varies from 1.45-1.62. E-N/IN_ ranges 0.67-0.77. In the five intact specimens there was variation in the intensity of mottling of the gular region, between very little (SAM R29780) and strongly mottled (SAM R29779). Similarly, the ground colour of the mid-dorsum varied from mid-brown (SAM. R29779) to deep purplish-brown (UPNG 7206), and the lateral stripe from dark brown (SAM R29779) to almost black (SAM R29780). As the single female had been skinned prior to examination, no comparison of the external morphology of the sexes could be made. 6 - pe Advertisement call The call is a rapid series of high-pitched cheeps, uttered at a rate of approximately 10 notes/sec for a period of up to 20 sec. Most of the acoustic energy is focussed between 4 and 5 kHz (Fig. 3) at 25°C, the attack of each pulse is very sharp, and there is frequency modulation within each pulse. The pulses are somewhat irregular in interval. Calling behaviour: Calls were uttered on the surface of the forest floor, sometimes from under leaves and other forest debris. Calling animals were as little as 1 m apart, and were difficult to distinguish, because when one individual commenced calling, many (if not all) of the other males in the vicinity joined in, and they all stopped calling at about the same time, so that the collector had little time to locate one individual. There was a gap between successive such “choruses” of a few to many minutes. Habitat and distribution The type locality at Wirui is open secondary woodland with large trees and a few shrubs on level ground. It is traversed by a well-worn path, and includes a permanent freshwater pond. C. pipiens was also heard calling, and one was seen, beside a dirt road between Most and Souri, just off the main road between Wewak and Passam, six km south of Wewak (altitude 400 m). This location is 0.2 0.4 0.8 0.6 1.0 sec Fig. 3. Sonagram of part of call of Copiula pipiens sp. nov. recorded at Wirui, 19.05 hr, 29 March 1983, air temperature 35°C. Traces between 2 and 3 kHz are regarded as artefacts, possibly the result of overload during recording. Filter 300 kHz. (58 1,0) KRURTON & RB. STOCKS aguily ona steep hillside jn thick secondary growrh With heavy ground cover trom fallen branches, ferns and other plants, The species is known only from the Wewak district, Comparison with other species (a) Externd! morphology: The smoathiv streamlined bady shape, the relatively leatureless palmar and plantar copolagy, the slightly expanded and grooved dizital discs, broader on the toes than on the fingers, and the prominent, cranstucent, White-lipped snaur are typical of Capii/e, and, in general appearance, € pipiens is diffieul ta distinguish from its congeners, However, it may be distinguished from © fistulas by sive: the minimum recorded S-V length foran adwit male C Jistulans is 284 mm (Menzies & ler, 1977), compared with the maximum length of male C pipiens, SV 247 nim, The female @ pipiens, SV 27,8 mam lies below the minimum recorded for aduli Jemale C fistlans, SV 31 mn, Copixla minor is comparable (0 C. pipieny in size: males 5-V [8.5-24.5 (nin (n = 11), fermales 21.8-23:8 mm (i = 4), bul © atiner and C pipiens differ markedly in proportions: the legs of © minor are shorter, maximum TL/S-V 0,43, ef © pipiens minimum TL/S-V 0.44; the snout of G punar is less elongated (maximum SNvE 1.36, el. & pipiens minimum SN/E 1.45); and the nares are relatively closer in C. ¢ninar (minimum E-N/1N 0,85, cf, © pipiens maximum E-N/IN 0,72), Copiula oxyrhing isa variable species in peed of revision (Burton. ia prep,), and no external character in C. exyrhina js sufficiently consistent to allow confident generalizations. However, che dursa of specimens designated C. axyrhina are less spoued than those of C. pipiens, and the postacular stripe is Usually shorter and narrower, (b) Taternal anatomy: ©. pipiens dilfers trom all Uescribed species ji direel hgamenrous ataclment between the (iui and sacrum, fn the other species the ilia of the Iwe sides are conuceted by a supertivial ligament which overlies the dorsal musculalure, and there js oo direct attachment belween rhe illum and sa¢rum., (ce) Foice: The call of CG pipigas is much highet pitched than ils congeners. The dominant frequencies of the calls of C fistulans and © miner are approximately | KHz, and that of C. wxyrhina is approximately 2 kHz (Menzies & Tyler, 1977). By comparison, the dominant frequency of C pipiens al upproxinmately ihe.xame temperature is 4-5 kHz. Calling behaviour The pattern of calling jn groups, with anmany individuals joimng in, and then all calls ceasing abruptly for some minutes isa form of behaviour we have observed in other microhylid species: Barvgeays flavigularis, Barygenys sp. fov., Coplhitxaliny cheesmanae. ©. variegutus (Wau gall type), Copinla fistulaus, Hvlaphorbus rufescens, Muntophryne lateralis, Oreaphryne hiroi, Phrynomantis sticlogaster and NXenobarrachus Suberaceus, Acknowledgements We wre grateful to Stephen Manboi and his friends from Wirui who assisted in the collection of the type series. Specimens were provided by the following instilulions: Anveriean Museanm of Natural History (R. G. Zweilel); British Musetuit (Natural History) (B, Clark); South Australian Museum (M, J. Tyler), Universily of Papua New Gunier Gl Pernetla), Ro G. Zweilel actively encouraged the project, and provided taps and additional data to support the specimens he sent. M.. J. Tyler prepared (he sonawram und critically read (he manuscript and M. Davies supervised the preparation of the drawings, M, J. Lirtejotn and P Harrison assisted in the interpretation of the sonagram, The referees made useful and cons(ruchve comments for which we are gratefil, This Work With underluken whilsc TC.B. was a Visiting Research Fellow in the Department of Zoology, Universily of Adelaide. References Biikvon VC) (RGF A reassessment of [he Papuan subfaniily Asterophryinde (Anura: Mienthylidae). ee. S Aust Was, (i press). Bisiekus, G. & Wai ek, LD: (1977) Linayme clearing of weian blue stajned whole small vertebrates fer demongrration of carfilage, Siain Technology 52, 229,242. Minvies J. 1, (975) Handbook af Common New Guinea Frogs, Wau Eeolopy Tnstinute, Handbook No. 1, Wan, Mensibs J. be de Tai ROM. (1977) The sysrenianies ane adapmanors Ol soine Papuan microhylid frees which live underbraiind, .. Aoal. 183, 431-464. TYirR M.1L 976) Drogs. tCotlins, Sydney, London), & Mbrntits 1. 7, (971) A new &pevics of microliyid frag of (ie genus Spferuphrine (rom Mile Bay, Papua. THiris. Ro Sue: S. Anan 95, 79-83. AWHFET, R. && (1972) Resulrs ef the Archbold Eepedinaris 97, A revision of rte (raps of the subfanvily Astcnophryinae family Mikrohylidae, Aull ne Adis Natu, tsi taR, 44\-s4a. ~& Tyite, Mo (1082) Ainphibia of New Guineu, In J. A, Giressint (Add) “Biogeography and Eeology of New Ouinea" Movauvriphive Brolagicae 42, TSO-80f, IW. Junk, The Hieue Boston, Lencon), THE EFFECTS OF COOLING WATER DISCHARGE ON THE INTERTIDAL FAUNA IN THE PORT RIVER ESTUARY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY I. M. THOMAS, R. C. AINSLIE, D. A. JOHNSTON, E. W. OFFLER & P. A. ZED Summary The fauna of the intertidal mudflats of the Port River estuary has been monitored between 1972 and 1985. As a consequence of the increase in volume and temperature of warm water discharge from the Torrens Island Power Station, changes have occurred in the intertidal communities. Near the warm water discharge populations of several bivalve mollusc and worm species have been reduced or eliminated and previously rare or absent worm species have become abundant. THE EFFECTS OF COOLING WATER DISCHARGE ON THE INTERTIDAL FAUNA IN THE PORT RIVER ESTUARY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA by L. M. THOMAS*, R. C. AINSLIET, DD A. JOHNSTON}, E, W, OFrLeryt & P. A. ZED] Sunimary Thomas, 1 M., Aussiir, RoC), Jorssion, D. A. OFFER, E,W. & Zeb, PA, (1986) Phe effects of cooling water discharge of the intertidal fauna in the Port River Estuary, South Australia. Trvas. RL Sae. §. Aust. (10(4), 159-172, 28 November, LOK6. The fauna of the intertidal mudflats of the Port River estuary has been monitored between 1972 ang 1985, Asa consequence of the increase fy volume and femperarure of warn water discharge from the Jurrens Island Power Stalion, changes bave ovcurred jn Che intertidal communities. Near the warm Water discharge populations of several bivalve molluse and Worm species have been reduced or climinated and previously rdre Or absent Worm species have became abundant. Changes in numbers and variety of species have been revorded throughout Angas Inlet and (hese changes. have encroached some way into the adjoining southerp reales oF Barker Inlet and che eastern end of North Arm. Introduction Various interudal and shallow littoral environ- ments cam be recognised in the South Australian Gulfs. These are based on coastal topagraphy and associated variations in energy of the wave action (Womersley & Thomas 1976), One environment, typical of (he low wave energy regions of the Gulf St Vincent, north of Port Adelaide, is the extensive muddy intertidal flats bucked by mangrove wood- land and samphire. Studies have been made on the Subndal fauna of such coastlines in upper Spencer Gulf (Shepherd 1983; Ward & Young 1982, 1983), however except for listings of conspicuous species (Womersley & Edmonds 1958; Butler er a/.') Butler et al. 1977) no detailed information has been available on the fauna of the muddy intertidal shores of Gull Src Vincent. A number of overseas reviews have documented the effects of warm water discharges [rom power stations on sublittoral benthic fauna (Courant & Talmage 1975, Talmage & Coutant 1980; Craven ef al. 1983; Langlord 1983). Effects yary from site to sile as a function of the elimatic, hydrological and biological features of the sites (Crema & Pagliai 1980). Generally ereatest effects on subtidal fauna are observed very near the oultalls and particularly during the hotiest times of the year (Langlord 1983), * (Deceased) South Ausivalian Museum. North Terrace, Adelaide, S. Aust, SUOD. | Elcetrieity Trust of South Australia, PO Bon 6, Eastwood S. Aust, S063 | Deparinvernt of Education, South Australia. ‘Rotter, AL 4, Depers, A. M., MeKillup, $ Co & Thonias, D. P (1975) The Conservation of Margrave Swamps ijn South Austraha. Reporte to the Nafire Conservation Society of South Australia (Unpublished) The effects include a significant reduction in numbers of species within the influence of the warm water plume (Wariner & Brehmer 1966; Thorhaug eral. 1978) with, in some cases, the establishment of dense populations of a few thermally tolerant species (Bamber & Spencer 1984), There is a lack of similar information of the influence of warm water outfalls on intertidal mudflat fauna (GESAMP 1984). This paper deseribes a monitoring programme conducted between 1972 and 1945 to establish long rerm patterns of faunal distribution of the intertidal mudflats of the Port River estuary. Ir describes changes associated with changing water tempera- tures resulling trom (he incremental development of the caaling water (CW) system of Torrens Island Power Stauion. Materials and Methods The stud) area The Port River estuary is aw sheltered waler complex of mudflars, mangroves and samphire marshes dissected by narrow channels with only a small and intermittent inflow of fresh water (Fig. 1). Torrens [sland Power Station commenced operating in 1967. If takes in cooling water fram the channel floor near the Port River, North Arm junction and discharges warm waler al the surface in western Angas Inlet. Average ambient summer (intake) temperature in the estuary is about 25°C (Roberison 1971; Neverauskas & Burler 1982). By 1972 Torrens Island Power Station, A Section, was discharging 1,9 % 10° m'vday of sea water at €&-7°C above intake temiperature, Since then there have been increases in the volume of warm water discharged as a [further four B Seetion units have became Gperational. 160 I. M. THOMAS ET AL. 3, 138 E SOUTH AUSTRALIA AQUATIC RESERVE \ TO GULF ST VINCENT TO GULF T VINCENT SOUTHERN OCEAN LeFEVRE TORRENS BARKER PENINSULA ISLAND INLET POWER STATION =2T - TRANSECT : G) GARDEN (®) - No. oF sites (3) ISLAND —t EASTEAN PASSAGE Fig. 1. Transect locations in the Port Adelaide estuary. THERMAL BFRECTS ON INTERRIIDAL FAUNA 16) Presenily B Section discharges an additional 3.0..108 m/day of warmed warer 10 Angas Lnlet at 9-10°C above ambient temperature, Water fenmperalure A hall hourly reeord of intake temperatures at the junction of the North Arm and the Port River was thaintalned and a similar record was niade of warmed effluent water from the power slation, From 1979 a record of temperacures at half hourly intervals was made with a thermistor suspended from a buy 30¢m below the surface in Angas. Inlet (Fig. 1). A conhnuous record was also made of shade air temperatures at Torrens Island. Average Weekly temperatures were abstracted from these records, A senes of temperature surveys was carried out during hot summer weather in March 1972, February 1979 and January 1982 to define distribution of Warimed Water through the estuary for both dodge (Bye 1976) and spring tides, Each survey involved from three to five circumnavigations of ‘Torrens Island with surface temperatures recorded at 28 stations spaced throughout the esiuary. By recording several times a day at each lovation it was possible to graph the results with time and tide to Obtain a representation of simul- laneous temperatures throughout the estuary. On 4.0.1984 a digital image of the distribution of the warm surface water from the Torrens [stand Power Station was obtained at 9.00 a.m. on a falling tide, ‘The image was produced by Hunting scanning equipment! operated (rom a Lear Jet at an altilude of 3 km. Intertidal fauna Sampling methods were based on those of Zed*, so that data comparable to this first study of the intertidal fauna in this region could be obtaitied. This involved sampling ona series of transects established on the main branches of the estuary at varying distances from the warm water discharge of the power station In 1972 (Zed*) and 1977 five Lransects Were examined. Subsequently five further transects were established (Pig. 1). Each transect extended avross the intertidal ojudflat from 10 m seaward af the mangrove fringe to the low water mark (LWM). On each transect stations were established at 10m intervals numbered trom the mangrove fringe (e.g. for transect 1, stations 1.1, 1.2, 1.3.,,. ele), Number of stations per transect depended on the width of the intertidal mud fat at > Zed. PA, (1972) The Effect of Warn Water from che ‘torens Island Power Station on the Marine Fauna of Angas lilet. BSv. (Fons) Thesis, Zoology Department. University of Adelaide, (Unpublished). low fide, ranging from 4 on transects 3 and 7? ta 9 on transect 8. At each Station, on each sampling aveasion, four samples of surface area 0.03 m2, depth 10 em, were collecied on a line perpendicular to the transect, These samples were combined. All animals retained on 1mm mesh sieves were Counted and sorted, Far all bur the first two surveys (1972 and 1977) all specimens were preserved, polychaeies in 10% formalin and orher animals in glyeerolwater: ethanol (5:35:70) viv), For each survey, using averaged station data, the Bray-Curtis measure was used to produce similarity matrix for the transect faunas, afier root- rool transformation of the data (Swarty 1978; Meld et al. 1982). Sediments In March 1982 sediment samples were collected in the same manner as thre intertidal Fauna samples from a total of 49 stations for all transeuts (Fig. 1) and passed through a series oF calibrated sieves to determine weights, expressed as a percentage of total sample weight of yarious sediment grades, The sediment grades corresponded te Wentworth size classes (Folk 1968) with the modification that the largest grade discriminated was course sand (including all material coarser than 1.25) and the finest sediment grade discriminated was sill (3.75) Graphic Means (Mz, Folk 196%) were dererniined for the samples. The Bray-Curtis dissimilarity measure (Swartz 1978; Field e? af 1982) was used to classify the samples into groups accanling to similarities based on the perventage contribution particular sedimen| grades make to the rotal weight of the various samples (Miedecke & Stephenson 1977). Results Temperature Temperature records for summer seasons for 1972, 1977, 1983 and 1985 are given on Fig. 2. Allowing for differences in weather belweert years (aic temperature, Fie. 2) similar ranges af summer ambient water temperatures have been observed for the years 1972, 1977-83 and 1985, Torrens Island B Section discharges waler at a higher temperature than A Section, therefore peak suouner discharge temperatures since 1978 are higher than those of 1972 and 1977 when only A Section was discharging (Fig. 2). Temperatures recorded at the Angas Inlet buoy since 1979 tend to follow discharge teniperdtures, beirig about 2-4°C lower, due to mixing with cooler tidal waler. Very neac the discharge lo Angas Intel the maximum temperature increase above ambieurl water temperature is determined by a juinber of 162 I. M. THOMAS ET AL. +---*-" DISCHARGE TEMP ANGAS INLET TEMP -----CW INTAKE TEMP AIR TEMP gg § DEGRELS ©” 2B —— os JANUARY 12 — JANUARY 25 \382 > So w on ow J c° 25 rr) tu 20) ra G15 w 2 40 cS] Jan Feb Mar dan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar dan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar Jan Feb Mar 1972 1977 1978 1979 1960 1981 1982 19B3 1985 Fig. 2. Weekly average temperature data for ambient, Angas Inlet, and cooling water (CW) outfalls, for January-March of 1972, 1977-1983, and 1985. Inset: Typical short term summer extremes (January 1982). Note: 1972 plots show “A” stauion discharge temperatures, 1977-1985 shows “B” station discharge temperatures. ~ Date Ambient(Port River)°C Max AirTemp°C Symbol Av, 19429 - 3-72 21:5 220 aioe ~ pos 7752-79 24.4 39:3 — 22 -2-79 26-3 39:0 20-14-82 39.0 a4:0 a C ABOVE AMBIENT 1 2 5 Angas Inlet Barker Inlet Outfall Volume 1972- 19 nyez 3 (million M°/day) 1979+ 29 y-V Transect¥ — 1982- 3.9 North*Arm > DISTANCE FROM OUTFALL (Km) Fig. 3, Gradients of above-ambient temperatures from the CW outfalls to more remote regions of the Port River “estuary” for selected days in 1972, 1979 and 1982. factors such as load on the power station units and wider area (Fig. 3), Further, during dodge tides local meteorological conditions (wind speed and — when there is little tidal dilution of the discharge direction), With progressive increase in the volume — water, warm water tends to bank up through Angas of warm water discharged to Angas Inlet, above- Inlet. Temperatures of up to 40°C have been ambient water temperatures are measured over a recorded in Angas Inlet with the power station THERMAL EFFECTS ON INTERTIDAL FAUNA 163 discharging from all units in hot weather on days of little tidal movement (Fig. 2 inset). The digital unage of the warm surface water distribunon in February 1984 (Fig. 4) shows the major influence of the discharge extending throughout Angas Inlet to southern Barker Inlet and eastern North Arm, There ls some recirculation of warmed surface water around Garden Island to the Port River and also incursion to Lhe southern region of Barker Inlet (see also Fig. 3, 1982 spring tide). This influence is not observed at the deeper power station intakes, Intertidal fauna A total of 120 species were recorded. Polychaetes were the most numerous (40 species), including several new records for southern Australia, followed by crustaceans (37), gastropod molluscs (19), bivalve molluses (13), and 11 species from various other taxa (Appendix 1). Fig. § shows (he dendrograms of classification of transects by faunal homogencity for 1972, 1977 and the summer surveys of 1981, 1982, 1983 and 1985, Species characteristic of the identified groups Fig. A. Theetial jrnaye al surface water distribution on a falling cide in the Part River estuary, February 1984 tOWin 24.406, CWoat 33.4°C. Anvas Tiler 286°C). the pale area in Angas Inlet, ground Garden Islancl, and railing into North Arm shows the distributlon of Ihe Warm surice plume, of faunas are shown in Fig, 5, with their percentage contribution to the total population sampled on the transects of the group. There have been some dilfieulties in proceeding with the Bray-Curtis analysis, In retrospect the decision to continue the sampling design adopted by Zed* caused some problems in analysing the data, as numbers of stations were not consistent between transects. However, as the faunal homogeneity analysis depends on the “percent each species contributes to the total number of individuals collected", rather than absolute numbers (Swartz 1978), we contend that this approach fairly describes the significun! changes in faunal patterns in the estuary. Consistent patterns within the long term data support this contention, For the !972 and 1977 surveys, identifications of some polychaete species were uncertain and, with the exception of the cirratulid Cirriformia punctata, and the large tube dwelling species Chaelopterus variopedatus and Diopatra dentata, specimens. were listed as “polychaete sp 1", “polychaete sp 2”, cte. Because of the taxonomic uncertainties and the absence of preserved specimens from these two surveys, these unidentified polychaetes were lumped rogether for the Bray-Curtis analysis. Reference to the original data (Zed?) and to subsequent work, suggests thal lransects most remote from the outfall {transects 4 and-&) do not share the same unidenti- fied polychaetes as the transects closer to the outfall (namely transects 1, 2 and 3). Grouping of transects on the dezidrograms based on lumped polychaetes should therefore give a conservative picture of faunal homogeneity relationships, with differences between transects under, rather than over- emphasised. The 1972 dendrogram showed three main groups of transects with respect to their faunal homo- geneity (Fig. 5). The fauna of transeet | directly opposite the thermal outfall was dominated by C puaciala which comprised 86% of all organisms found on this transect (Fig. 5a). A few “other polychaetes” and low numbers of one species of bivalve, Tellina deltoidalis were also: tound on this transect. On transects Further from the outfall (2 and 3) low numbers of CG purtctata were found with the community dominated by “other polychaetes”, T. deltoidalis (25%), and the gastropod Nassurius hurchardi (Fig. Sa). Although transect ! and transects 2 and 3 share some species (namely C punctata and T. delloidalis) the difference in relative contributions which these species make to ihe communities of each transect results in transect | clearly separating from transecis 2 and 3 on the dendrogram. No C purtclata were found io the communities most remote from the qutfall (transects 4 and 8, Fig. Ll), Although “other paly I. M. THOMAS ET AL, 164 1 (a)1972 i fs) z > E45 rs < 2 = 7 @ Qa Oo TRANSECT> 1 2 3°44 «8B vA ve vA C. punctata 86 11-6 on D dentata 2 12 4 = ‘polychaetes 11 58 77 X, inconstans 77 |, Crebrelamellatus 2-2 8 T. deltoidalis 2 25 66 3 3 L. recta 22 = N. burchardi 34 (c)FEBRUARY 1981 in 1 z > E iv az ‘5 2 2 oO # a 1] TRANSECT > 1 2 3 4 6 5 8 7 1 % th C.punctata 17 86 2 Pseudopolydora sp 5 = N. grubei australis 5 44 N. australiensis 1 X. inconstans 51# av |. crebrelameliatus 21 3 8 T. deltoidalis 2 2K scalarina&K peroni 1 = . Sfragilis 17-5 41 N. pauperata 29 Sjuvenile specimens 1 (b)1977 DISSIMILARITY INDEX a a th % C. punctata 98 13 Ca E be D. dentata 3-8 1 = ‘polychaetes 1-5 103 246 X, inconstans 42 |, Crebrelamellatus 27-8 3 —_—‘T. deltoidalis 69 1 é 3 B paivae 28 N. burchardi 29 (d)MARCH 1982 1 Es 4 | = a Q ° 0 14 3 2 6 5,8 7 0 9 — — —_—————” % ts vA C, punctata 83 Pseudopolydora snp 96 at grubei australis 5 oN. australiensis 5:3 = S. cylindriter 56 N. vaalii 2:7 X inconstans 15 50 |.crebrelamellatus 6-7 11-2 $ ; s T. deltoidalis 2 3 o K. i i = peron 15 N. pauperata 1 S,_ fragilis 1 A albocincta 8-2 2 i THERMAL EFFECTS ON INTERTIDAL FAUNA x wos (e)MARCH 1983 od (QMARCH 1985 z a = 2 > = E a ‘5 5 = = = = " a 2) wo a 0 BD oO TRANSECTe. 1 2 4 3 7 6 5 8B 7 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 § 10 —S—S——_—_ Ss Ls 4 % % % % h % C. punctata 75 13 C, punctata 5:5 74:2 Pseudopolydora sp 97 2 Pseudopolydora sn 6 2 N. grubei sustralis 23 a8 2 Ngrubei australis \ 305 o N. australiensis 8 N. australiensis 72 E 8 S. cylindriter 27 aS evlindriter 1-4 29-2 N. vaalii 3 E N. vaalil 2 = B. lepte 3 2 S. gracilis 32 X. inconstans 6:2 6-8 28 C capitata 22 8 |. crebrelameliatus 5:9 9 Terebellinae 14 a £ T. deltoidalis 6 X.inconstans 18 3-5 30:4 K. peroni |. crebrelamellatus 74 o4 ov 8 A. albocincta 75 $$ — T, deltoidalis 6-7 a a = z 3 S. fragilis “ = a N. trigonella 4 N. burchardi 16 A. albocincta 36 165 lAnemone | a Fig. 5. Dendrograms of transect faunal homogeneity, for surveys ol 1972, 1977 and the summers of 1982-83 and 1985. The figure also lists all species which contribute >1% to total number of individuals sampled on each o} the subjectively indentified groups of transects for each survey. chaetes” contributed a small percentage to the communities of these transects, their faunas were primarily distinguished by the large numerical contribution of Xenosirvbus inconstans (77%) and other bivalve molluses (Fig.. Sa). In 1977, with an additional 1x10 m4/d of warmed water discharging to Angas Inlet, faunas of both transects | and 2 were characterised by the very large numbers of C. punctata previously found only on transect 1, These two transects therefore formed a distinct group on the 1977 dendrogram. (Fig, 5b), Low numbers of C. punctata were present on transect 3 (where they had already been recorded in 1972) but also on transect 4 (where they were not recorded in 1972). These two transects (3 and 4) formed the second, intermediate group on the dendrogram, their faunas also being characterised by the bivalve 7e//ina deltoidalis and other shared polychaetes (Fig. 5b). The faunas of transect 8 and the new Lransect 6 were both distinguished by the varied bivalve and polychaete species which had characterised transect 8 in 1972 (Fig. 5b). The summer of 1980-81 was the first full summer with the addition of a further unit (0.5 « 10° m3/d) discharging to Angas Inlet. From 1980 all polychaetes were identified and numbers of every species were considered in the Bray-Curtis analysis. Faunas of transects | and 4 all grouped together on the dendrogram (Fig. 5c). A major contributor to the grouping of transects 1 to 4 was, again, C. 166 1, M. THOMAS ET dal. punctala, comprising 63% of the total number of polychactes found on this group OF transects. Two other polychaete species, namely the orbiniid Naineris grubei australis and the spionid Pseudopolydora sp. were identified in the taunas of this group, each contributing about 20% ro the total number of palychaetes. 11 is possible that these Iwo species are the unidentified polychaetes found in association With Jarge C) punciata numbers in the previous surveys. Unexpectedly, another voniributor to the grouping of the faunas of transects | to 4 was the mud mussel Xenus/robus inconsians which occurred in each of these transects, comprising $1% of all organisms of this group, This mussel had been dominant in North Arm and Barker Inlet, bul had not been common in Angas Inlet before 1980-81. All specimens were juvenile and subsequent surveys revealed that the species did not persist in the Infet. A settlement of another molluse the gastropod Salinatur Jragilis alsa contributed to the faunal homogeneity of transects L to 4, and to the high molluse to polychaete ratio found for these Angas Inlet transects Int this Survey compared to all other surveys reported here In 198) C. punctata was found lor the first time in large numbers on transect 6, It was also abundant on the new transect 5 in southern Barker Inlet (Pig, 1), The faunas of these twa transects formed the intermediate group on the dendrogram (Fig. 5¢), alsa characterised by a second worm species, N, grubed australis, and a bivalve mollusc, /rus crebrelamellauss. Faunas of transects 7 ro 10, forming the third group on the dendrogram, were again characterised by the varied bivalve molluse populations. On this group of transects the polychaete to molluse ratio was low, The most abundant worm, Nepiips australiensis, comprised only 1% of the total number of organisms (Fig. Sc). Low numbers of ather worm species including Seoloples evilndrifar and Neanthes vaalii were also identifled in the faunas of this proup af transects. Following the 1981-82 summer, the first full summer With all four units of B Section operating (Fig. 3), a Further change was noted it the faunal distribution around the esttiary, Again the faunas of transects 1-4 grouped on the dendrogram (Fig. 5d). Llowever the previously abundant C. purctata had virtually disappeared from the faunas of these transects and the sptonid Pseudo polydera sp, which had been identilied in low numbers in the 198] survey, dominated the faunas of this group of transects, comprising 86% of all organisms found (Fig. Sd). © punctata remained the predominant organism in the faunas of transects Sand 6, which again formed an intermediate group on the dendrogram (Fig. Sd). The group of faunas OF transects 7 to 10 continued to be charactertwed by the bivalve and worm species previously identified [rom areas more remote from the oul falls (Fig, 5d), Although the volumes and temperatures of the thermal discharge underwent no further increase following the 1982 summer, surveys were continued to determine whether the 1982 dendrogram represented a stable biological state, The 1983 dendrogram closely resembled that for the previous survey With continued spionid dominance of the Angits Inlet transects, and transects 7, 9 and 10 having faunas with large bivalve populations and numbers of those worms which had previously been identified as characteristic of regions remote from the outfall (Fig. Sc), The mast notable change in the dendrograni was the tendency for the fauna of transect § to group more closely with those of the cirratulid dominated faunas of transeets 5 and 6, rather than with those of transects 7, 9 and 10. This was due to a combinition of factors including an increase in numbers of C. punctata on transect 8, and an increase in numbers of 1. crebreluméelatus and_¥, jnconstans on transects 5 and 6, Two years later, in Marclt 1985 the rranseer faunas demon- strated virtually the same homogencity relationship (Fig, 51), The dominant species in each of the major groups of transects remained the same (Fig. Sf) although on transects in Angas tnlet (1-4) some worm Species (Capitella capitata, Svllis gracilis and C, punctata) Were present im greater numbers than in T9R3, For the samples trom 198) until 1985, when all species were identified, it was possible to record total species number at each iransect. The mean number of species per square metre for the various groups 2 ~ ACI & 2 Mac's) @ 7.ne8Hn ’ Mar, 83 7,410 Mar 'n2 Te, 3048 trangec| group * od a] Fig. 6. Relationship bemween number of species/m* and transect wtoup for the surveys of 1981 83 and 1985, AU species were identified ut these surveys THERMAL EFFECTS ON INTERTIDAL FAUNA lf? OS INDEX z & 8 DISSIMILARITY 2 44°45 12 24 Bd SH 87 13 22 92 & 62 63 23 25 27 45 42 43 44 89 52 55 336 7Ao9S G4 26 82 85 B6 73 93 101 102 4 72 54 10832 34 H 41 MH B83 51 54 BG SITE hig, 7. Dendrogram of classification of Port Adelaide “esiuary™ sites by sediment grades. of transects identified in the 1981-85 surveys is shown in Fig. 6. While all groups of transects had occasional or rare species in. addition to the core of more common species (Fig, Sa-f), the total number of species in a given group of transects was consistently higher in groups more remote from the thermal outfall (Fig. 6). Sediments Of 49 sediment samples over half (26) were niediuii sand (MZ, 1-2 @), 16 were fine sands (MZ, 2-3 ») and seven were coarse sands (MZ 0-1 ¢), Fig. 7 gives the hierarchical classification of the sediments from all sites sampled. Although in a few cases similarities were observed between samples from the same transect (eg. samples 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 were all coarse sand, and samples from 4.1, 4.2 and 4.5 were all fine sand) overall there was no obvious topographical coherence in the clusters on Fig. 7, and na correlation between sediment and type of infauna. Discussion Although a number of overseas studies have documented the effects of thermal discharge on sublittoral benthic fauna, comparatively little information is availabl2 on intertidal fauna. Barnet (1971) investigated the effect of thermal discharge from Hunterston Power Station, Scotland, on selected intertidal sand animals, finding only subtle changes in breeding season and growth rates of a bivalve, Telling tenuis, and an amphipod Urothoe brevicornis, Barnett and subsequent authors (Bamber & Spencer 1984) attibuted the small effects to the tact that the intertidal animals in cool temperate regions are adapted to a greater natural temperature range than thar characteristic of the thermal effluents in these regions. Few published Australian studies are available with which to compare the present results. Powis & Robinson (1980) examined the subtidal benthic macrofaunal communities in the Tuggerah Lakes. The Munmorah Power Station discharges water to this estuarine lake system at up to 4°C above ambient, These authors report that the only apparent influence of the warmed water was. an increase in numbers of the gastropod mollusc belacumantus australis, very near the outfall. Rainer & Fitzhardinge (1981) examined both intertidal and subtidal benthic communities of Port Hacking. While species distribution was limited by fluctuations in dissolved oxygen levels there was little evidence that natural short term temperature extremes, over the shallow sand flats, influenced species distribution. Saenger er a/ (1980) examined the macrobenthos of the Calhope River and Auckland Creek, Queensland, to obtain comprehensive prethermal baseline data pnor to the establishment of the Gladstone Power Station. To date published post thermal information includes a localised study of the macrobenthos of the discharge canal of this power station. Saenger e7 a/ (1982) suggest that the major changes in the benthic fauna in this localised region can be more closely correlated with changes in flow rates, and ultimately with resulting sediment changes, than with temperature effects. This study documents a pattern of change in the distribution of intertidal mudflats in response to changing environmental condiuons. In 1972, near the Torrens Island Power Station cooling water Ins 1M, TROMAS ET .ae, chibcharge to Angas Inlet, the |nrertidal communities iad a localised predominance of the cirratulid worm, Cirriformia punciata, and a comparative paucity of bivalve molluses, Between 1972 and i981 the distribution of Co punctate extended throughout Angas Inlel to the adjacent reaches of Barker Lilet and North Arm, while there was also 2 suppression al hivalve molluse species over the same ranpe, Since the summer of 1981-82 C. punctara bas been replaced as the predamitant species in Angas inlet by Psevdopilvdore sp, a spionid which previously contributed only a sinall percentage ta the population in this: region. © punctauw predominance tas been restricted mainly to the region Ol transects 5 and 6 in Barker Inlet and North Arm (Fig, tb The pattern of ehange closely correspands to changes observed i) studies af estuarine ecosystems subjected to organic pollution. Gray (1976a) and Parker (F980) have noled declines in populations af bivalve molluse species in the fauna of polluted estuaries, Grassle & Grassle (1974) arid Gray (1976b, 1980) identify Various groups of organisms which, because of their life history characteristics, respond rapidly to environmental perturbations ard colonise disturbed regions, Spionid worms, Which presently dominate the fauna of Angas Inlet are amongst the most opportunistic colonising species. Other species presently found in Angas Inlet, the syllid and capitellld worms, are alsa considered higtity opporiunistic (Grassle & Grassle 1974). Prior to this study © punctata had only beet recorded at Lizard Island, Qld (P. Hutchings L980, pers. comm.) Angas Inlet is a bout harbour, mooring yachts from around Australia. We have reeorded C. punclote in the fouling fauna of solid substrates in Angas trilet, as well as in the intertidal zone. It is (herefore possible that this species was introduced to the warm waters of Angas Inlet in the fouling fauna on the hull ofa visiting yachr, (Note Chut tnother tropical species, the Sycopho- inedusan Cassropea ndrosia, previously known from Piji, New Caledonia and North Queensland (Kramp 1961, 1965) has also been fotind In Angas Inlet (Southeott 1982)), Little is known of the life history of C punclara, bul George (19644, b) has detailed the life history of a related species, CG renraculeni, indicating a wide temperature tolerance in its breeding season, and vhe capabilicy of rapid, massive population bursts. These characreristics, also associated with the recognised opportunistic species above (Grassle & Grassle 1974), probably enabled this tropical species ta colonise Angas Inlet When the natural populations of intertidal fawia were disturbed by the development of the power satin. However, 2 punetata has pot persisted as the dominant species in Angas Inlet since 1882. ft seems likely that the restriction of €. punciuia te areas just oulside Angas Inlet where maximum summer temperatiires are about 30°C (Fig, 3) is due Simply ta the temperature tolerance of this species, as it has been recorded adjacent to the outfall in higher ltemperatires. The sudden and drastic reduction in numbers of CQ punctalw in the warmest regions Of Angas Inlet since March 1982 may be explained rather by the competitive advantage of the more highly opportunistic Pseudopelydorasp,, ip, a disturbed enviranment where biological interactions may be more exayeerated (Grassle & Sanders 1973), Conclusion The progressive increase in thermal discharge fram Torrens Island Power Station over the period 1972-985 has lead 16 recognisable changes in the falure, abundance, and distribution of inrertidal invertebrates in adjavent reaches of Port River estuary. In particular bivalve molluse and worm species Characteristic of tindisturbed regions of {he estuary, bave declined in population in the warmest regions of Angas Inlet, They have been lareely replaced by opportunistic worm species, initially the tropical cirralulid Cirrifarmia purcrata, and more recently the spionid Psevdopalydori spy. C pliriclare 4ls0 predominates in southern Barker Inlet and eastern North Arm where significant changes have occurred in the thermal regime. The pattern of changes recorded in the estuary closely resemble changes noted in Overseas studies of disturbed estuarine regions, Ackoowledyments This work was funded and supporied by The Electricity Trust as part of ily ongoing programme of environmental research. We thank Dr Michael Geddes for reviewing the inanuseript. We are gratetul to those whe ideitified organisms, especially Dr F. Hutchings (polychaetes} and Mr W. Zeidler (amphipods). We are alse prateful to che South Australian Museuni lor access to their reference collections, and to numerous students of the Zooloey Departorent, University of Adelaide who helped with sample collection ovet the Jast decade, We weknowledge the South Australian Centre for Remote Seusing for the produciion and supply of Fig. 4. THERMAL, EFFECTS ON INTERTIDAL PAUNA 169 References Ramark, R, N. & Spencer, J. (1984) The benthos of a coastal power station thermal discharge canal. Mar. Biol, Assoc. UK. 64, 603-623, Baknerr, P. RO. (1971) Some changes in intertidal sand communilies due ta thermal pelluuion. Proc. R. Sue, Lond, R177, 453-364. Boicek, At, Derers, A, M., Mekirtup, SC. & Ciiomas, BD. PB, (1977) Distribution and sediments of Inaurove foresis in South Austialia. Vrans. R. Soe, 3. Alést, WA), 35-44. Bye, J, A. T. (1976) Physical Oceanography of Gull St Vincent and Inyestigator Strail jn C. R. Twidale, MJ Tyler & B. P. Webb (Eds) “Natural History of the Adelaide Region’ (Royal Society al South Australia, Adelaide). Courant, €. C. & Tatmacte, S. S. (1975) Therma) effects. Water Poll, Contrat Fed. 47(6), 1657-1711. Crain, | By Harrecson, M. E. & Tatmace, 5. 5 (1983) Thermal effects. [fid, 55(6), 787-500. Crema, R.& Pactra, Ay M. B, (1980) The structure of benthic communities man area of |hermal discharge ron) a coastal power station. Mur Pollut. Bull VW, 221-224, Pino, 1G. Chark, KOR, & Warwick, R.M. (1982) 4 prictical suategy for analysing multispecies distriburion patterns. Mar Ecol Prog, Ser, 8, 37-32. Trik, R. L. (1968) ‘Petrology of Sedimentary Rocks’ (Heniphill, Tesas). Giokal, LD. (96da) The life history of the eirrarulial worn Cirriformia fearaculata on an intertidal mudtiat, A. Mar. Biol. Assoc, UK. $4, 47-65, (19646) On some environmental factors affecting the distribution of Cirrifarmia fentuculara (Polychaeta) wt Hamble shi 44, 373-388. GESAMP (1984) IMO/FAQ/UNESCO/ WMOQ/ WHO/ JABAZUN/UNEP Joint Group ol Experts om the Scientific Aspects of Marine Pollution, Thermal Discharzes jv the Marine Environment. Rep. Styd. GESAMP, 24. Grassy, LB & Sanpers, H. 1. (1973) Lile histories antl the role of disturbance. Deep-Sea Res. 20, 643-659. & GRAsste, J. Po (1974) Opporrunistic life histories ad genetic systems in marine benthic poly- chacies, J. Mar Res. 32(2), 263-284, Gray, JS. (1976a) The fauna of the polluted River Tees Estuary. Estuary Ceasr. Mar Sci, 1, 203-223. (19766) Are marine baseline surveys worthwhile? New Scieatist April 1976, 219-221. (1980) Why do evological monitoring? Mar Pol). Ail, VA, 62-65. Kame, PL. (1961) Synopsis of the medusae of the wold. L Mar Biol Assoc Uk, 40, 1-469. (165) Sone wedusac (mainly Seyphamedusacy from Australian coastal waters, Zraws, R, Soe. 5. ats! 89, 257-278. Tancror, Tb. (983) Electricity Generation and the Leology of Natural Waters (Liverpool University Press, Londor), MiFbeckE, J. G. & Sreeurnsen, W. (1977) Eniviron- mental impact and baseline studies of the sof bottom marine environment in the vicinity of ocean sewer outfalls on the NSW central coast. Third Aust, Conference on Coastal und Ocean Engineering, 157-162. (Institution of Engineers Australia, Melbourne). NEVERAUSKAS, V. PR. & Burien, A, J, (1982) Tolerange of blue crab, Portynus pelugicus (L) to high teniperarure, Trans, R. Soe. S. Aust. 1M6(4), 215-218. Parker, J. G. (1980) Effects of pollution upon the benthos of Belfast Lough, Adar. Poll, Bud, 11, 80-83. Powis, B. JL & Reopinsom, K. 1 M. (1980) Benthic jMacrofaunal Communities in the Tuggerah Lakes, New South Wales. Aust < Mar Fresh, Res. 31, 803-815. SAENGER, P, Srrenensoan, W, & Moyexty, J. (980) The estuarine macrobenthos of the Calhope River and Auckland Creek, Queensland. Mem. Old. Mus, 20), 143-161. : ,& (1982) Macrobenthos of the cooling water discharge canal of the Gladstone Power Station Queensland, Aust J Mar. Freshw. Res, 33, 1983-95. Surenrep, 8 A. (1983) Benthic communities of upper Spencer Gulf, South Australia Trans. A. Soe, S Aust. 107(2), 69-85, Rogertson, B, D. (1971) Meteorological Noe No. 49 (Bureau of Meteorology, Adelaide). SouTHcarr, R. V, (1982) Jellyfishes (Classes Seyphovoa and Hydrozoa) /n S. A. Shepherd & f. M. Thomas (Eds) “Murine Invertebrates of Southern Australia, Part 1” (Government Printer, South Australia). Swartz, R. C. (1978) Techniques for Sampling and Analysing the Marine Mactrobenthos. Environmental Protection Agency, Corvallis Enyironmental Research Laboratory. Marine and Freshwater Ecology Bragich. Marine Centre Newport EPA/600/1)2. Tarmact, SS. & Courant, C, C. (1980) Thermal effects, Jour, Water Poll. Fed, 52(6), 1575-1615. THorkava, A. Brake, N. & Sctirorper, P. Be (1978) The effect of heated effluents fram power plants on seagrass (Thylessia) communities quantitatively comparing estuaries in the subjropies to the tropics, Mar Pollut, Bull. 9, 181-487, Waeb, J. J. & Youna, P. C. (1982) Elfeers of sediments, Lrage metals and particle size on community structure and epibenihic seagrass fauna ear a lead sielrer, South Australia, Mar, Ecol. Prog. Ser. 9, 137-146. & ——- — (1983) The depauperation of epilinuna on Pinne bicolor near a lead smelter, Spencer Gut, South Australia. Emviron. Poll. (Ser. A) SH), 293-308. Wasinwes, J. EB. & BREHMER, M, L. (1966) The effects of thermal effluents on marine organisms, Afr & Har. Pall, tat. Jd. Wb, 227-284, WOMEnRSLEY, PL BS. & EoMonns, §&, 1. (1958) A general avcount! of (he intertidal ecology of South Australian cousts, Awl, J Mar. Presi, Res. (2), 217-260. & Titans, b. M. (1976) Intertidal Bcalogy fC. R. Twidale, M. J, Tyler & B. PL Webb (Eds) "Natural History of rhe Adelaide Region" (Royil Society of Soutlt Australia, Adelaide. 170 I, M. THOMAS EFT AL. APPENDIX 1 SPECIES LIST 1972-1985 a + recorded YEAR: Species: Pre- 198] 1981 1982 1983 1985 POLYCHAETES Naineris grubei australis Hartman + Scoloplos cylindrifer Ehlers + Leitoscoloplos bifurcatus (Hartman) + Scolaricia sp. Nephyts australiensis (Fauchald) + Cirriformia punctata (Grube) + Lumbrineris sp. 1 + Lumbrineris sp. 2 Eunice australis Quatrefages + + + + Eunice antennata (Savigny) 4 Lysidice sp. + Marphysa sp. + Nematonereis sp. Schistomeringos sp. Diopatra dentata Kinberg Neanthes vaalii Kinberg Neanthes cricognatha (Ehlers) Nereis cockburnensis Augener Olganereis edmondsi (Hartman) + + + Australonereis ehlersi (Augener) + + Ceratonereis transversa Hutchings + + Perinereis nuntia (Grube) + + + Perinereis amblyondonta (Schmarda) + Nereidae + Barantolla lepte Hutchings + + + + + Capitella capitata (Fabricius) + Pseudopolydora sp. + + 4 + Boccardia chilensis Blake & Kudenov Syllis gracilis Grube ‘ + + + Myrianida sp. + Harmothoe praeclara (Haswell) + + + Glycera americana Leidy + Ophiodromus sp. Abarenicola affinis clarki Wells + Ampharetidae Chaetopterus variopedatus (Reiner) 4 + + Armandia intermedia Fauvel + Sabellidae + + Dorvillea sp. + Terebellinae 4 q + NEMERTEA Nemertean spp. + + ‘ + + PLATYHELMINTHES Latocestus sp. + BIVALVES Xenostrobus inconstans (Lamarck) Tellina deltoidalis Lamarck Trus crebrelamellatus (Tate) Laternula recta (Reeve) Katelysia scalarina (Lamarck) Katelysia peronii Lamarck Spisula trigonella (Lamarck) Brachidontes erosus (Lamarck) Ostrea angasi Sowerby Anomia trigonopsis Hutton Sanguinolaria biradiata (Wood) + Eumarcia fumigata (Sowerby) + + Pinna bicolor Gmelin 4 GASTROPODS Niotha pyrrhus (Menke) + Nassarius burchardi (Philippa) ‘ + 1 + . Nassarius pauperata (Lamarck) + + + 1 + + + ++ tttt4 t+ e+ t++Het + + ++ +4 + ++ 44 of ++ateereet ++ettdge+ +++ettter t+e++e ttt +++ tGgeeet THERMAL EFFECTS ON INTERTIDAL FAUNA 171 i ea aeEEEyyEE EEE EEE SSE Sn YEAR: Species: 1981 1981 1982 1983 1985 Bedeva paivae (Crosse) Salinator fragilis (Lamarck) Salinator solidus (von. Martens) Batillaria estuarina (Tate) Batillaria diemenensis (Qouy & Gaimard) + Diala lauta A. Adams + Diloma sp. 4. Quibulla tenuissima Sowerby + + Austroliotia densilineata (Tate) + Opisthobranchia + Monodonta constricta Lamarck + Clanculus sp. Asteracmea sp. Natica sp. Nudibranchiata CHITONS Stenochiton longicymba Blainville + CRUSTACEANS ISOPODS Paridotea munda (Hale) + Dynamenopsis sp. Cerceis sp. + Euidotea bakeri (Collinge) + Cymodoce longicaudata (Baker) + Zuzara venosa (Stebbing) + + Exosphaeroma sp. 1 + + Exosphaeroma sp. 2 + AMPHIPODS Ericthonius pugnax (Dana) + Maera mastersii (Haswell) + Elasmospus bampo Barnard + + + Amphipod sp. A + Cymadusa filosa Barnard + Cymadusa sp. + Allorchestes compressa (Dana) + + + DECAPODS Crangon socialis (Heller) + + + + Leander serenus (Heller) + Processa sp. + Penaeus latisulcatus (Kishinonye) + + Philyra laevis (Bell) + + + + + Pilumnus fissifrons (Stimpson) 4 + + + Halicarcinus rostratus (Haswell) + Phlyxia intermedia (Miers) + + + + + + + + + + + + +4+e44 +tet + Heteropanope serratifrons (Kinahan) Naxia aurita (Latreille) Helograpsus haswellianus (White legge) + + Petalomera depressa (Baker) + Nectocarcinus sp. Ceratoplax punctata (Baker) + Callianassa ceramica (Fulton & Grant) + STOMATOPODS Squilla laevis (Hess) + TANAIDS Apseudes australis (Haswell) + Tanaidae + + 7 + ' MYSIDS Paranchialana angustata (Sars) + CIRRIPEDS Balanus amphitrite Darwin + Elminius modestus + COPEPODS Copepods + 172 I. M. THOMAS ET AL. -—)) SS SeSeeeeeeeeeeeSSsSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSMSFFFFeeee YEAR: Pre- Species: 1981 1981 1982 1983 1985 CNIDARIANS Anthothoe albocincta (Stuckey) + + + + + Epiactis sp. + 7 PISCES Nesogobius hinsbyi (McCulloch & Ogilby) + + Ammotretis elongatus McCulloch - Gobius bifrenatus Kner + ECHINODERMS Ophionereis sp. + Leptosynapta dolabrifera (Stimpson) Cricophorus nutrix (Stuckey) Ophiuroidea eee t+ tt A SYSTEMATIC EFFECT OF STOCKING INTENSITY UPON THE SPECIFIC DEFOLIATION RATE OF SALTBUSH BY SHEEP BY R. T. LANGE Summary This extends earlier studies of sheep grazing saltbush shrubland near Whyalla, South Australia, where times spent in the different parts of the flock’s range had been shown to be indicated by the corresponding depositions of the egesta. That result enables quantitative estimates (ha sheep “') to be made of the stocking intensities experienced in each of the different parts of the range (SIP = stocking intensity of the part), by combining flock size, part area, and range egesta accumulations in an appropriate formula. BRILL COMMUNICATION A SYSTEMATIC EFFECT OF STOCKING INTENSITY UPON THE SPECIFIC DEFOLIATION RATE OF SALTBUSH BY SHEEP This extends carlicr studies of sheep grazing saltbush shjubland near Whyalla, Sourh Australia, where limes spent in che difference parts af ihe flock’s range had been shown to be indivaled by (he corresponding depositions of (he egesta!®. That result enables quantitative estimates (ha sheep |) to be wade of the stocking inteusities experienced in cach ol the different parts of the range (SIP. stocking intensity of the part), by combining flack size, part area, and ranke caesta accumulations it an appropriate formula.” We also has been shown) Uhat SIP varies greatly throaghout each flock 's range ina consisten| way, whether the full-scale paddocks of the region or in very small experimental enclosures. Roughly a third of the range experiences SIP grading upwards from the paddock avenge shocking intensity (PSt=roral area divided! by Mock sive), the remainder wrading downwards. Greatest Tnlensilies are-ol yhagnitides equivalent ta about 7 PSI; Juwest meastirable intensities have values roughly equivalent to the PSI/16. Lasuly. it las been shown, in several cases, by tise ot 4 leat-marking tectiniqueé that the extent of defohation of saltbushes jo ie various parts of the rangeland. ts lincurly refitted (co He concomitant accurmularions of sheep cesta in those pars Thus the sijuation has been reached where wiferred SEP and its immediate effects on plants such as sallbush, can be studied across the various open Jovaliries, WithOul constraining the Mock’s behaviour. The present reparr describes an unexpected new quantitative feature of those inter-relationships, revealed from a smal] enclosure of sallhush stocked with sheep. An enclosure 35% 100m was feneed aff in the midst of extensive saltbush shrubland on Middleback Station neat Whyalla, 5, Aust, a locity deseribed ji detail by Barker and Noble". The sheibland was dry and devoid af any preen grass, due to drought. Survey poles were ser about this enelosure such that observers could visually sector iL uto ten equal cells, and eaeh cell mito halves, by line of-sight, A drinking-trough and a holding pen were installed af one end, Ineaeli voll, bushes were counted sind 100 teaves of (vel) outermost foliage were marked, alistiburing the marks widely amonpst (he bushes’. The percentage loss of salthust foliage fren each cell wats estimated alsa by Ure wietliod of Andrew et af! A [lock of sever merino werhers (20 sheep ha ‘) was introduced and left fur six days except for an inspection period every 24 h, during which the sheep were penned, Al each inspection, all egesta was recovered and measured trom each hall-cell separately, counts wea made of the loss af murked Jeaves, and the saltbush foliase bioniass was estimated in each cell During davlight, the activity of the Mock was observed from a distance, Contry to tua) oucormes, the sheep in this enclosure did pot setlie down for nearly three days, Instead they spent much more time than expected in Ure southertt (dovn-yvind) end of [he enclosurG just standing, Noe reason for this Was apparent. During the first chree days a high propornomal marked leaves which were fosp from bushes could be observed Uneaten, lying on the gronnd, and thus were eVidently broken oll simply by the passage of the sheep, These were removed. By (he mornitie of the fourth day (he sheep were grazing normally. However, no staristically-significant relationships could be Jenjonstrated at the end of the experiment, between cell evesta accumulation and cither of cell salibush lea! loss, or cell salthash foliage biomass reciction, Even when the two vamped-on cells were disregarded, no signiticant trends could be detected from the remaining cells. This was contrary fo the results of at least mvo earlier experiments, in which the relationships were significant. From a general point ol view, the outcome thus appeared lo be of analypical grazing episode (big. 1) in which flock behaviour was too aberrant tor the expected egesto Ueposition-saltbush defoliacion relationships to be evypressedl. Il was (herefure remarkable to discover that in cach vel! considered separately, the propressive accumularion of egesta and the progressive removal of marked saltbush leaves by the sheep, were fairly closely and sinoortily related (Fig. 2). The turther remarkable feature was that cumulative Q paddock area 1 (—— 7 4 6 o = 2? ' les : $ oO. = ® @ RS — Sa ES oc 4 3 g oo 0.5 II on 2 ~¢ OW 3 0.25 2 0.125 1 lig. 1. The cumulative distribution of log, SIP (stocking intensity of the part) for the 20 paris of the sheep- stocked saltbush enclosure. The right-hand scale expresses SIP variation in terms of PSL (paddock average slockim intensity). By conmparison with Hilder’s 1964 data (see Fig. | of Lange 1985), note rhe atypically low proportion af SIP = PSI. 174 the slopes of these relationships, i.c. egesta accumulated per tagged leaf taken—appeared Lo vary between cells in a Very systematic way. _ Oo oO Oo 600 egesta (g. f.wt. ) 20 30 10 % leaves removed Fig. 2. Cumulative egesta accumulation versus cumulative loss of marked saltbush leaves for 3 representative cells from the enclosure, Note how slopes are steeper in cells that accumulated more egesta. Lines with less (han 6 points involved days with no sheep Visits. That is shown in Fig. 3 for the eight non-camped cells, where these slopes are plotted against the total lresh weights of sheep ceesta deposited on the cells over the six- day period. The equation of the linear regression is: y= -24 + 649%, 17 = 0.86, p < 0.001, where y = g egesta deposited per 1% tagged leaf removed (= slope), and x is kg egesta deposited. The intercept is nol significant, When the slopes are plotted against the natural logarithm of cell egesta accumulations, all ten cells including the camp-sites are accommodated in a very highly significant regression: y 156) 88.5 In (x), > » 0.92, p < 0,001, In this case the intercept is significant. These results reveal an unsuspected quantitative inter- relationship in flock-browse plant interaction, which is too significant to dismiss without atlention. —_ oi Oo 100 9 €gesta /1% leaf removed a ro) 1 2 3 kg egesta Fig. 3. Slopes as in Fig. 2, for each of the 8 non-camped cells of the enclosure, versus the corresponding totals of sheep egesta accumulated in cells over the 6-day period, On face value, the results imply that as SIP rises, the systematic defoliation rate of the saltbush by the sheep falls. Since marked leaves were observed lying detached upon the ground, during the early part of the six-day period, interpretation must allow for effects due to the mere passage ol sheep, as well as direct browsing. On general grounds, one might have thought that it there was to be an effect of this nature, then it might have increased not decreased the specific defoliation rate. Thal is, crowding as SIP increased might have been expected to increase incidental physical damage to salibushes, thus removing more leaves per sheep, not less, But the reverse applied. Bush density did vary slightly from cell to cell, but not in any way thal explained this effect. The effect remains unexplained and serves as a reminder that little is yet understood of line details at the grazing interface between sheep and sallbush. Since it is demonstrated so far only from this single experiment, it requires verification, and further (rials will be undertaken, The author gratefully acknowledges support from The Broken Hill Proprietary Co. and Mitsubishi Motors (Australia) Lid, for the Middleback Field Centre Programme. Andrew Nicolson provided the sheep and field access. 175 Noble, I. R. (1979) In D. Graetz & K. Howes (eds.) Studies in The Australian Arid Zone IV. Chenopod Shrublands. C.S.I.R.O. (Aust.) Div. of Land Res. ‘Lange, R. T. & Willcocks, M. C. (1978) Aust. J. Expt. Agric. An. Husb. 18, 764-767. *Lange, R. T. (1983) Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 107, 137. (1985) Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 109, 167-174. Managem., pp. 125-143. A. (1984) Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 108, 11-12. 7 Andrew, M. H., Noble, I. R. & Lange, R. T. (1979) Aust. Barker, S. (1979) Jn D. Graetz & K. Howes (eds). Studies Rangel. J. 1, 225-231. in The Australian Arid Zone IV. Chenopod Shrublands. C.S.1.R.O. (Aust.) Div. of Land Res. Managem., pp. 83-106. R. T. LANGE, Botany Dept, University of Adelaide, Box 498, G.P.O. Adelaide, S. Aust. 5001. NEW RECORDS OF SPIDERS (ARACHNIDA: ARANEAE) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY BERNARD GUERIN Summary The spider fauna of South Australia is largely unknown due to a lack of systematic collecting over the years. Few studies have been published and these are based on material collected incidentally to other groups. Thus the larger and wandering spiders are better known than cryptic and nocturnal species. BRIEF COMMUNICATION NEW RECORDS OF SPIDERS (ARACHNIDA: ARANEAE) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA The spider fauna of Sourh Australia is Janzely unknown due to a lack of systematic collecting over the years, Few studies have been published and these ape based on material collected invidentally to other groups!2496, Thus the larger and wandering spiders are berer krown than eryptic and nocturnal species. Scvenleen spiders are recorded here, including two families and Gight genera previously unrecorded in South Australia, Voucher specimens have been deposited in the South Australian Museum, The family placement of genera follows Davies (1985)’, and Brignoli (1983)* for families not covered by Davies (1985). Family; Hahniidae, Seorospilus bicolor Simon, 1886 These spiders superficially resemble small Nicadamus but are much smiller and live under gum bark. Known previously {rom ‘Tasmania’, the family is characterized by a Transverse row of spinnerets. The specimens collected were from Aldgate (35°01 S, 138°44'E) under zum burk (SAM NIOSSI17). imm Fig. L Verteal view of THenurins, Fumily: Gnaphosidae, THonunius Simon, 1908 Generally uecepied now to he in the Gnaphosidae®. Female spider collected ina pitfall trap trom the Toolache Waterhole region (28''21'S, 40°25 E, SAM N1985120), The specimen Has. very lone anterior spinnerets starting mid- ventrally (Fig. 1). Long spinning tubes are present on the anterior spitmerens, The posterior spinnerets are moderately long, thus distinguishing the gefitios fromm Myandra and Molvcria, Honunilus quadricauda (the type species) Was described from a single male from blarvey, W.A. The long spinning tubes were not noied, The female remains unknown, Also of nore with this specimen are the structures on the terminal joints of the mid-ventral spinnerets, ane on each jou (Fig. 1). No large spinneret sensory organs are noted in the literalure so their function remains anknown, Lampona scutata Strand, 1913 Collected in pilfall fraps at Hambidge Conservation Park (33¢24'S, 135455 E, SAM NI9BS118), Granite Downs (2656'S, 133°30°E) and the lake edge of Lake Hart (31°40'S, 136°40'E), The latler specimen was in an old kangaroo skull. LT. seutate is Similar in shape to the common L- cylindrata, Juveniles havea bright orale cephalothorax with bright orange scutes on the dorsal and ventral abdomen. Matare specimens are dark red with darker seutes, The type locality is *Zentral-Australien” ® | have been unable to locale any literature record of the species since the deseription, Lampona asperrima Wickovan, 1950 A mature female was pittall trapped at Muckera (30°02'5, 130°03'E, SAM NIYRS119), Known only from Reevesby Island*. Similar to L. sewtata but it differs in eye arrangement, relative spinneret lengths and genitaha. bamily: Araneidae. Dolophones themisoides Rainbow, 1915 A specimen was collected in a pitfall trap al Muckera on the Nullarbor (30°02'S, 130°03'L, SAM 61985123). Originally described from “Moorilyanna Native Well, Central Australia” (26°52'S, 133°0V Ey, 1 have not Jocated any subsequent literalure records, Araneus psittacinus (Koch, 1887) A number of these orb weavers have been found in the Adelaide Hilly and suburbs (SAM N1I985124-N1985125). Almost the entire body is bright green with a variable patiern on the dorsal abdomen. Some haye fo patrern, some havea yellow stripe, some have bright red spots and still others have white or yellow stripes with a bright red border. Some have a longitudinal stripe, somea (ransverse one. Both males and females have been found with different colour patterns. Examination of the genitalia indicates they are conspecific. 178 Family: Mimeticie. Arevs: simsoni (Simon, 1893) An adult collected on honeysickle (Lorticera japonica) ay Aldgate (35°01'S, 138°44'E, SAM N19851 26). Numerous young were on the sucrounding bushes. Their cephalothoray and abdomen colours ranged from black and white to a deep red shade. Colour variation in this genus has been reported!” Areys walckénaer] Simon, 1879 Mule and females of this spider have beer found on shrubs at Aldgate and Bridgewater (SAM N1985127/128). A, walekerueri is cocorded from eastern Australia, WA, and Java! The W.A. record ts doblous(B, Y. Main pers. comim.). Family: Theridiidae, Phoroncidia triluberculata (Hickroan, 1951) Specimens were collected at Aldgate (S5'00'S, 13844'E, SAM N1985129), The type locality is Launceston, Tasmania, which suggests that the species will oceur in Victoria, The spiders were found on a single vertical line OF sik, about 44 of the way to the top, One had its tine between two leaves on a ferice of honeysuckle, the others berween two pieces of bark on a pine tree. Phoroncidia sexinberculata (Keysenling, 1890) Two specimens haye been found on bushes at Bridgewater and Aldgate (SAM NI985130). Known previously fram N.SW, and Qld, Faurmtily: Thomisidae. Seecortomus formivorus Rainbow, 1900 Several specimens were collected in January on cifterent plants inthe aiddle of g large paddock in the Middleback region near Whyalla (32"57'S, 137°24'E, SAM NL9BS131- 1985132). They were found in small web-cases!. There Were Numerous ants (Jridanwriney purpurens) on the Mants and spiders were seen to eat these. A number of the spiders had web-cases joined together, living semi conimunally Previously recorded (rom three Ipeations in N.SMW."* this species may be more widely disttibuted Uian records suggest. The genus is also Known from Queensland {V. Davies, pers. comm.). Bomts larveta Koch, 1873 Two males and two females collected at Aldyute (35-0NS, (38°44 E, SAM N1985133-NI98S134). Colours vary i the females: one is brown Whereas the other has bright wreen legs and cephalothorax and a whine abdomen Lintoriinately, the original description did nor figure the femole genitalia. Both these females have identical nemlalia, The brown female was on brown reeds and the preen female was on a greeny-blue wormwood shrib Cynrbacha fesiiva Koch, 1874 Specimens collected ar Aldgate and in Adelaide suburbs (>AM NI9831351. ‘The species is common in the eusiern stales5, Also reported Irom 5. Aust. is a six-sparted Cymbacha'®, alihough some young C. fesriva also appear ta have six-spots, Sutvihella sp. Vhe only member of this genus reported in S. Aust. |s Sidvmelia trapezia (Koch, 1873). It is common all over Austratia!’, Two specimens front Aldgate and Bridgewater SAM NI98S136) differ in bein hirsuce: They also differ ftom the only deseribed birsuie member, & hirsuta (Koeh, 1873), in having two Jona posterior projections from the abdomen. They superficially resemble the undescribed specimen photographed by Mascord (1980, p, 99, No. 6), Paruily; Philadromicac Tibellus. sp. Specimens of this genus have been found on a grass tussock in a dry ereek-bed at Granite Dowy)s (26°56'S, 133°30)E, SAM N1985229). They differ from the only described Australian species, 7 tened/uy (Koch, 1876), and superficially appear (o differ from the undescribed species shown in Mascord (1980), It js likely that it isa new species. ‘These are the first reported menjbers of the fainily Philodroniidae in S.A, Tamily; Miturgidae: Miturga agelenina Simon, 1909 Specimens collected at Hughes (30°35°S, 129°30' ER, SAM NIQSS138-N1985139). They are well known from W.A. and the Easter states! 7, Only reported in S.A, from Reevesby fsland*. Specimens were found in pairs 1 the web. Family: Zoridac, Thasvraea sp. Specimens of this spider have been iound ar Aldgate, Stirling and Bridwewarer (SAM N1985137), all in the Adelaide Hills, They are also known to be widespread tn South Australia (D, Hirst, pers. comu.). I wish to thank De M. B. Thompson and G Medin lor collecting the Monvnrius: thanks lo Jeu Thurmer for the drawings and for notiving the sructure on the erminal spinneret joints of Monunivs, | wish to iiank b. Jansen forthe Nullarbor, Bridgewater and Hambidge spiders and some trom Middleback; B, Gilbert for other Bridgewater spiders; David Hirst for identilying the Thasvraed: Jenn Thurmer for a Cynthacha; and to the NPWS for permission to collect in some areas. False want to thank Margaret Davies for extensive editorial help. ‘Hickman, V, Y. (1944) Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 68, 18-48: iHlickman, ¥. ¥. (1950) Proc. R- Soe, Vie. 60, 1 16. "Hogg, EL R. (1896) lraneidue. In Report of the Horn Expedition 10 Central Ansiralia, Pt 2. Zoology, 409356. *Pullgine, R. H. (1914) Trans. RB. Soc, S$. Aust, 3h, 447-443, ‘Rainbow, W. J. (1915) Trans. RB. Soe, S. Aust, 39, 172-792. “strand, FE, (1913) Zoulogische Jahtbuecher 35, 599.424, "Pavies, ¥. T. (1985) Arancomorpiiae, tn “Zoolsgicil Catalogue of Australia, Vol, 3, Arachnida’ (Australia Government Printing Service, Canberra), “Brignoli, P.M, (1983) “A Catalogue of the Araneae described Warieee 1940 und 1941" (Manehester University Press, Manchester). “Higkman, Vo ¥. (1948) Pap. Pro, RL Suc, Tas. 1998, 23s Clyne, Melbourne). '! Heimer, S. (1984) Entomologische Abhandlungen 47, 155-178. Hickman, V. V. (1951) Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Tas. 1950, 3-24. 3Mascord, R. (1980) “Spiders of Australia” (Reed, Sydney). D. (1969) “Australian Spiders” (Nelson, 179 Rainbow, W. J. (1900) Rec. Aust. Mus. 3, 169-175. 1 Rainbow, W. J. (1911) Rec. Aust. Mus. 9, 107-319. ‘Tee, D. & Southcott, R. V. (1979) “Spiders and other arachnids of South Australia” (South Australian Museum, Adelaide). "Simon, E. (1909) Araneae, 2nd part. Jn Michaelsen, W. & Kartmeyer, R. (Eds.) “Die Fauna Sud-West Australiens”, pp. 155-212 (Fischer, Jena). BERNARD GUERIN, Department of Psychology, University of Queensland, St Lucia, Qld 4067. CELAENIA ATKINSONI (ARACHNIDA, ARANEAE): NEW RECORD FOR SOUTH AUSTRALIA WITH A DESCRIPTION OF THE MALE BY BERNARD GUERIN Summary Male and female Celaenia atkinsoni (Pickard-Cambridge) were collected from the Adelaide Hills. These represent the first record of this species for South Australia and provide an opportunity to describe the previously unknown male of the species. BRIEF COMMUNICANON CELAENIA ATKINSON] (ARACHNIDA, ARANEAE); NEW RECORD FOR SOUTH AUSTRALIA WITH A DESCRIPTION OF THE MALE Mile and female Celvenia arkinsent (Pickard- Cambridge) were collected from the Actelaide Hills. These represent the first record of (his species for Sout) Australia ikl provide an opportunity to deseribe the previously unknown male of the species. lamily Aratieicise, Celaenia vikinson( (Pickard-Cambridge, 1879) Two females were found at night hanging from horivontal silk-lines about 10 em long ina garden in Aldwate GS-U1'S, 138) 44°, SAM S198S121). The line may protect [hem from the many ants and Clubianidae foubd on the same bush, alehough ats main function is thought 1 be in assisting prey captures! Another eongener, © kinhere/, is common in Adelaide suburbs, The lack of shoulder humps in the later easily differentiates the two. A snate was beaten off a bush at Bridgewater (35°01, 845'T, SAM NI985122) and seems to be the tindeseribed male of €) arkinsond eis 138 mm in total length, about 1 that of the fernale, Like the first aod second jnstirs’, (We abdoniinal proniberances are smaller than those of the adult. They appear as shoulder humps in bein unterive on the ubdamen (Fig. 1). The pacern of setae is the same as in the Temales. CL a/Kinsoni is known from eastern Austealia and New Zealand? All specimens Were collected in late December/early January. A briet deseriptioan of the male follows. Abbreviations for eye measurements are suindard.” 0.5mm Fis, ), Dorsal abdomen of male Celvenia atkinsoni. Measurenenr (in fam): Body Tength, bags Carapace Jonwih. 0.63; Caraupace width. 0.63; Abdomen longth, 0.873 Abdomen widlh, (13; Abdomen height, 0.75. Lee lenetlis are shown in ‘Table 1. Colour: Carapace light yellow will two posterior brow stripes. on either sideof the Muhest point. Palps, chehverse, mayitlae aad lubiony all light yellow. Sternum yellowish willt browa border, Legs yellowish with distal half of mekitarsi and patel orange. Basal and distal ribia orange, femur orange, Abdomen white with brawn mark ies: Spinnerets yellow surrounded by white. Ceérdpave: Pointed in tront, wider posterianiy. Eyes on raised (uberele projecting over clypeus. Stagte black clavate seta in centre, Two smaller black setae belween PME, Tanil d. Length (ini af porionis of rhe lez in male Celacnia atkinsoni 4M NIG8S122), Metlarsus Tarsus Total | U.32 “il O19 Ot) O.0T 0,80 2 28 7.09 U6 0.06 1.07 0.66 3 O15 ),07 OV .07 on7 0,47 4 0.2) 04 OI 0,09 O47 OST Fyes: Eves in (We rows. From above both eve rows strongly revurveel, Eye mitig AME: ALE: PMES PLE | 4: 2:5; 2. AME senuraied [ram each other by |.3~ their diameter and from ALL by 3 limes their diameten PME separnued front cach other by O.80¢ their diameter and trom PLE hy Lae their diameter. The lateral eyes are conuguous. The clypeus is 4.46 diamerer of AME, Aatertar ventral: Manillae converging. Labuin rrianwukar. Srernuen Stecnuny as long as wide, widesr between secon coxde ancl rounded posteriorly, Lees: Lengi order 1,2, 4,3, Lightly clothed in fine hairs. Black clavate hair on both distal tibia}. Three tarsal claws Abdomen Wider than long. Two dorsal anterior humps slightly projectinu over the side of the abdomen, Postenor surface slopes Sieeply, Number of black clavate hairs on the autenor humps, While elivale hairs jn places. Six spinnerels, conival, Anterior pair larmest Genitalia: Sec Vig. 2. O.25mm Pin. 2. Genitalia of male Celdenir atkinsan, 182 I wish to thank B. Gilbert for the male Ce/aenia; thanks 'Main, B. Y. (1982) Bull. Brit. Arach. Soc. 5, 425-432. to Jenni Thurmer for the drawings; and thanks to Hickman, V. V. (1970) Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Tas. 105, 75-81. Margaret Davies for editorial help. My thanks also totwo — 3Mascord, R. (1980) “Spiders of Australia.” (Reed, reviewers for helpful comments. Sydney). BERNARD GUERIN, Department of Psychology, Univerisity of Queensland, St Lucia, Qld 4067. AN ALLEGED ARCHAEOCYATH FROM CAPE DENISON, ANTARCTICA BY J. B. JAGO AND R. L. OLIVER Summary There have been numerous attempts to reassemble the Antarctic and Australian parts of Gondwanaland as they were prior to their Mesozoic rifting and subsequent movement apart. Attempts such as those of Sproll & Dietz and Smith & Hallam were based largely on morphological best fits of continental margins; other attempts were based largely on reversing seafloor spreading patterns. BRIFE COMMUNICATION AN ALLEGED ARCHAEOCYATH FROM CAPE DENISON, ANTARCTICA There have been numerous atlentpts to reasseinble the Antarctic and Australian pares of Gondwanaland is (hey were pila to ther Mesozoe piltine and subsequent movement apuri Attempts such a8 those of Sproll & Vier! and Smith & Hallam* were based largely on morphological best fits of continental margins, other aliempis? were based largely on reversine seafloor spreading purtterns. Reconstruchons based on the geology of te two continents have generally jised one of (wo approaches: (1) avoniparien ef the geology af northern Vierorioa Land, Antarctica with that of Tasmania, particularly with respect 10 the Cambrian and Ordovician rocks ol both areas’? 12) A comparison ot the geology of the Fast Aataretic shield with that of the Preeaimbrian of southern Australia, pacricularty with respeer to the isatopic wes? Pies in, b show reconsiractions based respeedively on ihe two approaches. One of (he problems in using the eeology of ihe opposmie margins has beer Ue presence of large gaps in the pre-Mesovoie geology of bath cantinenis. On the Australian continent the Tertiary sediments of rhe bucla aud Murray Basins occupy laree areas whereas ta Aulurctica substantial regions are jee-vavered. One piece af Information which has been used by some auhors ll jn either conlinental or palacouvouraphic revonsiruction has been the repart by Mawsen!*thal an erratic collected during the 191-1914 Australasian Anrarcnic Expedition in morsing at Cape Denison contains aw possible member of (ire Archaeoeyarha, Mawson (p, 349) Noted jm ane case (NO. 346) a forsterite marble now serpentinised, there is figured on the fave of the rock outrlines.of what may very well have originally been fossil archacovyathinae. The outlines are recorded in yellow green serpentinite Which shows Up agaist de white cock”, This veport ys signifieait i tat ie fie rock does yideed contain Arehacoegiatha then it could suggest a link with the archagocyathanaich limestones of ihe lower Cumbrian ol he Adelaide Guasyncting, ie, Cupe Denison vould be placed opposite the Adelaide Geosyneline on a 'Sproll, W. BP, & Dicte, ROS. (1969) Nature 222, 445-448, ‘Smith, A, Gy & Hatta, A, (1970) Nature 225, 139-144, ‘Playes, PR Ro & Ringis, J. (1973) Natiie 243, 354-458, JOriffiths, OR. 974d) Naltuce 249, 336-338, ‘Laird, M. G.. Conper, R.A. & age, BR 11977) Nature 265, WLIO, “Laied, MG, (ISBN) 4, BR. Sow NZ, $(, 425-448. “Jaye, & BL (1981) ft Creswell, Mo ML. & Vella, Po (eds). Conmlwana bive (Batkena, Rotlerdagi) 19-204, “Lovering, 4b, Travis, G. A. Comaford, 1, & Kelly, PR. QYRT) Spee, Pulls peal. Soe Aust. 7. 199-203. “Oliver, Ry &,, Coopen J AO & Travtove, AQ J, (1983) dir Oliver, Rob, James, BR, & dapo, J.B. eds). Agioetic Larihh Seienge (Austrian Agademy of Science, Comberra), 64-08, cootiental reassembly, as has mideed been proposed by some authors?! alihoueh the closest Knows outetops at archaeocvathan lmnestone in Antarctica to Cape Denisan are from the revion between the Byed und Norcal Glaciers of rhe Transantarcric Mountains, some 1400 km to the southeast, The bedrock geotegy of the Commonwealth Bav/Cape Denison ates comprises granodibrite gneisses intruded by aplitic and amphibalivic dykes’ 4. Rooks in the Cape Denison area are either of amphibolite or grariulite facies’; the eranodiorite eneiss 14 of very Late Archaean age’, Erratics found in the moraines ut Cape Denison incluce conulonmierates and urkases'*, various igneous rocks‘, and a considerable variety of meiumorphic rocks! GIKI2202122 The great majority off (ue ernaties collected by the 1911-1914 expedition are metamorphic rocks", Specimens collected hy Misono are housed in the Geology Depariment, University of Adehkude Aq inspection of specimen IL6 (alsa numbered 16669) shows the urchaevevarban-lke struchire deseribed by Mawson (Fig. 2). However, in the opinion of the wrirers, ihe itlleped urchaeouyath clearly vonsists simply of randomly onented, fibrous serpentinite formed diving the metimorphisn of impure limestone. The degree of metamerphisey of the rock ts such that any fossils are unlikely to haye survived the metamorphie process, Glastonbury, whoa described specimen 316 a6 e forsterite marble makes ne invention of the presence of possible archavacyaths. Henee itis concluded that althoush if is quite possible ona continental drift reconstuetion (har Cape Denison Was justaposed with the archaeoeyathan bearing limestones of the Adelwde Geosyneling, the crane used by Mawson should oot be tised as evidence in support of this because it docs nor contunm semnmants of Archaeoevitha. Another poi is that the erratte could have been derived from within quite a lage area ol bast Antarctiea, [tis also of interest ta nore thar Truswell”! has shown (hat sea-lMoar oaiples coltected by Mawson during the W9N-19i4 Australisian Antarctic Expedition ean be used fo suppor an) Antareriva-Austratia reconstruction?" in whieh Cape Derisen is placed opposite the Adelaide Geosyneling Veevers, J & Powell, C2 McA. (1974) Jn Veevers, J. b (Ed). Phanerozoic earth Wistary ot Avstenlia (Clarendon, Oxford) 282-289. "Shergald, J. UL, dago. ib B, Cooper, Ro A. & Laurie, 4 R.. (985 tat, Union geo}, Science Publ, 19, Mawson, D. (1940) Sedimentary rocks, Australasian Antarche Expedition 19}1-|4. Scfeutific Reports Series A 4, (HL), 347-367, "“Dwird, M.G. (198i) Jy Holland, C. H. (Eu.) Lower Palacozvie of the Middle Fast, Bastern und Southern Alrica, and Antarctica. (Wiley, London) 287-214, “Stillwell, FL. (1918) Austalasiat) Antareric Expedition {911-14 Scivnlific Reports, Seties A, > (1), 1230, “Chastonburcy, oO. G. (1940) Australasian Antarctic Pxpedinon MI) lt4, Scieanfie Reports Series A 4 t4), 114-134, 184 ~ W.A. ~ ~ ~ YILGARN BLOCK ~ ~ EAST ANTARCTICA & + ova YILGAAN BLOCK ~ nm EAST ANTARCTICA os + de 7 => Middle Cambrian to Early Ordovician LLL} Adelaidean to Cambrian Precambrian (Undifferentiated) ? Late Precambrian to Ordovician Fig. 1. Continental reconstruction alternatives. See text for details. AG, Adelaide Geasyncline, SB, Smithton Basin. DT, Dundas Trough. AT, Adamsfield Trough, STR, South Tasman Rise. BG, Bowers Group, RBG, Robertson Bay Group. KS Vig. 2. Two views of (he specimens containing [he alleged archaeoeyath, bath at natural scale. The fibrous serpentinite is present an ihe rieht hand side of the upper photograph and at the top of the lower photograph. Stilwell, FLL, (1023) Australasian Antarctic Expedition II -I4. Scientific Reports Series A 3 (4), 259-280. "Coulson, A. b (1925) Australasian Antarche Expedition IMi-I4. Scientilic Reports Series A 3 (5), 281-305, 'SClastonbury, dO, G, (1940) Australasian Antarctic Expedition I91{-l4. Scientific Reports Series A 4 (6), IN3-146, “Kleeman, A. W. (1940) Australasian Antirctic Expedition 1911-14, Scientific Reports Series A 4 (7), 197-292, “Pifley, C. E. (1923) Australasian Antarctic Expedition 19-14. Scientific Reports Series A. 3 (2), 231-244, “lGlastonbury, J. O. G. (1940) Australasian Antarctic Expedition 19tI-14. Scientific Reports Series A 4 (8), 295-322. UGlasionbury, J. O. G. (1940) Australasian Antarctic Expedition 191]-14, Scientific Reports Series A 4 (9), “Mawson, D, (1940) Australasian Antaretic Expedition , ta-l4. Scientific Reports Series A 4 (13), 405-432. “ Truswell, E. M. (1982) J. geal. Soc, Aust. 29, 343-356. Crook, K. A. W. & Belbin, L. (1978) J. geal. Soe, Aust, 25, 23-40. /Veevers, J... Powell, CG Mead. & Johnson, B.D. (1975) Earth Planet. Sci, Letts 27, 383-87. J.B, JAGO, School of Applied Geology, South Australian Institute of Technology, PO. Bos 1, Ingle Farm, S. Aust, 5098 and R. L, OLIVER, Geology Department, University of Adelaide, (1.7.0, Box 498, Adelaide, S. Aust. S001, THE MUSGRAVE RANGES EARTHQUAKE OF MARCH 30, 1986 BY B. BARLOW, D. DENHAM & K. MCCUE Summary On 30 March 1986 at 0854 UT (1824 local time) a large earthquake (Ms ~ 5.8) occurred near Marryat Creek by De Rose Hill in the Musgrave Ranges, South Australia (see Fig. 1). The main shock was followed in the next seven days by five aftershocks which were large enough (magnitude greater than 3) to enable instrumental locations to be made (Table 1). A further 12 unlocatable aftershocks were detected by the closest seismograph station at Alice Springs. BRIEF COMMUNICATION THE MUSGRAVE RANGES EARTHQUAKE OF MARCH 30, 1986 On 30 March 1986 at 854 UT (1824 loval time) a large carthquake (My - 5,8) occurred near Marryat Creck by De Rose Hill in the Musgrave Ranges, South Australia (see Fig, 1). The main shock was followed in the nest seven days by five aftershocks which were lurge enough (magnitude greater tham 3) to enable instrumental locations to be made (Table 1), A further 12 unloeatable allershocks Were detevied by the closest semouraph auilion at Alice Sprinys. The main earthquake occurred in (he eastern end of the Musgrave Block. This is a Precambrian crystalline basement feature, previously thought to be aseismig. Only one poorly lovated carthguake has been recorded within 100 kim of the epicentral area if the past 30 vears. Most uetivily in South Australia is confined to (he Flinders Ranges Seismic Zone', A reconnaissance survey of the fell area has vevealed a13 km long arewale thrust fault, cenvex to the norchwest, willpa maximum throw of 0.6 metre. [he scarp outcrops ina sandy clay with no bedrock exposure. On the cast- west limb there wits d substantial component of left-lateril sirtke slip, reaching a maximum af about 0.8 m1. On the yormh-south limb there was a smaller ammount of dextral Mike Shp. The north-south limb dips al about 60 degrees to she west and (he dip of the eas\-west limb, measured al Uw surface, is 30 degrees (o the south, The main shock was well recorded al all of the Australian Seismmogranh stalions and at many stauons worldwide. The US National Earthquake Information Service (NEIS) eaniputed an epicentre close to 26.23", 132.70°R using P wave dala from the global seismic network. This epicentre 7s not considered to be well located because Whe closest station (at Alice Springs) was more than 300 kin from the epicentre and all stations in ihe cdistunve range 5-17 degrees were amilled because of high nevative travel Lime residuals (relative to. the Jeffreys-Bullen velocity model), The computed location, based on P and S recordings on the 12 closest Australian s[auions, and using a velocity model appropriate to South Australia, places the epicentre 30 km further cast (hig. 1). The mavroseismic epicentre, defined by the surface breakage (faulting), lies about midway between these two instrumental solutions. The NEIS jhaenitudes obtained from teleseismic observations were my, 5,7 and M.S.8. These values translate lo Richter magnitudes My 6 and 5,5 respectively, Phe average Richler magnitude determined on the S.Aust. seismic network was My 5.2, although the cpicentral distances involved lic outside the range of applicability of the Jocal magnitude formula, A preliminary fault plane solution has been obtaimed using P wave first motions from all available Australian stalions, supplemented by recordings from China, Tidia, Japan and Panua New Guinea. The results are shawn in Fig. 2 and indicate a mechanism comprising thrust and strike slip faulting, consistent with the ma¢roseismic evidenve. The pressure axis is close io horizontal and strikes N220°F, The east-wesl nodal plane dips at 67 to the soutlt and mutehes (he orientation and sense of motion observed on the east-west limb of the mapped surface fault, Insufficient stations recorded (he aflershocks to enable additional fault plane solutions to be obtained. However, the first motion directions read for stations ar Nectar Brook, Partacauna, Roopena and Woomera in South Australia, were inconsistent from one alershock to the neat, implying a Hon-uniform rupture sequence, Intensity questionnaires were distribured to hundreds of homesteads and post offices covering w large arca of South and Central Australia, in an attempt 10 produce an jsoseismal map for the earthquake. Ol the 227 questionnaires returned, 88s reporied not felt. The compiled data for ihe felt area are shown ip Fig. 1. Because ‘Taate t. Hvpoventral parameters: for the Musgrave Ranges earthiyuake of 30th March, 1986 and aftershocks, eT RE EEEE UIE SSESESSSSS SESSA SSSI Date Origin Time Lat Long. Depth Magnitude No. of il M S (°S) (Bb) (km) M, Stanoans W) Mat, 1886 OS 53 53.2 46.234 142.697 1 My 5.8 126 (NEIS) (Matin Shack) 57 My (Main Shock) OR 53 SS4 26.285 a.n9 1 M, (SA) 4.2 12 (SA) (Main Stivek) O8, 53 48 4 26.33 132.52 ma) 28 (BMR) 26 199 132.83 shallow Surface faulling! 3) Mar., (986 O06 12 02,5 26.178 132.075 4 3.3 5 oy 25 ATA 26,208 LA) R13 24 3.1 4 Ol Apr., 1986 {1 42 55.65 26,252 13).864 3 43 5 9 Ape, TYs6 08 20 00.10 26.220 131.973 18 3.) $ U6 Ape, 1986 li 44 OT RS 26.2710 132,04 5 3A) 3 > Macroseismic epicentre (intersection of ewst-west and north-south fault traces). NELLIS : US National Earthquake Information Service. SA : SA. Seismic Network, augmented by stations ut Alice Springs, Warburton and Mount tea. BMR > Bureau of Mineral Resources, Australian Seismoyraph network, 188 130° 132° Ap S.A. Network epicentre Yo Zone intensity 134° 137° 136° pBALIGE SPRINGS 24° 3 [Deep Well [een SIMPSON IV ¢ - Ha DESERT “ AYERS / Angas Downs 4 ROCK 4-5 -~7o. jo M “3 V Put N “Sp, ve / / \ oFinke ) /Mulga Park 4Noes L 8 nf _6 Kulfera N.T — eee ee mR - YI Og ea TS rt So ae Sa —_---- 26° 4 F. al \ ad / S.A, \ 6b ¢ \ ‘ De Rose Hill ‘\ ie ot cot oPedirka ” Foranite owns 2godnadatta A NEIS epicentre F Fault trace Fig. 1. lsoseismal map of the Musgrave Ranges earthquake. Intensity values are on the Modified Mercalli Scale. The Arabic numbers denote point observations whereas the Roman numerals define the isoseismal zones. The zero designation corresponds to “not felt”. The map also shows the instrumental locations of the epicentre and the east- west and north-south fault traces. 24/G653-9/2 of the sparsity of the population, damage was minor, being confined to cracked walls in the nearest homesteads at De Rose Hill and Victory Downs Station, The maximum intensities were MM VI. Several localities, as far away as 150 km, recorded intensity MM V. Minor shaking was reported at Alice Springs, 300 km to the north, and Cooper Pedy, 350 km to the south, although towns such as Oodnadatta which were closer to the epicentre experienced no felt effects. There were isolated (anomalous) reports of the earthquake (MMII/IIT) from places as distant as Olary and Quorn. Fig. 2, Fault plane solution for the Musgrave Ranges earthquake. Solid and open circles represent compressive and dilative first motions respectively, plotted on an equal area Stereographie projection of the lower focal sphere. The circumscribed crosses show nodal planes and the pressure (P) and tension (T) axes. The numbers represent the trend and plunge of the focal planes and poles. 189 At the time of writing another large earthquake (M, ‘Greenhalgh, S. A., Singh, R. & Parham, R. T. (1986) ~ 5.5) occurred in the same area of the Musgrave Ranges Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 110(4), 145-154. on 11 July 1986 at 0718 UT. It was preceded by a M, 3.8 earthquake on 10 July at 2210 UT. We wish to thank R. McDougall and A. McArdle for assistance in data preparation and analysis. B. BARLOW, D. DENHAM, T. JONES, K. McCUE, Bureau of Mineral Resources, Canberra, A.C-T. 2601, G. GIBSON, Phillip Institute of Technology, Bundoora 3083, Vic. and S. GREENHALGH, School of Earth Sciences, Flinders University of South Australia, Bedford Park, S. Aust. 5042. FOOD OF THE ANENOME ANTHOTHOE ALBOCINCTA AT WEST ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY S. A. SHEPHERD AND J. D. GRAY Summary Anthozoans are ubiquitous on rocky substrata in temperate waters yet there have been few studies of their natural diet in southern Australia or elsewhere. The anenome Anthothoe albocincta (Stuckey) is the most common anthozoan at West Island, South Australia (35°37°S, 134°52°E) and occurs on the northern side of the island at 4-5 m depth, at a mean adult population density of 12.5 m -2(SE ~*.8), with a mean column diameter of 10.1 mm (size range 7-14 mm). The species is described and figured by Thomas & Shepherd. BRIEF COMMUNICATION FOOD OF THE ANEMONE ANTHOTHOE ALBOCINCTA AT WEST ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA Anthozoans are ubiquitous on rocky substrata in lempergle waters! yer there have bean few studies of their natural diet in southern Australia? or elsewhere’4. The anemone Alnthothoe albocineta (Stuckey) is the most common anthozoan at West Island, South Australia (35°37'S, 134°52'B) and ocetirs on the northern side of the island al 4-5 m depth, at a mean adult population densuy of 12,5 m *(SE~2.8), with a mean column diameter of 10.1 mm (size range 7-14 mmi), The species is deseribed and figured by Thomas & Shepherd. During the Course of an experimental investigation of the settlement of abalone” we examined the role of this anemone asa polential predator of settling abalone larvae. This species, like most anemones, is a passive suspension feeder thal captures prey, usually zooplankton, brought 10 the tentacles by ambient currents’, The habitat of .4_ alboeincra is usually near the sand- line on rocky subsirata, under boulders or at the entrance of crevices. The tentacles project into the current and (he tentacular crown fans outwards and. down to within a few millimetres of the subsimalum enabliny the tentacles to sieve the water passing between them. Up to 200 conical tentacles to 1S mm long are borne on the ora! disc. Distance between the larger, inner tenfacles js aboul 2-4 mm atthe mid points and to 8 mm at the tips. The finer, ouler tentavles are spaced 0.5-1 mm upart ar the mid polit and up to 2 mm apart at the tips. Particles cuptured are passed from ihe outer to inner tentacles and iien fo (he mouth. Mean mouth size of the sample was 2.3 min bot it can expand considerably. We observed no-diurnal rhythm in the expansion and contraction of tentacles and usually 60-90% of Taste 1. Covlenteran cantents of Anthothoe albocineta. A, albocincta were expanded day and night, Ln this respect this anemone resembles most other studied subtidal temperate species that have zooxanthellac®- 11) this note we describe the coelcnteran vortents of a sumple ol 38 adult 4. a/bocinere taken at West 1. during Decernber 1984 when competent abalone larvae are expected to settle. Samples were preserved in formalin and sea-water and subsequently examined in the laboararory under 40~ magnification with a dissecting microscope. Mesenterial filaments of A. albocine/a ace numerous and if was necessary (o dissect each anemone and serape the Hlaments to free partly digested prey. The eoelenteron contents of the sample of A. albocincta are given in Table |. Crustacean appendages and other crustacean fragments are (he most abundant items but positive identifications were not possible due to partial digestion; their size and shape suggested that many of them are probably amphipods, Judging from the abun- dance of complete and fraymented crustaceans found in the coelenteron, the abundance of common taxa is in the order: aniphipods, estracods and copepods. OF the non- crustacean living prey, inyerlebrale eggs are the most abundant by far, with bivalve and gastropod larvae ard foraminiterans less common. There are also quantities of macro-alzal Tragments and tragments of encrusting Orgunisms such as sponge, bryozoans and coralline algae (included in red alae in Table 1). The mean length range of prey categories is fram 0.17 mm to 2,08 mm with standard deviations ringing from 1/3 to greater than the means. The size distribution for all prey items (Fig. 1) is skewed to smaller sizes willra mode at 0.4-0.6-mm. However thts Length (mrn) Length range (mm) | i n Mean 1S8.D min, max. Amphipods 10 2.08 1,28 0.75 4.71 Cladocerans 2 0.48 0.24 0.3] 0.65 Copepods 12 0.66 {).27 0.28 115 lsopods 1 0.80 — _ — Mysids 1 5.25 - — Ostravods aS 0.54 0.18 O15 1.03 Crusiiéan appendayes 327 0.57 (),38 13 3,49 Other crustacean fragments H9 (1.69 4,54 0.09 6.13 Gastropead larvac 10 0.56 Odd O19 1.50 Bivalve larvae \4 .40 OAS O15 0,59 Annelids 2 1.29 1.56 O19 a: Nematodes ii 0.36 (1.23 0.13 U.88. Foraminiferans | 0.27 Nil O10 (h4s Sponge lrazmenis 11 0.17 U.U6 0,09 (28 ryoxoan fragments 35 0.97 1.24 0.18 6.25 Invertebrate e2es 238 0.16 012 0.04 1.38 Green alpac (fragments) 28 L.80 | 64 033 6.89 Brown and ced algae (iragments) 42 0.95 1.69 ONT LO.85 Dinoflagellates 4 0,29 (WAS 0,23 0.80 Spines, spicules 1s 0,92 121 0,20 4,69 Shell fragments 7 OS! O14 O30 0,70) TOTAL 1235 ' rr 1 i FREQUENCY _s, 100- Meaty etal ' 1 1 2 >2 LENGTH(mm) Fig. 1. Length frequency distribution of all prey items (continuous line) and crustacean fragments and appendages (dashed line) in the coelenteron of A. albocincta, distribution largely reflects the distribution of crustacean fragments and appendages derived from fewer, larger individuals, 'Thomas, I. M. & Shepherd, 8. A. (1982) In S. A, Shepherd & I. M. Thomas (eds) “Marine [nvertebrates of Southern Australia Part 1” pp, 161-169 (Govt Printer, , Adelaide). “Ayre, D. J. (1984) Ophelia 23, 149-153. {Purcell, J. E. (1977) Bull. S. Cal. Acad. Sci. 76, 168-172. 4Sebens, K. P. (1981) Biol. Bull. mar. biol. Lab., Woods Hole 161, 152-171, ‘Van- Praet, M. (1985) Ady. Mar. Biol. 20, 66-101. The coelenteron contents of this anemone is similar in terms of taxonomic prey categories to that of other temperate anemones studied’ and we likewise conclude that the diet of this anemone, in summer at least, is principally of demersal crustaceans and larvae of benthic organisms. Lts ability to capture plankton over a wide size range and in particular, active species like amphipods, implies that it is capable of capturing weakly swimming prey such as abalone larvae in the size range 0).25- 0.5 mm*!", Nevertheless, while this anemone may be a potential predator of abalone larvae, its importance as a predator depends on presently unknown ecological factors such as the sieving efficiency of the tentacular crown, Its effect on the density of settling larvae may in fact be slight, since a study of abalone settlement using experimental boulder structures found more newly. settled abalone on structures with anemones present than on structures from which they had been removed®. We thank the Department of Fisheries for a student grant, Michelle Jenkins for technical help and Dr R. Black for helpful criticism of the manuscript. Shepherd, S. A. & Turner, J. A. (1985) J. Exp. Mar, Biol. Ecol. 93, 285-298. 'Sebens, K. P. & Koehl, M. A. R. (1984) Mar. Biol. 81, ge 271. 'Sebens, K. P. & DeReimer, K. (1977) Mar. Biol. 43, 247-256. Leighton, D. L. (1972) Fishery Bulletin 70, 373-381. "Garland, C. D., Cooke, S. L., Grant, J. F. & MeMeekin, T. A. (1985) J. Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecol, 91, 137-149. S. A. SHEPHERD and J. D. GRAY, Department of Fisheries, 135 Pirie Street, Adelaide, South Australia, 5000. ON THE NOMENCLATURE OF A HYLID TREE FROG FROM QUEENSLAND BY MICHAEL J. TYLER AND GRAEME F.. WATSON Summary The nomenclature of Australian frogs currently is labile and a number of areas of disagreement need to be addressed before any degree of stability can be achieved. One of the numerous issues involved is the correct name to be applied to a single species of hylid tree frog occurring in North Queensland. At present three names are used in the literature: Litoria eucnemis (Lonnberg), L. genimaculata (Horst) and L. serrata (Andersson). BRIEF COMMUNICATION ON THE NOMENCLATURE OF A HYLID TREE FROG FROM QUEENSLAND The nomenclature ol Australian frags currently is labile and a number of areas of disagreement need ta be addressed before any deyree of stability can be achieved. One of the numerous issues involved is the correct fame (o be applied (oa single speaies of hylid tree frog oecurring in North Queensland, At present three names are used in the literature; Litoria eucrentis (Lonnberg)!?, ree cenimaculala (Horse 4 and £ serrata (Andersson) ©. Litoria serrata Was described in 1916" from specimens taken ar Atherton, Carrington and Malanda, and was referred to (he synonymy of L. eucnenis of New Guinca by Loveridge®. The aetion was supported by Copland? but was questioned hy Moore!!’, Because of this uncertainty the Lype specimens were reexarnined, compared with additional series and considered conspecific by Tyler! Subsequent use of [te name L. serrata for (he Austrahan poptlation!? follows Cogaer' who adopted it in the tirst edition of his lield guide, with the comment “It has recently been regarded as conspecific with Liferia eucnemis, & species from the Huen Peninsula in New Guinea.” Cogger clearly believed thal this was nol the vase, but did not render the evidence upon which he based his pinion, More recently the speeific identity of the Australian population has been changed? to 4, genimaculata, a species Ueseribed from New Guinea The change is justified by the authors only by the comment “/. serrata of Cogwer (1975),.” The name /, genivnuculata has now been incorporaled jo a list of the amphibian fauna of Queensland’. Ir is apparent front the above summary thit recent nomenclatural changes have been implemented without the presentation of any substantive evidence in support of those changes. In New Guinea @. eucaenis and L, genimaculata are revarded as distinct bul closely related species differing in adult size and maximum extent of interdigital webbing). Tyler considered the two species lo be allopatric bul more recently they have been demonstrated to be sympatric over a portion of their geographic range. and readily distinguishable by differences in male call’*. Both species produce calls described as “sort "ls no doubt caused by their lack of vocal sacs! *Y, An audiospectrogram of a call of L. gentmaculata provided by Zweilel'* depicts a series of nine notes emitted ula rate Of approximately 6/sec. In contrast the call of L- eucnemis is more complex and described as “groups of low, soft, chuckling noles and finished . . with several louder, shorter pulsed calls", Zweifel’s figures of the call of each species indicate that there is no possibility of L, evenemis aad L. genimaculara being canspecilic, The call of an Australian specimen (Queensland National Parks and Wildlife Service collection N 32472) from Weather Station Creek is biphasic with pulse repetition rates of 34,8 and 52,5 pulses see ' respectively, Comparable values from. Zweitel's'* recording of L. encnemis trom New Guinea are 23,5 and 165 pulses sec |. Although there is similarity in (he low pulse rate calls, (hey differ markedly in the number of pulses, 30 in the Australian frog compared with 16 in the New Guinea specimen. In the case of the high pulse rate calls the differences in pulse fepetition rates are conspicuous whereas the number of pulses (17 and 23 respectively) differ only slightly. More and improved recordings fron Australia and New Guinea are required to resolve the issue of whether the allopatric populations variously knownas L. eucnernis and L. serrata are Conspecitic. MULL 4AM 2 ‘Q 6 8B 1.0 TIME IN SECONDS eet yt GAA. 12 1.4 +6 18 20 22 Fig. 1, Audiaspeetrogram (300 Hy lilter) of calls of Liroria ewcnemis recorded by K. R- McDonald, Air temp, 23°C. Tape=Dept Zoolowy, University of Adelaide, K. MeD (10). Analysed on a Kay Digital Sonagraply Model 7800. 194 Nevertheless, there is no justification for considering L. genimaculata a member of the Australian fauna. If L, genimaculata does occur in Australia it will be an ‘Tyler, M. J. (1976) “Frogs.” (Collins, Sydney). "Barker, J. & Grigg, G. (1977) “A field guide to Australian frogs.” (Rigby, Adelaide). {Kikkawa, J., Monteith, G, B. & Ingram, G. (1981) Jn A. Keast (ed.), “Ecological biogeography of Australia.” (W, Junk, The Hague). ‘Ingram, G. J. & Covacevich, J. (1981) Mem. Qld Mus. 20, 291-306. ‘Cogger, H. G., Cameron, E, & Cogger, H. (1983) “Zoological catalogue of Australia. Vol. 1. Amphibia and Reptilia.” (Australian Government Publishing Service, Canberra). “Dennis, A. & Trenerry, M. (1984) N. Qld Nat. (184), 2-9. Andersson, L. G. (1916) Vetensk. Akad. Hand]. 52(9), 1-20. ‘Loveridge, A. (1935) Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard 78, 1-60. *Copland, S. J. (1957) Proc, Linn. Soc. N.SW. 82(1), 9-108. addition to the fauna and not a nomenclatural replacement of L. eucnemtis. We are indebted to Mr K. R. McDonald for providing the tape recording from which Fig. 1 was prepared. "Moore, J. A. (1961) Bull. Amer. Mus, Nat. Hist. 121(3), 149-386. "Tyler, M. J. (1965) Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 145(1), 91-106. Dingle, J. G. (1979) “Checklist of Queensland native animals.” Part 1. Amphibians, reptiles and mammals. (Queensland Agric. Coll,, Lawes.) (Mimeo). “Cogger, H. G, (1975) “Reptiles and amphibians of Australia,” (Reed, Sydney). 'SHorst, R. (1883) Notes Leyden Mus. 5(22), 235-244, Tyler, M. J. (1968) Zool. Verhandl. (96), 1-203. Menzies, J. 1. (1976) “Handbook of common New Guinea frogs.” Wau Ecology Institute Handbook No. 1. (Wau, Papua New Guinea). "Tyler, M. J. & Davies, M. (1978) Aust. J. Zool. Suppl. Ser. (63), 1-47. 'S¢weifel, R. G. (1980) Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat, Hist, 165(5), 387-434. "Tyler, M. J. (1971) Univ, Kansas Publ. Mus. Nat. Hist. ‘ 19(4), 319-360, Tyler, M. J. (1972) Zool. Anz. 189, 331-336. MICHAEL J. TYLER, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, Box 498 G.P.O., Adelaide, 5. Aust. 5001, and GRAEME F. WATSON, Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Vic. 3052. ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY THE GOVERNOR OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA LIEUTENANT-GENERAL SIR DONALD DUNSTAN, K.B.E., C.B. OFFICERS FOR 1986-87 President: M. J. TYLER, M.Sc. Vice-Presidents: T. D. SCOTT, M.Sc., Dip.Ed. Secretary: Treasurer: S. A. PARKER, B.Sc. R. H. FISHER, E.D., AULA. Editor: Assistant Editor: M. DAVIES, M.Sc. K. H. NORTHCOTE, B.Ag. Sc., D.Ag.Sc. Librarian: N. P. McKELLAR-STEWART Programme Secretary: B.Sc., Dip.Lib. R. A. TEDMAN, B.Sc., Ph.D. Minute Secretary: Membership Secretary: P. M. TAYLOR, B.Sc. P. M. THOMAS, M.Sc. Members of Council: R. V. SOUTHCOTT, M.D., D.Sc, DTIM&H N. A. LOCKET, M.A., B.M., B.Ch., Ph.D., D.O. G. M. E. MAYO, B.Ag.Sc., Ph.D., D-Univ. C. B. WELLS, E. D., M.Ag.Sc. B. J. COOPER, B.Sc., Ph.D. Printed by Graphic Services Pty Ltd, 516-518 Grand Junction Road, Northfield, S.A. 5085